Home

Operating Instructions

1. Figure 11 17 Replacing the fan frame size HX right hand power block Drive converter cabinet units 396 Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Maintenance and servicing 11 4 Replacing components Description The average service life of the device fans is 50 000 hours In practice however the service life depends on other variables e g ambient temperature degree of cabinet protection etc and therefore may deviate from this value The fans must be replaced in good time to ensure that the cabinet unit is available Preparatory steps e Disconnect the cabinet unit from the power supply e Allow unimpeded access e Remove the protective cover Removal steps The removal steps are numbered in accordance with the figure 1 Remove the busbar 12 screws 2 Remove the retaining screws for the fan 3 screws 3 Disconnect the supply cables 1 x L 1 x N You can now carefully remove the fan CAUTION When removing the unit ensure that you do not damage any signal cables Installation steps For installation carry out the above steps in reverse order CAUTION The tightening torques specified in the table Tightening torques for connecting current conducting parts must be observed Carefully establish the plug in connections and then ensure that they are secure The screwed connections for the protective covers must only be tightened by
2. Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 131 Commissioning 5 3 Procedure for commissioning via STARTER 132 gt Choose the following data from the list fields Device Sinamics Type G150 Version 2 6x Bus address the corresponding bus address for the cabinet unit The entry in field Name field is user defined gt Click Insert The selected drive unit is displayed in a preview window in the project wizard Project Wizard Starter 1 2 al 4 Introduction Create PG PC Set Insert drive Summary new project interface units Please enter the drive unit data m Preview gt r Drive unit Project Device Sinamics X fla SINAMICS_G150 Type G150 Version 2 6x Bus addr 34 bd Name SINAMICS_G150_1 Sinamics tutorial Insert Cancel Figure 5 10 Inserting the drive unit gt Click Continue gt A project summary is displayed Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Commissioning 5 3 Procedure for commissioning via STARTER Project Wizard Starter SS Summary 1k 2 3 Introduction Create PG PC Set Insert drive new project interface units The following settings have been selected Project name Project Storage location C Siemens Step 5 proj Interface PC Adapter PROFIBUS Drive units SINSMICS_G150 SINAMICS_G150 Addr 33 Figure 5
3. The necessary ESD protective measures are clearly illustrated in the following diagram e a conductive floor surface e b ESD table e c ESD shoes e d ESD overall e e ESD wristband e f cabinet ground connection e g contact with conductive flooring i Sitting Standing Standing sitting Figure 1 1 ESD protective measures Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 17 Safety information 7 3 Components that can be destroyed by electrostatic discharge ESD Residual risks of power drive systems When carrying out a risk assessment of the machine plant in accordance with the EU Machinery Directive the machine manufacturer plant operator must consider the following residual risks associated with the control and drive components of a power drive system PDS 1 Unintentional movements of driven machine components during commissioning operation maintenance and repairs caused by for example Hardware defects and or software errors in the sensors controllers actuators and connection technology Response times of the controller and drive Operating and or ambient conditions not within the scope of the specification Parameterization programming cabling and installation errors Use of radio devices cellular phones in the immediate vicinity of the controller External influences damage 2 Exceptional temperatures as well as em
4. Table 10 1 Description of the LEDs on the CU320 LED Color State Description OFF The electronics power supply is missing or lies outside permissible tolerance range Green Steady light The component is ready for operation and cyclic DRIVE CLIQ RDY communication is taking place The Control Unit is awaiting first commissioning ready 2 Hz flashing light Writing to CompactFlash card Red Steady light At least one fault is present in this component 0 5 Hz flashing CompactFlash card has not been inserted light Boot error e g firmware cannot be loaded to the RAM Green red 0 5 Hz Control Unit 320 is ready for operation flashing light However there are no software licenses Orange Steady light System is booting and DRIVE CLiQ communication is being established 0 5 Hz flashing DRIVE CLiQ component firmware update in progress light 2 Hz flashing light Component firmware update complete Waiting for POWER ON of relevant components Drive converter cabinet units 350 Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Diagnosis faults and alarms 10 2 Diagnosis LED Color State Description OFF Cyclic communication is not yet running Note The PROF Idrive is ready for communication when the Control Unit DPA is ready for operation see RDY LED i _ Green Steady light Cyclic communication is running PROF Idrive cyclic ae transmission 0 5 Hz flashing Cyclic communication is
5. Interconnecting signals using BICO technology To interconnect two signals a BICO input parameter signal sink must be assigned to the desired BICO output parameter signal source The following information is required in order to connect a binector connector input to a binector connector output e Binectors e Connectors with no index e Connectors with index 192 Parameter number bit number and drive object ID Parameter number and drive object ID Parameter number index and drive object ID Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5SE00189855A Operation 6 3 Basic information about the drive system BO Binector output BI Binector input CO Connector output Cl Connector input Signal source Signal sink BI BO CI CO without index CO with index Index 0 ci 1 2 3 Figure 6 5 Interconnecting signals using BICO technology Note A connector input CI cannot be interconnected with any connector output CO signal source The same applies to the binector input BI and binector output BO Data type in the parameter list provides information about the data type of the parameter and the data type of the BICO parameter for each CI und BI parameter For CO and BO parameters only the data type of the BICO parameter is given Notation e Data type BICO input Data type parameter Data type BICO parameter Example Unsigned32 Integer16 e Data type BI
6. Version A Line supply connection Main switch optional 1 Fuses optional 1 Main contactor optional 1 Line reactor Uk 2 lt 500 kW standard gt 500 kW only as an option L23 Rectifier DC link Brake chopper optional Inverter Motor connection Version C 1 The main switch fuses and main contactor functions are implemented using circuit breakers at and above an output current of gt 800 A Figure 2 4 Wiring principle versions A and C Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Device Overview 2 4 Wiring Principle Circuit principle for version A units that are connected in parallel with 6 pulse infeed motor with one winding system 6 pulse infeed Line supply connection Main switch optional 1 Fuses optional 1 Main contactor optional 1 Line reactor Uk 2 Rectifier Connected voltage DC link Inverter Motor connection Motor with one winding system 1 The main switch fuses and main contactor functions are implemented by a circuit breaker upwards of an output voltage gt 800 A Figure 2 5 Circuit principle for version A units that are connected in parallel 6 pulse infeed connected to one motor with one winding system Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 29 Device Overview 2 4 Wiring Principle Circuit principle for versi
7. Torque control without encoder Torque control with encoder Speed control without encoder Speed control with encoder I f control with fixed current V f control for drive requiring a precise frequency e g textiles V f control for drive requiring a precise frequency with FCC V f control with linear characteristic V f control with linear characteristic and FCC V f control with parabolic characteristic V f control with parameterizable characteristic V f control with independent voltage setpoint gt Click Continue gt Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 139 Commissioning 5 3 Procedure for commissioning via STARTER Configuring the drive unit properties 140 Configuration SINAMICS_G150 Drive setting Drive unit Drive Drive_1 DDS 0 0 ptions Control structure Configure the drive properties MIMotor Motor holding brake O Encoder C Defaults of the setpoint Connection voltage 400 Standard IEC Motor 50Hz SI units Drive functions Important parameters C Summary Cancel Help Figure 5 16 Configuring the drive unit properties gt Under Standard choose the appropriate standard for your motor whereby the following is defined e IEC motor 50 Hz SI unit Line frequency 50 Hz motor data in kW e NEMA motor 60 Hz US unit Line frequency
8. The minimum short circuit voltage of the transformer should be 4 e The checkback contacts of the main contactors and the circuit breakers are connected in series in the factory and wired to digital input 5 of the Control Unit When the drive unit is being commissioned the checkback signal monitoring function must be activated This is realized using parameter pO860 VECT OR 722 5 CONTROL_UNIT Motors with two electrically isolated winding systems and also motors with one winding system can be used e When connecting a motor with one winding system the following special considerations must be taken into account The motor connections of the Power Modules can be connected to one another at the motor per phase Parameter p7003 winding system must be set to 0 one winding system Ifa motor reactor is not being used option L08 observation of the minimum motor cable lengths is mandatory refer to the section titled Electrical installation Edge modulation is not possible e When connecting a motor with separate winding systems the following special considerations must be taken into account Every Power Module motor connection must be connected to its own winding system Parameter p7003 winding system must be set to 1 multiple separate winding systems or motors Edge modulation is possible N DANGER During connection installation and repair work on units that are connected in parallel
9. 4 7 Power connections If necessary the connection fitted in the factory shown with a dashed line must be reconnected to the actual line voltage Note Two transformers T1 T10 and T20 are installed in the following cabinet units The two primary terminals on these devices must be set together e With 380 V 480 V 3 AC 6SL3710 1GE41 0_A0 e With 500 V 600 V 3 AC 6SL3710 1GF37 4_A0 6SL3710 1GF38 1_A0 e With 660 V 690 V 3 AC 6SL3710 1GH37 4_A0 6SL3710 1GH38 1_A0 Note For units that are connected in parallel the setting terminals must be set jointly in both sub cabinets e With 380 V 480 V 3 AC 6SL3710 2GE41 1AA0 6SL3710 2GE41 4AA0 6SL3710 2GE41 6AA0 e With 500 V 600 V 3 AC 6SL3710 2GF38 6AA0 6SL3710 2GF41 1AA0 6SL3710 2GF41 4AA0 e With 660 V 690 V 3 AC 6SL3710 2GH41 1AA0 6SL3710 2GH41 4AA0 6SL3710 2GH41 5AA0 Figure 4 3 Setting terminals for the fan transformer 380 V 480 V 3 AC 500 V 600 V 3 AC 660 V 690 V 3 AC The line voltage assignments for making the appropriate setting on the fan transformer are indicated in the following tables Note With the 660 V 690 V 3 AC fan transformer a jumper is inserted between the 600 V terminal and CON terminal The 600V and CON terminals are for internal use CAUTION If the terminals are not reconnected to the actual line voltage e The required cooling capacity cannot be provided because the fan rota
10. 420 Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Technical specifications 12 3 Technical specitications Order number 6SL3710 1GE33 8AA0 1GE35 0AA0 1GE36 1AA0 1 Rated output of a typical 6 pole standard induction motor based on I or IH at 400 V 3 AC 50 Hz 2 Rated output of a typical 6 pole standard induction motor based on IL or IH at 460 V 3 AC 60 Hz 3 The base load current IL is based on a duty cycle of 110 for 60 s or 150 for 10 s with a duty cycle duration of 300 s see Overload capability 4 The base load current IH is based on a duty cycle of 150 for 60 s or 160 for 10 s with a duty cycle duration of 300 s see Overload capability 5 The current values given here are based on the rated output current 6 The recommendations for the North American market in AWG or MCM must be taken from the appropriate NEC National Electrical Code or CEC Canadian Electrical Code standards Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 421 Technical specifications 12 3 Technical specifications Table 12 11 Version A 380 V 480 V 3 AC part 3 Order number 6SL3710 1GE37 5AA0 1GE38 4AA0 1GE41 0AA0 Unit rating for IL at 50 Hz 400 V kW 400 450 560 for I at 50 Hz 400 V 1 kW 315 400 450 for IL at 60 Hz 460 V 2 hp 600 600 800 for I at 60 Hz 460 V 2 hp 450 500
11. Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 465 Technical specifications 12 3 Technical specifications Table 12 33 Version C 660 V 690 V 3 AC Part 5 Order number 6SL3710 1GH38 1CA0 Unit rating for IL at 50 Hz 690 V 1 kW 800 for I at 50 Hz 690 V 1 kW 710 Output current Rated current In A 810 Base load current It 2 A 790 Base load current IH 3 A 724 Input current Rated input current A 842 Input current max A 1295 Current requirements for 24 VDC JA 1 5 auxiliary supply Connection voltages Line voltage Vacrms 660 V 3 AC 10 to 690 V 3 AC 10 15 lt 1 min Line frequency Hz 47 to 63 Hz Electronics power supply Voc 24 20 4 28 8 Power loss kW 14 7 Cooling air requirement m s 1 48 Sound pressure level Lpa dB A 72 75 1 m at 50 60 Hz Line connection recommended DIN VDE 4 mm2 4x 150 maximum DIN VDE mm2 8 x 240 Fixing screw M12 4 holes Motor connection recommended DIN VDE 5 mm2 3x185 maximum DIN VDE mm2 6 x 240 Fixing screw M12 3 holes Protective conductor connection Fixing screw M12 18 holes Max motor cable length shielded unshielded m 300 450 Dimensions standard version Width mm 1000 Height mm 2000 Depth mm 600 Power block frame size JX Weight without options approx kg 980 Recommended protection Line and semi cond protection 3NE1334 2 Rated
12. 1 lf a temperature sensor has not been installed a value of 200 C is displayed Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 227 Operation 6 7 Control via the operator panel Scalings for vector object Table 6 14 Scalings for vector object Size Reference speed Scaling parameter 100 p2000 Default for quick commissioning p2000 Maximum speed p1082 Reference voltage 100 p2001 p2001 1000 V Reference current 100 p2002 p2002 Current limit p0640 Reference torque 100 p2003 p2003 2 x rated motor torque Reference power 100 12004 r2004 p2003 x p2000 x T7 30 Reference frequency 100 p2000 60 Reference modulation depth 100 Maximum output voltage without overload Reference flux 100 Rated motor flux Reference temperature 100 100 C TM31 object Table 6 15 List of signals for the operation screen TM31 object Signal Parameter Short name Unit Scaling 100 Analog input 0 V mA r4052 0 Al_UI V mA V 100 V mA 100 mA Analog input 1 V mA r4052 1 Al_UI V mA V 100 V mA 100 mA Analog input 0 scaled r4055 0 Al_ as set in p200x Analog input 1 scaled r4055 1 Al_ as set in p200x 228 Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5SE00189855A Operation 6 7 Contro
13. 11 4 Replacing components e Disconnect the cabinet unit from the power supply e Allow unimpeded access to the power block e Remove the protective cover Removal steps The removal steps are numbered in accordance with the figure 1 Unscrew the connection to the outgoing motor section 3 screws 2 Unscrew the connection to the line supply 3 screws 3 Remove the retaining screws at the top 2 screws 4 5 Remove the CU320 mount 1 nut If necessary remove the PROFIBUS plug and Remove the retaining screws at the bottom 2 screws connection to the operator panel X140 on the CU320 and carefully remove the CU320 Disconnect the connectors for the fiber optic cables 5 plugs and release the cable connection for the signal cables 2 connectors Disconnect the plug for the thermocouple Unscrew the two retaining screws for the fan and attach the tool for de installing the power block at this position You can now remove the power block CAUTION When removing the power block ensure that you do not damage any signal cables Installation steps For installation carry out the above steps in reverse order CAUTION The tightening torques specified in the table Tightening torques for connecting current conducting parts must be observed Carefully establish the plug in connections and then ensure that they are secure The screwed connections for the protective c
14. M I oc Figure 8 2 Signal flow diagram Digital outputs Factory settings Table 8 3 Factory settings for digital outputs Digital output Terminal Factory setting DOO X542 2 3 Enable pulses DO1 X542 5 6 No fault DI DO8 X541 2 Ready to start DI DO9 X541 3 DI DO10 X541 4 DI DO11 X541 5 Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 291 Output terminals 8 3 Digital outputs Selection of possible connections for the digital outputs Table 8 4 Selection of possible connections for the digital outputs Signal Bit in status Parameter word 1 1 Ready to start 0 r0889 0 1 Ready to operate DC link loaded pulses blocked 1 r0889 1 1 Operation enabled drive follows n_set 2 r0889 2 1 Fault present 3 r2139 3 0 Coast to stop active OFF2 4 r0889 4 0 Fast stop active OFF3 5 r0889 5 1 Power on disable 6 r0889 6 1 Alarm present 7 12139 7 1 Speed setpoint actual deviation in the tolerance bandwidth p2163 p2166 8 12197 7 1 Control required to PLC 9 r0899 9 1 f orn comparison value reached or exceeded p2141 p2142 10 r2199 1 1 1 M or P limit reached p0640 p1520 p1521 11 11407 7 Reserved 12 0 Alarm motor overtemperature A7910 13 r2129 14 Reserved 14 0 Alarm thermal overload in power unit A5000 15 r2129 15 1 Pulses enabled inverter is clocking
15. Servicing involves activities and procedures for maintaining and restoring the specified condition of the device Required tools The following tools are required for replacing components e Spanner or socket spanner w f 10 e Spanner or socket spanner w f 13 e Spanner or socket spanner w f 16 17 e Spanner or socket spanner w f 18 19 e Hexagon socket spanner size 8 e Torque wrench up to 50 Nm e Screwdriver size 1 2 e Screwdriver Torx T20 e Screwdriver Torx T30 Tightening torques for current carrying parts When securing connections for current conducting parts DC link motor connections busbars you must observe the following tightening torques Table 11 1 Tightening torques for connecting current carrying parts Screw Torque M6 6 Nm M8 13 Nm M10 25 Nm M12 50 Nm Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 365 Maintenance and servicing 11 3 Maintenance 11 3 1 Installation device Description The installation device is used for installing and removing the power blocks It is used as an installation aid which is placed in front of and secured to the module The telescopic guide support allows the withdrawable device to be adjusted according to the height at which the power blocks are installed Once the mechanical and electrical connections have been removed the power block can be removed from the module whereby the power block is guided and supported
16. The operating manual and machine documentation are written in different languages as specified in the delivery contracts Note We recommend engaging the support and services of your local Siemens service center for all planning installation commissioning and maintenance work Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 ASE00189855A Safety information 7 3 Components that can be destroyed by electrostatic discharge ESD 1 3 Components that can be destroyed by electrostatic discharge ESD CAUTION The board contains components that can be destroyed by electrostatic discharge These components can be easily destroyed if not handled properly If you do have to use electronic boards however please observe the following e You should only touch electronic boards if absolutely necessary e When you touch boards however your body must be electrically discharged beforehand e Boards must not come into contact with highly insulating materials such as plastic parts insulated desktops articles of clothing manufactured from man made fibers e Boards must only be placed on conductive surfaces e Boards and components should only be stored and transported in conductive packaging such as metalized plastic boxes or metal containers e If the packaging material is not conductive the boards must be wrapped with a conductive packaging material such as conductive foam rubber or household aluminum foil
17. Use the following DNS server addresses Obtain DNS server address automatically Preferred DNS server Alternate DNS server Figure 6 33 Properties of the Internet Protocol TCP IP Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Operation 6 8 PROFINET IO Settings in STARTER The following settings are required in STARTER for communication via PROFINET e Extras gt Set PG PC interface Set PG PC Interface Access Path Access Point of the Application S7ONLINE STEP gt TCP IP Auto gt Broadcom Ne w Standard for STEP 7 Interface Parameter Assignment Used TCPAP Auto gt Broadcom NetXtreme Gig Properties Serial cable PPI Diagnostics TCP IP gt Broadcom Netxtreme Gic TCP IP gt Ndis Wanlp ow TCP IP Auto gt Broadcom Netxtrer s lt ill E Assigning Parameters for the IE PG access to your NDIS CPs with TCP IP Protocol RFC 1006 Interfaces Add Remove Select Cancel Help Figure 6 34 Set the PG PC interface Assignment of the IP address and the name for the PROFINET interface of the drive unit Use the STARTER to assign an IP address and a name to the PROFINET interface e g CBE20 Requirement e Connect the direct Ethernet cable from the PG PC to the PROFINET interface of the CU320 Control Unit e Switch on Control Unit CU320 The accessible nodes must be searched in the STARTER e Pr
18. kW 1500 for I at 50 Hz 690 V 7 kW 1350 Output current Rated current In A 1500 Base load current IL 2 A 1462 Base load current IH A 1340 Input current Rated input current A 1568 Input current max A 2406 Current requirements for 24 VDC JA 3 0 auxiliary supply Connection voltages Line voltage Vacrms 660 V 3 AC 10 to 690 V 3 AC 10 15 lt 1 min Line frequency Hz 47 to 63 Hz Electronics power supply Voc 24 20 4 28 8 Power loss kW 29 0 Cooling air requirement m s 2 96 Sound pressure level Lpa dB A 75 78 1 m at 50 60 Hz Line connection Per sub cabinet recommended DIN VDE 4 mm 4x 150 maximum DIN VDE mm2 8 x 240 Fixing screw M12 4 holes Motor connection Per sub cabinet recommended DIN VDE 5 mm2 3x185 maximum DIN VDE mm 6 x 240 Fixing screw M12 3 holes Protective conductor connection Per sub cabinet Fixing screw M12 18 holes Max motor cable length shielded unshielded m 300 450 Dimensions standard version Width mm 3200 Height mm 2000 Depth mm 600 Power block frame size JX Weight without options approx kg 2700 Recommended protection Line protection Per sub cabinet with option L26 3NA3365 6 Rated current A 2 x 500 frame size to DIN 43620 1 3 Line and semiconductor protection Per sub cabinet without option L26 3NE1334 2 Rated current A 2 x 500 Frame size to DIN 43620 1 2 456 Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructio
19. 0 ZSW2 Status word 2 interface mode See table Status word 2 interface FP2454 SINAMICS p2038 0 mode SINAMICS p2038 0 ZSW2_BM Status word 2 metal industry interface See table Status word 2 metal FP2429 mode SINAMICS p2038 0 industry interface mode SINAMICS p2038 0 NIST_A Speed setpoint A 16 bit r0063 0 FP4715 NIST_B Speed setpoint B 32 bit r0063 FP4710 IAIST Actual value of current r0068 0 FP6714 MIST Actual torque value r0080 0 FP6714 PIST Actual power value r0082 0 FP6714 NIST_GLATT Actual speed value smoothed r0063 1 FP4715 IAIST_GLATT Current actual value smoothed r0068 1 FP6714 MIST_GLATT Torque actual value smoothed r0080 1 FP6714 PIST_GLATT Power actual value smoothed r0082 1 FP6714 MELD_NAMUR VIK NAMUR message bit bar r3113 see table NAMUR message bit bar WARN_CODE Alarm code r2132 FP8065 ERROR_CODE Error code r2131 FP8060 Drive converter cabinet units 218 Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Operation 6 7 6 7 1 Description Control via the operator panel 6 7 Control via the operator panel Operator panel AOP30 overview and menu structure The operator panel can be used for the following activities e Parameterization commissioning e Monitoring status variables e Controlling the drive e Diagnosing faults and alarms All the functions can be accessed via a menu Your starting point is the main menu which you can always call up using
20. Connection voltage Cooling method Drive unit selection 65L3710 1GE 32 1440 65L3710 1GE32 1CA0 6SL3710 1GE32 1CU0 6SL3710 1GE32 14U0 6SL3710 1GE32 6440 6SL3710 1GE32 6C40 6SL3710 1GE32 6CU0 6SL3710 1GE32 64U0 6SL3710 1GE33 1440 6SL3710 1GE33 1C40 6SL3710 1GE33 1CU0 6SL3710 1GE33 14U0 6SL3710 1GE33 8440 6SL3710 1GE33 8C040 RA ASA RRR Amn Configure the drive Drive object type Default macro 5 3 Procedure for commissioning via STARTER 400 400V 4007 400v 400v 4007 4007 4007 4007 4007 4007 400V 400v 4007 Vector G150 cabinet unit Y 2 x E ce ue Figure 5 13 Configuring the drive unit gt Under Connection voltage choose the correct voltage Under Cooling method choose the correct cooling method for your drive unit Note In this step you make a preliminary selection of the cabinet units You do not define the line voltage and cooling method yet gt A list is now displayed under Drive unit selection Choose the corresponding drive unit according to type order no see type plate gt Click Continue gt Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 135 Commissioning 5 3 Procedure for commissioning via STARTER Choosing the options Configuration SINAMICS_G150 Options M Drive unit Configure the order options Control structure 1Drive setting Options selection Motor Motor holding brake
21. Detailed information on connecting individual options with interfaces can be found on the documentation CD 4 10 1 dv dt filter plus Voltage Peak Limiter option L10 Description The dv dt filter plus Voltage Peak Limiter comprises two components the dv dt reactor and the Voltage Peak Limiter which limits transients and returns the energy to the DC link The dv dt filters plus Voltage Peak Limiter must be used for motors for which the proof voltage of the insulation system is unknown or insufficient Standard motors of the 1LA5 1LA6 and 1LA8 series only require them at supply voltages gt 500 V 10 The dv dt filter plus Voltage Peak Limiter limits the voltage gradient to values lt 500 V us and the typical transients to the values below with motor cable lengths of lt 150 m e lt 1000 V at Uline lt 575 V e lt 1250 V at 660 V lt Uline lt 690 V Depending on the converter power option L10 can be accommodated in the drive converter cabinet unit or an additional cabinet with a width 400 mm is required Table 4 20 Accommodating the voltage limiting network in the cabinet or in an additional cabinet Voltage range Installation of the dv dt filter plus Installation of the VPL in an Voltage Peak Limiter within the additional cabinet converter cabinet unit 380 V to 480 V 3 AC 6SL3710 1GE32 1AA0 6SL3710 1GE36 1AA0 6SL3710 1GE32 6AA0 6SL3710 1GE37 5AA0 6SL3710 1GE33 1AA0 6SL3710 1GE38 4AA0 6SL3710 1GE33 8AA0 6SL3710 1G
22. Electrical installation 4 10 Other connections Table 4 41 Meaning of the controls and displays on the insulation monitor Position Meaning 1 INFO key To request standard information ESC key Back menu function 2 TEST key Call up self test Arrow key up Parameter change scroll 3 RESET button Delete insulation and fault messages Arrow key down Parameter change scroll 4 Menu key Call up menu system Enter key Confirm parameter change Alarm LED 1 lights up Insulation fault first alarm threshold reached Alarm LED 2 lights up Insulation fault second alarm threshold reached 7 LED lights up System error present Connection Table 4 42 Connections on insulation monitor Terminal Technical specifications A1 Supply voltage via 6 A melting fuse A2 88 to 264 V AC 77 to 286 V DC L1 Connection of the 3 AC system to be monitored L2 AK Connection to coupling device KE PE connection T1 External test button T2 External test button R1 External reset key NC contact or wire jumper otherwise the fault code is not stored R2 External reset key NC contact or wire jumper F1 STANDBY with aid of F1 F2 function input F2 M External kQ display analog output 0 pA 400 pA M External kQ display analog output 0 pA 400 pA A Serial interface RS 485 B termination by means of 120 ohm resistor 11 Sign
23. Immediate pulse suppression the drive coasts to standstill The motor brake if parameterized is closed immediately Switching on inhibited is activated e OFF3 Switch to speed controlled operation n_set 0 is input immediately to brake the drive along the OFF3 deceleration ramp p1135 When standstill is detected the motor brake if parameterized is closed The pulses are inhibited when the motor brake closing time p1217 has elapsed Standstill is detected when the speed actual value of the speed threshold p1226 is undershot or when the monitoring time p1227 started when speed setpoint lt speed threshold p1226 expires Switching on inhibited is activated Function diagram FP 6060 Parameters e p0341 e p0342 e p1300 e p1499 e p1501 e p1503 e p1511 e p1512 e p1513 e p1514 e 11515 Drive converter cabinet units Torque setpoint Motor moment of inertia Ratio between the total and motor moment of inertia Open loop closed loop control mode Accelerating for torque control scaling Change over between closed loop speed torque control Torque setpoint Supplementary torque 1 Supplementary torque 1 scaling Supplementary torque 2 Supplementary torque 2 scaling Supplementary torque total Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 281 Setpoint channel and closed loop control 7 4 Vector speed torque control with without encoder 7 4 5 Torque limiting De
24. NAMUR terminal block Safely isolated 24 Y supply PELV External auxiliaries outlet uncontrolled Profinet User terminal block extension module Defaults of the setpoint Drive functions Pr ss data exchang Important parameters Summary SMC30 Sensor Module fe in syne naci Safe torque off on the power module Line filter for use in the first environment in accordar Motor reactor E dv dt filter plus voltage peak limiter Sine wave filter Main contactor for currents lt 800 Connection for external auxiliaries controlled max 1 Without line choke in the power range P lt 500 kw Mains switch incl fuses or circuit breaker EMERGENCY STOP pushbutton in the cabinet doc ill gt The options and the selection of the drive unit can no longer be changed after the Wizard page has been exited with Next Cancel Help Figure 5 14 Choosing the options gt From the combination box Options selection select the options belonging to your drive unit by clicking on the corresponding check box see type plate CAUTION If a sine wave filter option L15 is connected it must be activated when the options are selected to prevent the filter from being destroyed Drive converter cabinet units 136 Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Commissioning 5 3 Procedure for commissioning via STARTER Note Check your options carefully against the options specified on th
25. The OFF key red is enabled The LOCAL REMOTE ON green JOG CW CCW INCREASE and DECREASE keys are disabled Parameterization inhibit factory setting not active e Active Parameters cannot be changed unless a password is entered The parameterization process is the same as with the operator input inhibit If you try and change parameters the message Note Parameterization inhibit active is displayed All the control keys can however still be actuated Access level factory setting Expert The different parameters required for this complex application are filtered so that they can be displayed as clearly as possible You select them according to the access level An expert level which must only be used by expert personnel is required for certain actions Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 235 Operation 6 7 Control via the operator panel 6 7 8 Faults and alarms Indicating faults and alarms What is a fault If a fault occurs the drive displays the fault and or alarm on the operator panel Faults are indicated by the red FAULT LED and a fault screen is automatically displayed You can use the F1 Help function to call up information about the cause of the fault and how to remedy it You can use F5 Ack to acknowledge a stored fault Alarms are indicated by means of the yellow ALARM LED The system also displays a note in the status bar providing information on t
26. gt 1 5 years at 20 C Service life in operation gt 2 years Replacing Switch the unit into a no voltage condition Open the cabinet Remove the old battery Insert the new battery Oo ON DOA FB O N Close the cabinet Open the cover of the battery compartment Close the cover of the battery compartment Reconnect the 24 V DC power supply and communications line Disconnect the 24 V DC power supply and communications line on the operator panel NOTICE The battery must be replaced within one minute to ensure that no AOP settings are lost Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 403 Maintenance and servicing 11 4 Replacing components Figure 11 20 Replacing the backup battery for the cabinet operator panel Drive converter cabinet units 404 Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Maintenance and servicing 11 5 Description Procedure 11 5 Forming the DC link capacitors Forming the DC link capacitors If the device is kept in storage for more than 2 years the DC link capacitors have to be re formed If this is not done the unit could be damaged when it is operated under load If the cabinet is commissioned within two years of its date of manufacture the DC link capacitors do not need to be re formed The date of manufacture is indicated in the serial number on the type plate see Device O
27. lt Back Continue gt Cancel Figure 5 5 Set up interface gt Click Change and test and set up the interface in accordance with your device configuration The Properties Copy and Select pushbuttons are now active Drive converter cabinet units 128 Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Commissioning 5 3 Procedure for commissioning via STARTER Set PG PC Interface Access Path Access Point of the Application S7ONLINE STEP7 gt PC Adapter PROFIBUS Standard for STEP 7 Interface Parameter Assignment Used Pe Adapter PROFIBUS ISO Ind Ethernet gt Intel R PROM A PC Adapter Auto PC Adapter MPI PC Adapter PROFIBUS lt Ht Parameter assignment of your PC adapter for a PROFIBUS network Interfaces Add Remove Select Figure 5 6 Setting the interface Note To parameterize the interface you must install the appropriate interface card e g PC Adapter PROFIBUS Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 129 Commissioning 5 3 Procedure for commissioning via STARTER Properties PC Adapter PROFIBUS PROFIBUS Local Connection Station Parameters IV PG PC is the only master on the bus Address 0 Timeout Network Parameters Transmission rate Highest station address Profile Standard Universal DP FMS User Defined Bus Parameters i Default Cancel Help Figu
28. 13 100 0 75 kHz 100 7 8 92 2 25 kHz Derating factor T gt 1 25 kHz 2kHz 2 5 kHz 5 KHZ fpulse Figure 12 1 Calculating derating factors by means of linear interpolation Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 415 Technical specifications 12 2 General data 12 2 2 Overload capability Low overload High overload 416 The converter is equipped with an overload reserve to deal with breakaway torques for example In drives with overload requirements the appropriate base load current must therefore be used as a basis for the required load The criterion for overload is that the drive is operated with its base load current before and after the overload occurs on the basis of a duty cycle duration of 300 s The base load current for low overload IL is based on a load duty cycle of 110 for 60 s or 150 for 10 s Converter current 10s A ts E lt Short time current 150 Short time current 110 Rated current continuous r 4 Figure 12 2 Low overload The base load current for a high overload IHis based on a duty cycle of 150 for 60 s or 160 for 10 s Converter current A i 10s Short time current 160 1 6 He Short time current 150 1 5 IH Rated current continuous r 4 Figure 12 3 High overload Drive converter cabinet units Opera
29. 2 Hz Detection of the components via LED is activated p0124 Note Both options depend on the LED status when module recognition is activated via p0124 1 352 J N WARNING LED Hazard DC link voltages may be present at any time regardless of the status of the H201 The warning information on the components must be carefully observed Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Diagnosis faults and alarms SMC30 encoder evaluation B83 10 2 Diagnosis Table 10 4 Description of the LEDs on the SMC30 LED Color State Description RDY OFF The electronics power supply is missing or lies outside the permissible tolerance range Green Steady light The component is ready for operation and cyclic DRIVE CLIQ communication is taking place Orange Steady light DRIVE CLiQ communication is being established Red Steady light At least one fault is pending on this component Note LED is driven irrespective of the corresponding messages being reconfigured Green Red Flashing 0 5 Hz Firmware is being downloaded Flashing 2Hz Firmware download is complete Waiting for POWER ON Green orange Flashing 2Hz Detection of the components via LED is activated p0144 or Note red orange Both options depend on the LED status when module recognition is activated via p0144 1 OUT gt 5V_ OFF Electronics power su
30. 4 7 2 Connecting the motor and power cables Connecting the motor and power cables on the cabinet unit Note For the location of the connections see the layout diagrams 1 Open the cabinet remove the covers if necessary in front of the connection panel for motor cables terminals U2 T1 V2 T2 W2 T3 X2 and power cables terminals U1 L1 V1 L2 W1 L3 X1 2 Move or remove the bottom plate below the connection panel through which the motor cables are fed 3 Screw the protective earth PE into the appropriate terminal with earth symbol 50 Nm for M12 at the points provided in the cabinet Note With version C connect the power cables first and then the motor cables 4 Connect the motor cables to the connections Make sure that you connect the conductors in the correct sequence U2 T1 V2 T2 W2 T3 and U1 L1 V1 L2 W1 L3 Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 63 Electrical installation 4 7 Power connections CAUTION Tighten the screws with the appropriate torque 50 Nm for M12 otherwise the terminal contacts could catch fire during operation Note The PE connection on the motor must be guided back directly to the cabinet unit and connected there Direction of motor rotation With induction machines with a clockwise phase sequence looking at the drive shaft the motor must be connected to the cabinet unit as follows Table 4 4 Ca
31. 5 2 1 Installing the STARTER commissioning tool c ceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeetaeeeeeaeeeeesaeeeeeneeeeees 124 5 2 2 Layout of the STARTER user interface esesseenserrssrrrrisrrrneetinrerennssnnnndsntneednnnantanastaaaeenann eann 124 5 3 Procedure for commissioning via STARTER cccccceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeaeeeeeeaees 125 5 3 1 Creating the poets a ktecived a REO ea g ieg ea deeded 125 5 3 2 Configure the drive Unit ee eeeeeee sence ee eeneeee aai aaa adaa aaeain ehia ara Araia etais 134 5 3 3 Additional settings required for units that are connected in parallel ccceceeseeeeeeeeeeees 159 5 3 4 Starting the drive projeCtiestisece nade inedean alimentaire 160 5 3 5 Connection via serial interface eceeceeteee cette cee ee ee etneeeeeteee eee ae eee teeeeetaeeeeeeeeereneeeeenae ea 161 Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5SE00189855A Table of contents 5 4 The AOP30 operator panel 2 c cccccceeeeeeeeecece cece eeeeeeeeaaceeeeeeeseeeanaeeseeeseecaeeeeeesaeensineeeeeenees 164 5 5 First commissioning with the AOP30 0 ccceeeeeneeeeceeeeneeeeeeaeeeeeaaeeeeeeaaeeseeaeeeeseeeeesenaeeeeneaes 165 5 5 1 Initial ramp up csee ded ta deeded a taa a atat dad ad aae et E ede dd Aide deers diih 165 5 5 2 Basit Commis SOngs eea E tai ha E T R 167 5 5 3 Additional settings required for units that are connected in parallel ceee
32. Electrical installation 4 10 Other connections CAN bus interface X451 CAN bus interface X451 features the following socket assignments Table 4 44 CAN bus interface X451 Pin Designation Technical specifications 1 Reserved 2 CAN_L CAN signal dominant low 3 CAN_GND CAN ground 4 Reserved 5 CAN_SHLD Optional shield 6 GND CAN ground 7 CAN_H CAN signal 8 Reserved 9 Reserved Type 9 pin sub D socket CAN bus interface X452 CAN bus interface X452 features the following socket assignments Table 4 45 CAN bus interface X452 Pin Designation Technical specifications 1 Reserved 2 CAN_L CAN signal dominant low 3 CAN_GND CAN ground 4 Reserved 5 CAN_SHLD Optional shield 6 GND CAN ground 7 CAN_H CAN signal 8 Reserved 9 Reserved Type 9 pin sub D pin Note Detailed and comprehensive instructions and information for the CANopen interface can be found in the accompanying Function Manual This manual is available as additional documentation on the accompanying customer CD Drive converter cabinet units 106 Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Electrical installation 4 10 Other connections 4 10 18 SMC30 Sensor Module Cabinet Mounted option K50 4 10 18 1 Description The SMC30 Sensor Module is used for determining the actual motor speed The signals emitted by the rotary pulse encod
33. Enable pulses After the feedback signal motor contactor closed from motor contactor 2 the bit motor data set changeover active r0835 0 is reset and the pulses are enabled The motor has now been changed over Function diagram Drive Data Set DDS Motor Data Sets MDS Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5SE00189855A Functions Monitoring and Protective Functions 9 2 Drive Functions 9 2 7 4 Parameters e 10051 Drive data set DDS effective e p0130 Motor data sets MDS number e p0180 Drive data set DDS number e p0186 Motor data sets MDS number e p0819 0 2 Copy drive data set DDS e p0820 BI Drive data set selection DDS bit 0 e p0821 BI Drive data set selection DDS bit 1 e p08s22 BI Drive data set selection DDS bit 2 e p0823 BI Drive data set selection DDS bit 3 e p0824 BI Drive data set selection DDS bit 4 e p0826 Motor changeover motor number e p0827 Motor changeover status word bit number e p0828 Motor changeover feedback signal e r0830 Motor changeover status e p0831 Motor changeover contactor feedback signal e p0833 Data set changeover configuration 9 2 8 Friction characteristic curve Description The friction characteristic is used to compensate for the frictional torque of the motor and driven load A friction characteristic allows the speed controller to be pre controlled and improves the control response 10 points along the characteristic are used for the
34. For installation carry out the above steps in reverse order CAUTION The tightening torques specified in the table Tightening torques for connecting current conducting parts must be observed Carefully establish the plug in connections and then ensure that they are secure The screwed connections for the protective covers must only be tightened by hand Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 399 Maintenance and servicing 11 4 Replacing components Replacing the fan right hand power block UE T i 4 E m m A Na b Figure 11 19 Replacing the fan frame size JX right hand power block Drive converter cabinet units 400 Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Maintenance and servicing 11 4 Replacing components Description The average service life of the device fans is 50 000 hours In practice however the service life depends on other variables e g ambient temperature degree of cabinet protection etc and therefore may deviate from this value The fans must be replaced in good time to ensure that the cabinet unit is available Preparatory steps e Disconnect the cabinet unit from the power supply e Allow unimpeded access e Remove the protectiv
35. Line and semiconductor protection without option L26 3NE1448 2 3NE1436 2 3NE1437 2 Rated current A 850 2 x 630 2x 710 Frame size to DIN 43620 1 3 3 3 422 Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Technical specifications 12 3 Technical specitications Order number 6SL3710 1GE37 5AA0 1GE38 4AA0 1GE41 0AA0 1 Rated output of a typical 6 pole standard induction motor based on I or IH at 400 V 3 AC 50 Hz 2 Rated output of a typical 6 pole standard induction motor based on IL or IH at 460 V 3 AC 60 Hz 3 The base load current IL is based on a duty cycle of 110 for 60 s or 150 for 10 s with a duty cycle duration of 300 s see Overload capability 4 The base load current IH is based on a duty cycle of 150 for 60 s or 160 for 10 s with a duty cycle duration of 300 s see Overload capability 5 The current values given here are based on the rated output current 6 The recommendations for the North American market in AWG or MCM must be taken from the appropriate NEC National Electrical Code or CEC Canadian Electrical Code standards Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 423 Technical specifications 12 3 Technical specifications Table 12 12 Version A 380 V 480 V 3 AC part 4 Order number 6SL3710 2GE41 1AA0 2GE41 4AA0 2GE41 6AA0 Unit rating for IL at 50
36. Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Technical specifications 1 2 12 1 Chapter content This chapter provides information on the following e General and specific technical specifications for the devices e Information on restrictions that apply when the devices are used in unfavorable ambient conditions derating Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 409 Technical specifications 12 2 General data 12 2 Table 12 1 General data General technical specifications Electrical data Line system configurations TN TT supplies or insulated supplies IT supplies Line frequency 47 63 Hz Output frequency 0 300 Hz Power factor Fundamental mode 2 gt 0 98 Total 0 93 0 96 Converter efficiency gt 98 Switching at input Once every 3 minutes Mechanical data Degree of protection IP20 higher degrees of protection up to IP54 optional Class of protection to EN 50178 Part 1 Cooling method Forced air cooling AF to EN 60146 Sound pressure level Lpa 1 m e at 50 Hz line frequency lt 72 dB A single units lt 75 dB A units that are connected in parallel e at 60 Hz line frequency lt 75 dB A single units lt 78 dB A units that are connected in parallel Touch protection BGV A3 Cabinet system Rittal TS 8 doors with double barb lock three section base plates for cable ent
37. Rated current A 2 x 500 2 x355 2 x 500 frame size to DIN 43620 1 3 3 3 Line and semiconductor protection Per sub cabinet Per sub cabinet without option L26 3NE1334 2 3NE1447 2 3NE1448 2 Rated current A 2 x 500 670 850 Frame size to DIN 43620 1 2 3 3 454 Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Technical specifications 12 3 Technical specitications Order number 6SL3710 1GH38 1AA0 2GH41 1AA0 2GH41 4AA0 1 Rated output of a typical 6 pole standard induction motor based on I or IH at 690 V 3 AC 50 Hz 2 The base load current I1 is based on a duty cycle of 110 for 60 s or 150 for 10 s with a duty cycle duration of 300 s see Overload capability 3 The base load current IH is based on a duty cycle of 150 for 60 s or 160 for 10 s with a duty cycle duration of 300 s see Overload capability 4 The current values given here are based on the rated output current 5 The recommendations for the North American market in AWG or MCM must be taken from the appropriate NEC National Electrical Code or CEC Canadian Electrical Code standards Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 455 Technical specifications 12 3 Technical specifications Table 12 28 Version A 660 V 690 V 3 AC part 6 Order number 6SL3710 2GH41 5AA0 Unit rating for IL at 50 Hz 690 V
38. Reversing can be observed by checking parameters r0069 phase currents and r0089 phase voltage The absolute position reference is lost on reversal Function diagram FD 4704 4715 Encoder evaluation FD 6730 6731 Current control Parameters e r0069 Phase currents actual value e 10089 Phase voltage actual value e p1820 Output phase direction reversal e p1821 Direction reversal Drive converter cabinet units 322 Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Functions Monitoring and Protective Functions 9 2 Drive Functions 9 2 13 Unit changeover Description Parameters and process variables for input and output can be switched to a suitable units system SI units US units or referenced variables with the help of the unit changeover function The following constraints apply to the unit changeover e Unit changeover is only possible for the VECTOR drive object e Parameters of the rating plate of the drive converter or the motor rating plate can be changed over between SI US units however a per unit representation is not possible e Once the changeover parameter has been changed all parameters that are assigned to a unit group depending on this parameter are jointly changed over to the new unit e A separate parameter is available for selecting technological units p0595 for the representation of technological variables in the technology controller e fa changeover is made to referenced variables and the re
39. SINAMICS G150 V kHz A 6SL3710 1GE32 1AA0 3 AC 380 480 4 172A 6SL3710 1GE32 6AA0 3 AC 380 480 4 216A 6SL3710 1GE33 1AA0 3 AC 380 480 4 273 A 6SL3710 1GE33 8AA0 3 AC 380 480 4 331A 6SL3710 1GE35 0AA0 3 AC 380 480 4 382 A 6SL3710 1GF31 8AA0 3 AC 500 600 2 5 152 A 6SL3710 1GF32 2AA0 3 AC 500 600 2 5 187A 1 The values apply to operation with a sine wave filter and do not correspond with the rated current on the type plate Commissioning When commissioning using the STARTER or AOP30 the sine wave filter must be activated by means of appropriate selection screenforms or dialog boxes p0230 3 see section Commissioning The following parameters are changed automatically during commissioning Table 4 23 Parameter settings for sine wave filters with SINAMICS G150 Parameter p0230 Name Drive filter type motor side Setting 3 Siemens sine wave filter p0233 Power unit motor reactor Filter inductance p0234 Power unit sine wave filter capacitance Filter capacitance p0290 Power unit overload response Disable pulse frequency reduction p1082 Maximum speed Fmax filter pole pair number 91800 Pulse frequency Nominal pulse frequency of the filter see previous table 1802 Modulator mode Space vector modulation without overmodulation p1909 Motor data identification control word Rs measurement only 82 Dr
40. The send telegram is parameterized as follows factory setting plan 623 ZSW1 NIST_GLATT IAIST_GLATT MIST_GLATT PIST_GLATT FAULT_CODE You do not have to make any further settings in order to use these telegrams User defined telegram selection a Standard telegrams Standard telegrams are structured in accordance with PROF ldrive profile or internal company specifications The internal process data links are established automatically in accordance with the telegram number setting in CU parameter p0922 The following standard telegrams can be set via parameter p0922 e p0922 1 gt Speed setpoint 16 bit e p0922 2 gt Speed setpoint 32 bit e p0922 3 gt Speed setpoint 32 bit with 1 position controller e p0922 4 gt Speed setpoint 32 bit with 2 position controller e p0922 20 gt Speed setpoint 16 bit VIK NAMUR e p0922 352 gt Speed setpoint 16 PCS7 Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 215 Operation 6 6 PROFIBUS Depending on the setting in p0922 the interface mode of the control and status word is automatically set e p0922 1 352 999 STW 1 ZSW 1 Interface Mode SINAMICS MICROMASTER p2038 0 e p0922 20 STW 1 ZSW 1 Interface Mode PROF Idrive VIK NAMUR p2038 2 b Manufacturer specific telegrams The manufacturer specific telegrams are structured in accordance with internal company specifications The internal proc
41. V f characteristics Control mode p1300 Speed controller at limit Motor locked Current limit reached F7900 p2177 1 000 0 000 65 000 s ON delay Figure 9 16 Blocking protection Function diagram FD 8012 Messages and monitoring Torque messages motor blocked stalled Parameters e p2175 Speed threshold motor blocked e p2177 Delay time motor blocked Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 345 Functions Monitoring and Protective Functions 9 4 Monitoring and protective functions 9 4 4 Stall protection only for vector control Description If for closed loop speed control with encoder the speed threshold set in p1744 for stall detection is exceeded then r1408 11 speed adaptation speed deviation is set If the fault threshold value set in p1745 is exceeded when in the low speed range less than p1755 x p1756 r1408 12 motor stalled is set If one of the two signals is set then after the delay time in p2178 fault F7902 motor stalled is output Speed threshold stall detection speed control with encoder only 0 00 210 000 00 1 min p1744 100 00 Speed adaptation speed deviation Motor stalled Stall monitoring gt H i r2198 7 F7902 p2178 0 010 0 000 1 000 s p1745 5 0 ON delay 0 1000 0 Error threshold stall detection Figure 9 17 Stall protection Function diagram FD 6730 Current control FD 8012 Messages and monitoring
42. Width mm 2400 2400 2400 Height mm 2000 2000 2000 Depth mm 600 600 600 Power block frame size HX HX HX Weight without options approx kg 1700 1710 2130 Recommended protection Line protection Per sub cabinet Per sub cabinet Per sub cabinet with option L26 3NA3475 3NA3475 3NA3365 Rated current A 800 800 2 x 500 frame size to DIN 43620 1 4 4 3 Line and semiconductor protection Per sub cabinet Per sub cabinet Per sub cabinet without option L26 3NE1438 2 3NE1448 2 3NE1436 2 Rated current A 800 850 2 x 630 Frame size to DIN 43620 1 3 3 3 424 Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Technical specifications 12 3 Technical specitications Order number 6SL3710 2GE41 1AA0 2GE41 4AA0 2GE41 6AA0 1 Rated output of a typical 6 pole standard induction motor based on I or IH at 400 V 3 AC 50 Hz 2 Rated output of a typical 6 pole standard induction motor based on IL or IH at 460 V 3 AC 60 Hz 3 The base load current IL is based on a duty cycle of 110 for 60 s or 150 for 10 s with a duty cycle duration of 300 s see Overload capability 4 The base load current IH is based on a duty cycle of 150 for 60 s or 160 for 10 s with a duty cycle duration of 300 s see Overload capability 5 The current values given here are based on the rated output current 6 The recommendations for the North American market in AWG or MCM must be taken from the appropri
43. and X522 8 cathode on the customer terminal block TM31 in the forward direction of the diode The measured temperature is limited to between 140 C and 248 C and is made available for further evaluation e Set the KTY temperature sensor type p4100 2 e Activate motor temperature measurement via the external sensor p0600 10 In the delivery condition and on completion of commissioning the source for the external sensor is set to the customer terminal block TM31 p0603 TM31 r4105 e When the alarm threshold is reached set via p0604 factory setting 120 C alarm A7910 is triggered Parameter p0610 can be used to set how the drive responds to the alarm triggered 0 No response only alarm no reduction of _max 1 Alarm with reduction of _max and fault F7011 2 Alarm and fault F7011 no reduction of _max e When the fault threshold is reached set via p0605 factory setting 155 C fault F7011 is triggered in conjunction with the setting in p0610 Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 347 Functions Monitoring and Protective Functions 9 4 Monitoring and protective functions Temperature measurement via PTC The device is connected to terminal X522 7 8 on the customer terminal block TM31 The threshold for switching to an alarm or fault is 1650 Q If the threshold is exceeded the system switches internally from an artificially generated temperatu
44. during rotating measurement without encoder p1960 1 3 with encoder p1960 2 4 If the drive is operated in the field weakening range this characteristic should be determined for vector control in particular The magnetization characteristic can be used to calculate the field generating current in the field weakening range more accurately thereby increasing torque accuracy Note In comparison with standstill measurement p1910 for induction motors rotating measurement p1960 allows the rated magnetization current and saturation characteristic to be determined more accurately Flow 0 p0365 p0364 100 p0363 90362 f my 0 ip A r0331 p0366 p0367 100 p0368 p0369 i ip iu Magnetization characteristic Figure 9 2 Magnetization characteristic Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 297 Functions Monitoring and Protective Functions 9 2 Drive Functions Carrying out motor identification e Enter p1910 gt 0 Alarm A07991 is displayed e identification starts when the motor is switched on e p1910 resets itself to 0 successful identification or fault FO7990 is output e 10047 displays the current status of the measurement Note To set the new controller setting permanently the data must be saved with p0977 or p0971 on the non volatile CompactFlash card J N WARNING During motor i
45. e You have created a drive unit project offline using STARTER e You have saved the project data to the hard disk on your PC e You have transferred the project data to the drive unit e You have saved the project data to the CompactFlash card so that it is protected in the event of a power failure Note The STARTER commissioning tool supports complex drive system operations If you are confronted with any system conditions in online mode that are beyond your control you are advised to delete the drive project from the project navigator and carefully create a new project in STARTER using the appropriate configuration data for your application 5 3 5 Connection via serial interface As well as the PROFIBUS connection there is also the option of exchanging data via a serial interface Prerequisites There must a serial interface COM on the PC from which the connection is to be made Settings 1 In STARTER select the Serial cable PPI interface from Project gt Set PC PG interface If this is not available from the dropdown list you first have to add it using Select Note If the interface cannot be added to the selection menu the driver for the serial interface has to be installed This is located under the following path on the STARTER CD installation starter starter Disk1 SerialCable_PPI STARTER must not be active while the driver is being installed 2 Make the following settings The 0 address and the
46. e g fans buffering can last a few seconds In drives with a low centrifugal mass e g pumps however buffering can last just 100 200 ms When the power is restored the Vdc_min controller is deactivated and the drive is ramped up to its setpoint speed at the ramp function generator ramp An alarm A7402 drive DC link voltage minimum controller active will be issued while the Vdc_min controller is active If the drive can no longer generate any regenerative energy because for example it is almost at a standstill the DC link voltage continues to drop If the minimum DC link voltage is undershot see Switching Vdc_min control on off lt 1 gt the drive will shut down with fault F30003 power unit DC link undervoltage If during active Vdc_min control a speed threshold set with parameter p1257 p1297 see Switching Vdc_min control on off lt 2 gt is undershot the drive will shut down with F7405 drive kinetic buffering minimum speed not reached If a shutdown with undervoltage in the DC link F30003 occurs without the drive coming to a standstill despite the fact that Vdc_min control is active the controller may have to be optimized via dynamic factor p1247 p1287 Increasing the dynamic factor in p1247 p1287 causes the controller to intervene more quickly The default setting for this parameter however should be sufficient for most applications Parameter p1256 1 p1296 can be used to activate time monitoring fo
47. e p1755 Motor model changeover speed encoderless operation e p1756 Motor model changeover speed hysteresis e p1758 Motor model changeover delay time closed open loop control e p1759 Motor model changeover delay time open closed loop control Drive converter cabinet units 268 Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Setpoint channel and closed loop contro 7 4 Vector speed torque control with without encoder 7 4 2 Vector control with encoder Description Benefits of vector control with an encoder e The speed can be controlled right down to 0 Hz standstill e Stable control response throughout the entire speed range e Allows a defined and or variable torque for speeds below approx 10 of the rated motor speed to be maintained e Compared with speed control without an encoder the dynamic response of drives with an encoder is significantly better because the speed is measured directly and integrated in the model created for the current components Motor model change A model change takes place between the current model and the observer model within the speed range p1752 x 100 p1756 and p1752 In the current model range i e at lower speeds torque accuracy depends on whether thermal tracking of the rotor resistance is carried out correctly In the observer model range and at speeds of less than approx 20 of the rated speed torque accuracy depends primarily on whether thermal tracking of the stator resistance is car
48. oe To select the language choose lt F5 gt F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 Once the language has been selected the booting up process continues Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 165 Commissioning 5 5 First commissioning with the AOP30 Once the system has successfully ramped up the drive has to be commissioned when the system is switched on for the first time after it has been delivered The converter can then be switched on When the system is then ramped up again it can be operated immediately Navigation within the interactive screens 166 Within an interactive screen the selection boxes can usually be selected using the lt F2 gt and or lt F3 gt keys Selection fields are generally texts surrounded by a frame When they are selected they are highlighted with a white text on a black background The present value of a highlighted selection box can usually be changed by pressing lt F5 gt OK and or Change Another entry box then appears and the value you want is entered directly using the numerical keypad or can be selected from a list You can change from one interactive screen to the next or previous screen by selecting the Next or Previous selection boxes and then confirming by pressing lt F5 gt OK If a screen contains particularly important parameters the selection field Continue only appears at the bottom of the screen This is because every single parameter in
49. p0180 2 Configure 2 DDS p0186 0 1 0 1 The MDS are assigned to the DDS p0820 Digital input DDS selection The digital input to change over the motor is selected via the p0821 to p0824 0 DDS Binary coding is used p0820 bit 0 etc p0826 0 1 1 2 Different numbers mean different thermal models p0827 0 1 0 1 The bits of p0830 are assigned to the MDS If p0827 0 0 for example bit p0830 0 is set via DDSO when MDSO is selected p0830 0 and p0830 1 Digital outputs auxiliary contactors The digital outputs for the auxiliary contactors are assigned to the bits p0831 0 1 Digital inputs auxiliary contacts The digital inputs for the feedback signal of the motor contactors are assigned p0833 00 and 01 0 0 The drive controls the contactor circuit and pulse suppression Motor changeover sequence 1 9 2 7 3 314 FP 8565 FP 8575 Pulse suppression The pulses are suppressed following the selection of a new drive data set using p0820 to p0824 Open motor contactor Motor contactor 1 is opened r0830 0 and the status bit Motor changeover active r0835 0 is set Change over drive data set The requested data set is activated r0051 data set currently effective r0837 requested data set Energize motor contactor After the feedback signal motor contactor opened from motor contactor 1 the appropriate bit of r0830 is set and motor contactor 2 is energized
50. power block at this position You can now remove the power block CAUTION When removing the power block ensure that you do not damage any signal cables Installation steps For installation carry out the above steps in reverse order CAUTION The tightening torques specified in the table Tightening torques for connecting current conducting parts must be observed Carefully establish the plug in connections and then ensure that they are secure The screwed connections for the protective covers must only be tightened by hand The fiber optic cable plugs must be remounted at their original slot Fiber optic cables and sockets are accordingly labeled for correct assignment U11 U21 U31 Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 375 Maintenance and servicing 11 4 Replacing components Replacing the right hand power block Figure 11 7 Replacing the power block frame size HX right hand power block Drive converter cabinet units 376 Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Maintenance and servicing 11 4 Replacing components Preparatory steps e Disconnect the cabinet unit from the power supply e Allow unimpeded access to the power block e Remove the protective cover Removal steps The removal steps are numbered in ac
51. self acknowledging that is they are reset automatically when the cause of the alarm has been eliminated Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5SE00189855A Diagnosis faults and alarms 10 3 10 3 1 Causes Remedy 10 3 Overview of warnings and faults Overview of warnings and faults If a fault occurs the drive indicates the fault and or alarm Faults and alarms are listed in a fault alarm list together with the following information e Fault alarm number e Standard drive response e Description of the possible cause of the fault alarm e Description of the procedure for rectifying the problem e Standard fault acknowledgement after it has been rectified Note The list of faults and alarms is contained on the documentation CD It also contains descriptions of the responses OFF 1 OFF2 etc Note The faults and alarms described below have been wired specially for the cabinet units listed in this document and preset via macro In this way the appropriate reaction is triggered by the additional components in the cabinet unit when faults and alarms are signaled It is possible to reprogram the faults and alarms described provided that the stated options are not included in the scope of the equipment External alarm 1 Alarm A7850 External alarm 1 is triggered by the following optional protection devices in the cabinet unit e Thermistor motor protection unit a
52. 0 4 20 mA Motor current Default 4 20 mA defaulted with motor current can be reparameterized for other variables Max connectable cross section 2 5 mm Table 4 54 Terminal block A1 X3 connection for the motor PTC thermistor sensor Terminal Designation Default Comments 90 91 Al Connection for a PTC Shutdown if limit value is exceeded thermistor Max connectable cross section 2 5 mm Drive converter cabinet units 118 Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Electrical installation 4 10 Other connections Adapting the analog inputs and outputs If the setting ranges of the analog inputs and outputs are to be changed the associated interface converters T411 T412 T413 must be set The corresponding interface converter must be removed for this purpose and the rotary switch on the side S1 turned to the corresponding position Table 4 55 Terminal block A1 X2 Adaptation of analog inputs and outputs Terminal Designation Item code of interface Settings on rotary switch S1 converter 50 51 Al T411 2 0 20mA 4 4 20 mA preassignment 60 61 AO T412 1 0 20mA 2 4 20 mA preassignment 62 63 AO T413 1 0 20mA 2 4 20 mA preassignment 4 10 23 Separate 24 V DC power supply for NAMUR option B02 Description If the customer cannot provide a separate 24 V DC supply PELV this option enables a second power supply to be installed to pro
53. 1 Replacing the filter mats The filter mats must be checked at regular intervals If the mats are too dirty to allow the air supply to flow normally they must be replaced Note Filter mat replacement is only relevant for options M23 M43 and M54 Not replacing contaminated filter mats can cause premature drive shutdown Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 369 Maintenance and servicing 11 4 Replacing components 11 4 2 Replacing the power block type FX Replacing the power block Figure 11 4 Replacing the power block frame size FX Drive converter cabinet units 370 Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Maintenance and servicing 11 4 Replacing components Preparatory steps e Disconnect the cabinet unit from the power supply e Allow unimpeded access to the power block e Remove the protective cover Removal steps The removal steps are numbered in accordance with the figure Unscrew the connection to the outgoing motor section 3 screws Unscrew the connection to the line supply 3 screws Remove the retaining screws at the top 2 screws Remove the retaining screws at the bottom 2 screws Remove the DRIVE CLiQ cables and connections to the CU320 5 plugs Remove the CU320 mounts 1 screw and 2 nuts If necessary remove the PROFIBUS plug and connection to the operator panel X140 on the CU320 and remove the CU320 On h WD N Disco
54. 11 Summary gt Click Complete to finish creating a new drive unit project Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 133 Commissioning 5 3 Procedure for commissioning via STARTER 5 3 2 Configure the drive unit In the project navigator open the component that contains your drive unit Mm STARTER Project Project Edit Targetsystem View Options Window Help Coat af E 0 ffl Nell Sail fe ote fata J eE EP Project i gt Insert single drive unit i fly sinamics_ciso gt Configure drive unit gt Overview gt Configuration gt Topology Control_Unit Press F1 to open Help display Offline mode NUM A Figure 5 12 Project navigator Configure drive unit gt In the project navigator click the plus sign next to the drive unit that you want to configure The plus sign becomes a minus sign and the drive unit configuration options are displayed as a tree below the drive unit gt Double click Configure the drive unit Drive converter cabinet units 134 Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Commissioning Configuring the drive unit Configuration SINAMICS_G150 Drive unit Options Control structure Drive setting Motor Motor holding brake Defaults of the setpoin Drive functions Important parameters Summary Configure the drive unit
55. 3 5 Fitting additional canopies option M21 or hoods option M23 M43 M54 essees 44 3 3 6 Line connection from above option M13 motor connection from above option M78 47 4 Electrical installation aeea e A A EAR NEEE E NE ducians 49 4 1 ChapterGontent PEE E A T E E E E E rectal 49 4 2 Checklist for electrical installation ecccccceccceeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeceaeeeeeeeesenaneeceeeeseeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeess 50 4 3 Important safety preCauUtions ceccceccececeeeeecee ceeeeeaeceeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeseneaeaeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeneeseeeneees 55 4 4 Introduction to EMC nietes e a deen hand anual actin vied alien sei daea iea a a EA EE 56 4 5 EMC compliant designi aseainena unginn innana EEEE E ANE EE EA A AN ASE ANT A A E NS 58 4 6 Electrical connection of units that are connected in parallel ccceceececeeeeeeeceeceeeeeeeeeneees 60 4 6 1 Connecting the PE DUSDAmS sirae EE EE E E E E EEE 60 4 6 2 Establishing the DC link connections siii eaea E aE EA ARE E iE 61 4 6 3 Connecting the power supply and signal CableS 0 ceecceeeeneeeeeeteeeeeeenaeeeeenaeeeeeeaeeeeenaeeeeeeaas 61 4 6 4 Connecting the DRIVE CLIQ topOlOgy e ceccceeeeeneeeeceeeeneeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeeeeaaeeeeeaeeeeeeteeeeenaeeeeeeaes 61 Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 7 Table of contents 4 7 Power connections ossiani aiaa wate ANN aa A iaa a aa anA A aa a aai 62 4 7 1 Connection cross
56. 3003 1024 HTL A B 3005 1024 TTL A B 3006 EN 1 2048 HTL A B 3007 Ey S 2048 TTL A B 3008 a 1024 HTL A B unipolar 3003 2048 HTL A B unipolar 3011 2048 TTL A B R with sense 3020 User defined v Details Cancel Help Figure 5 23 Entering the encoder data gt In the Encoder name field enter a name of your choice Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 149 Commissioning 5 3 Procedure for commissioning via STARTER Note In the factory setting an HTL encoder is bipolar with 1024 pulses per revolution at terminal X521 X531 gt To select a different predefined encoder configuration check the Select standard encoder from list radio button and select one of the encoders from the list gt To enter special encoder configurations click the Enter data radio button and then the Encoder data button The following screen is displayed in which you can enter the required data Encoder data Encoder type Incremental tracks Pulses revolution 1024 Level f HTL TIL Rotary l Track monitoring Signal C Unipolar Bipolar Measuring system os Zero marks Configuration No zero mark X Zero mark spacing Pulses Encoder evaluation SMC30 Supply voltage C 5 Remote sense 24 Incremental HTL TTL Encoder connection SUB D Terminal Cancel Figure 5 24 Entering encoder data User defined encoder data gt Select
57. 60 Hz motor data in hp gt Under Connection voltage enter the appropriate voltage of the cabinet unit gt Click Continue gt Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Commissioning 5 3 Procedure for commissioning via STARTER Configuring the motor Selecting the motor type Configuration SINAMICS_G150 Motor Drive unit Drive Drive_1 DDS 0 MDS 0 Options Control structure Configure the motor rive settir Drive setting Motor name Motor Motor holding brake C Motor with DRIYE CLIQ interface Encoder I Read ou See Defaults of the setpoinl C Select standard motor from list Drive functions Pr data exchang Enter motor data Important parameters Motor type Induction motor rotating 1 Summary Parallel motor connection Figure 5 17 Configuring the motor Selecting the motor type gt Under Motor name enter a name for the motor gt From the selection box next to Motor type select the appropriate motor for your application gt In the Parallel connection motor field enter the number of motors connected in parallel if necessary Motors connected in parallel must be of the same type and size Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 141 Commissioning 5 3 Procedure for commissioning via STARTER Note The steps described below also apply to com
58. 700 Output current Rated current In A 745 840 985 Base load current IL 3 A 725 820 960 Base load current IH A 570 700 860 Input current Rated input current A 775 873 1024 Input current max A 1188 1344 1573 Current requirements for 24 VDC JA 1 4 1 4 1 5 auxiliary supply Connection voltages Line voltage Vacrms 380 V 3 AC 10 to 480 V 3 AC 10 15 lt 1 min Line frequency Hz 47 to 63 Hz Electronics power supply Voc 24 20 4 28 8 Power loss kW 9 6 10 1 14 4 Cooling air requirement m s 0 78 0 78 1 48 Sound pressure level Lpa dB A 70 73 70 73 72 75 1 m at 50 60 Hz Line connection recommended DIN VDE mm2 3x185 4x 150 4x 185 maximum DIN VDE mm 4 x 240 8 x 240 8 x 240 Fixing screw M12 2 holes M12 4 holes M12 4 holes Motor connection recommended DIN VDE mm 3x150 3x185 4 x 185 maximum DIN VDE mm2 2 x 240 4x 240 6 x 240 Fixing screw M12 2 holes M12 2 holes M12 3 holes Protective conductor connection Fixing screw M12 10 holes M12 16 holes M12 18 holes Max motor cable length shielded unshielded m 300 450 300 450 300 450 Dimensions standard version Width mm 1200 1200 1600 Height mm 2000 2000 2000 Depth mm 600 600 600 Power block frame size HX HX JX Weight without options approx kg 865 1075 1360 Recommended protection Line protection with option L26 3NA3475 3NA3365 3NA3472 Rated current A 800 2 x 500 2 x 630 frame size to DIN 43620 1 4 3 3
59. 8 x240 8 x240 Fixing screw M12 4 holes M12 4 holes M12 4 holes Protective conductor connection Fixing screw M12 8 holes M12 8 holes M12 10 holes Max motor cable length shielded unshielded m 300 450 300 450 300 450 Dimensions standard version Width mm 600 600 1000 Height mm 2000 2000 2000 Depth mm 600 600 600 Power block frame size HX HX JX Weight without options approx kg 670 670 980 Recommended protection Line and semi cond protection 3NE1448 2 3NE1436 2 3NE1437 2 Rated current A 850 2 x 630 2x710 frame size to DIN 43620 1 3 3 3 430 Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Technical specifications 12 3 Technical specitications Order number 6SL3710 1GE37 5CAO 1GE38 4CA0 1GE41 0CA0 1 Rated output of a typical 6 pole standard induction motor based on I or IH at 400 V 3 AC 50 Hz 2 Rated output of a typical 6 pole standard induction motor based on IL or IH at 460 V 3 AC 60 Hz 3 The base load current IL is based on a duty cycle of 110 for 60 s or 150 for 10 s with a duty cycle duration of 300 s see Overload capability 4 The base load current IH is based on a duty cycle of 150 for 60 s or 160 for 10 s with a duty cycle duration of 300 s see Overload capability 5 The current values given here are based on the rated output current 6 The recommendations for the North American market in AWG or MCM must be taken from the appropr
60. A y Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 205 Operation 6 5 Setpoint sources 6 5 2 Motorized potentiometer Description The digital motorized potentiometer enables you to set speeds remotely using switching signals keys It is activated via terminals or PROFIBUS As long as a logical 1 is present at signal input MOP raise setpoint higher the internal numerator integrates the setpoint You can set the integration time time taken for the setpoint to increase using parameter p1047 In the same way you can decrease the setpoint using signal input MOP lower The deceleration ramp can be set using parameter p1048 Configuration parameter p1030 0 1 default setting 0 is used to activate that the actual motorized potentiometer is saved in a non volatile fashion when powering down the drive unit When powering up the drive unit the starting initial value of the motorized potentiometer is set to the last actual value that was present when the drive unit was powered down Prerequisites The default setting for the motorized potentiometer was chosen during commissioning e STARTER Motorized potentiometer e AOP30 3 Motorized potentiometer Signal flow diagram MOP raise Ramp up time Ramp down time p1047 p1048 MOP lower MOP nsetnRFG 11050 Motorized potentio meter implemente via internal Figure 6 18 Signal flow diagram Motorized potentiom
61. A5SE00189855A Functions Monitoring and Protective Functions 9 3 Extended functions Example 2 Emergency brake If emergency braking is required electrical and mechanical braking is to take place simultaneously This can be achieved if OFF3 is used as a tripping signal for emergency braking p1219 0 r0898 2 OFF3 to apply brake immediately To prevent the converter working in opposition to the brake the OFF3 ramp p1135 should be set to 0 seconds Any prevailing regenerative energy must be converted into heat via a braking resistor This is often used for example in calendar stacks cutting tools running gears and presses Example 3 Service brake on crane drives For cranes with manual control it is important that the drive responds immediately when the control lever is moved master switch To this end the drive is powered up using the on command p0840 the pulses are enabled Speed setpoint 01142 and speed controller p0856 are inhibited The motor is magnetized The magnetization time generally applicable for three phase motors 1 2 seconds is therefore eliminated Now only the brake opening time will delay the motor starting to rotate following activation of the master switch Movement of the master switch generates a setpoint enable from the control bit interconnected with p1142 p1229 2 p1224 0 The speed controller is enabled immediately and the speed setpoint is enabled once the brake opening
62. AOP30 164 Assembly Canopies and hoods 44 Canopy to increase the degree of protection to IP21 45 Hood to increase the degree of protection to IP23 IP43 IP54 46 Line connection from above 47 Motor connection from above 47 Automatic restart 307 Automatic speed controller optimization 295 Auxiliary supply 69 Auxiliary Supply 230 V AC 70 24 V DC 70 Auxiliary Voltage 77 B BOO 117 B02 119 BO3 119 Basic commissioning Entering the basic parameters 171 Settings for units that are connected in parallel 159 173 Basic Commissioning Enter the motor data 168 Entering the encoder data 169 Motor identification 172 Selecting the motor type 168 Basic information BICO technology 191 Binector input Bl 192 Binector output BO 192 Command data set CDS 186 Connector input Cl 192 Connector output CO 192 Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Copy motor data set MDS 190 Copying the command data set CDS 190 Copying the drive data set DDS 190 Data sets 186 Drive data set DDS 187 Drive objects 184 Encoder data set EDS 188 Interconnecting signals 192 Motor data set MDS 189 Parameter categorization 182 Parameter types 181 Parameters 181 Basic information about the drive system 181 BICO technology 191 Interconnecting signals 192 Binector input Bl 192 Binector output BO 192 Blocking protection 345 Bremseinheit 25 kW Option L61 92 Bre
63. CAN Communication Board Option G20 eee cence eeeneeeeeeeee ee eeeeetaeeeeetaeeee 104 4 10 18 SMC30 Sensor Module Cabinet Mounted option K50 ec eeeeeeeeeeneee erence etteeeeeeneeeen 107 410 181 DESCHIPUOM ex ates Gch fetes aie aa a aa aae ana aee a aunts ua maar Aaah mee eh ee eee eae 107 ARO A182 COMME CUOM siesta ces cag A A E haubasenavtasirsdeaicesaduascanteabdchateds 112 4 10 18 3 Connection CXAMPles cececcccccceceeeeeeecae cece cece eeeeececaaaaeceeeecesecaaeeeeeeeesecqacaeceeeesecseceeeeeeeeeneeess 114 4 10 19 Voltage Sensing Module for determining the actual motor speed and the phase angle OPON KS 1 Ai tien wh eh ace ten ain ete ce at eta O T E 115 4 10 20 Customer terminal block extension Option G61 eceeeceeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeteteeeeeteeeeeeaeeeetneeeee 115 4 10 21 Terminal module for activation of Safe Torque Off and Safe STOP 1 option K82 116 4 10 22 NAMUR terminal block Option BOO eee eeeeeeeeeeeee ee ee teneeeee eee ee taeeeeeteeeeetaeeeeesieeeeetnaeeeeeaa 117 4 10 23 Separate 24 V DC power supply for NAMUR option BO2 ccccceeeeeseceeceeeeeeesenteeeeeeees 119 4 10 24 Outgoing section for external auxiliary equipment for NAMUR option B03 eee 119 COMMISSIONING inae asirispa aaa anana taara Eaa aaa E Ea aana aerian aata raae sivas aodammearenviazasds 121 5 1 Chapter contentari aaa a a aa a a atid tech a e caddie A 121 5 2 STARTER commissioning TOOL aeei r E ER 123
64. Hz Electronics power supply Voc 24 20 4 28 8 Power loss kW 2 8 3 8 4 2 Cooling air requirement m s 0 17 0 36 0 36 Sound pressure level Lpa dB A 67 68 67 73 67 73 1 m at 50 60 Hz Line connection recommended DIN VDE mm 95 120 2x70 maximum DIN VDE mm 4 x 240 4 x 240 4 x 240 Fixing screw M12 1 hole M12 1 hole M12 1 hole Motor connection recommended DIN VDE 5 mm2 70 95 120 maximum DIN VDE mm 2x150 2x150 2 x 150 Fixing screw M12 1 hole M12 1 hole M12 1 hole Protective conductor connection Fixing screw M12 2 holes M12 2 holes M12 2 holes Max motor cable length shielded unshielded m 300 450 300 450 300 450 Dimensions standard version Width mm 400 400 400 Height mm 2000 2000 2000 Depth mm 600 600 600 Power block frame size FX GX GX Weight without options approx kg 225 300 300 Recommended protection Line and semi cond protection 3NE1225 2 3NE1227 2 3NE1230 2 Rated current A 200 250 315 1 1 460 Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5SE00189855A Technical specifications 12 3 Technical specitications Order number 6SL3710 1GH31 5CA0 1GH31 8CAO 1GH32 2CA0 1 Rated output of a typical 6 pole standard induction motor based on I or IH at 690 V 3 AC 50 Hz 2 The base load current I1 is based on a duty cycle of 110 for 60 s or 150 for 10 s with a duty cycle duration of 300 s see Overload capability 3 The base l
65. Hz 400 V kW 630 710 900 for I at 50 Hz 400 V 1 kW 500 560 710 for IL at 60 Hz 460 V 2 hp 900 1000 1250 for I at 60 Hz 460 V 2 hp 700 900 1000 Output current Rated current In A 1120 1380 1560 Base load current IL 3 A 1092 1340 1516 Base load current IH A 850 1054 1294 Input current Rated input current A 1174 1444 1624 Input current max A 1800 2215 2495 Current requirements for 24 VDC A 2 8 2 8 3 0 auxiliary supply Connection voltages Line voltage Vacrms 380 V 3 AC 10 to 480 V 3 AC 10 15 lt 1 min Line frequency Hz 47 to 63 Hz Electronics power supply Voc 24 20 4 28 8 Power loss kW 16 2 19 0 19 9 Cooling air requirement m s 1 56 1 56 1 56 Sound pressure level Lpa dB A 73 76 73 76 73 76 1 m at 50 60 Hz Line connection Per sub cabinet Per sub cabinet Per sub cabinet recommended DIN VDE mm2 2 x 240 3x 185 4x 150 maximum DIN VDE mm 4 x 240 4 x 240 8 x 240 Fixing screw M12 2 holes M12 2 holes M12 4 holes Motor connection Per sub cabinet Per sub cabinet Per sub cabinet recommended DIN VDE mm 2x185 3x150 3 x 185 maximum DIN VDE mm2 4 x 240 4 x 240 4 x 240 Fixing screw M12 2 holes M12 2 holes M12 2 holes Protective conductor connection Per sub cabinet Per sub cabinet Per sub cabinet Fixing screw M12 2 holes M12 10 holes M12 16 holes Max motor cable length shielded unshielded m 300 450 300 450 300 450 Dimensions standard version
66. N WARNING If p1210 is set to values gt 1 the motor can be restarted automatically without the need to issue the ON command In the event of prolonged power failures and when the automatic restart function is activated p1210 gt 1 the drive may have been at a standstill for a long time and mistakenly considered to have been switched off For this reason entering the area around the drive when it is in this condition can cause death serious injury or considerable material damage Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 307 Functions Monitoring and Protective Functions 9 2 Drive Functions Automatic restart mode Table 9 1 Automatic restart mode p1210 Mode 0 Disables automatic restart Meaning Automatic restart inactive 1 Acknowledges all faults without restarting If p1210 1 pending faults will be acknowledged automatically once their cause has been rectified If further faults occur after faults have been acknowledged these will also be acknowledged automatically A minimum time of p1212 1 s must expire between successful fault acknowledgement and a fault re occurring if the signal ON OFF 1 control word 1 bit 0 is at a HIGH signal level If the ON OFF 1 signal is set to LOW the time between when a fault is acknowledged and another one occurs must be at least 1 s If p1210 1 fault FO7320 will not be generated if the acknowledge attempt fai
67. R1 Operator panel Power Module T1 Emergency OFF Control Unit CU320 A10 Line circuit breaker Q1 Door interlock Customer terminal block A60 MER cn p aT aA Ventilation grilles depend ing on degree of protection Line supply connection X1 Motor connection X2 Figure 2 1 Example of the cabinet drive version A e g 132 kW 400 V 3 AC certain components are optional Drive converter cabinet units 24 Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Device Overview 2 3 Design Version A units that are connected in parallel For very high power ratings the cabinet drive comprises two cabinet units that combined to drive a motor in a parallel connection e At 380 V 480 V 3 AC 6SL3710 2GE41 1AA0 6SL3710 2GE41 4AA0 6SL3710 2GE41 6AA0 e With 500 V 600 V 3 AC 6SL3710 2GF38 6AA0 6SL3710 2GF41 1AA0 6SL3710 2GF41 4AA0 e With 660 V 690 V 3 AC 6SL3710 2GH41 1AA0 6SL3710 2GH41 4AA0 6SL3710 2GH41 5AA0 CU320 Control Unit A10 Operator panel Customer terminal block A60 insu ADASALAR ESR ELS ASRS as a n PL LRR RR M SPSL I CNN An AAAA Line supply connection X1 Motor connection Line supply X2 connection X1 Line circuit breaker Power Module Q1 T1 Motor connection X2 Line circuit breaker Power Module Q1 T1 Location designatio Location designation Locatio
68. REMOTE also during operation factory setting no e Yes You can switch between LOCAL and REMOTE when the drive is switched on motor is running e No Before the system switches to LOCAL a check is carried out to determine whether the drive is in the operational status If so the system does not switch to LOCAL and outputs the message Local not possible Before the system switches to REMOTE the drive is switched off and the setpoint is set to 0 6 7 7 2 ON key OFF key ON key always active in LOCAL when the operator input inhibit is deactivated OFF key in the factory setting acts as OFF1 ramp down at the deceleration ramp p1121 when n 0 voltage disconnection only if a main contactor is installed The OFF key is effective in the LOCAL mode and when the OFF in REMOTE function is active Settings Menu Commissioning Service AOP Settings Control Settings Red OFF key acts as factory setting OFF 1 e OFF1 Ramp down on the deceleration ramp p1121 e OFF2 Immediate pulse block motor coasts to a standstill e OFF3 Ramp down on the emergency stop ramp p1135 6 7 7 3 Switching between clockwise and counter clockwise rotation kh Settings Menu Commissioning Service AOP Settings Control Settings Switching between CCW CW factory setting no e Yes Switching between CW CCW rotation by means of the CW CCW key possible in LOCAL mode e No The CW CCW key has no effect in LOCAL mode For
69. Selector voltage V current 1 AIO vez 59 voltage V cu I V 1 55 1 S5 1 Selector voltage V current I Al1 Note When delivered both switches are set to current measurement switch set to I X522 2 analog outputs temperature sensor connection Table 4 16 Terminal block X522 Terminal Designation Technical specifications 1 AO 0V 10 V 10 V max 3 mA 2 AO 0 4 mA 20 mA max load resistance lt 500 Q 3 AO 0C 20 mA 20 mA max load resistance lt 500 Q 4 AO 1V 0 mA 20 mA max load resistance lt 500 Q 5 AO 1 Resolution 11 bits sign 6 AO 1C continued short circuit proof 7 Temp Temperature sensor connection KTY84 1C130 PTC 8 Temp 1 AO xV analog output voltage AO xC Analog output current Max connectable cross section 1 5 mm CAUTION The permissible back EMF at the outputs is 15 V Drive converter cabinet units 76 Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Electrical installation 4 9 Signal connections X540 Joint auxiliary voltage for the digital inputs Table 4 17 Terminal block X540 Terminal Designation Elle 8 P24 EJN 7 P24 D 6 P24 jo ET gt 5 P24 Elw 4 P24 EJN 3 P24 ETI El 2 P24 1 P24 Technical specifications 24 V DC Max total load current of 24 V auxiliary voltage of terminal blocks X540 and X541 combined 150 mA continued sh
70. Sink Source Parameter Description DO Parameter Description DO p0840 0 ON OFF1 Vector r4022 0 TM31 DIO TM31 p0844 0 No OFF2_1 Vector r4022 4 TM31 DI4 TM31 p0845 0 No OFF2_2 Vector 10722 3 CU DI3 CU p0848 0 No OFF3_1 Vector r4022 5 TM31 DI5 TM31 p0849 0 No OFF3_2 Vector 1 Vector p0806 Inhibit LOCAL mode Vector 0 Vector p0810 Changeover CDS bit 0 Vector 0 Vector p0852 Enable operation Vector 1 Vector p0854 Control request Vector 1 Vector p0922 PROF ldrive PZD telegram selection Vector 999 Free telegram configuration p1020 FSW bit 0 Vector r4022 1 TM31 DI1 TM31 p1021 FSW bit 1 Vector r4022 2 TM31 DI2 TM31 p1035 MOP raise Vector r4022 1 TM31 DI1 TM31 p1036 MOP lower Vector r4022 2 TM31 DI2 TM31 p1113 Direction of rotation reversal Vector r4022 6 TM31 DI6 TM31 p1140 Enable RFG Vector 1 Vector p1141 Start RFG Vector 1 Vector p1142 Enable nsetp Vector 1 Vector p2103 Acknowledge fault 1 Vector 0 Vector p2104 Acknowledge fault 2 Vector r4022 3 TM31 DI3 TM31 p2106 Ext fault_1 Vector r0722 1 CU DI1 CU p2107 Ext fault_2 Vector 1 Vector p2112 Ext alarm_1 Vector r0722 0 CU DIO CU p2116 Ext alarm_2 Vector 1 Vector p0738 DI DO8 CU 1 24 V CU p0748 8 Invert DI DO8 CU 0 Not inverted p0728 8 Set DI DO8 input or output CU 1 Output p0739 DI DO9 CU 1 24 V CU p0748 9 Invert DI DO9 CU 0 Not inverted p0728 9 Set DI DO9 input or output CU 1 Output p0740 DI DO10 CU 1 24 V CU p0748 10 Invert DI DO10 CU 0 Not inverted p0728 10 Set DI DO10 input or output CU
71. The value is indicated in milliseconds and the counter overflows after 49 days Actual motor operating hours The motor operating hours counter p0650 drive resumes when the pulses are enabled When the pulse enable is withdrawn the counter is stopped and the value saved To store the value you need a CU320 with order number 6SL3040 OAA1 and version C or higher The counter is deactivated with p0651 0 If the maintenance interval set in p0651 is reached alarm A01590 is triggered Once the motor has been maintained the maintenance interval must be reset Operating hours counter for the fan The operating hours of the fan in the power unit are displayed in p0251 drive The number of hours operated can only be reset to 0 in this parameter e g after a fan has been replaced The service life of the fan is entered in p0252 drive Alarm A30042 service life of the fan reached or exceeded is output when this figure is reached and also 500 hours beforehand Evaluation of the fault value in the alarm provides details of the cause of the alarm Monitoring is deactivated with p0252 0 Drive converter cabinet units 320 Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Functions Monitoring and Protective Functions 9 2 Drive Functions 9 2 11 Simulation operation Description The simulation function is predominantly used to simulate the drive without a motor being connected and without a DC link voltage In this cas
72. These cyclical values therefore limit the torque setpoint at the speed controller output torque input or indicate the instantaneous max possible torque If the torque setpoint is limited then this is displayed using parameter p1407 e 1407 8 Upper torque limit active e 1407 9 Lower torque limit active Function diagram FP 6060 Torque setpoint FP 6630 Upper lower torque limit FP 6640 Current power torque limits 7 4 6 Permanent magnet synchronous motors Description Permanent magnet synchronous motors without encoders are supported during operations without encoders Controlled operation is not possible when the motor is stationary Typical applications include direct drives with torque motors which are characterized by high torque at low speeds e g Siemens complete torque motors of the 1FW3 series When these drives are used gear units and mechanical parts subject to wear can be dispensed with if the application allows this J N WARNING As soon as the motor starts to rotate a voltage is generated When work is carried out on the converter the motor must be safely disconnected If this is not possible the motor must be locked by a holding brake for example Features e Field weakening of up to approx 1 2 x rated speed depending on the supply voltage of the converter and motor data also see supplementary conditions e Capture only when using a VSM module to record the motor speed and phase angle option K
73. V 1 kW 315 450 500 for IL at 60 Hz 575 V 2 hp 600 700 800 for I at 60 Hz 575 V 2 hp 500 700 700 Output current Rated current In A 575 735 810 Base load current IL 3 A 560 710 790 Base load current IH A 514 657 724 Input current Rated input current A 598 764 842 Input current max A 918 1164 1295 Current requirements for 24 VDC JA 1 4 1 5 1 5 auxiliary supply Connection voltages Line voltage Vacrms 500 V 3 AC 10 to 600 V 3 AC 10 15 lt 1 min Line frequency Hz 47 to 63 Hz Electronics power supply Voc 24 20 4 28 8 Power loss kW 8 7 12 7 14 1 Cooling air requirement m s 0 78 1 48 1 48 Sound pressure level Lpa dB A 72 75 72 75 72 75 1 m at 50 60 Hz Line connection recommended DIN VDE mm2 2 x 240 3x 185 4x 150 maximum DIN VDE mm 4 x 240 8 x 240 8 x 240 Fixing screw M12 2 holes M12 4 holes M12 4 holes Motor connection recommended DIN VDE mm 2x185 3x150 3 x 185 maximum DIN VDE mm2 4 x 240 6 x 240 6 x 240 Fixing screw M12 2 holes M12 3 holes M12 3 holes Protective conductor connection Fixing screw M12 2 holes M12 18 holes M12 18 holes Max motor cable length shielded unshielded m 300 450 300 450 300 450 Dimensions standard version Width mm 600 1000 1000 Height mm 2000 2000 2000 Depth mm 600 600 600 Power block frame size HX JX JX Weight without options approx kg 670 940 980 Recommended protection Line and semi cond protection 3
74. Vacrms 380 V 3 AC 10 to 480 V 3 AC 10 15 lt 1 min Line frequency Hz 47 to 63 Hz Electronics power supply Voc 24 20 4 28 8 Power loss kW 2 9 3 8 4 4 Cooling air requirement m s 0 17 0 23 0 36 Sound pressure level Lpa dB A 67 68 69 73 69 73 1 m at 50 60 Hz Line connection recommended DIN VDE mm2 2x70 2x95 2x120 maximum DIN VDE mm 4 x 240 4 x 240 4 x 240 Fixing screw M12 2 holes M12 2 holes M12 2 holes Motor connection recommended DIN VDE mm 2x50 2x70 2x95 maximum DIN VDE mm 2x150 2x150 2 x 150 Fixing screw M12 2 holes M12 2 holes M12 2 holes Protective conductor connection Fixing screw M12 2 holes M12 2 holes M12 2 holes Max motor cable length shielded unshielded m 300 450 300 450 300 450 Dimensions standard version Width mm 800 800 800 Height mm 2000 2000 2000 Depth mm 600 600 600 Power block frame size FX FX GX Weight without options approx kg 320 320 390 418 Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5SE00189855A Technical specifications 12 3 Technical specitications Order number Recommended protection Line protection with option L26 Rated current frame size to DIN 43620 1 Line and semiconductor protection without option L26 Rated current Frame size to DIN 43620 1 6SL3710 A 1GE32 1AA0 3NA3144 250 2 3NE1230 2 315 1 1GE32 6AA0 3NA3250 300 2 3NE13
75. a broader control range must be blocked To ensure that the speed does not constantly increase and decrease in the suppression bandwidth speeds the bands are assigned a hysteresis Specifying a minimum speed allows a specific range to be disabled around speed 0 rpm for steady state operation Signal flow diagram Skip frequency speed 1 Skip frequency speed 4 p1091 Skip frequency speed 2 Skip frequency speed 3 p1094 p1092 p1093 Minimum speed p1080 Setp_after_limit r1114 nsetp_afterMinLim 1112 Minimum limit Bandwidth p1101 Figure 7 1 Signal flow diagram Skip frequency speeds and minimum speeds Function diagram FP 3050 Skip frequency bands and speed limiting Drive converter cabinet units 254 Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Setpoint channel and closed loop contro 7 2 Setpoint channel Parameter e p1080 Minimum speed e p1091 Skip frequency speed 1 e p1092 Skip frequency speed 2 e p1093 Skip frequency speed 3 e p1094 Skip frequency speed 4 e p1101 Skip frequency speed bandwidth e r1112 Speed setpoint after minimum limiting 7 2 4 Speed limitation Description Speed limitation aims to limit the maximum permissible speed of the entire drive train to protect the drive and load machine process against damage caused by excessive speeds Signal flow diagram Maximum speed p1082 nset_after_min_lim Set_bef_RFG 1112 Speed limit negative p1086 Figu
76. a standstill The converter then accelerates the motor to the setpoint speed In many cases however the motor is not at a standstill Two different situations are possible here 1 The drive rotates as a result of external influences such as water pump drives or air fan drives In this case the drive can also rotate against the direction of rotation The drive rotates as a result of a previous shutdown e g OFF 2 or a power failure The drive slowly coasts to a standstill as a result of the kinetic energy stored in the drive train example induced draft fan with a high moment of inertia and a steeply descending load characteristic in the lower speed range In accordance with the setting chosen p1200 the flying restart function is activated in the following situations e Once power has been restored and the automatic restart function is active e After a shutdown with the OFF2 command pulse inhibit when the automatic restart function is active e When the ON command is issued Note The flying restart function must be used when the motor may still be running or is being driven by the load to prevent shutdowns due to overcurrent F7801 Note If the value set for parameter p1203 search speed factor is higher the search curve is flatter and as a result the search time is longer A lower value has the opposite effect In motors with a low moment of inertia the flying restart function can cause the d
77. all settings that are different to the factory settings are reset immediately This may cause the cabinet unit to switch to a different unwanted operational status For this reason you should always take great care when resetting parameters Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 229 Operation 6 7 Control via the operator panel 6 7 5 5 AOP30 diagnosis Software database version You can use this menu to display the firmware and database versions The database version must be compatible with the drive software status you can check this in parameter r0018 Battery status In this menu you can display the battery voltage numerically in Volts or as a bar display The battery ensures that the data in the database and the current time are retained When the battery voltage is represented as a percentage a battery voltage of lt 2 V is equal to 0 and a voltage of 2 3 V to 100 The data is secure up to a battery voltage of 2 V e Ifthe battery voltage is lt 2 45 V the message Replace battery is displayed in the status bar e Ifthe battery voltage is lt 2 30 V the system displays the following message Warning weak battery e If the battery voltage is lt 2 V the system displays the following message Warning battery is empty e Ifthe time and or database are not available after the system has been switched off for a prolonged period due to the voltage bei
78. and solutions in drive and automation technology In special cases help is available from professional trained and experienced specialists via teleservice and video conferencing Free Contact providing you with free technical support e In Europe Africa Tel 49 0 180 50 50 222 Fax 49 0 180 50 50 223 Internet http www siemens de automation support request e in America Tel 14232622522 Fax 14232622289 E mail simatic hotline sea siemens com e Asia Pacific region Tel 86 1064 757575 Fax 86 1064 747474 E mail adsupport asia siemens com Note Calls are subject to charge e g 0 14 min from fixed lines within Germany Tariffs of other phone providers may differ 10 4 1 Spare parts The spare parts available for the ordered cabinet unit can be found in the spare parts list This list is provided on the documentation CD Drive converter cabinet units 362 Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Maintenance and servicing 1 1 11 1 Chapter content This chapter provides information on the following e Maintenance and servicing procedures that have to be carried out on a regular basis to ensure the availability of the cabinet units e Exchanging device components when the unit is serviced e Forming the DC link capacitors e Upgrading the cabinet unit firmware e Loading the new operator panel firmware from the PC DANGER Five safety rules When carrying out any kind of
79. at 50 Hz 690 V kW 75 90 110 for IH at 50 Hz 690 V 7 kW 55 75 90 Output current Rated current In A 85 100 120 Base load current IL 2 A 80 95 115 Base load current IH A 76 89 107 Input current Rated input current 4 A 93 109 131 Input current max A 131 155 188 Current requirements for 24 VDC JA 1 1 1 1 1 1 auxiliary supply Connection voltages Line voltage Vacrms 660 V 3 AC 10 to 690 V 3 AC 10 15 lt 1 min Line frequency Hz 47 to 63 Hz Electronics power supply Voc 24 20 4 28 8 Power loss kW 1 7 2 1 2 7 Cooling air requirement m s 0 17 0 17 0 17 Sound pressure level Lpa dB A 67 68 67 68 67 68 1 m at 50 60 Hz Line connection recommended DIN VDE mm 50 50 70 maximum DIN VDE mm 4 x 240 4 x 240 4 x 240 Fixing screw M12 2 holes M12 2 holes M12 2 holes Motor connection recommended DIN VDE mm2 35 50 70 maximum DIN VDE mm 2x70 2x150 2 x 150 Fixing screw M12 2 holes M12 2 holes M12 2 holes Protective conductor connection Fixing screw M12 2 holes M12 2 holes M12 2 holes Max motor cable length shielded unshielded m 300 450 300 450 300 450 Dimensions standard version Width mm 800 800 800 Height mm 2000 2000 2000 Depth mm 600 600 600 Power block frame size FX FX FX Weight without options approx kg 320 320 320 446 Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5SE00189855A Technical specifications 12 3 Techni
80. be jumpered with M_Encoder X531 Table 4 51 Encoder connection X531 Terminal Signal name 1 P_Encoder 5 V 24 V M_Encoder Temp Temperature sensor connection KTY84 1C130 PTC Technical specifications Encoder supply Ground for encoder power supply Temp Reserved do not use Reserved do not use Reserved do not use COINIO aA R W M Reserved do not use Max connectable cross section 1 5 mm Note Note that when the encoder is connected via terminals the cable shield must be applied to the module NOTICE The KTY temperature sensor must be connected with the correct polarity Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 113 Electrical installation 4 10 Other connections 4 10 18 3 Connection examples Connection example 1 HTL encoder bipolar without zero marker gt p0405 9 hex Track A Track A Track B Track B Zero pulse Inverse zero pulse CTRL Ground Encoder power supply 24 V Ground for encoder power supply Figure 4 21 Connection example 1 HTL encoder bipolar without zero marker Connection example 2 TTL encoder unipolar without Zero marker gt p0405 A hex Track A Track A Track B Track B Zero pulse Inverse zero pulse CTRL Ground Encoder power supply 5 V Ground for encoder power supply Figure 4 22 Connection example 2 TTL encoder
81. by the guide rails on the withdrawable devices Figure 11 1 Installation device Order number Order number for the installation device 6SL3766 1FA00 O0AAO Drive converter cabinet units 366 Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Maintenance and servicing 11 3 Maintenance 11 3 2 Using crane lifting lugs to transport power blocks Crane lifting lugs The power blocks are fitted with crane lifting lugs for transportation on a lifting harness in the context of replacement The positions of the crane lifting lugs are illustrated by arrows in the figures below J N WARNING A lifting harness with vertical ropes or chains must be used to prevent any risk of damage to the housing CAUTION The power block busbars must not be used to support or secure lifting harnesses for the purpose of transportation Figure 11 2 Crane lifting lugs on FX GX power block Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 367 Maintenance and servicing 11 3 Maintenance Baos il AI aw Figure 11 3 Crane lifting lugs on HX JX power block Note On HX and JX power blocks the front crane lifting lug is located behind the busbar Drive converter cabinet units 368 Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Maintenance and servicing 11 4 Replacing components 11 4 Replacing components J N WARNING The follo
82. current A 2 x 500 frame size to DIN 43620 1 2 466 Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Technical specifications 12 3 Technical specitications Order number 6SL3710 1GH38 1CA0 1 Rated output of a typical 6 pole standard induction motor based on I or IH at 690 V 3 AC 50 Hz 2 The base load current IL is based on a duty cycle of 110 for 60 s or 150 for 10 s with a duty cycle duration of 300 s see Overload capability 3 The base load current IH is based on a duty cycle of 150 for 60 s or 160 for 10 s with a duty cycle duration of 300 s see Overload capability 4 The current values given here are based on the rated output current 5 The recommendations for the North American market in AWG or MCM must be taken from the appropriate NEC National Electrical Code or CEC Canadian Electrical Code standards Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 467 Technical specifications 12 3 Technical specifications Drive converter cabinet units 468 Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Appendix A 1 List of abbreviations A As Alarm AC Alternating current Al Analog input AO Analog output AOP Advanced operator panel with plain text display B Bl Binector input BICO Binector connector BO Binector output C C Capacitance CAN Serial bus system CB Communication board CDS Command data set CI Connect
83. data transfer The sequence of drive objects is displayed via a list in p0978 0 15 where it can also be changed Note The sequence of drive objects in HW Config must be the same as that in the drive p0978 NOTICE A ring type topology is not permissible 6 8 3 Further information about communication via PROFINET IO Further information about communication via PROFINET IO For more information about the PROFINET IO communication refer to the section PROFIBUS DP PROFINET IO communication in the documentation SINAMICS S120 Function Manual Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 249 Operation 6 9 Engineering Software Drive Control Chart DCC 6 9 Engineering Software Drive Control Chart DCC Graphical configuring and expansion of the device functionality by means of freely available closed loop control arithmetic and logic function blocks Drive Control Chart DCC expands the facility for the simplest possible configuring of technological functions both for the SIMOTION motion control system as well as for the SINAMICS drive system This provides the user with a new dimension of system adaptability for specific machine functions DCC does not restrict the number of functions that can be used the only restriction is the performance of the target platform The user friendly DCC editor enables easy graphical configuration and a clear representation of c
84. download is complete Waiting for POWER ON light Green orange 2 Hz flashing Detection of the components via LED is activated p0154 or light Note red orange Both options depend on the LED status when module recognition is activated via p0154 1 Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 351 Diagnosis faults and alarms 10 2 Diagnosis Control Interface Board Interface module in the Power Module T1 Table 10 3 Description of the LEDs on the Control Interface Board LED state Description H200 H201 OFF OFF The electronics power supply is missing or lies outside the permissible tolerance range Green OFF The component is ready for operation and cyclic DRIVE CLiQ communication is taking place Orange The component is ready for operation and cyclic DRIVE CLiQ communication is taking place The DC link voltage is present Red The component is ready for operation and cyclic DRIVE CLiQ communication is taking place The DC link voltage is too high Orange Orange DRIVE CLiQ communication is being established Red At least one fault is pending on this component Note LED is driven irrespective of the corresponding messages being reconfigured Flashing 0 5 Hz Firmware is being downloaded Green orange or red orange Green Red Flashing 2 Hz Firmware download is complete Waiting for POWER ON Green Red Flashing
85. drive is carrying current r0899 11 1 n_act lt p2155 r2197 1 1 n_act gt p2155 12197 2 1 Ramp up ramp down completed r2199 5 1 n_act lt p2161 preferably as n_min or n 0 message r2199 0 1 Torque setpoint lt p2174 r2198 10 1 LOCAL mode active control via operator panel or control panel r0807 0 0 Motor blocked 12198 6 Drive converter cabinet units 292 Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Functions Monitoring and Protective Functions 9 1 Chapter content This chapter provides information on e Drive functions Motor identification Vdc control automatic restart flying restart motor changeover friction characteristic increase in the output frequency runtime simulation operation direction reversal unit changeover e Extended functions Technology controller bypass function extended brake control extended monitoring functions e Monitoring and protective functions Power unit protection thermal monitoring functions and overload responses blocking protection stall protection thermal motor protection Monitoring functions Functions Protective PTEN Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 293 Functions Monitoring and Protective Functions 9 1 Chapter content Function diagrams To supplement these operating instructions the documentation folder contains simplified function diagrams describing the operating principle The diagram
86. during braking are specified in the following table J N WARNING link capacitors are discharged The threshold switch must only be used when the cabinet unit is switched off and the DC Drive converter cabinet units 96 Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Electrical installation 4 10 Other connections Table 4 37 Response thresholds of the braking units Rated voltage Response Switch Comments threshold position 380 V 480 V 673 V 1 774 V is the default factory setting With supply voltages of between 380 V 774V 2 and 400 V the response threshold can be set to 673 V to reduce the voltage stress on the motor and converter This does however reduce the possible braking power with the square of the voltage 673 774 0 75 The maximum possible braking power is therefore 75 500 V 600 V 841 V 1 967 V is the default factory setting With a supply voltage of 500 V the 967 V 2 response threshold can be set to 841 V to reduce the voltage stress on the motor and converter This does however reduce the possible braking power with the square of the voltage 841 967 0 75 The maximum possible braking power is therefore 75 660 V 690 V 1070 V 1 1158 V is the default factory setting With a supply voltage of 660 V the 1158 V 2 response threshold can be set to 1070 V to reduce the voltage stress on the motor and converter This does however reduce the possible braking power with the squ
87. e g 08 00 06 6B 80 C0 IP address To allow a PROFINET device to be addressed as a node on Industrial Ethernet this device also requires an IP address that is unique within the network The IP address is made up of 4 decimal numbers with a range of values from 0 through 255 The decimal numbers are separated by a period The IP address is made up of e The address of the sub network and e The address of the node generally called the host or network node IP address assignment The TCP IP protocol is a prerequisite for establishing a connection and parameterization This is the reason that an IP address is required The IP addresses of IO devices can be assigned by the IO controller and always have the same sub network mask as the IO controller The can be consecutively assigned from the IP address of the IO controller The IP address can be changed manually if necessary and is saved in a volatile fashion If the IP address is to be stored in a non volatile memory the address must be assigned using the Primary Setup Tool PST or STARTER This can also be carried out in HWConfig in STEP 7 where the function is called Edit Ethernet node Note If the network is part of an existing Ethernet company network obtain the information from your network administrator IP address sub network mask and a router that is possibly being used Device name When it is shipped an IO device does not have a device name An IO de
88. ented aa Aaaa aAa ns ant ea deen 21 2 2 Applications features and GeSIQN ccccccceeeeeceeeceeceeeeeeeseaeeeeeeeeeseccaeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeeeeeeeseanaeee mn 21 2 2 1 FieldoftapplicationSete ma a a a e a aE a a aa aa ea aE Aaaa 21 2 2 2 Characteristics quality service cccceeececcceceee cece ee eeceeaee ener ce eeaaaeceeeeeeseeacaeeeeeesecseaeeeeeeseeeeeees 22 2 3 DESIG ainsi oian eani a a aa a a aaa a E a Aa at ia aiaia 24 2 3 1 Version Al anpe ated Male aid a a eataa aaa eaae ea nee eee eel 24 2 3 2 VERSION Crnome o e A As teats a nace E a teat A Aaa eo ce as 27 2 4 Wiring Principle tch Melts tnlaginl T aah eee a ent eet ih ts ata 28 2 5 Type Plate tere shih tae ete tasks E an lie ees Bk NR ah Sak eae Mee a thee tie Melee de Ae 33 3 Mechanical installation iss cas ccccccat a ai traadi ia aaae E aaa Ae AEAT adai 37 3 1 Chapter content sironnan ees eee are ie A tear aa a e a 37 3 2 Transportation and storage is is iiaa eai aaa aaa daa aiaa 38 3 3 Assembly nren a aiaia ea adag Poetas ied a Aan ae aa a a endl 40 3 3 1 Mechanical installation Checklist c cccccceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseceaeaeeeeeesecaaaeeeeeeeesencucaeeeseeeneeeees 41 3 3 2 Preparatory StePSin eene eaan i a eaaa ea aaa aa aaa aae aeai eet aaa aa T aa aa aE 42 3 3 3 installationen m a a a a a a a a a oh ae Seach ta enaea ts 43 3 3 4 Mechanical connection of units that are connected in parallel cccceceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeetsenees 44 3
89. fails Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 69 Electrical installation 4 8 External Supply of the Auxiliary Supply from a Secure Line 4 8 1 230 V AC auxiliary supply The maximum fuse rating is 16 A The connection is protected inside the cabinet with 3 A or 5 A Connection e On terminal block X40 remove the jumpers between terminals 1 and 2 as well as 5 and 6 e Connect the external 230 V AC supply to terminals 2 L1 and 6 N 4 8 2 24 V DC auxiliary supply The power requirement is 5 A Connection Connect the external 24 V DC supply to terminals 1 P 24 V and 2 Mex of terminal block x9 Drive converter cabinet units 70 Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Electrical installation 4 9 Signal connections 4 9 Signal connections 4 9 1 Customer terminal block A60 Note The factory setting and description of the customer terminal blocks can be found in the circuit diagrams The location of the customer terminal block in the cabinet unit is indicated in the layout diagram Shield connection The shield connection of shielded control cables on the customer terminal block A60 is established in the immediate vicinity of the terminal block For this purpose the customer terminal block A60 and the mounting plates have cut out sections which are used to snap the enclosed shield springs into place The shields of incoming and outgoing cables m
90. flush mounted with the cabinet unit and is fitted using spacers at a distance of 250 mm above the top of the cabinet As a result cabinets with a canopy are 250 mm higher Cabinet units with degree of protection IP23 are supplied with additional hoods as well as plastic ventilation grilles and braided plastic in the air inlet doors and outlet hoods The hoods are flush with the cabinets at the side and front and have a recess at the rear so that air can escape even if the cabinet is wall mounted Air escapes from the front and back The hood is secured by means of the four holes for the crane hooks in the cabinet Fitting hoods increases the height of the cabinet by 400 mm Cabinet units with degree of protection IP43 are supplied with additional hoods as well as plastic ventilation grilles and close meshed braided plastic in the air inlet doors and outlet hoods The hoods are flush with the cabinets at the side and front and have a recess at the rear so that air can escape even if the cabinet is wall mounted Air escapes from the front and back The hood is secured by means of the four holes for the crane hooks in the cabinet Fitting hoods increases the height of the cabinets by 400 mm Compliance with degree of protection IP43 requires an intact filter medium which must be serviced on a regular basis according to the prevailing ambient conditions Cabinet units with degree of protection IP54 are supplied with additional hoods plastic v
91. generator rounding type OFF3 ramp down time OFF3 initial rounding time OFF3 final rounding time Ramp function generator speed setpoint at the output Ramp function generator configuration Note The effective ramp up time increases when you enter initial and final rounding times Effective ramp up time p1120 0 5 x p1130 0 5 x p1131 Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 257 Setpoint channel and closed loop control 7 3 V f control 7 3 V f control Description The simplest solution for a control procedure is the V f characteristic whereby the stator voltage for the induction motor or synchronous motor is controlled proportionately to the stator frequency This method has proved successful in a wide range of applications with low dynamic requirements such as e Pumps and fans e Belt drives e Multi motor drives V f control aims to maintain a constant flux in the motor whereby the flux is proportional to the magnetization current ly or the ratio of voltage U to frequency f o lu Vif The torque M generated by the induction motors is in turn proportional to the product or more precisely the vector product x 1 of the flux and current M xl To generate as much torque as possible with a given current the motor must function using the greatest possible constant flux To maintain a constant flux therefore the voltage V must cha
92. hand Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 397 Maintenance and servicing 11 4 Replacing components 11 4 13 Replacing the fan type JX Replacing the fan left hand power block STE Figure 11 18 Replacing the fan frame size JX left hand power block Drive converter cabinet units 398 Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Maintenance and servicing 11 4 Replacing components Description The average service life of the device fans is 50 000 hours In practice however the service life depends on other variables e g ambient temperature degree of cabinet protection etc and therefore may deviate from this value The fans must be replaced in good time to ensure that the cabinet unit is available Preparatory steps e Disconnect the cabinet unit from the power supply e Allow unimpeded access e Remove the protective cover Removal steps The removal steps are numbered in accordance with the figure 1 Remove the retaining screws for the fan 3 screws 2 Disconnect the supply cables 1 x L 1 x N You can now carefully remove the fan CAUTION When removing the unit ensure that you do not damage any signal cables Installation steps
93. in the example are powered by the internal 24 V supply of the customer terminal block terminal X540 The two groups of digital inputs optocoupler inputs have a common reference potential for each group ground reference M1 or M2 To close the circuit when the internal 24 V supply is used the ground references M1 M2 must be connected to internal ground M If power is not supplied from the internal 24 V supply terminal X540 the jumper between ground M1 and M or M2 and M must be removed in order to avoid potential rounding The external ground must then be connected to terminals M1 and M2 X520 4 digital inputs Table 4 12 Terminal block X520 Terminal Designation 1 Technical specifications 1 DIO Voltage 3 V to 30 V 2 DI4 Typical current consumption 10 mA at 24 V Reference potential is always terminal M1 3 DI2 Level 4 DI3 high level 15 V to 30 V low level 3 V to 5 V 5 M1 Ground reference 6 M Electronics ground 1 DI digital input M1 ground reference M Electronics ground Max connectable cross section 1 5 mm Note An open input is interpreted as low Drive converter cabinet units 74 Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Electrical installation X530 4 digital inputs Table 4 13 Terminal block X530 4 9 Signal connections Terminal Designation 1 Technical specifications 1 DI 4 Voltage 3 V
94. into account the characteristic motor torque curve e g fan pump e Quadratic characteristic f characteristic e Energy saving because the low voltage also results in small currents and losses 3 Programmable Characteristic that takes into account the characteristic motor machine torque characteristic 9 fl f2 fB 4 fmax p1320 1322 p1324 p1326 1082 5 Precise frequency Characteristic see parameter value 0 that takes into account the technological drives textiles particularity of an application e g textile applications e Whereby current limitation Imax controller only affects the output voltage and not the output frequency e By disabling slip compensation and resonance damping Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 259 Setpoint channel and closed loop control 7 3 V f control Parameter value Meaning Precise frequency drives with flux current control FCC Application property Characteristic see parameter value 1 that takes into account the technological particularity of an application e g textile applications e Whereby current limitation Imax controller only affects the output voltage and not the output frequency e By disabling slip compensation and resonance damping Voltage losses in the stator resistance for static dynamic loads are also compensated flux current control FCC This is particularly useful for small motors since they
95. is the protective conductor and comprises three symmetrically arranged protective conductors The individual protective conductors must each be provided with cable eyes and be connected to ground The cable also has a concentric flexible braided copper shield To comply with EN61800 3 regarding radio interference suppression the shield must contact at both ends and with the greatest possible surface area On the motor side cable glands that contact the shield with the greatest possible surface area are recommended for the terminal boxes Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Electrical installation 4 7 Power connections Minimum motor cable lengths for connection to a motor with one winding system for units that are connected in parallel For units that are connected in parallel for a connection to a motor with one winding system it must be ensured that the motor cable lengths are kept to a minimum if a motor reactor option L08 is not being used Table 4 3 Minimum cable lengths Order number Type performance kW Minimum cable length m 380 V 480 V3 AC 6SL3710 2GE41 1AA0 630 13 6SL3710 2GE41 4AA0 710 10 6SL3710 2GE41 6AA0 900 9 500 V 600 V 3 AC 6SL3710 2GF38 6AA0 630 18 6SL3710 2GF41 1AA0 710 15 6SL3710 2GF41 4AA0 1000 13 660 V 690 V 3 AC 6SL3710 2GH41 1AA0 1000 20 6SL3710 2GH41 4AA0 1350 18 6SL3710 2GH41 5AA0 1500 15
96. it must be ensured that both sub cabinets are electrically disconnected from the power supply Drive converter cabinet units 26 Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Device Overview 2 3 2 2 3 Design Version C This version is particularly compact in design with an in built line reactor It can be used for example when the power supply connection components such as the main contactor and main circuit breaker with fuses for conductor protection and semi conductor protection are installed in an existing central low voltage distribution unit Line fuses are required for conductor protection VDE 636 Part 10 Line fuses can also be used to protect the semi conductors of the line commutated converter VDE 636 Part 40 EN 60 269 4 The cabinet unit simply comprises a single cabinet with a width of 400 mm 600 mm or 1000 mm Operator panel Power Module T1 Control Unit CU320 A10 Door interlock Customer terminal block A60 Ventilation grilles depend ing on degree of protection Motor connection X2 Line supply connection X1 Line reactor R1 MITTITI ETT MT Figure 2 3 Example of a cabinet unit version C e g 315 kW 690 V 3 AC Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 27 Device Overview 2 4 Wiring Principle 2 4 Wiring Principle Wiring principle versions A and C 28
97. manner that the pulse frequency is variably reduced so that the required power can be obtained Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5SE00189855A Functions Monitoring and Protective Functions 9 2 Drive Functions Characteristics e The reaction to overload depends on the setting of parameter p0290 p0290 0 Reduce output current or output frequency p0290 1 No reduction shutdown when overload threshold is reached p0290 2 Reduce the output current or output and pulse frequency not using t p0290 3 Reduce the pulse frequency not using I t e For p0290 2 at overload first reduce the pulse frequency and consequently the output frequency until it has dropped to rated pulse frequency then reduce the output frequency if overload continues to persist The rated pulse frequency is half the inverse value of the current controller clock cycle 0 5 x 1 p0115 0 e Reduction of the pulse frequency is executed in whole multiples based on the rated pulse frequency 5 kHz gt 2 5 kHz gt 1 25 kHz or 4 kHz gt 2 kHz e After entering the maximum speed in p1082 the system automatically calculates whether the pulse frequency is sufficient for the entered maximum speed if necessary the pulse frequency is increased automatically to a value that is necessary for this At overload then also for p0290 2 or 3 this new pulse frequency will no longer be underranged the downstream react
98. maximum DIN VDE mm 2x150 2x150 2x150 Fixing screw M12 1 hole M12 1 hole M12 1 hole Protective conductor connection Fixing screw M12 2 holes M12 2 holes M12 2 holes Max motor cable length shielded unshielded m 300 450 300 450 300 450 Dimensions standard version Width mm 400 400 400 Height mm 2000 2000 2000 Depth mm 600 600 600 Power block frame size FX FX GX Weight without options approx kg 225 225 300 Recommended protection Line and semi cond protection 3NE1230 2 3NE1331 2 3NE1334 2 Rated current A 315 350 500 frame size to DIN 43620 1 1 2 2 426 Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Technical specifications 12 3 Technical specitications Order number 6SL3710 1GE32 1CA0 1GE32 6CA0 1GE33 1CA0 1 Rated output of a typical 6 pole standard induction motor based on I or IH at 400 V 3 AC 50 Hz 2 Rated output of a typical 6 pole standard induction motor based on IL or IH at 460 V 3 AC 60 Hz 3 The base load current IL is based on a duty cycle of 110 for 60 s or 150 for 10 s with a duty cycle duration of 300 s see Overload capability 4 The base load current IH is based on a duty cycle of 150 for 60 s or 160 for 10 s with a duty cycle duration of 300 s see Overload capability 5 The current values given here are based on the rated output current 6 The recommendations for the North American market in AWG or MCM must be take
99. monitoring n_set gt 0 e Load monitoring Description of load monitoring This function monitors power transmission between the motor and the working machine Typical applications include V belts flat belts or chains that loop around the belt pulleys or cog wheels for drive and outgoing shafts and transfer the peripheral speeds and forces Load monitoring can be used here to identify blockages in the working machine and interruptions to the power transmission During load monitoring the current speed torque curve is compared with the programmed speed torque curve p2182 p2190 If the current value is outside the programmed tolerance bandwidth a fault or alarm is triggered depending on parameter p2181 The fault or alarm message can be delayed by means of parameter p2192 to prevent false alarms caused by brief transitional states Torque Nm p1082 5 p2189 fiii M p2190 tiiin MnM p2187 t i gt 4 Torque p2188 fii i i Actual value p2185 p2186 Speed ip2184 pm r2198 Bit11 gL 5i p2192 lt 2192 lt I Figure 9 15 Load monitoring p2181 1 Drive converter cabinet units 340 Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Functions Monitoring and Protective Functions Commissioning 9 3 Extended functions The extended monitoring functions function module can be activated by running the commissioning wiz
100. not use 0 O 4 P_Encoder 5 V 24 V Encoder supply O fe 5 P_Encoder 5 V 24 V Encoder supply z e 6 P_Sense Sense input encoder power supply ie 7 M_Encoder M Ground for encoder power supply o O 8 Temp Temperature sensor connection KTY84 1C130 PTC 9 A 9 M_Sense Ground sense input 10 R Reference signal R 11 R Inverted reference signal R 12 B Inverted incremental signal B 13 B Incremental signal B 14 A Inverted incremental signal A 15 A Incremental signal A Connector type 15 pin socket CAUTION The encoder power supply can be parameterized to 5 V or 24 V The encoder may be destroyed if you enter the wrong parameter NOTICE The KTY temperature sensor must be connected with the correct polarity 112 Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Electrical installation 4 10 Other connections X521 X531 Encoder connection 2 for HTL TTL encoder with open circuit monitoring Table 4 50 Encoder connection X521 Terminal Signal name Technical specifications 1 A Incremental signal A 2 A Inverted incremental signal A 3 B Incremental signal B 4 B Inverted incremental signal B 5 R Reference signal R 6 R Inverted reference signal R 7 CTRL Control signal 8 M Ground via inductivity Max connectable cross section 1 5 mm Note When unipolar HTL encoders are used A B and R on the terminal block must
101. of supply In the same way check the boxes once you have finished the installation procedure to confirm that the activities are complete Item Activity Fulfilled Complete 1 The ambient conditions must be permissible See Technical specifications General C technical specifications The cabinet unit must be firmly attached to the fixing points provided With version C with a width of 400 mm the cabinet unit can if required be secured to a non flammable vertical surface by means of the wall support supplied see Mechanical installation preparation The cooling air can flow unobstructed 2 The minimum ceiling height for unhindered air outlet specified in the Operating Instructions must be observed The cooling air supply must be not be obstructed see o Mechanical installation preparation 3 Transport units separately shipped must be connected to one another refer to Chapter C Mechanical installation Mechanically connecting separately shipped transport units 4 Components that are supplied separately for transport reasons canopy or hood must be fitted see Mechanical installation Fitting additional canopies option M21 or hoods option M23 M43 M54 5 The clearance around an open door escape route specified in the applicable accident C prevention guidelines must be observed 6 With option M13 M78 C Choose the required metric screw conne
102. of the device fans is 50 000 hours In practice however the service life depends on other variables e g ambient temperature degree of cabinet protection etc and therefore may deviate from this value The fans must be replaced in good time to ensure that the cabinet unit is available Preparatory steps e Disconnect the cabinet unit from the power supply e Allow unimpeded access e Remove the protective cover Removal steps The removal steps are numbered in accordance with the figure 1 Remove the busbar 6 screws 2 Remove the retaining screws for the fan 3 screws 3 Disconnect the supply cables 1 x L 1 x N You can now carefully remove the fan CAUTION When removing the unit ensure that you do not damage any signal cables Installation steps For installation carry out the above steps in reverse order CAUTION The tightening torques specified in the table Tightening torques for connecting current conducting parts must be observed Carefully establish the plug in connections and then ensure that they are secure The screwed connections for the protective covers must only be tightened by hand Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 395 Maintenance and servicing 11 4 Replacing components Replacing the fan right hand power block
103. over between closed loop speed and torque control if closed loop torque control is directly selected with p1300 22 or 23 The torque setpoint and or supplementary setpoint can be entered using BICO parameter p1503 Cl torque setpoint or p1511 Cl supplementary torque setpoint The supplementary torque acts both for closed loop torque as well as for the closed loop speed control As a result of this characteristic a pre control torque can be implemented for the closed loop speed control using the supplementary torque setpoint Note For safety reasons assignments to fixed torque setpoints are currently not possible If energy is regenerated and cannot be injected back into the line supply then a Braking Module with connected braking resistor must be used Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 279 Setpoint channel and closed loop control 7 4 Vector speed torque control with without encoder L kK O r15470 r1538 10072 gt Speed setpoint controller o NE D As D Ti i Torque r1547 1 11539 setpoint Actual speed value M_setp 0 p1300 M_otr 1 M_ctr active 1 M_ctr active gt 1 FP25207 M_suppl 1 1515 M_suppl 1 scal M_suppl 2 scal M_suppl 2 SUE Figure 7 16 Closed loop speed torque control The total of the two torque setpoints is limited in the same way as the speed control torque setpoint Above the maximum speed p1082 a speed limiting cont
104. p0400 9999 Previously set values are stored here e Adjust the bit fields of p0404 p0405 and p0408 to the data for the connected encoder Table 5 2 Meaning of the bit setting for p0404 Bit Meaning Value 0 Value 1 20 Voltage 5 V No yes 21 Voltage 24 V No yes Table 5 3 Meaning of the bit settings for p0405 Bit Meaning Value 0 Value 1 0 Signal Unipolar Bipolar 1 Level HTL TTL 2 Track monitoring None A B gt lt A B 3 Zero pulse 24 V unipolar Same as A B track CAUTION damaged Once the encoder has been commissioned the supply voltage 5 24 V set for the encoder is activated on the SMC30 module If a 5 V encoder is connected and the supply voltage has not been set correctly via p0404 bit 20 Yes bit 21 No the encoder may be Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5SE00189855A Commissioning Basic commissioning Entering the basic parameters 2 VECTOR basic commissioning p0230 Drive filter type p0700cMacro BI 6 terminalsTM31 p1000cMacro CI n_target 2 terminalsTM31 Help A v OK t yv 2 VECTOR basic commissioning d 0 p1070cMain setpoint 03 04055 000 p1080dMinimum speed 0 000 min 1 p1082dMaximum speed LR min 1 p1120dHLG ramp up time 20 000 s Help A v OK F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 2 VECTOR basic commissioning d 0 p1120dHLG Ramp up time 20 000 s p1
105. p0742 DI DO12 CU 1 24 V CU p0748 12 Invert DI DO12 CU 0 Not inverted p0728 12 Set DI DO12 input or output CU 1 Output p0743 DI DO13 CU r0899 6 Switching on inhibited Vector p0748 13 Invert DI DO13 CU 1 Inverted p0728 13 Set DI DO13 input or output CU 1 Output p0744 DI DO14 CU 1 24 V CU p0748 14 Invert DI DO14 CU 0 Not inverted p0728 14 Set DI DO14 input or output CU 1 Output p0745 DI DO15 CU 12138 7 Ack fault Vector p0748 15 Invert DI DO15 CU 0 Not inverted p0728 15 Set DI DO15 input or output CU 1 Output p2103 Acknowledge fault 1 TM31 0 TM31 p2104 Acknowledge fault 2 TM31 r4022 3 TM31 DI3 TM31 p4030 DOO TM31 r0899 11 Pulses enabled Vector p4031 DO1 TM31 r2139 3 Fault Vector p4048 1 Invert DO1 TM31 1 Inverted p4038 DO8 TM31 r0899 0 Ready for switching on Vector p4028 8 Set DI DO8 input or output TM31 1 Output p4039 DO9 TM31 0 TM31 p4028 9 Set DI DO9 input or output TM31 0 Input p4040 DO10 TM31 0 TM31 p4028 10 Set DI DO10 input or output TM31 0 Input p4041 DO11 TM31 0 TM31 p4028 11 Set DI DO11 input or output TM31 0 Input Drive converter cabinet units 476 Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Appendix Parameter macro p0700 7 NAMUR 70007 This macro is used to set the NAMUR terminal block as the default command source A 2 Parameter macros Table A 4 Parameter macro p0700 7 NAMUR
106. p2080 14 Bl PROFIBUS send status word 1 Vector 12197 3 Clockwise Vector p2080 15 Bl PROFIBUS send status word 1__ Vector r2129 15 No Therm alarm Power unit Vector overload p2088 PROFIBUS Invert status word Vector B800h Vector p2128 14 Select fault alarm code for trigger Vector 7910 A7910 Alarm motor Vector overtemperature p2128 15 Select fault alarm code for trigger Vector 5000 A5000 Therm alarm Power unit Vector overload p2153 Time constant revolutions actual Vector 20 20 ms Vector value filter p4053 0 TM31 analog inputs smoothing TM31 0 0 ms TM31 time constant p4053 1 TM31 analog inputs smoothing TM31 0 0 ms TM31 time constant p4056 0 Type of analog inputs TM31 2 Current 0 20 mA TM31 p4056 1 Type of analog inputs TM31 2 Current 0 20 mA TM31 Drive converter cabinet units 472 Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Appendix A 2 Parameter macros Sink Source Parameter Description DO Parameter Description DO p4076 0 Type of analog outputs TM31 0 Current 0 20 mA TM31 p4076 1 Type of analog outputs TM31 0 Current 0 20 mA TM31 p4071 0 Signal analog output 0 TM31 r0063 Actual speed smoothed TM31 p4071 1 Signal analog output 1 TM31 r0068 Absolute current actual value TM31 p4100 Type of temperature sensor TM31 0 Factory setting TM31 p4102 0 Alarm t
107. p2215 the motorized potentiometer or via the field bus e g PROFIBUS Pre control can be integrated via a connector input The output can be scaled via parameter p2295 and the control direction reversed It can be limited via parameters p2291 and p2292 and interconnected as required via a connector output 12294 Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 327 Functions Monitoring and Protective Functions 9 3 Extended functions The actual value can be integrated for example via an analog input on the TM31 If a PID controller has to be used for control reasons the D component is switched to the setpoint actual value difference p2263 1 unlike in the factory setting This is always necessary when the D component is to be effective even if the reference variable changes The D component can only be activated when p2274 gt 0 Note With the entry 0 sec as power up time or ramp down time for the ramp function generator of the technology controller the current values of the respective ramp function generator will be frozen Commissioning The technology controller function module can be activated by running the commissioning Wizard Parameter r0108 16 indicates whether the function module has been activated Function diagram FD 7950 Technology controller fixed values FD 7954 Technology controller motorized potentiometer FD 7958 Technology controller closed
108. parameter p0864 via a free digital input This means that if the drive converter develops a fault with a shutdown response at the instant in time that the pulses are inhibited the motor is isolated from the drive converter so that energy is not fed back to the fault location Function diagram FP 6721 Current control Id setpoint PEM p0300 2 FP 6724 Current control field weakening controller PEM p0300 2 FP 6731 Current control interface to Motor Module PEM p0300 2 Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 285 Setpoint channel and closed loop control 7 4 Vector speed torque control with without encoder Drive converter cabinet units 286 Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Output terminals 8 1 Chapter content This chapter provides information on e Analog outputs e Digital outputs Diagnosis Faults alarms Monitoring functions Functions Protective unc pod Al Function diagrams To supplement this operating manual the documentation folder contains simplified function diagrams describing the operating principle The diagrams are arranged in accordance with the chapters in the operating manual The page numbers 8xx describe the functionality in the following chapter At certain points in this chapter reference is made to function diagrams with a 4 digit number These are stored on the documentation CD in the SINAMICS List Manual which provi
109. part when running up If unexpectedly a fault message of the topology fault category is displayed then when replacing a component one of the following faults errors should have occurred e A Control Interface Board with different firmware data was installed e When connecting up DRIVE CLiQ cables connections were interchanged Automatic firmware update As of firmware 2 5 an automatic firmware update can be carried out once the electronics have been powered up on replacement DRIVE CLiQ components e The following LEDs will flash slowly to indicate that an automatic firmware update is in progress the RDY LED on the Control Unit orange 0 5 Hz and an LED on the relevant DRIVE CLiQ component green red 0 5 Hz CAUTION The drive converter must not be shut down during this process e Once the automatic firmware update is complete the RDY LED on the Control Unit will flash quickly orange 2 Hz along with an LED on the relevant DRIVE CLiQ component green red 2 Hz e To complete the automatic firmware update process a POWER ON is required switch the device off and back on again Drive converter cabinet units 406 Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Maintenance and servicing 11 7 Upgrading the cabinet unit firmware 11 7 Upgrading the cabinet unit firmware When you upgrade the cabinet unit firmware by installing a new CompactFlash Card with a new firmware version for example yo
110. plugs On hk wD Remove the connection for the current transformer and associated PE connection 1 plug 7 Unscrew the two retaining screws for the fan and attach the tool for de installing the power block at this position You can now remove the power block CAUTION When removing the power block ensure that you do not damage any signal cables Installation steps For installation carry out the above steps in reverse order CAUTION The tightening torques specified in the table Tightening torques for connecting current conducting parts must be observed Carefully establish the plug in connections and then ensure that they are secure The screwed connections for the protective covers must only be tightened by hand The fiber optic cable plugs must be remounted at their original slot Fiber optic cables and sockets are accordingly labeled for correct assignment U11 U21 U31 Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 381 Maintenance and servicing 11 4 Replacing components 11 4 6 Replacing the Control Interface Board type FX Replacing the Control Interface Board amp 110 lo gt i O ETI s A 6 amp Tim gN f j S d gi wl E in E pel gigle esa 4g o P g x 1e i amp 4 B i s es re Saar a a i Ma n id TT ie F A o t 3 M PE fe Figure
111. poy ON OFF static C 10 4 OFF dynamic SC 11 AN D Faster S 12 D ee SC 14 D Interlock SC 15 p Counterclockwise SC 16_ p 0 signal clockwise phase sequence i7 1 signal counterclockwise phase sequence Power disconnection 9C Ready Tina el gat Motor running sC 34 DO NO sC 35 DO COM sC 36 DO NC 50 Speed setpoint 5 SC i P gt 0 4 20 mA s gt 60 Motor frequency 8C 0 4 20 mA e 62 Motor current SC 0 4 20 mA o 9 A1X3 sC 90 PTC sensor 91 Al PA SG Figure 6 14 Terminal assignment with NAMUR terminal block default setting Switching the command source The command source can be switched using the LOCAL REMOTE key on the AOP30 Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 201 Operation 6 4 Command sources 6 4 4 PROF Idrive NAMUR default setting Prerequisites The NAMUR terminal block option BOO is installed in the cabinet unit The PROF Idrive default setting was chosen during commissioning e STARTER PROF ldrive Namur e AOP30 10 PROF Idrive Namur Command sources Button LOCAL REMOTE AOP r0807 Master control active Assume master control STARTER 0 REMOTE PROF Idrive NAMUR z 1 LOCAL Operator panel STARTER Internal control Operator panel AOP Control panel STARTER N N m NAMUR terminals X2 Figure 6 15 Command sources AOP30 gt PROFIdrive NAMUR Priority The
112. priority of the command sources is shown in the diagram Command sources AOP30 lt gt PROF Idrive NAMUR Note The EMERGENCY STOP and motor protection signals are always active regardless of the command source All of the supplementary setpoints are deactivated for LOCAL master control Drive converter cabinet units 202 Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Operation 6 4 Command sources Terminal assignment for the PROF Idrive NAMUR default setting When you choose the PROFldrive NAMUR default setting the terminal assignment is as follows as with option BOO NAMUR terminal block A1X2 e M ON dynamic 2 poy ON OFF static C 10 4 OFF dynamic 11 5 Faster S 12 D Slower NC 13 b RESET SC 14 D Interlock SC 15 p Counterclockwise 16_ p 0 signal clockwise phase sequence S i7 1 signal counterclockwise phase sequence Power disconnection 9C gt Ready eS E _ 9231 Motor running ig 88 34 DO NO Fault 35 DO COM SC SC 36 DO NC 50 Speed setpoint 5 SC i P gt 0 4 20 mA s gt 60 Motor frequency 8C 0 4 20 mA e 62 Motor current SC 0 4 20 mA o 9 A1X3 sC 90 PTC sensor o gt sC 91 Al Figure 6 16 Terminal assignment for the PROFldrive NAMUR default setting Control word 1 The bit assignment for control word 1 is described in Descr
113. problems The permissible ambient conditions must be adhered to The information in the relevant documentation must be observed All names identified by are registered trademarks of the Siemens AG The remaining trademarks in this publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner Disclaimer of Liability We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described Since variance cannot be precluded entirely we cannot guarantee full consistency However the information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions Siemens AG A5E00189855A Copyright Siemens AG 2008 Industry Sector 02 2009 Technical data subject to change Postfach 48 48 90026 NURNBERG GERMANY Foreword User documentation J N WARNING Before installing and commissioning the converter make sure that you read all the safety notes and warnings carefully including the warning labels on the equipment itself The warning labels must always be legible Missing or damaged labels must be replaced Structure of this documentation The customer documentation comprises general and individual documentation The general documentation describes the topics that apply to all cabinet units Operating Instructions The Operating Instructions consist of the followin
114. reducing losses in the power unit since switching losses account for a high proportion of overall losses In many applications a temporary reduction in the pulse frequency can be tolerated to allow the process to continue Disadvantage As a result of the pulse frequency reduction the current ripple is increased which can mean that the torque ripple is increased at the motor shaft for low moments of inertia and also an increased noise level Reducing the pulse frequency does not affect the dynamic response of the current control circuit since the sampling time for the current control circuit remains constant Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 343 Functions Monitoring and Protective Functions 9 4 Monitoring and protective functions Function diagram Parameter 344 e Reducing the output frequency p0290 0 2 This variant is recommended when you do not need to reduce the pulse frequency or the pulse frequency has already been set to the lowest level The load should also have a characteristic similar to a fan that is a quadratic torque characteristic with falling speed Reducing the output frequency has the effect of significantly reducing the converter output current which in turn reduces losses in the power unit No reduction p0290 1 You should choose this option if it is neither possible to reduce the pulse frequency nor reduce the output current The converter does not c
115. safety reasons the CW CCW key is disabled in the factory setting pumps and fans must normally only be operated in one direction In the operation status in LOCAL mode the current direction of rotation is indicated by an arrow next to the operating mode Note You have to make additional settings when switching between CW CCW rotation Drive converter cabinet units 232 Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Operation 6 7 Control via the operator panel 6 7 7 4 Jog JOG Settings Menu Commissioning Service AOP Settings Control Settings JOG key active factory setting no e Yes The jog key is effective in the LOCAL mode in the state ready to power up not in operation The speed that is set in parameter p1058 is approached e No The JOG key has no effect in LOCAL mode 6 7 7 5 Increase setpoint decrease setpoint You can use the increase and decrease keys to set the setpoint with a resolution of 1min 1 of a the maximum speed E You can also enter the setpoint numerically To do so press F2 in the operation screen The system displays an inverted edit field for entering the required speed Enter the required value using the numeric keypad Press F5 OK to confirm the setpoint When you enter values numerically you can enter any speed between the minimum speed p1080 and the maximum speed p1082 Setpoint entry in LOCAL mode is unipolar You can change the direction of rotation b
116. service life of the motor is as long as that attained with direct mains operation CAUTION If a sine wave filter is connected to the converter the converter must be activated during commissioning to prevent the filter from being destroyed see Commissioning Restrictions The following restrictions must be taken into account when a sine wave filter is used e The output frequency is limited to max 115 Hz at 500 600 V and 150 Hz at 380 480 V e The modulation type is permanently set to space vector modulation without overmodulation e The maximum output frequency is limited to 85 of the input frequency Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 81 Electrical installation 4 10 Other connections e Maximum permissible motor cable lengths Unshielded cable max 450 m Shielded cable max 300 m e During commissioning the pulse frequency rises to double the factory setting This induces current derating which must be applied to the cabinet unit rated currents listed in the technical specifications Note If a filter cannot be parameterized p0230 3 this means that a filter has not been provided for the cabinet unit In this case the cabinet unit must not be operated with a sine wave filter Table 4 22 Technical specifications for sine wave filters with SINAMICS G150 Order no Voltage Pulse frequency Output current
117. speed lower e p1465 Speed controller adaptation speed upper e p1466 Speed controller P gain scaling Dynamic response reduction field weakening encoderless VC only e p1400 0 Speed control configuration Automatic Kp Tn adaptation active Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 277 Setpoint channel and closed loop control 7 4 Vector speed torque contro with without encoder 7 4 3 4 Droop Function Description Requirement 278 Droop enabled via p1492 ensures that the speed setpoint is reduced proportionally as the load torque increases The droop function has a torque limiting effect on a drive that is mechanically coupled to a different speed e g guide roller on a goods train In this way a very effective load distribution can also be realized in connection with the torque setpoint of a leading speed controlled drive In contrast to torque control or load distribution with overriding and limitation with the appropriate setting such a load distribution controls even a smooth mechanical connection This method is only suitable to a limited extent for drives that are accelerated and braked with significant changes in speed The droop feedback is used for example in applications in which two or more motors are connected mechanically or operate with a common shaft and fulfill the above requirements It limits the torque differences that can occur as a result of the mechanical connect
118. the automatic restart function p1200 4 is active Changing the converter into Ready to start and bypass status after powering up is of a higher priority than switching back on automatically Monitoring of the motor temperatures using temperature sensors is active while the converter is in one of two statuses Ready to start and bypass or Ready to operate and bypass The two motor contactors must be designed for switching under load Note The examples contained in the following descriptions are only basic circuits designed to explain the basic function The dimensions of specific circuit configurations contactors protective equipment must be calculated for specific systems The bypass function is only available for sped control without encoders p1300 20 or V f control p1300 0 19 and when using an asynchronous motor Establishing the bypass function The bypass function is part of the technology controller function module that can be activated by running the commissioning Wizard Parameter r0108 16 indicates whether the function module has been activated 330 Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Functions Monitoring and Protective Functions 9 3 Extended functions 9 3 2 1 Bypass with synchronizer with degree of overlapping p1260 1 Description When Bypass with synchronizer with degree of overlapping p1260 1 is activated the synchro
119. the basis pulse frequency with integers the following output frequencies can be achieved taking into account the derating factors Table 9 4 Maximum output frequency achieved by increasing the pulse frequency Pulse frequency Maximum output frequency kHz Hz 1 25 100 2 160 2 5 200 4 300 1 5 300 1 1 The maximum output frequency is limited to 300 Hz due to the closed loop control 9 2 9 5 Parameters e p0009 e p0112 e p0113 e p0115 e p1800 Drive converter cabinet units Device commissioning parameter filter Sampling times pre setting p0115 Selects the minimum pulse frequency Sampling times Pulse frequency Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 319 Functions Monitoring and Protective Functions 9 2 Drive Functions 9 2 10 Runtime operating hours counter Total system runtime The entire system runtime is displayed in r2114 Control Unit it is made up of r2114 0 milliseconds and r2114 1 days Index 0 indicates the system runtime in milliseconds after reaching 86 400 000 ms 24 hours the value is reset Index 1 indicates the system runtime in days The value is saved when the system is switched off Once the drive unit has been switched on the counter continues to run with the value that was saved the last time the drive was switched off Relative system runtime The relative system runtime since the last POWER ON is displayed in p0969 Control Unit
120. the required line and then press the F5 lt OK gt key the corresponding faults alarms are displayed The list of current faults is selected here as an example Displays the current faults A maximum of eight current faults are displayed along with their fault number and a description of the fault To display additional help regarding the cause of the problem and how to solve it choose F1 lt Help gt To acknowledge the faults choose F5 lt Ack gt If a fault cannot be acknowledge the fault remains Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Operation 6 7 Control via the operator panel 6 7 5 Menu commissioning service 6 7 5 1 Drive commissioning This option enables you to re commission the drive from the main menu Basic Commissioning Only the basic commissioning parameters are queried and stored permanently Complete commissioning Complete commissioning with motor and encoder data entry is carried out Following this key motor parameters are recalculated from the motor data The parameter values calculated during previous commissioning are lost In a Subsequent motor identification procedure the calculated values are overwritten Motor identification The selection screen for motor identification appears Resetting the fan runtime After a fan replacement the time counter for monitoring the fan runtime must be reset 6 7 5 2 Device commissioning Device com
121. this interactive screen has to be checked and or corrected thoroughly before the next interactive screen can be accessed Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5SE00189855A Commissioning 5 5 First commissioning with the AOP30 5 5 2 Basic Commissioning Entering the motor data During initial commissioning you have to enter motor data using the operator panel Use the data shown on the motor type plate B MOr 1LA8 T TE 315 No N 1107840010001 2002 IMB3 Hz cosy 1min Te s Certif wo A 50 A a 0 87 1485 No 690 y 235 _Rotor_SQU CAGE KL 13 ENAEC 6D034 1 Gewat 1 3t Figure 5 35 Example of a motor type plate Table 5 1 Motor data Parameter no Values Unit System of units for line frequency and entering motor data p0100 0 IEC 50 Hz kW 1 NEMA 60 Hz hp Motor Rated voltage p0304 V Rated current p0305 A Rated power p0307 kW hp Rated power factor cos at p0100 0 only p0308 Rated efficiency n at p0100 1only p0309 Rated frequency p0310 Hz Rated speed p0311 min 1 rpm Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 167 Commissioning 5 5 First commissioning with the AOP30 Basic commissioning Selecting the motor type and entering the motor data For the following cabinet units possible additional settings must be made before the following sequence see Additional settings for cabinet units with hi
122. transmission rate of 19 2 kbit s are important here Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 161 Commissioning 5 3 Procedure for commissioning via STARTER Set PG PC Interface Access Path Access Point of the Application S7ONLINE STEP gt Serial cable PPI v Standard for STEP 7 Interface Parameter Assignment Used Serial cable PPI Properties HA PC Adapter PROFIBUS aa Properties Serial cable PPI PC PPI cable PPI as PPI Local Connection Serial cable PPI Ls HA TCP IP gt Intel R PRO 100 VE Ne iad Station Parameters Address 0 lt M gt Assigning Parameters to an PC PPI cable for an PPI Network Timeout 1s Interfaces Add Remove m Network Parameters M amp Ad anc ed PPI E Muttple master networl Transmission rate 19 2 kbps v Highest station address Default Cancel Help Figure 5 30 Setting the interface 3 On CU320 set bus address 3 on the Profibus address switch 4 When setting up the drive unit also set bus address 3 Drive converter cabinet units 162 Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Commissioning Starter Projektassistent Neues Projekt erstellen Einf hrung 5 3 Procedure for commissioning via STARTER Zusammen fassung 3 Antriebs gerate ei
123. triggered by the bypass function Transfer process p1266 Bypass command 1261 2 Request to synchronize sent by bypass function 13819 2 Synchronized 1261 1 Close contactor K2 p1269 1 Contactor K2 closed 1261 0 Close contactor K1 p1269 0 Contactor K1 closed Figure 9 11 332 A H Motor i Converter Line i Motor Line supply Motor on converter supply changeover on line supply Converter on converter i changeover Signal diagram bypass with synchronization with overlap Transfer of motor to line supply contactors K1 and K2 are activated by the converter The initial state is as follows Contactor K1 is closed contactor K2 is open and the motor is fed from the converter The control bit bypass command p1266 is set e g by the higher level automation The bypass function sets the control word bit synchronizing r1261 2 Since the bit is set while the converter is running the Transfer motor to line supply synchronization process is started Once motor synchronization to line frequency line voltage and line phasing is complete the synchronization algorithm reports this state r3819 2 The bypass mechanism evaluates this signal and closes contactor K2 r1261 1 1 The signal is evaluated internally BICO wiring is not required Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5SE00189855A Functions Monitoring and Pr
124. unipolar without zero marker Drive converter cabinet units 114 Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Electrical installation 4 10 Other connections 4 10 19 Voltage Sensing Module for determining the actual motor speed and the phase angle option K51 Voltage recording module VSM10 is used to operate a permanent field synchronous machine without encoder with the requirement for switching to a machine which is already running capture function The terminals on the Voltage Sensing Module B51 are pre assigned in the factory and must not be changed by the customer To commission the function the permanent field synchronous machine without encoder must be input and Flying restart activated with p1200 4 10 20 Customer terminal block extension option G61 Description A TM31 interface module customer terminal block A60 is already installed in standard A second module A61 provides the following additional digital and analog inputs outputs in the drive system e 8 digital inputs e 4 bidirectional digital inputs outputs e 2 relay outputs with changeover contact e 2 analog inputs e 2 analog outputs e 1 temperature sensor input KTY84 130 PTC The second TM31 must be installed on the system side Default settings are not provided Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 115 Electrical installation 4 10 Other connections 4 10 21 Terminal module for activa
125. voltage Vacrms 500 V 3 AC 10 to 600 V 3 AC 10 15 lt 1 min Line frequency Hz 47 to 63 Hz Electronics power supply Voc 24 20 4 28 8 Power loss kW 15 4 17 2 23 8 Cooling air requirement m s 1 56 1 56 2 96 Sound pressure level Lpa dB A 75 78 75 78 75 78 1 m at 50 60 Hz Line connection Per sub cabinet Per sub cabinet Per sub cabinet recommended DIN VDE mm2 2x185 2 x 240 3 x 185 maximum DIN VDE mm 4 x 240 4 x 240 8 x 240 Fixing screw M12 2 holes M12 2 holes M12 4 holes Motor connection Per sub cabinet Per sub cabinet Per sub cabinet recommended DIN VDE mm 2x150 2x185 3 x 150 maximum DIN VDE mm2 4 x 240 4 x 240 6 x 240 Fixing screw M12 2 holes M12 2 holes M12 3 holes Protective conductor connection Per sub cabinet Per sub cabinet Per sub cabinet Fixing screw M12 2 holes M12 2 holes M12 18 holes Max motor cable length shielded unshielded m 300 450 300 450 300 450 Dimensions standard version Width mm 2400 2400 3200 Height mm 2000 2000 2000 Depth mm 600 600 600 Power block frame size HX HX JX Weight without options approx kg 1700 1700 2620 Recommended protection Line protection Per sub cabinet Per sub cabinet Per sub cabinet with option L26 3NA3352 6 3NA3365 6 3NA3365 6 Rated current A 2x 315 2 x 500 2 x 500 frame size to DIN 43620 1 3 3 3 Line and semiconductor protection Per sub cabinet Per sub cabinet Per sub cabinet without option L26 3NE14
126. which could cause them to malfunction For example the operation of heart pacemakers can be impaired potentially leading to damage to a person s health or even death It is therefore forbidden for persons with heart pacemakers to enter these areas The plant operator is responsible for taking appropriate measures labels and hazard warnings to adequately protect operating personnel and others against any possible risk e Observe the relevant nationally applicable health and safety regulations In Germany electromagnetic fields are subject to regulations BGV B11 and BGR B11 stipulated by the German statutory industrial accident insurance institution e Display adequate hazard warning notices e Place barriers around hazardous areas e Take measures e g using shields to reduce electromagnetic fields at their source e Make sure that personnel are wearing the appropriate protective gear Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 19 Safety information 7 3 Components that can be destroyed by electrostatic discharge ESD 20 Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 ASE00189855A Device Overview 2 2 1 Chapter content This chapter provides information on the following Introduction to the cabinet units The main components and features of the cabinet unit The cabinet unit wiring Explanation of the type plate 2 2 Applications features and design
127. work on electrical devices the five safety rules must always be observed Disconnect the system Protect against reconnection Make sure that the equipment has zero potential Ground and short circuit Cover or fence off adjacent components that are still live N DANGER Before carrying out any maintenance or repair work on the de energized cabinet unit wait for 5 minutes after switching off the supply voltage This allows the capacitors to discharge to a harmless level lt 25 V after the supply voltage has been switched off oR WRN Before starting work you should also measure the voltage after the 5 minutes have elapsed The voltage can be measured on DC link terminals DCP and DCN N DANGER When the external power supply for individual options L50 L55 or the external 230 V AC auxiliary supply is connected dangerous voltages are still present in the cabinet unit even when the main circuit breaker is open N DANGER During connection installation and repair work on units that are connected in parallel it must be ensured that both sub cabinets are electrically disconnected from the power supply Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 363 Maintenance and servicing 11 2 Maintenance 11 2 Maintenance The cabinet unit mainly comprises electronic components Apart from the fan s the unit contains very few components that a
128. x p1240 0 Set the Expert access level on the operator panel lt Key pushbutton gt lt Access level gt Set Expert and confirm Switch external fault 2 to DI 11 on the TM31 Disabling the Vdc max controller When the brake chopper is used the Vdc max controller must be switched off If the thermostat is opened due to a thermal overload on the braking resistor fault F7861 External Fault 2 is triggered and the drive is switched off with OFF2 If the brake chopper triggers a fault fault F7862 External fault 3 is triggered in the drive You can acknowledge malfunctions in the braking unit by pressing the Acknowledge button on the operator panel when the DC link voltage is present Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 95 Electrical installation 4 10 Other connections Duty cycles P DE continuous braking power HPDE P 45 5 x Ppp Power permissible every 90 s for 15 s P __ 4xP__ Power permissible every 90 s for 20 s 20 DB 6 00 Pi 2x Pg Power permissible every 90 s for 40 s P 5 00 rm ee 15 P 4 00 20 3 00 P 2 00 7 ee tet 40 P 1 00 DB 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 Figure 4 11 Duty cycles for the braking resistors Threshold switch A Mreeneree seecete eek ee p m o m n m o Mi 110 120 130 t s The response threshold at which the braking unit is activated and the DC link voltage generated
129. 0 3 outlines the EMC requirements for variable speed drive systems It specifies requirements for converters with operating voltages of less than 1000 V Different environments and categories are defined depending on where the drive system is installed Medium voltage network lt lt Distribution of conducted I faults l Public low voltage network Industrial low voltage network Measuring point for conducted faults First environment environment Limit of facility 1 Measuring point for emitted interference Figure 4 1 Definition of the first and second environments Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Electrical installation 4 4 Introduction to EMC Second environment environment Figure 4 2 Definition of categories C1 to C4 Table 4 1 Definition of the first and second environments Definition of the first and second environments First environment Residential buildings or locations at which the drive system is connected to a public low voltage supply network without a transformer Second environment Industrial locations supplied by a medium voltage network via a separate transformer Table 4 2 Definition of categories C1 to C4 Definition of categories C1 to C4 Category C1 Rated voltage lt 1000 V unrestricted use in the first environment Category C2 Rated voltage for stationary drive sy
130. 0 2 x 185 maximum DIN VDE mm 4 x 240 4 x 240 4 x 240 Fixing screw M12 1 hole M12 1 hole M12 2 holes Motor connection recommended DIN VDE 5 mm2 2x70 2x95 2x 120 maximum DIN VDE mm 2 x 185 2 x 240 4 x 240 Fixing screw M12 1 hole M12 1 hole M12 2 holes Protective conductor connection Fixing screw M12 2 holes M12 2 holes M12 2 holes Max motor cable length shielded unshielded m 300 450 300 450 300 450 Dimensions standard version Width mm 400 400 600 Height mm 2000 2000 2000 Depth mm 600 600 600 Power block frame size GX GX HX Weight without options approx kg 300 300 670 Recommended protection Line and semi cond protection 3NE1331 2 3NE1334 2 3NE1334 2 Rated current A 350 500 500 frame size to DIN 43620 1 2 2 2 462 Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5SE00189855A Technical specifications 12 3 Technical specitications Order number 6SL3710 1GH32 6CA0 1GH33 3CA0 1GH34 1CA0 1 Rated output of a typical 6 pole standard induction motor based on I or IH at 690 V 3 AC 50 Hz 2 The base load current IL is based on a duty cycle of 110 for 60 s or 150 for 10 s with a duty cycle duration of 300 s see Overload capability 3 The base load current IH is based on a duty cycle of 150 for 60 s or 160 for 10 s with a duty cycle duration of 300 s see Overload capability 4 The current values given here are based on the rated output cu
131. 0 2008 ASE00189855A Table of contents 12 Technical Specifications cnra aae neriasi a E aa E EE a a a i 409 12 1 Chapter content aiisioii nieun ata aaa een r oe aaea pe a el a E a iaai i 409 12 2 General data AEAEE E AEA T A ae ee ae ee 410 12 2 1 Deratinig datas usciu sinira aiat s iaa ian doe ehuneav hans denevs a a 411 12 22 Qverload capability ioi e E E E a EE E daneabeednettetiag 416 12 3 Techinical specifications a a a a aa a a ee AA aAa aa atana 417 12 3 1 Cabinet unit version A 380 V 480 V 3 AC esesssssissssrserrsiesrrrsissrrrrnrrirerrrrinsrriinssrrrrnsrrerenna 418 12 3 2 Cabinet unit version C 380 V 480 V 3 AC woo cece cc ceccccceeeeeseeseeseseeesesesauaaeeeeaaaeeeeeeaeeeeaa 426 12 3 3 Cabinet unit version A 500 V 600 V 3 AC u ieee ccececcccceeeeeeeeeeeseseeesesesaueeeeeeaaeeeeenaeeeeaa 432 12 3 4 Cabinet unit version C 500 V 600 V 3 AC eeesssssssisrsiserrriesnriiissrrrrnrriterrtrinenniinsunnrrnnrnerenna 440 12 3 5 Cabinet unit version A 660 V 690 V 3 AC ccc ccc cecccsceeeeeeseeeeeseseeesesesauauseeeaaaeeeeeneeeeeeaa 446 12 3 6 Cabinet unit version C 660 V 690 V 3 AC wooo cece cc ceccccceeesesee se eeeseeeesesauaeeeseaaaeeeeeneeeeeaa 458 A FAD DOMGIX rrr aa a a a ee er aa a ea a E a raai ned teS 469 A 1 B E eo ab re VAOS a ee 469 A 2 PaFAMeleniMacCrOS aa a a e aaa aa aa A 471 AIB D E EEE E EE E E EE T AE EE E E AE EE E A AEE TE A 483 Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5
132. 0 900 1560 79 60 Connection voltage 500 600 V 3 AC 1GF31 8_A0O 110 175 87 60 1GF32 2_A0 132 215 87 60 1GF32 6_A0 160 260 88 60 1GF33 3_A0 200 330 82 55 1GF34 1_A0 250 410 82 55 1GF34 7_A0 315 465 87 55 1GF35 8_A0O 400 575 85 55 1GF37 4_A0 500 735 79 55 1GF38 1_A0 560 810 72 55 2GF38 6AA0 630 860 87 55 2GF41 1AA0 710 1070 85 55 2GF41 4AA0 1000 1360 79 55 Connection voltage 660 690 V 3 AC 1GH28 5_ AO 75 85 89 60 1GH31 0_A0 90 100 88 60 1GH31 2_A0 110 120 88 60 1GH31 5_A0 132 150 84 55 1GH31 8_A0O 160 175 87 60 1GH32 2_A0 200 215 87 60 1GH32 6_A0 250 260 88 60 1GH33 3_A0 315 330 82 55 1GH34 1_A0 400 410 82 55 1GH34 7_A0 450 465 87 55 1GH35 8_AO 560 575 85 55 1GH37 4_A0 710 735 79 55 1GH38 1_A0 800 810 72 55 2GH41 1AA0 1000 1070 85 55 2GH41 4AA0 1350 1360 79 55 2GH41 5AA0 1500 1500 72 55 Drive converter cabinet units 414 Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Technical specifications 12 2 General data For pulse frequencies in the range between the fixed values the relevant derating factors can be determined by means of linear interpolation Yo Vp b Xp Xo The following formula applies for this X1 Xo Example The derating factor is required for when X2 2 kHz for 6SL3710 1GE41 0_A0 Xo 1 25 kHz Yo 100 X1 2 5 kHz Y1 87 X2 2 kHz Y2 87 100 Y2 100 2 kHz 1 25 kHz 2 5 kHz 1 25 kHz
133. 0 is set to 1 and alarm A01920 is output Binector output r2043 0 can be used for an emergency stop for example Once a delay time p2044 has elapsed fault F01910 is output and fault reaction OFF3 quick stop is triggered If no OFF response is to be triggered the fault response can be reparameterized accordingly Fault F01910 can be acknowledged immediately The drive can then be operated even without PROFIBUS Cyclic telegrams from master DRE F01910 Figure 6 23 Monitoring Telegram failure Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Operation 6 6 PROFIBUS 6 6 4 Telegrams and process data General information Selecting a telegram via CU parameter p0922 determines which process data is transferred between the master and slave From the perspective of the slave SINAMICS the received process data comprises the receive words and the process data to be sent the send words The receive and send words comprise the following elements e Receive words Control words and setpoints e Send words Status words and actual values Default setting Profidrive When the Profidrive default setting is chosen for command and setpoint selection see Command sources Profidrive default settings Free telegram p0922 999 is selected The receive message frame is parameterized as follows as a result of the default setting plan 622 STW1 NSOLL_A
134. 00 A 0 9 both switches 2 both switches NOTICE If the release current is not set correctly the circuit breaker could trip inadvertently or even fail to trip Messages output during operation and in the event of faults are described in Additional Operating Instructions of the Operating Instructions Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 85 Electrical installation 4 10 Other connections 4 10 6 EMERGENCY OFF pushbutton installed in the cabinet door option L45 Description The EMERGENCY OFF pushbutton with protective collar is integrated in the door of the cabinet unit The contacts of the pushbutton are connected to terminal block X120 In conjunction with options L57 L59 and L60 EMERGENCY OFF of category 0 and EMERGENCY STOP of category 1 can be activated A braking unit may be necessary to achieve the required shutdown times Note When the EMERGENCY OFF pushbutton is pressed the motor coasts to a standstill and the main motor voltage is disconnected to EN 60204 1 VDE 0113 in conjunction with options L57 L59 and L60 Auxiliary voltages e g for separately driven fans or anti condensation heating may still be present Certain sections of the converter e g the closed loop controller or any auxiliary equipment may also remain live If all the voltages have to be completely disconnected the EMERGENCY OFF pushbutton must be integrated ina protection concept wh
135. 0600 0 or p0601 0 10037 Power Module temperatures Displays the measured temperatures in the Power Module r0046 Missing drive enable signals Displays missing enable signals that are preventing the closed loop drive control from being commissioned r0049 Motor encoder data set effective MDS EDS Displays the effective motor data set MDS and the effective encoder data sets EDS r0050 Command data set effective CDS Displays the effective command data set CDS 356 Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5SE00189855A Diagnosis faults and alarms 10 2 Diagnosis Parameters r0051 Name Description Drive data set DDS effective Effective drive data set DDS display r0206 Rated power module power Displays the rated power module power for various load duty cycles r0207 Rated power module current Displays the rated power module power for various load duty cycles r0208 Rated power module line supply voltage Displays the rated line supply voltage of the power module TM31 key diagnostic parameters details in List Manual Parameters r0002 Name Description TM31 operating display Operating display for terminal board 31 TB31 14021 Digital inputs actual terminal value Displays the actual value at the digital input terminals on the TM31 This parameter
136. 1 Output p0741 DI DO11 CU 1 24 V CU p0748 11 Invert DI DO11 CU 0 Not inverted p0728 11 Set DI DO11 input or output CU 1 Output p0742 DI DO12 CU 1 24 V CU Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 477 Appendix A 2 Parameter macros Sink Source Parameter Description DO Parameter Description DO p0748 12 Invert DI DO12 CU 0 Not inverted p0728 12 Set DI DO12 input or output CU 1 Output p0743 DI DO13 CU r0899 6 Switching on inhibited Vector p0748 13 Invert DI DO13 CU 1 Inverted p0728 13 Set DI DO13 input or output CU 1 Output p0744 DI DO14 CU 1 24 V CU p0748 14 Invert DI DO14 CU 0 Not inverted p0728 14 Set DI DO14 input or output CU 1 Output p0745 DI DO15 CU 12138 7 Ack fault Vector p0748 15 Invert DI DO15 CU 0 Not inverted p0728 15 Set DI DO15 input or output CU 1 Output p2103 Acknowledge fault 1 TM31 0 TM31 p2104 Acknowledge fault 2 TM31 r4022 3 TM31 DI3 TM31 p4030 DOO TM31 r0899 11 Pulses enabled Vector p4031 DO1 TM31 r2139 3 Fault Vector p4048 1 Invert DO1 TM31 1 Inverted p4038 DO8 TM31 r0899 0 Ready for switching on Vector p4028 8 Set DI DO8 input or output TM31 1 Output p4039 DO9 TM31 0 TM31 p4028 9 Set DI DO9 input or output TM31 0 Input p4040 DO10 TM31 0 TM31 p4028 10 Set DI DO10 input or output TM31 0 Input p4041 DO11 TM31 0 TM31 p4028 11 Set DI DO11 input or output TM31 0 Input Drive converter cabi
137. 1 Vector r2090 7 PZD 1 bit 7 Vector p2104 Acknowledge fault 2 Vector r4022 3 TM31 DI3 TM31 p2106 Ext fault_1 Vector r0722 1 CU DI1 CU p2107 Ext fault_2 Vector 1 Vector p2112 Ext alarm_1 Vector 1r0722 0 CU DIO CU p2116 Ext alarm_2 Vector 1 Vector Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 473 Appendix A 2 Parameter macros Sink Source Parameter Description DO Parameter Description DO p0738 DI DO8 CU 1 24 V CU p0748 8 Invert DI DO8 CU 0 Not inverted p0728 8 Set DI DO8 input or output CU 1 Output p0739 DI DO9 CU 1 24 V CU p0748 9 Invert DI DO9 CU 0 Not inverted p0728 9 Set DI DO9 input or output CU 1 Output p0740 DI DO10 CU 1 24 V CU p0748 10 Invert DI DO10 CU 0 Not inverted p0728 10 Set DI DO10 input or output CU 1 Output p0741 DI DO11 CU 1 24 V CU p0748 11 Invert DI DO11 CU 0 Not inverted p0728 11 Set DI DO11 input or output CU 1 Output p0742 DI DO12 CU 1 24 V CU p0748 12 Invert DI DO12 CU 0 Not inverted p0728 12 Set DI DO12 input or output CU 1 Output p0743 DI DO13 CU r0899 6 Switching on inhibited Vector p0748 13 Invert DI DO13 CU 1 Inverted p0728 13 Set DI DO13 input or output CU 1 Output p0744 DI DO14 CU 1 24 V CU p0748 14 Invert DI DO14 CU 0 Not inverted p0728 14 Set DI DO14 input or output CU 1 Output p0745 DI DO15 CU 12138 7 Ack fault Vector p0748 15 In
138. 11 10 Replacing the control interface board frame size FX Drive converter cabinet units 382 Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Maintenance and servicing 11 4 Replacing components Preparatory steps e Disconnect the cabinet unit from the power supply e Allow unimpeded access e Remove the protective cover Removal steps The removal steps are numbered in accordance with the figure 1 Remove the CU320 mounts 1 screw and 2 nuts If necessary remove the PROFIBUS plug and connection to the operator panel X140 on the CU320 and remove the CU320 2 Disconnect the plug in connections for the fiber optic cables and signal cables 5 plugs 3 Remove the DRIVE CLiQ cables and connections to the CU320 5 plugs 4 Remove the retaining screws for the slide in electronics unit 2 screws When removing the slide in electronics unit you have to disconnect 5 further plugs one after the other 2 at the top 3 below CAUTION When removing the unit ensure that you do not damage any signal cables The Control Interface Board can then be removed from the slide in electronics unit CAUTION When removing the ribbon cable s connectors make sure that you actuate the locking lever on the connector very carefully e g with a screwdriver because otherwise the lock could be damaged Installation steps For installation carry out the above steps in reverse order CAUTION The tighte
139. 121dHLG Ramp down time 30 000 s p1135dHLG OFF3 t_R down 10 000 s Contin Help A OK F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 Final confirmation Permanent parameter transfer execute with continue and OK Contin Help v OK F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 5 5 First commissioning with the AOP30 Entering the basic commissioning parameters If a sine wave filter option L15 is connected it must be activated in p0230 p0230 3 otherwise it could be destroyed p0700 Preset command source 5 PROF Idrive 6 TM31 terminals 7 Namur 10 PROF Idrive Namur p1000 Preset setpoint source 1 PROFldrive 2 TM31 terminals 3 Motorized potentiometer 4 Fixed setpoint Once a setpoint source has been selected p1000 the main setpoint p1070 is defaulted accordingly To navigate through the selection fields choose lt F2 gt or lt F3 gt To activate a selection choose lt F5 gt To change a parameter value navigate to the required selection field and activate with lt F5 gt Another window appears in which you can enter the required value directly or select the value from a list Final confirmation Confirm the basic parameters to save them Once you have selected Continue and activated your entries with lt F5 gt the basic parameters you entered are p
140. 13 9 2 7 2 Example of changing over between two MOtOTFS ssssssesssssesrrsseirestirssttrrssttnssttnnssttnnnnennsseen 313 9 2 7 3 Function diagram isc cciencdiendaeiiee aaia ana iaae aaia aaia a aia a Ea aa a aa a pene 314 g2 TES Paramet S e E EEEE EEE AEN E E AEA 315 9 2 8 Fiction charactors te CUNE oe ereen E EEE EEE 315 9 2 9 Increasing the Output freq ents pressas yian iaie ii an ani apaia iaiia AR Aaaa 317 92 98 NDOSCHIPUON E a a a a E aan a a a a a Satta a 317 9 2 9 2 Default pulse frequencies cccceccceeeeeeeeenaeceaeceeeeeeeeecaeceeeeeeesecaaeeeeeeesecacaeeseeeesesecsieeesesaees 317 9 2 9 3 Increasing the pulse frequency eeeeeceeeeeteeeeeeneeeceeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeeeaaeeeeeeaeeeseeaeeestiaeeeeeeiaeeeetianeees 318 9 2 9 4 Maximum output frequency achieved by increasing the pulse frequency ccceeeeseeeeeeees 319 gL PAramelersiciute see etcav nec A T eden ee teeagi tacit N OANA 319 9 2 10 Runtime operating hours counter seisseen EEEa a EE 320 9 2 11 Simulation operatio i en e a ia eaa aiae iane aaia a ia ia aiaa Eea 321 9 212 DireCtlon revois alie EAR 322 9213 UNIE CHANGEGOVER ea enea E EE E E 323 9 2 14 Derating behavior at increased pulse frequency ssssseiissesrsserrrsrtrrstttrrsstrrssttnrssttnnstennssen n 324 9 3 Extended functions scr sista std aR aR hesitate ai tetera 327 9 3 1 Technology contor seoser aaa E E AA E 327 9 3 2 Bypass TUNCCION saiia ania iaaa n ia aieiai aA
141. 189855A Device Overview 2 5 Type plate Specifications on the type plate SIEMENS FREQUENZUMRICHTER AC DRIVE SINAMICS G150 Input Vv A Eingang BAC 380 480 519 Output Ausgang 3AC 0 480 Vv 490 A Temperature range 0 40 oc Duty class l Temperaturbereich Bel Klasse Degree of protection IP21 Cooling method AF Schutzart K hlart Weight 510 kg Gewicht Order number 1P 6SL3710 1GE35 0AA0 Z Bestellnummer List of device LO0 L26 M21 options cE 2 5 Type plate lt 4 Device designation Serial number Fabrik Nummer SNV5 1205742010001 S N V51205742010001 D xI j Month of manufacture Year of manufacture V 2PE Made in EU Germany Figure 2 9 Type plate for the cabinet unit Date of manufacture The date of manufacture can be determined as follows Table 2 1 Production year and month Letter numbe Year of manufacture Letter number Month of manufacture r S 2004 1to9 January to September T 2005 O October U 2006 N November V 2007 D December W 2008 x 2009 Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 33 Device Overview 2 5 Type plate Type plate specifications from type plate above Table 2 2 Specifications on the type plate Specification Value Explanation Input 3 AC Three phase connection 380 480V Rated input voltage 239 A Rated inpu
142. 19 Terminal block X542 Terminal Designation 1 Technical specifications 1 DO 0 NC Contact type Changeover contact max load current 8 A N 2 DO 0 COM Max switching voltage 250 V AC 30 V DC 3 DO 0 NO Max switching voltage gt at 250 V AC 2000 VA cos 1 4 DO 1 N en 2 at 250 V AC 750 VA cos 0 4 m 5 DO 1 COM at 30 V DC 240 W ohmic load i 6 DO 1 NO Required minimum current 100 mA 1 DO digital output NO normally open contact NC normally closed contact COM mid position contact Max connectable cross section 2 5 mm Note If 230 V AC is applied to the relay outputs the Terminal Module must also be grounded via a 6 mm protective conductor Drive converter cabinet units 78 Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Electrical installation 4 10 Other connections 4 10 Other connections Depending on the options installed further connections have to be established for example dv dt filter plus Voltage Peak Limiter main contactor sine wave filter connection for external auxiliary equipment main circuit breaker including fuses or circuit breaker EMERGENCY OFF button cabinet illumination with service socket anti condensation heating for cabinet contactor safety combinations EMERGENCY OFF EMERGENCY STOP thermistor motor protection unit braking unit PT100 evaluation unit insulation monitor communication modules encoder evaluator and NAMUR option
143. 2 2 1 Field of applications SINAMICS G150 drive converter cabinet units are specially designed to meet the requirements of drives with a quadratic and constant load characteristic medium performance requirements and no regenerative feedback Applications include Pumps and fans Compressors Extruders and mixers Mills Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 21 Device Overview 2 2 Applications features and design 2 2 2 Characteristics quality service Features Quality 22 The accuracy of sensorless vector control ensures that the system can be used for a wide variety of applications and as a result an additional speed sensor is not required Optionally applications with system specific requirements for an encoder can use an encoder evaluator SINAMICS G150 takes this into account and as a result offers a low cost drive solution tailored to actual requirements In addition factors have been considered to ensure easy handling of the drive from the planning and design phase through to operation These factors include e Compact modular service friendly design e Straightforward planning and design thanks to the Sizer and Starter tools e Ready to connect to facilitate the installation process e Quick menu driven commissioning with no complex parameterization e Clear and convenient operation via a user friendly graphical operator panel with measured values displayed in plai
144. 27 are described in the Additional Operating Instructions of the Operating Instructions Note The PT100 evaluation unit and the parameters for the measurement channels are described in the Additional Operating Instructions Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Electrical installation 4 10 Other connections The PT100 evaluation unit can monitor up to six sensors The sensors can be connected in a two or three wire system With the two wire system inputs Tx1 and Tx3 must be assigned With the three wire system input Tx2 must also be connected x 1 2 6 The limit values can be freely programmed for each channel Shielded signal cables are recommended If this is not possible however the sensor cables should at least be twisted in pairs In the factory setting the measurement channels are divided into two groups of three channels With motors for example this means that three PT100s in the stator windings and two PT100s in the motor bearings can be monitored Unused channels can be suppressed via parameters The output relays are integrated in the internal fault and alarm train of the cabinet unit The messages can also be picked up by the customer via two spare signaling relays Two user programmable analog outputs 0 4 to 20 mA and 0 2 to 10 V are also available for integration in a higher level controller The power for the PT100 evaluation unit is supplied and the evalua
145. 3 Extended functions Bypass function e p1200 e p1260 e 11261 e p1262 e p1263 e p1264 e p1265 e p1266 e p1267 e p1268 e p1269 e p1274 Flying restart operating mode Bypass configuration CO BO Bypass control status word Bypass dead time Debypass delay time Bypass delay time Bypass speed threshold BI Bypass control command Bypass changeover source configuration Bl Bypass feedback signal synchronization completed BI Bypass switch feedback signal BI Bypass switch monitoring time Synchronization e p3800 e p3801 e p3802 e 13803 e 13804 e 13805 e p3806 e 13808 e p3809 e p3811 e 13812 e p3813 e 13814 e p3815 e 13819 Drive converter cabinet units Sync supply drive activation Sync supply drive drive object number Bl Sync supply drive enable CO BO Sync supply drive control word CO Sync supply drive target frequency CO Sync supply drive frequency difference Sync supply drive frequency difference threshold CO Sync supply drive phase difference Sync supply drive phase setpoint Sync supply drive frequency limitation CO Sync supply drive correction frequency Sync supply drive phase synchronism threshold CO Sync supply drive voltage difference Sync supply drive voltage difference threshold CO BO Sync supply drive status word Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 337 Functions Monitoring and Protective Functions 9 3 Extended functions 9 3 3 Exte
146. 3 Sinusoidal Filter Option LIS jaser eee e E EE T E E NE T 81 4 10 4 Connection for External Auxiliary Equipment Option L19 ssseseesseeeeeeresseernsseereserreseerrssrrnsse 83 4 10 5 Main switch incl fuses or circuit breaker option L26 2 ee eececeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeenaeeeeeeaas 84 4 10 6 EMERGENCY OFF pushbutton installed in the cabinet door option L45 eseeeeeeeeeeee 86 4 10 7 Cabinet illumination with service socket option L50 ssessssssssssssrrssesrrssrrrssrirrssrennsstnnssrnnsnt 87 4 10 8 Cabinet anti condensation heating option L55 eee ceeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeeeeaas 87 4 10 9 EMERGENCY OFF category 0 230 V AC or 24 V DC option L57 00 eee eeteeeeeneeeeeee 88 4 10 10 EMERGENCY STOP category 1 230 V AC option L59 00 0 eee ee eeteeee entree ee etteeeeeneeeeeeee 90 4 10 11 EMERGENCY STOP category 1 24 V DC option L60 0 0 eee eee eeneeeeeeneeeeeeaeeeeeenaeeeeeeas 91 4 10 12 25 kW Braking Unit Option L61 50 kW Braking Unit Option L62 92 4 10 13 Thermistor Motor Protection Unit Option L83 L84 0 eee cece cece enteeeeeeneeeeeeaeeeeenaeeeeneaas 98 4 10 14 PT100 Evaluation Unit Option L86 0 cee eee eeeeenneeeeeeneeeeeeaaeeeeeeaeeeeeeaaeeeesaeeeeeeaeeeesaaes 98 4 10 15 Insulation Monitor Option L87 ee eeeeeeeeeeeee a a 100 4 10 16 Communication Board Ethernet CBE20 Option G33 eceeeeeeeeeeee tener eter eeteeeetteeeeetaeeeees 102 4 10 17 CBC10
147. 31 2 350 2 1GE33 1AA0 3NA3254 355 3 3NE1334 2 500 2 1 Rated output of a typical 6 pole standard induction motor based on IL or In at 400 V 3 AC 50 Hz 2 Rated output of a typical 6 pole standard induction motor based on IL or I at 460 V 3 AC 60 Hz 3 The base load current IL is based on a duty cycle of 110 for 60 s or 150 for 10 s with a duty cycle duration of 300 s see Overload capability 4 The base load current IH is based on a duty cycle of 150 for 60 s or 160 for 10 s with a duty cycle duration of 300 s see Overload capability 5 The current values given here are based on the rated output current 8 The recommendations for the North American market in AWG or MCM must be taken from the appropriate NEC National Electrical Code or CEC Canadian Electrical Code standards Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5SE00189855A 419 Technical specifications 12 3 Technical specifications Table 12 10 Version A 380 V 480 V 3 AC part 2 Order number 6SL3710 1GE33 8AA0 1GE35 0AA0 1GE36 1AA0 Unit rating for IL at 50 Hz 400 V kW 200 250 315 for I at 50 Hz 400 V 1 kW 160 200 250 for IL at 60 Hz 460 V 2 hp 300 400 500 for I at 60 Hz 460 V 2 hp 250 350 350 Output current Rated current In A 380 490 605 Base load current IL 3 A 370 477 590 Base load current IH A 340 438 460 Input curren
148. 35 2 3NE1447 2 3NE1448 2 Rated current A 560 670 850 Frame size to DIN 43620 1 3 3 3 438 Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Technical specifications 12 3 Technical specitications Order number 6SL3710 2GF38 6AA0 2GF41 1AA0 2GF41 4AA0 1 Rated output of a typical 6 pole standard induction motor based on I or IH at 500 V 3 AC 50 Hz 2 Rated output of a typical 6 pole standard induction motor based on IL or I at 575 V 3 AC 60 Hz 3 The base load current IL is based on a duty cycle of 110 for 60 s or 150 for 10 s with a duty cycle duration of 300 s see Overload capability 4 The base load current IH is based on a duty cycle of 150 for 60 s or 160 for 10 s with a duty cycle duration of 300 s see Overload capability 5 The current values given here are based on the rated output current 6 The recommendations for the North American market in AWG or MCM must be taken from the appropriate NEC National Electrical Code or CEC Canadian Electrical Code standards Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 439 Technical specifications 12 3 Technical specifications 12 3 4 Table 12 20 Version C 500 V 600 V 3 AC part 1 Cabinet unit version C 500 V 600 V 3 AC Order number 6SL3710 1GF31 8CA0 1GF32 2CA0 1GF32 6CA0 Unit rating for IL at 50
149. 38 0 mode SINAMICS p2038 0 STW1 Control word 1 interface mode VIK See table Control word 1 interface FP2441 NAMUR p2038 2 mode VIK NAMUR p2038 2 STW1_BM Control word 1 metal industry interface See table Control word 1 metal industry FP2425 mode SINAMICS p2038 0 interface mode SINAMICS p2038 0 STW2 Control word 2 interface mode SINAMICS See table Control word 2 interface FP2444 p2038 0 mode SINAMICS p2038 0 STW2_BM Control word 2 metal industry interface See table Control word 2 metal industry FP2426 mode SINAMICS p2038 0 interface mode SINAMICS p2038 0 NSOLL_A Speed setpoint A 16 bit p1070 FP3030 NSOLL_B Speed setpoint B 32 bit p1155 FP3080 PCS7_x PCS7 specific setpoints Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 217 Operation 6 6 PROFIBUS 6 6 5 2 Overview of status words and actual values Table 6 12 Overview of status words and actual values Abbreviation Description Parameter Function diagram ZSW1 Status word 1 interface mode See table Status word 1 interface FP2452 SINAMICS p2038 0 mode SINAMICS p2038 0 ZSW1 Status word 1 interface mode VIK See table Status word 1 interface FP2451 NAMUR p2038 2 mode VIK NAMUR p2038 2 ZSW1_BM Status word 1 metal industry interface See table Status word 1 metal FP2428 mode SINAMICS p2038 0 industry interface mode SINAMICS p2038
150. 3NE1334 2 3NE1334 2 3NE1435 2 Rated current A 500 500 560 frame size to DIN 43620 1 2 2 3 442 Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Technical specifications 12 3 Technical specitications Order number 6SL3710 1GF33 3CA0 1GF34 1CA0 1GF34 7CA0O 1 Rated output of a typical 6 pole standard induction motor based on I or IH at 500 V 3 AC 50 Hz 2 Rated output of a typical 6 pole standard induction motor based on IL or I at 575 V 3 AC 60 Hz 3 The base load current IL is based on a duty cycle of 110 for 60 s or 150 for 10 s with a duty cycle duration of 300 s see Overload capability 4 The base load current IH is based on a duty cycle of 150 for 60 s or 160 for 10 s with a duty cycle duration of 300 s see Overload capability 5 The current values given here are based on the rated output current 6 The recommendations for the North American market in AWG or MCM must be taken from the appropriate NEC National Electrical Code or CEC Canadian Electrical Code standards Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 443 Technical specifications 12 3 Technical specifications Table 12 22 Version C 500 V 600 V 3 AC part 3 Order number 6SL3710 1GF35 8CA0 1GF37 4CA0 1GF38 1CA0 Unit rating for IL at 50 Hz 500 V kW 400 500 560 for I at 50 Hz 500
151. 4 2 n n n 2 6 3 Basic information about the drive system Power Module data sets PDS number Motor data sets MDS number Copy motor data set MDS Encoder data sets EDS number Command data set CDS number Drive data set DDS number Assigned motor data set MDS Encoder 1 encoder data set number Encoder 2 encoder data set number Encoder 3 encoder data set number Copy command data set CDS Bl Command data set selection CDS bit 0 Bl Command data set selection CDS bit 1 Copy drive data set DDS Bl Drive data set selection bit 0 BI Drive data set selection bit 1 BI Drive data set selection bit 2 BI Drive data set selection bit 3 BI Drive data set selection bit 4 6 3 4 BICO technology interconnecting signals Description Every drive contains a large number of interconnectable input and output variables and internal control variables BICO technology Binector Connector Technology allows the drive to be adapted to a wide variety of conditions Digital signals which can be connected freely by means of BICO parameters are identified by the prefix BI BO Cl or CO in their parameter name These parameters are identified accordingly in the parameter list or in the function diagrams Note The STARTER parameterization and commissioning tool is recommended when using BICO technology Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 191 Opera
152. 4 7 Power connections 4 7 5 Removing the connection bracket for the interference suppression capacitor with operation from an ungrounded supply If the cabinet unit is operated on a non grounded system IT system the connection bracket for the converter s interference suppression capacitor T1 must be removed Unscrew the M4 Torx T20 screws and remove the connection bracket Figure 4 4 Removing the connection bracket for the interference suppression capacitor J N WARNING Failing to remove the connection bracket for the interference suppression capacitor on a non grounded system IT system can cause significant damage to the cabinet unit Note For units that are connected in parallel the connection bracket must be removed in both sub cabinets e With 380 V 480 V 3 AC 6SL3710 2GE41 1AA0 6SL3710 2GE41 4AA0 6SL3710 2GE41 6AA0 e With 500 V 600 V 3 AC 6SL3710 2GF38 6AA0 6SL3710 2GF41 1AA0 6SL3710 2GF41 4AA0 e With 660 V 690 V 3 AC 6SL3710 2GH41 1AA0 6SL3710 2GH41 4AA0 6SL3710 2GH41 5AA0 Drive converter cabinet units 68 Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Electrical installation 4 8 External Supply of the Auxiliary Supply from a Secure Line 4 8 External Supply of the Auxiliary Supply from a Secure Line Description An external auxiliary supply is always recommended if communication and closed loop control are to be independent of the supply system An external auxili
153. 4 TM31 p0854 Control request Vector 1 Vector p0922 PROF Idrive PZD telegram Vector 999 Free telegram configuration selection p1020 FSW bit 0 Vector r4022 1 TM31 DI1 TM31 p1021 FSW bit 1 Vector r4022 2 TM31 DI2 TM31 p1035 MOP raise Vector r4022 1 TM31 DI1 TM31 p1036 MOP lower Vector r4022 2 TM31 DI2 TM31 p1113 Direction of rotation reversal Vector 0 TM31 p1140 Enable RFG Vector 1 Vector p1141 Start RFG Vector 1 Vector p1142 Enable nsetp Vector 1 Vector p2103 Acknowledge fault 1 Vector 0 Vector p2104 Acknowledge fault 2 Vector r4022 3 TM31 DI3 TM31 p2106 Ext fault_1 Vector r0722 1 CU DI1 CU p2107 Ext fault_2 Vector 1 Vector p2112 Ext alarm_1 Vector r0722 0 CU DIO CU p2116 Ext alarm_2 Vector 1 Vector p0738 DI DO8 CU 1 24 V CU p0748 8 Invert DI DO8 CU 0 Not inverted p0728 8 Set DI DO8 input or output CU 1 Output p0739 DI DO9 CU 1 24 V CU p0748 9 Invert DI DO9 CU 0 Not inverted p0728 9 Set DI DO9 input or output CU 1 Output p0740 DI DO10 CU 1 24 V CU p0748 10 Invert DI DO10 CU 0 Not inverted p0728 10 Set DI DO10 input or output CU 1 Output p0741 DI DO11 CU 1 24 V CU p0748 11 Invert DI DO11 CU 0 Not inverted p0728 11 Set DI DO11 input or output CU 1 Output Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 475 Appendix A 2 Parameter macros Sink Source Parameter Description DO Parameter Description DO
154. 5 735 Base load current IL 2 A 452 560 710 Base load current IH A 416 514 657 Input current Rated input current 4 A 483 598 764 Input current max A 740 918 1164 Current requirements for 24 VDC JA 1 4 1 4 1 5 auxiliary supply Connection voltages Line voltage Vacrms 660 V 3 AC 10 to 690 V 3 AC 10 15 lt 1 min Line frequency Hz 47 to 63 Hz Electronics power supply Voc 24 20 4 28 8 Power loss kW 9 1 10 8 13 5 Cooling air requirement m s 0 78 0 78 1 48 Sound pressure level Lpa dB A 72 75 72 75 72 75 1 m at 50 60 Hz Line connection recommended DIN VDE mm 2x 185 2 x 240 3 x 185 maximum DIN VDE mm 4 x 240 4 x 240 8 x 240 Fixing screw M12 2 holes M12 2 holes M12 4 holes Motor connection recommended DIN VDE 5 mm2 2x150 2x185 3 x 150 maximum DIN VDE mm 4 x 240 4 x 240 6 x 240 Fixing screw M12 2 holes M12 2 holes M12 3 holes Protective conductor connection Fixing screw M12 2 holes M12 2 holes M12 18 holes Max motor cable length shielded unshielded m 300 450 300 450 300 450 Dimensions standard version Width mm 1200 1200 1600 Height mm 2000 2000 2000 Depth mm 600 600 600 Power block frame size HX HX JX Weight without options approx kg 860 860 1320 Recommended protection Line protection with option L26 3NA3352 6 3NA3354 6 3NA3365 6 Rated current A 2x315 2 x355 2 x 500 frame size to DIN 43620 1 3 3 3 Line and semiconductor protection without opti
155. 5 CAN CBC10 Communication Board The CBC10 CANopen communication board CAN Communication Board is used to connect drives in the SINAMICS drive system to higher level automation systems with a CAN bus The CANopen Option Board uses two 9 pin sub D connectors for the connection to the CAN bus system The connectors can be used as inputs or outputs Unused pins are plated through Among others the following transmission rates are supported 10 20 50 125 250 500 800 kBaud and 1 Mbaud Drive converter cabinet units 104 Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Electrical installation 4 10 Other connections CAUTION The Option Board should only be inserted and removed when the Control Unit and Option Board are disconnected from the power supply The CBC10 must only be operated by qualified personnel The ESD notices must be observed Note Detailed and comprehensive instructions and information for the CBC10 Communication Board can be found in the accompanying Operating Instructions These Operating Instructions are available as additional documentation on the enclosed customer CD Interface overview X451 ite CAN socket Si x lt opi 9 X452 CAN pin A Si gt lt 6SL3055 0AAQ00 i Figure 4 16 CAN CBC10 Communication Board Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 105
156. 50 315 Output current Rated current In A 260 330 410 Base load current IL 2 A 250 320 400 Base load current IH A 233 280 367 Input current Rated input current 4 A 270 343 426 Input current max A 410 525 655 Current requirements for 24 VDC JA 1 35 1 35 1 4 auxiliary supply Connection voltages Line voltage Vacrms 660 V 3 AC 10 to 690 V 3 AC 10 15 lt 1 min Line frequency Hz 47 to 63 Hz Electronics power supply Voc 24 20 4 28 8 Power loss kW 5 0 6 1 8 1 Cooling air requirement m s 0 36 0 36 0 78 Sound pressure level Lpa dB A 67 73 67 73 72 75 1 m at 50 60 Hz Line connection recommended DIN VDE mm 2x95 2x 120 2 x 185 maximum DIN VDE mm 4 x 240 4 x 240 4 x 240 Fixing screw M12 2 holes M12 2 holes M12 2 holes Motor connection recommended DIN VDE 5 mm2 2x70 2x95 2x 120 maximum DIN VDE mm 2x 185 2 x 240 4 x 240 Fixing screw M12 2 holes M12 2 holes M12 2 holes Protective conductor connection Fixing screw M12 2 holes M12 2 holes M12 2 holes Max motor cable length shielded unshielded m 300 450 300 450 300 450 Dimensions standard version Width mm 800 800 1200 Height mm 2000 2000 2000 Depth mm 600 600 600 Power block frame size GX GX HX Weight without options approx kg 390 390 860 Recommended protection Line protection with option L26 3NA3354 6 3NA3365 6 3NA3365 6 Rated current A 355 500 500 frame size to DIN 43620 1 3 3 3 Line and semicondu
157. 51 Speed and torque control vector e V f control for diagnostics vector e Motor identification e Speed controller optimization rotary measurement Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 283 Setpoint channel and closed loop control 7 4 Vector speed torque control with without encoder Supplementary conditions e Maximum speed or maximum torque depend on the converter output voltage available and the back EMF of the motor calculation specifications EMF must not exceed Uratea converter e Calculatin a maximum speed A U ene DC link max n max n Ph e Depending on the terminal voltage and load cycle the maximum torque can be taken from the motor data sheets configuration instructions e No thermal model is available for the closed loop control of a permanent magnet synchronous motor The motor can only be protected against overheating using a temperature sensor PTC We recommend that the motor temperature is measured using a temperature sensor KTY in order to achieve a high level of torque accuracy Commissioning The following sequence is recommended for commissioning e Configure the drive When the drive is being commissioned using STARTER or the AOP30 operator panel the permanent magnet synchronous motor must be selected The motor data specified in the table below must then be entered Finally the motor identification routine and speed optimization p1900 a
158. 55A Table of contents 9 Functions Monitoring and Protective FUNCTIONS cccsccceeeeesseeneeeeeeeeesseeneeeeeeeessseenaeeeeeeesnsennnee aes 293 9 1 Chapter content asteinen eiee cigduan de vedas oe aa aa Me adil ae ata aa iara iE ad 293 9 2 Drive Functions renoun eaa en eee 295 9 2 1 Motor identification and automatic speed controller optimization ccccceesececeeeeeeeeteeeees 295 9 2 1 1 Standstill measurement inc nif et tint deed catia need aie re ig eid eee todas 296 9 2 1 2 Rotating measurement and speed controller optimization ccceeeceeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeenteeeees 298 9 2 2 Efficiency OptimiZation eiie nated vaiacendadeoenssguaaeeduaaeseadevgte 301 9 2 3 Fast magnetization for induction MOtOTS 0 eee eeeeeeeee cee eeeeeeeeeaeeeeeaaeeeeetaaeeeeeaeeeseeaeeeetenaeeeeneaes 302 9 2 4 Yde controles nd eh ade i dines aw ag edd ed a ed eed ee Aneel 303 9 2 5 Automatic restart UNCION ne E Ladee evaded cits cau ctiacd NEEESE 307 9 2 6 Flying Testaren o nana a stti sd de rds waa Aiea aie teat anaes ati ee adi 310 9 2 6 1 Flying restart without CNCOCED ee eececeeeeeeeeeeeeee eee e a S A ROEA 311 9 2 6 2 Flying restart With encodef a s asirini iaiaeiaeiaa aaiae a iai ia 312 9 26 3 Parameters saunei a aa aai aaa E a a ada Aaa deed e 312 9 2 7 Motor changeover Selection sioa ea EE EE EEEE REE RA adage EDE E a aa 313 9 2 Descriptio misionin eena a a a see T E daaa a aana raa aa ai a tee 3
159. 6 A see Electrical installation Other connections Anti condensation heating for cabinet option L55 Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 51 Electrical installation 4 2 Checklist for electrical installation Item Activity Fulfilled Complete Signal connections 18 Cabinet unit operation by higher level controller control room The control cables must be C C connected in accordance with the interface assignment and the shield applied Taking into account electrical interference and the distance from power cables the digital and analog signals must be routed with separate cables When the analog inputs on the customer terminal block are used as current or voltage inputs selectors S5 0 and S5 1 must be set accordingly see Electrical installation Signal connections Customer terminal block A60 19 Option K50 The SMC30 Sensor Module is used for determining the actual motor C C Sensor Module Speed Cabinet In conjunction with SINAMICS G150 the following encoders are Mounted supported by the SMC30 Sensor Module SMC30 e TTL encoder e HTL encoder The motor temperature can also be detected using KTY84 130 or PTC thermistors In the factory setting an HTL encoder is bipolar with 1024 pulses per revolution see Electrical installation Other connections SMC30 Sensor Module Cabinet Mounted option K50 Connecting protection and monitoring devi
160. 7 77 7 accel 0 fset fn fmax f p0310 p1082 x PERAN p0305 rated motor current x number of pole r0395 current stator resistance x pairs p1311 voltage boost at acceleration Figure 7 7 Voltage boost during acceleration example p1300 0 p1310 0 p1311 gt 0 Function diagram FP 6300 V f characteristic and voltage boost Parameter e p0304 Rated motor voltage e p0305 Rated motor current e 10395 Stator resistance actual e p1310 Permanent voltage boost e p1311 Voltage boost during acceleration e 11315 Voltage boost total Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 263 Setpoint channel and closed loop control 7 3 V f control 7 3 2 Slip compensation Description The slip compensation means that the speed of induction motors is essentially kept constant independent of the load M2 5 h Figure 7 8 Slip compensation Function diagram FP 6310 Resonance damping and slip compensation Parameters e p1335 Slip compensation p1335 0 0 slip compensation is deactivated p1335 100 0 slip is fully compensated e p1336 Slip compensation limit value e 11337 Actual slip compensation Drive converter cabinet units 264 Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Setpoint channel and closed loop contro 7 4 Vector speed torque control wit
161. 88 Current requirements for 24 VDC JA 1 1 1 1 1 1 auxiliary supply Connection voltages Line voltage Vacrms 660 V 3 AC 10 to 690 V 3 AC 10 15 lt 1 min Line frequency Hz 47 to 63 Hz Electronics power supply Voc 24 20 4 28 8 Power loss kW 1 7 2 1 2 7 Cooling air requirement m s 0 17 0 17 0 17 Sound pressure level Lpa dB A 67 68 67 68 67 68 1 m at 50 60 Hz Line connection recommended DIN VDE mm 50 50 70 maximum DIN VDE mm 4 x 240 4 x 240 4 x 240 Fixing screw M12 1 hole M12 1 hole M12 1 hole Motor connection recommended DIN VDE mm2 35 50 70 maximum DIN VDE mm 2x70 2x150 2 x 150 Fixing screw M12 1 hole M12 1 hole M12 1 hole Protective conductor connection Fixing screw M12 2 holes M12 2 holes M12 2 holes Max motor cable length shielded unshielded m 300 450 300 450 300 450 Dimensions standard version Width mm 400 400 400 Height mm 2000 2000 2000 Depth mm 600 600 600 Power block frame size FX FX FX Weight without options approx kg 225 225 225 Recommended protection Line and semi cond protection 3NE1022 2 3NE1022 2 3NE1224 2 Rated current A 125 125 160 frame size to DIN 43620 1 00 00 1 458 Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5SE00189855A Technical specifications 12 3 Technical specitications Order number 6SL3710 1GH28 5CA0 1GH31 0CAO 1GH31 2CA0 1 Rated output of a typical 6 pole standard induction
162. 9 6 8 3 Further information about communication via PROFINET 1O ccccceeseeceeceeeeeeeseeteeeeeeees 249 6 9 Engineering Software Drive Control Chart DCC 0 ee ecceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeaeeseneaees 250 Setpoint channel and closed loop control eceeeecceeceeeeeesseeeeeeeeeeeesseeeeeeeeeeeesseeeeeeeeeeeesseceeeeeeeeeeseeeeess 251 7 1 Chapter contents cititens ee tee te anit Ae ee A Tat ieee ete ed a alg vt tate ae 251 7 2 SEeIPOINt Channellasutsaitait cose et te ie oe ee a tak ats Oe alee Ah tel teat 23 252 7 2 1 Setpointaddition vx ewes ket acetate a aa a ne ede ie as 252 7 2 2 Dir cti n reversal rei aa aaea acne anactend teteeeeh ine ace acest esta nate ee 253 7 2 3 Suppression bandwidths and minimum Speeds ecceccecceeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeseceeaeeeeeeeeesseeeeeees 254 7 2 4 Speed limitation niorse eed a ewe adai aia oad deanna ste dete taba Seen eae diate neuen eeener ents 255 7 2 5 Ramp functon generoi raei E steddcestidaces tadaecexit heths ladut nidadb E 256 7 3 MIF COMUOM i aortne a a satel beta dackes Seeebea a betel 28 a aa octane 258 7 3 1 NoltaGe BOOS test eiie E E peeteueeh teach EA cctedey eth hepeemtheneet sheet tatgy 261 7 3 2 Slip Compensation 0 ceed elves Gaetan aas staat nea teehee tee Ad ee eee acess nih adrian oe eaS EARE 264 7 4 Vector speed torque control with without CNCOde cccccceeeceeeeceeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeenteaeeeeeeeees 265 7 4 1 Vector control wi
163. 9 Connection for external auxiliary equipment v L50 Cabinet illumination with service socket v L55 Cabinet anti condensation heating vA v L61 25 kW 125 kW braking unit v L62 50 kW 250 kW braking unit v YO9 Special paint finish for cabinet vA v Documentation standard English German D02 Customer documentation circuit diagram terminal diagram layout diagram in v vA DXF format D04 Customer documentation as hard copy v vA D14 Draft of customer documentation v v D58 Documentation language English French v v D60 Documentation language English Spanish v v D80 Documentation language English Italian v v Languages standard English German T58 Rating plate data in English French v vA T60 Rating plate data in English Spanish v v T80 Rating plate data in English Italian v v Industry specific options chemicals B00 NAMUR terminal block v B02 Electrically separated 24 V power supply PELV v B03 Outgoing section for external auxiliary equipment uncontrolled v Options specific to the shipbuilding industry M66 Marine version v v E11 Individual certificate from Germanischer Lloyd GL v vA E21 Individual certificate from Lloyds Register LR v vA E31 Individual certificate from Bureau Veritas BV v vA E51 Individual certificate from Det Norske Veritas DNV v vA E61 Individual certificate from American Bureau of Shipping ABS v vA Converter acceptance inspection in presence of customer F03 Visual acceptance v vA
164. 9855A Operation 6 4 Command sources TM31 terminal assignment with TM31 Terminals default setting When you choose the TM31 Terminals default setting the terminal assignment for TM31 is as follows TM31 X521 0 20 mA Alo 1 NS lt i 5 0 O Sy AN PO Al 1 13 X520 N E Lee Tes ON OFF1 R tL oi a A 2 MOP Y FSwo 2 Po m S di 6 MOP FSW1 s l oiz M Acknowledge ott ois N10 fault ue Q eet M1 2 L D x522 Inverter AO 0V NA enable X530 Aoi i 3 Speed 0 20mA SC tlo a0 0cr 8 5Q actual value Free ia A G44 dis 4 AO vf Free s DIG pce a Current 0 20mA Free SC 4l Di7 actual value l oet eee tae Temp LNG Iza ay Aare l So 2 r i I X540 X541 7 5 24V EENT TE D E 0 24V aren 2 Do Ready to start H4 3 gt 24V DIDO 9 8 Free 7 2 24 V DI DO 10 a N pies a 7 24V DDO 1 8 Free p l 24 v M e NO 2 24V o 24V X542 Ld 3 14 DO Do 0 S gt Enable pulses PA 001 i So l No fault y 6 BQ ee eee ee Figure 6 12 TM31 terminal assignment with TM31 Terminals default setting Switching the command source The command source can be sw
165. All parameters All the parameters present in the device are listed here The DO to which the parameter currently selected belongs inverted is displayed in curly brackets in the top left of the screen 2 DO selection In this display you can pre select a DO Only the parameters for this DO are then listed The expert list display in STARTER only uses this DO view In both cases the set access level governs which parameters are displayed You can set the access level in the menu for inhibit functions which can be called up using the key button The parameters for access levels 1 and 2 are sufficient for simple applications At access level 3 Expert you can change the structure of the function by interconnecting BICO parameters In the data set selection menu you can choose which of the data sets chosen is currently DISPLAYED Data set parameters are indicated by a c d m e or p between the parameter number and parameter designator When a data set parameter is changed the data set selection dialog appears Drive converter cabinet units 222 Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Operation 6 7 Control via the operator panel Data block selection Type Max Drive AOP Command DB ci Lo o Drive DB d 0 0 0 Motor DB m 0 0 0 Help A v Back OK Fi Ez Fs ra Fs Figure 6 26 Data set selection Explanation of the operator control dialog e Max s
166. C unshielded cables for gt 25 V AC and s 230 V AC Class 3 unshielded cables for gt 230 V AC DC and s 1000 V AC DC Shields must not be used to conduct electricity In other words they must not simultaneously act as neutral or PE conductors Apply the shield so that it covers the greatest possible surface area You can use ground clamps ground terminals or ground screw connections Avoid extending the shield to the grounding point using a wire pigtail because this will reduce the effectiveness of the shield by up to 90 Attach the shield to a shield bar directly after the line inlet into the cabinet Insulate the entire shielded cable and route the shield up to the device connection but do not connect it again Create a low impedance ground connection for additional cabinets system components and distributed devices with the largest possible cross section at least 16 mm Ground unused lines at one end in the cabinet Choose the greatest possible clearance between the power and signal cables at least 20 cm The greater the distance over which the cables are routed in parallel the greater the clearance must be If a sufficient clearance cannot be maintained you must install additional shields Avoid unnecessarily long cable loops Line supply cables and power supply cables for devices and modules may have to be filtered in the cabinet to reduce incoming or outgoing disturbances To reduce emissions the device
167. CO output Data type BICO parameter Example FloatingPoint32 The possible interconnections between BICO input signal sink and BICO output signal source are described in the List Manual in the table Possible combinations for BICO interconnections in the section Explanations on the parameter list The BICO parameter interconnection can be implemented in different data sets CDS DDS MDS etc The different interconnections in the data sets are activated by switching the data sets Interconnections across drive objects are also possible Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 193 Operation 6 3 Basic information about the drive system Internal encoding of the binector connector output parameters The internal codes are needed for example to write BICO input parameters via PROF ldrive Parameter number Drive Index number object 10 31 a 16 15 0 Device e g CU320 63 Separate object Kej Oo B Example signal sources 0000 0011 1110 1001 bin 1111 11 bin 00 0000 0010 bin 0000 0000 0000 0001 bin 0000 00 bin 00 0000 0000 bin 0001 0000 hex gt Fixed 1 0000 0000 0000 0000 bin 0000 00 bin 00 0000 0000 bin 0000 0000 hex gt Fixed 0 Figure 6 6 Internal encoding of the binector connector output parameters Example 1 interconnecting digital signals Suppose you want to operate a drive via terminals DI 0 and DI 1 on the Control Unit using jog 1 and jog 2 BO Binector out
168. D TxD N Receive transmit data N A A RS485 9 not assigned Connectors 210 The cables must be connected via PROFIBUS connectors as they contain the necessary terminating resistors The figure below shows suitable PROFIBUS connectors with without a PG PC connector PROFIBUS connector without PG PC connection 6ES7972 0BA41 0XA0 PROFIBUS connector with PG PC connection 6ES7972 0BB41 0OXA0 Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Operation 6 6 PROFIBUS Bus terminating resistor The bus terminating resistor must be switched on or off depending on its position in the bus otherwise the data will not be transmitted properly Principle the terminating resistors must only be switched on at both ends of the bus line the resistors must be switched off at all other connectors The cable shield must be connected at both ends over large surface area contacts First bus node Last bus node Bus termination From previous To next bus node bus node Figure 6 21 Posisition of the bus terminating resistors Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 211 Operation 6 6 PROFIBUS Cable routing cable from above into the electronic module Entry of PROFIBUS jt Connect bus cable to existing cable strand and fasten using cable ties The cables must be
169. Do not use router 255 Subnet screen Use router y x Address Assign IP configuration Heo Figure 6 37 STARTER Edit Ethernet nodes After selecting the Assign name button the following confirmation will appear if the assignment was successful Edit Ethernet node e K Name of the station has been set successfully Figure 6 38 STARTER Successful assignment of the device name After selecting the Assign IP configuration button the following confirmation will appear if the assignment was successful Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 243 Operation 6 8 PROFINET IO Edit Ethernet node IP configuration has been set successfully Figure 6 39 STARTER Successful assignment of the IP configuration After closing the Edit Ethernet node interactive screen the successful christening of the node is displayed in the node overview after updating F5 P Accessible nodes TCP IP Auto gt Broadcom NetXtreme Gig PER SEa Accessible nodes a Drive unit_01 address 192 168 0 10 type SINAMICS G150 2 5x Activate extended slot search Do you want to accept the selected drive units into the project Select drive units Refresh F5 Figure 6 40 STARTER Accessible nodes update completed Note The IP address and device name for the Control Unit are stored on the CompactFlash Card non volatile Drive converter cabinet un
170. Drive converter cabinet units 88 Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Electrical installation 4 10 Other connections Reconnection to the 24 V DC Button Circuit When using the 24 V DC button circuit you must remove the following jumpers at terminal block X120 e 4 5 9 10 and 11 14 You must also insert the following jumpers at terminal block X120 e 4 11 5 10 and 9 14 Diagnostics Messages output during operation and in the event of faults meaning of LEDs on K120 are described in the Additional Operating Instructions of the Operating Instructions Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 89 Electrical installation 4 10 Other connections 4 10 10 EMERGENCY STOP category 1 230 V AC option L59 Description EMERGENCY STOP category 1 for controlled stop to EN 60204 1 This function stops the drive by means of a quick stop along a deceleration ramp that must be parameterized The cabinet unit is then disconnected from the power supply via the line contactor which bypasses the electronics by means of a safety combination to EN 60204 1 The operating status and the function are indicated by means of eight LEDs K120 K121 Connection Table 4 31 Terminal block X120 connection for EMERGENCY STOP category 1 230 V AC Terminal Technical specifications 4 Jumper wired in the factory 5 7 Loop in EMERGENCY OFF button fro
171. E00189855A 13 Table of contents 14 Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 ASE00189855A Safety information 1 1 1 Warnings J N WARNING Hazardous voltages are present when electrical equipment is in operation Severe personal injury or substantial material damage may result if these warnings are not observed Only qualified personnel are permitted to work on or around the equipment This personnel must be thoroughly familiar with all warning and maintenance procedures described in these operating instructions The successful and safe operation of this device is dependent on correct transport proper storage and installation as well as careful operation and maintenance National safety guidelines must be observed N DANGER Five safety rules When carrying out any kind of work on electrical devices the five safety rules must always be observed 1 Disconnect the system 2 Protect against reconnection 3 Make sure that the equipment is de energized 4 Ground and short circuit 5 Cover or enclose adjacent components that are still live Certification The following certificates e EC declaration of conformity e Certificate of compliance with order e EC manufacturer s declaration can be found under Safety and Operating Instructions in the documentation folder Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 15 Safety informatio
172. E00189855A 385 Maintenance and servicing 11 4 Replacing components 11 4 8 Replacing the Control Interface Board type HX Replacing the Control Interface Board CBSO ALLL j ad fo of Figure 11 12 Replacing the Control Interface Board frame size HX Drive converter cabinet units 386 Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Maintenance and servicing 11 4 Replacing components Preparatory steps e Disconnect the cabinet unit from the power supply e Allow unimpeded access e Remove the protective cover Removal steps The removal steps are numbered in accordance with the figure 1 Remove the CU320 mount 1 nut If necessary remove the PROFIBUS plug and connection to the operator panel X140 on the CU320 and carefully remove the CU320 2 Disconnect the plug in connections for the fiber optic cables and signal cables 5 plugs 3 Remove the DRIVE CLiQ cables and connections to the CU320 5 plugs 4 Remove the retaining screws for the slide in electronics unit 2 screws When removing the slide in electronics unit you have to disconnect 5 further plugs one after the other 2 at the top 3 below CAUTION When removing the unit ensure that you do not damage any signal cables The Control Interface Board can then be removed from the slide in electronics unit CAUTION When removing the ribbon cable s connectors make sure that you actuate the locking lever on the co
173. E41 0AA0 6SL3710 1GE35 0AA0 6SL3710 2GE41 1AA0 1 6SL3710 2GE41 4AA0 1 6SL3710 2GE41 6AA0 1 Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 79 Electrical installation 4 10 Other connections Restrictions Commissioning 80 Voltage range 500 V to 600 V 3 AC Installation of the dv dt filter plus Voltage Peak Limiter within the converter cabinet unit 6SL3710 1GF31 8AA0 6SL3710 1GF32 2AA0 6SL3710 1GF32 6AA0 6SL3710 1GF33 3AA0 Installation of the VPL in an additional cabinet 6SL3710 1GF34 1AA0 6SL3710 1GF34 7AA0 6SL3710 1GF35 8AA0 6SL3710 1GF37 4AA0 6SL3710 1GF38 1AA0 6SL3710 2GF38 6AA0 1 6SL3710 2GF41 1AA0 1 6SL3710 2GF41 4AA0 660 V to 690 V 3 AC 6SL3710 1GH28 5AA0 6SL3710 1GH31 0AA0 6SL3710 1GH31 2AA0 6SL3710 1GH31 5AA0 6SL3710 1GH31 8AA0 6SL3710 1GH32 2AA0 6SL3710 1GH32 6AA0 6SL3710 1GH33 3AA0 6SL3710 1GH34 1AA0 6SL3710 1GH34 7AA0 6SL3710 1GH35 8AA0 6SL3710 1GH37 4AA0 6SL3710 1GH38 1AA0 6SL3710 2GH41 1AA0 6SL3710 2GH41 4AA0 1 6SL3710 2GH41 5AA0 1 1 With units that are connected in parallel each individual sub cabinet has a separate auxiliary cabinet for the Voltage Peak Limiter The following restrictions should be noted when a dv dt filter plus Voltage Peak Limiter is used e The output frequency is limited to no more than 150 Hz e Maximum permissible motor cable lengths Shielded cable max 300 m Unshiel
174. ERATION gt 12 25 30 S Entry 01 Entry 02 Entry 01 Entry 02 Entry 03 Entry 04 Entry 03 Entry 04 Entry 05 Entry 06 Entry 05 Entry 06 Entry 07 Entry 08 Entry 07 Entry 08 Entry 09 Entry 10 yi MR 50 100 OPERATION gt 12 25 30 S OPERATION gt 12 25 30 S Entry 01 Entry 02 Entry 01 rr 0j o 0 Entry 03 Entry 04 sal ie Entry 02 aS i eS in 50 100 f 70 100 Entry 06 ry M 50 100 0 50 100 OPERATION gt 12 25 30 S Entry 01 Entry 02 Figure 6 28 Layout of the entries in the operation screen 6 7 5 4 Lists of signals for the operation screen The following tables list some of the main signals for the operation screen along with the associated reference variables and default settings for fast commissioning Drive converter cabinet units 226 Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Operation Vector object Table 6 13 List of signals for the operation screen vector object 6 7 Control via the operator panel Signal Parameters Short name Unit Scaling 100 See table below Factory setting entry no Speed setpoint upstream of ramp function 1 r1114 NSETP 1 min p2000 generator Output frequency 2 r0024 F_OUT Hz Reference frequency Power smoothed 3 r0032 PACTV kW 12004 DC link voltage smoothed 4 r0026 U_DC V p2001 Actual speed smoothed 5 r0021 N_ACT 1 min
175. F71 Function test of the converter without motor connected v v F75 Function test of the converter with test bay motor no load vA v F77 Insulation test on converter v v F97 Customer specific converter acceptance inspections on request v vA V indicates that this option is available for that version indicates that this option is not available for that version Drive converter cabinet units 36 Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Mechanical installation 3 1 Chapter content This chapter provides information on the following e The conditions for transporting storing and installing the cabinet unit e Preparing and installing the cabinet unit Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5SE00189855A 37 Mechanical installation 3 2 Transportation and storage 3 2 Transportation and storage Transportation 38 WARNING The following must be taken into account when the devices are transported The devices are heavy Their center of gravity is displaced and they can be top heavy Suitable hoisting gear operated by trained personnel is essential due to the weight of the devices The devices must only be transported in the upright position indicated The devices must not be transported upside down or horizontally Serious injury or even death and substantial material damage can occur if the devices are not lifted or transported properly Note Information about sh
176. Hz 500 V 1 kW 110 132 160 for I at 50 Hz 500 V 1 kW 90 110 132 for IL at 60 Hz 575 V 2 hp 150 200 250 for I at 60 Hz 575 V 2 hp 150 200 200 Output current Rated current In A 175 215 260 Base load current IL 3 A 171 208 250 Base load current IH A 157 192 233 Input current Rated input current A 191 224 270 Input current max A 279 341 410 Current requirements for 24 VDC JA 1 35 1 35 1 35 auxiliary supply Connection voltages Line voltage Vacrms 500 V 3 AC 10 to 600 V 3 AC 10 15 lt 1 min Line frequency Hz 47 to 63 Hz Electronics power supply Voc 24 20 4 28 8 Power loss kW 3 8 4 2 5 0 Cooling air requirement m s 0 36 0 36 0 36 Sound pressure level Lpa dB A 69 73 69 73 69 73 1 m at 50 60 Hz Line connection recommended DIN VDE mm2 120 2x70 2x95 maximum DIN VDE mm2 4 x 240 4 x 240 4 x 240 Fixing screw M12 1 hole M12 1 hole M12 1 hole Motor connection recommended DIN VDE mm 95 120 2x70 maximum DIN VDE mm 2x150 2x150 2x150 Fixing screw M12 1 hole M12 1 hole M12 1 hole Protective conductor connection Fixing screw M12 2 holes M12 2 holes M12 2 holes Max motor cable length shielded unshielded m 300 450 300 450 300 450 Dimensions standard version Width mm 400 400 400 Height mm 2000 2000 2000 Depth mm 600 600 600 Power block frame size GX GX GX Weight without options approx kg 300 300 300 Recommended protection Line and semi con
177. I IL 66 40 2 5 380 52 5 710 H 740 Figure 4 9 Dimension drawing for braking resistor 25 kW mi I S HE H HHHH gii HH Hea oO N oD et H HEE 2x mill Hie Threaded bolt M12 H HH Hea M10 M50 70 ee A T1 T2 i lt E Screw terminal Ground connection 140 i DE g 2 5 mm M19 air i 112 70 60 52 710 740 _ Figure 4 10 Dimension drawing for braking resistor 50 kW Drive converter cabinet u nits Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 93 Electrical installation 4 10 Other connections Connecting the braking resistor JN WARNING The cables must only be connected to terminal block X5 when the cabinet unit is switched off and the DC link capacitors are discharged CAUTION The braking resistor cables must be laid in such a way that they are short circuit and ground fault proof The length of the connecting cables between the cabinet unit and external braking resistor must not exceed 100 m Table 4 35 Terminal block X5 connection for external braking resistor Terminal Description of function 1 Braking resistor connection 2 Braking resistor connection Max connectable cross section 70 mm Recommended cable cross sections e For L61 25 kW 35 mm e For L62 50 kW 50 mm Table 4 36 Installing the thermostatic switch for the external braking resistor in the monitoring train of the cabinet unit Terminal Description of function T1
178. Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 125 Commissioning 5 3 Procedure for commissioning via STARTER Accessing the STARTER project wizard STARTER Project Ey Aktualisieren Drucken Optionen Full Text Search J STARTER Getting Started d with Commi 12 Use project wizard Commissioning the Drives Standard commissioning If this page should no longer be displayed automatically at the start select Options gt Settings and deactivate in the Display first steps at the start option in the Workbench tab A wizard provides support for the project creation the configuration of the drive and the interface It will also assist you with your online and offline configuration To call the wizard select Project gt New with Wizard from the menu bar How to use the project wizard e Use project wizard To commission the following drives e Commissioning of a MICROMASTER 4th generation drive lt m Press F1 to open Help display Offline mode he Figure 5 2 Main screen of the STARTER parameterization and commissioning tool gt Close the STARTER Getting Started Drive Commissioning screen by choosing HTML Help gt Close Note When you deactivate the Display wizard during start checkbox the project wizard is no longer displayed the next time you start STARTER You can call up the project wizard by choosing Project gt New with Wizard To deactivate the online help for Getting Started follow the instructi
179. Li igsetp p1570 x r0331 2 1570 x r0331 r0077 Figure 9 3 Efficiency optimization It only makes sense to activate this function if the dynamic response requirements of the speed controller are low e g pump and fan applications For p1580 100 the flux in the motor under no load operating conditions is reduced to half of the setpoint reference flux p1570 2 As soon as load is connected to the drive the setpoint reference flux increases linearly with the load and reaching the setpoint set in p1570 at approx r0077 r0331 x p1570 In the field weakening range the final value is reduced by the actual degree of field weakening The smoothing time p1582 should be set to approx 100 to 200 ms Flux differentiation see also p1401 1 is automatically deactivated internally following magnetization FP 6722 Field weakening characteristic Id setpoint ASM p0300 1 FP 6723 Field weakening control flux control for induction motor p0300 1 e 10077 Current setpoints torque generating e 10331 Motor magnetizing current short circuit current actual e p1570 Flux setpoint e p1580 Efficiency optimization units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 301 Functions Monitoring and Protective Functions 9 2 Drive Functions 9 2 3 Fast magnetization for induction motors Description Fast magnetization for induction motors is used to reduce delay time during magnetization Features e Rapid flux build up by imp
180. N VDE mm2 2x120 2x185 2x 185 maximum DIN VDE mm 4 x 240 4 x 240 4 x 240 Fixing screw M12 2 holes M12 2 holes M12 2 holes Motor connection recommended DIN VDE mm 2x95 2x120 2 x 150 maximum DIN VDE mm2 2 x 240 4x 240 4x 240 Fixing screw M12 2 holes M12 2 holes M12 2 holes Protective conductor connection Fixing screw M12 2 holes M12 2 holes M12 2 holes Max motor cable length shielded unshielded m 300 450 300 450 300 450 Dimensions standard version Width mm 800 1200 1200 Height mm 2000 2000 2000 Depth mm 600 600 600 Power block frame size GX HX HX Weight without options approx kg 390 860 860 Recommended protection Line protection with option L26 3NA3365 6 3NA3365 6 3NA3352 6 Rated current A 500 500 2x 315 frame size to DIN 43620 1 3 3 2 Line and semiconductor protection without option L26 3NE1334 2 3NE1334 2 3NE1435 2 Rated current A 500 500 560 Frame size to DIN 43620 1 2 2 3 434 Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Technical specifications 12 3 Technical specitications Order number 6SL3710 1GF33 3AA0 1GF34 1AA0 1GF34 7AA0 1 Rated output of a typical 6 pole standard induction motor based on I or IH at 500 V 3 AC 50 Hz 2 Rated output of a typical 6 pole standard induction motor based on IL or I at 575 V 3 AC 60 Hz 3 The base load current IL is based on a duty cycle of 110 for 60 s or 150 for 10 s w
181. NE1447 2 3NE1448 2 3NE1334 2 Rated current A 670 850 2 x 500 frame size to DIN 43620 1 3 3 2 444 Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Technical specifications 12 3 Technical specitications Order number 6SL3710 1GF35 8CA0 1GF37 4CA0 1GF38 1CA0 1 Rated output of a typical 6 pole standard induction motor based on I or I at 500 V 3 AC 50 Hz 2 Rated output of a typical 6 pole standard induction motor based on IL or I at 575 V 3 AC 60 Hz 3 The base load current IL is based on a duty cycle of 110 for 60 s or 150 for 10 s with a duty cycle duration of 300 s see Overload capability 4 The base load current IH is based on a duty cycle of 150 for 60 s or 160 for 10 s with a duty cycle duration of 300 s see Overload capability 5 The current values given here are based on the rated output current 6 The recommendations for the North American market in AWG or MCM must be taken from the appropriate NEC National Electrical Code or CEC Canadian Electrical Code standards Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 445 Technical specifications 12 3 Technical specifications 12 3 5 Table 12 23 Version A 660 V 690 V 3 AC part 1 Cabinet unit version A 660 V 690 V 3 AC Order number 6SL3710 1GH28 5AA0 1GH31 0AA0 1GH31 2AA0 Unit rating for IL
182. Parameter p0112 Sampling times default setting p0115 of the DO VECTOR must be set to 0 Expert 3 Use p0113 to enter any pulse frequency between 1 kHz and 2 kHz If a higher pulse frequency is to be set e g 2 2 kHz this value must be divided by 2 or by 4 to obtain a result between 1 kHz and 2 kHz e g 2 2 kHz divided by 2 is 1 1 kHz 4 Not all pulse frequencies are accepted in parameter p0113 in such cases the alarm Impermissible value is output 5 If the frequency entered in parameter p0113 is not accepted parameter r0114 0 recommends a different frequency that can deviate from the entered pulse frequency by several Hertz This frequency should be entered in p0113 6 After entering the frequency in p0113 parameter p0009 on the Control Unit must be set to 0 Ready again 7 The Control Unit re initializes After booting the pulse frequencies recommended in r0114 i i 1 2 can be entered in parameter p1800 Pulse frequency of the DO VECTOR NOTICE The pulse frequency entered in p1800 must correspond precisely to the value given in r0114 i otherwise the entry will be rejected Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5SE00189855A Functions Monitoring and Protective Functions 9 2 Drive Functions 9 2 9 4 Maximum output frequency achieved by increasing the pulse frequency Maximum output frequencies achieved by increasing the pulse frequency By multiplying
183. R 0 OFF2 Contin Help A v OK E Fa e E F5 When the SMC30 is connected for encoder evaluation with option K50 it is recognized by the AOP30 and a screen is displayed in which you can enter the encoder data To navigate through the selection fields choose lt F2 gt or lt F3 gt To activate a selection choose lt F5 gt Predefined encoders can be easily set by selecting parameter p0400 encoder type selection 3001 1024 HTL A B R at X521 X531 3002 1024 TTL A B R at X521 X531 3003 2048 HTL A B R at X521 X531 3005 1024 HTL A B at X521 X531 3006 1024 TTL A B at X521 X531 3007 2048 HTL A B at X521 X531 3008 2048 TTL A B at X521 X531 3009 1024 HTL A B unipolar at X521 X531 3011 2048 HTL A B unipolar at X521 X531 3020 2048 TTL A B R with sense to X520 Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 169 Commissioning 5 5 First commissioning with the AOP30 Note In the factory setting an HTL encoder is bipolar with 1024 pulses per revolution and a 24 V power supply The section Electrical Installation contains two connection examples for HTL and TTL encoders Note If the connected encoder does not match any of the encoders predefined in p0400 follow the simple procedure below for entering the encoder data e Via p0400 select an encoder type whose data is similar to that of the connected encoder e Select User defined encoders
184. SINAMICS G150 Converter Cabinet Units 75 kW to 1500 kW Operating Instructions 10 2008 SINAMICS SIEMENS SIEMENS SINAMICS SINAMICS G150 Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions Control version V2 6 SP1 10 2008 A5E00189855A Foreword Safety information Device Overview Mechanical installation Electrical installation Commissioning Operation Setpoint channel and closed loop control Output terminals Functions Monitoring and Protective Functions O O IN O 0O IA 0O IN Diagnosis faults and alarms EN O Maintenance and servicing Technical specifications EN N Appendix gt Legal information Warning notice system This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety as well as to prevent damage to property The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol These notices shown below are graded according to the degree of danger NDANGER indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken NWARNING indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken NCAUTION with a safety alert symbol indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper prec
185. SO 9001 by an independent authority Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 ASE00189855A Device Overview 2 2 Applications features and design Service Our worldwide sales and service network offers our customers consulting services tailored to their needs provides support with planning and design and offers a range of training courses For detailed contact information and the current link to our Internet pages refer to chapter Diagnosis faults and alarms section Service and Support Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 23 Device Overview 2 3 Design 2 3 Design The SINAMICS G150 cabinet units are characterized by their compact modular and service friendly design A wide range of electrical and mechanical components enable the drive system to be optimized for the appropriate requirements Two cabinet unit versions are available depending on the options that are chosen 2 3 1 Version A All the required power supply connection components such as the main circuit breaker circuit breakers main contactor line fuses radio interference suppression filter motor components and additional protection and monitoring devices can be installed as required The cabinet unit comprises up to two cabinet panels with a total width of between 800 and 1600 mm depending on the output and 3200 mm for units that are connected in parallel Line reactor
186. Safety inhibits Operat inhibit Param inhibit Access level Battery status Keyboard test LED test Figure 6 24 Menu structure of the operator panel Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Operation 6 7 Control via the operator panel 6 7 2 Operation screen menu Description The operation screen displays the most important status variables for the drive unit In its condition on delivery it displays the operating status of the drive the direction of rotation the time as well as four drive variables parameters numerically and two in the form of a bar display for continuous monitoring You can call up the operation screen in one of two ways 1 After the power supply has been switched on and the system has ramped up 2 By pressing the MENU key twice and then F5 OK 2 VECTOR OPERATION gt 12 25 30 S NSETP 1450 000 rpm F_OUT 50 0 Hz PACTV 235 0kW U_DC 620 0V AC i a cr 1450 0 0 50 100 ACT Act ar 450 0 0 50 100 Help Change sel par Diag F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 Figure 6 25 Operation screen If a fault occurs the system automatically displays the fault screen see Faults and alarms In LOCAL control mode you can choose to enter the setpoint numerically F2 setpoint The Define operation screen menu can be selected directly using F3 Change The individual parameters of the operation screen can be sele
187. Summary Mi Si i gt Notes 1 The PROFIBUS process data will be interconnected to BICO parameters in accordance with the selected message frame type These BICO parameters cannot be subsequently changed Figure 5 27 Selecting the PROFIBUS message frame Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 155 Commissioning 5 3 Procedure for commissioning via STARTER 156 gt Under PROFIBUS process data exchange drive select the PROFIBUS message frame type Message frame types Standard telegram 1 Standard telegram 2 Standard telegram 3 Standard telegram 4 VIK NAMUR telegram 20 SIEMENS telegram for metal industry 220 PCS7 telegram 352 Free telegram configuration with BICO gt Click Continue gt Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5SE00189855A Commissioning 5 3 Procedure for commissioning via STARTER Entering important parameters Configuration SINAMICS_G150 Important parameters Drive unit a Drive Drive_1 DDS 0 0 p t Ions Control structure Drive setting Set the values for the most important parameters Motor Motor data Current limit 307 50 Arms Optional Motor Dat RA Equivalent Circuit C Minimum speed o o00 RPM Calculation of the t Motor holding brake Maximum speed 5000 000 RPM Encoder Defaults of the setp Ramp up time 20 000 s Drive functions PROFIBUS proces Ramp down time 30 000 s S
188. Thermostatic switch connection connection with terminal X541 1 P24 V T2 Thermostatic switch connection connection with terminal X541 5 D111 Max connectable cross section due to TM31 1 5 mm Drive converter cabinet units 94 Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Electrical installation Commissioning 4 10 Other connections When commissioning via STARTER parameters are assigned to external fault 3 and acknowledged automatically when option L61 or L62 are selected When commissioning via AOP30 the parameter entries required have to be set subsequently Expert access level 02 p2108 01 722 4 Le enon 02 p3111 02 899 2 01 p0745 02 2138 7 Cabinet unit settings If the thermostatic switch for the braking resistor is connected to digital input 11 appropriate settings have to be made so that the drive is brought to a standstill if a fault occurs Diagnosis Set the Expert access level on the operator panel lt Key pushbutton gt lt Access level gt Set Expert and confirm Connect digital input 4 DI4 on the CU320 to the first input of External fault 3 Connect the Operation signal to the second input of External fault 3 Connect Acknowledge fault to digital output 15 D015 on the CU320 Once the device has been successfully commissioned you have to make the following changes Expert access level 02 p2107 03 4022 11
189. Torque messages motor blocked stalled Parameters e r1408 CO BO Control status word 3 e p1744 Motor model speed threshold stall detection e p1745 Motor model error threshold stall detection e p1755 Motor model changeover speed encoderless operation e p1756 Motor model changeover speed hysteresis e p2178 Delay time motor stalled Drive converter cabinet units 346 Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Functions Monitoring and Protective Functions 9 4 Monitoring and protective functions 9 4 5 Thermal motor protection Description The priority of thermal motor protection is to identify critical situations If alarm thresholds are exceeded the user can set parameterizable response options p0610 that enable continued operation e g with reduced power and prevent immediate shutdown The signal characteristic is shown in diagram 902 e Effective protection is also possible without a temperature sensor p4100 0 The temperatures of different motor components stators core rotors can be determined indirectly using a temperature model e Connecting temperature sensors KTY84 or PTC100 to the customer terminal block TM31 terminal X522 7 8 allows the motor temperature to be determined directly In this way accurate start temperatures are available immediately when the motor is switched on again or after a power failure Temperature measurement via KTY The device is connected to terminals X522 7 anode
190. VDE mm 4 x 240 4 x 240 6 x 240 Fixing screw M12 2 holes M12 2 holes M12 3 holes Protective conductor connection Fixing screw M12 2 holes M12 2 holes M12 18 holes Max motor cable length shielded unshielded m 300 450 300 450 300 450 Dimensions standard version Width mm 600 600 1000 Height mm 2000 2000 2000 Depth mm 600 600 600 Power block frame size HX HX JX Weight without options approx kg 670 670 940 Recommended protection Line and semi cond protection 3NE1435 2 3NE1447 2 3NE1448 2 Rated current A 560 670 850 frame size to DIN 43620 1 3 3 3 464 Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Technical specifications 12 3 Technical specitications Order number 6SL3710 1GH34 7CA0 1GH35 8CA0 1GH37 4CA0 1 Rated output of a typical 6 pole standard induction motor based on I or IH at 690 V 3 AC 50 Hz 2 The base load current I1 is based on a duty cycle of 110 for 60 s or 150 for 10 s with a duty cycle duration of 300 s see Overload capability 3 The base load current IH is based on a duty cycle of 150 for 60 s or 160 for 10 s with a duty cycle duration of 300 s see Overload capability 4 The current values given here are based on the rated output current 5 The recommendations for the North American market in AWG or MCM must be taken from the appropriate NEC National Electrical Code or CEC Canadian Electrical Code standards
191. aaa aa aiae 330 9 3 2 1 Bypass with synchronizer with degree of overlapping p1260 1 00 eeeeeeeeeenteeeeetteeeeeenaes 331 9 3 2 2 Bypass with synchronizer without degree of overlapping p1260 2 Lssssssssesersseerreeerresre 333 9 3 2 3 Bypass without synchronizer P1260 3 eeecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseneeeeeseeeeeeseeeaeeseneaeeeeeenaees 335 9 324 VRUNCON GIAQKAM 5 22252 c2 saneyta cata e ges 32 suineadaedieadndacee indi anpandarigateyiieeiansdeaaadaneataieas 336 9 32 59 Parameters enhi a aiaa AEE i ea ee eli ane ei 337 9 3 3 Extended braking CONTON oen banca cobe vedacd E E R 338 9 3 4 Extended monitoring TUNCHIONS seene EA ERE 340 9 4 Monitoring and protective FUNCTIONS seses eee eect EEEE NE EEEE NE Ei 342 9 4 1 Protecting power components ceeceeecceceeeee cece ca eeaececececescaaeceeeeeeeseaeaeeeeeeesenisaeeeeeeeseneaees 342 9 4 2 Thermal monitoring and overload responses cceeeceeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeaeeeseeeeeeseeaaees 343 9 4 3 BIOCK protection scifi 2cesesedaseeths sad iat antai cb regi e at ea aioe aa aea E ataie ddevevieetowesea laeedeaanen 345 9 4 4 Stall protection only for vector control e eee eceeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaaeeseeaaeeeseeaeeeseenaeeeeeeiteeees 346 9 4 5 Thermal motor protection siren eked et eee E ahi eden hana teak ete 347 Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 11 Table of contents 10 Diagnosis faults and ala
192. al installation 4 7 Power connections 4 7 Power connections WARNING Swapping the input and output terminals can destroy the device Swapping or short circuiting the DC link terminals can destroy the device The contactor and relay operating coils that are connected to the same supply network as the device or are located near the device must be connected to overvoltage limiters e g RC elements The device must not be operated via a residual current operated device DIN VDE 0160 4 7 1 Connection cross sections and cable lengths Connection cross sections Cable lengths 62 The connection cross sections for the line connection motor connection and ground connection for your device are specified in the tables provided in the Technical specifications section The maximum permissible cable lengths are specified for standard cable types or cable types recommended by SIEMENS Longer cables can only be used after consultation The listed cable length represents the actual distance between the converter and the motor taking account factors such as parallel laying current carrying capacity and the laying factor e Unshielded cable e g Protodur NYY max 450 m e Shielded cable e g Protodur NYCWY Protoflex EMV 3 Plus max 300 m Note The cable lengths specified are also valid if a motor choke is in use option L08 Note The PROTOFLEX EMV 3 PLUS shielded cable recommended by Siemens
193. aling relay ALARM 1 mid position contact 12 Signaling relay ALARM 1 NC contact 14 Signaling relay ALARM 1 NO contact 21 Signaling relay ALARM 2 mid position contact 22 Signaling relay ALARM 2 NC contact 24 Signaling relay ALARM 2 NO contact Max connectable cross section 2 5 mm Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 101 Electrical installation 4 10 Other connections Diagnostics Messages output during operation and in the event of faults meaning of LEDs on B101 are described in the Additional Operating Instructions of the Operating Instructions 4 10 16 Communication Board Ethernet CBE20 Option G33 Description Interface module CBE20 is used for communication via PROFINET The module is delivered mounted in a supplementary pack on the CU320 Control Unit and must be installed line side in the option slot of the CU320 Control Unit 4 Ethernet interfaces are available on the module Diagnosis of the function mode and communication are possible via LEDs Interface overview A isc m Port 1 1 PF Oo eA Ar Y Port 2 X1400 interfaces Ethernet interfaces Port 3 et AN Port 4 O O LEDs Sync green Fault red Figure 4 13 Communicati
194. anner w f 16 17 Spanner or socket spanner w f 18 19 Hexagon socket spanner size 8 Torque wrench up to 50 Nm Screwdriver size 2 Screwdriver Torx T20 Screwdriver Torx T30 Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Electrical installation 4 3 Important safety precautions 4 3 Important safety precautions J N WARNING The cabinet units are operated with high voltages All connection procedures must be carried out when the cabinet is de energized All work on the device must be carried out by trained personnel only Non observance of these warning notices can result in death severe personal injury or substantial property damage Work on an open device must be carried out with extreme caution because external supply voltages may be present The power and control terminals may be live even when the motor is not running Dangerously high voltage levels are still present in the device up to five minutes after it has been disconnected due to the DC link capacitors For this reason the unit should not be opened until a reasonable period of time has elapsed Reforming the DC link capacitors The storage period should not exceed two years If the device is stored for more than two years its DC link capacitors must be reformed during commissioning The reforming procedure is described in Maintenance and servicing The operator is responsible for ensuring that the motor converter an
195. arameter macros Parameter macro p0015 G150 cabinet unit This macro is used to make default settings for operating the cabinet unit A 2 Parameter macros Table A 1 Parameter macro p0015 G150 cabinet unit Sink Source Parameter Description DO Parameter Description DO p0400 0 Encoder type selection Vector 9999 Other Vector p0404 0 Encoder configuration Vector 200008h Vector p0405 0 Square wave encoder track A B Vector 9h Bipolar like A B track Vector p0408 0 Rotary encoder pulse no Vector 1024 1024 pulses per revolution Vector p0420 0 Encoder connection Vector 0x2 Encoder connection terminal Vector p0500 Technology application Vector 1 Pumps fans Vector p0600 Motor temperature sensor for Vector 0 No sensor Vector monitoring p0601 Motor temperature sensor type Vector 0 No sensor Vector p0603 Cl Motor temperature Vector r4105 Sensor on TM31 TM31 p0604 Motor overtemperature alarm Vector 120 120 C Vector threshold p0605 Motor overtemperature fault Vector 155 155 C Vector threshold p0606 Motor overtemperature timer Vector 0 Os Vector p0610 Response to motor overtemperature Vector 1 Display fault for alarm Imax red Vector condition p0700 0 Macro binector input BI Vector 70006 TM31 terminals Vector p0864 BI Infeed operation Vector 1 Vector p1000 0 Macro connector inputs Cl for Vector 10002 TM31_Al0 Vector speed setpo
196. ard Parameter r0108 17 indicates whether it has been activated Function diagram FD 8010 FD 8013 Parameters e p2150 e p2151 e p2161 e p2181 e p2182 e p2183 e p2184 e p2185 e p2190 e p2192 e 12198 4 e 2198 5 Drive converter cabinet units Speed messages Load monitoring Hysteresis speed 3 Cl Speed setpoint Speed threshold 3 Load monitoring response Load monitoring speed threshold 1 Load monitoring speed threshold 2 Load monitoring speed threshold 3 Load monitoring speed threshold 1 upper Load monitoring speed threshold 3 lower Load monitoring delay time BO ZSW monitoring 2 n_setp lt p2161 BO ZSW monitoring 2 n_setp lt 0 Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 341 Functions Monitoring and Protective Functions 9 4 Monitoring and protective functions 9 4 Monitoring and protective functions 9 4 1 Protecting power components Description SINAMICS power units offer comprehensive functions for protecting power components Table 9 8 General protection for power units Protection against Protective measure Response Overcurrent Monitoring with two thresholds e First threshold exceeded A30031 A30032 A30033 Current limiting in phase U has responded Pulsing in this phase is inhibited for one pulse period F30017 gt OFF2 is triggered if the threshold is exceeded too often e Second threshold exceeded F30001 Overcurrent gt OFF2 DC link overvolta
197. are of the voltage 1070 1158 0 85 The maximum possible braking power is therefore 85 Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 97 Electrical installation 4 10 Other connections 4 10 13 Thermistor Motor Protection Unit Option L83 L84 Description Connection Diagnostics 4 10 14 PT100 Evaluation Unit Option L86 Description 98 This option includes the thermistor motor protection unit with PTB approval for PTC thermistor sensors PTC resistor type A for warning and shutdown The power supply for the thermistor motor protection unit is provided inside the converter where the evaluation is also performed Option L83 triggers the external alarm 1 A7850 if a fault occurs Option L84 triggers the external fault 1 F7860 if a fault occurs Table 4 38 F127 F125 connection for thermistor motor protection unit Equipment designation F127 T1 T2 Description of function Thermistor motor protection alarm F125 T1 T2 Thermistor motor protection shutdown The PTC thermistor sensors are connected directly to terminals T1 and T2 of the evaluation unit Table 4 39 Maximum cable length for the sensor circuit Line cross section in mm Line length in m 2 5 2 x 2800 1 5 2 x 1500 0 5 2 x 500 Messages output during operation and in the event of faults meaning of LEDs on F125 F1
198. ary of the line contactor feedback is DO 1 CU_G displayed Parameter r0722 CU_DI_Status splayed Bit 5 DI 5 X132 2 To confirm the set connection choose lt F5 gt Help Cancel OK F1 F2 Fs Fa F5 N DANGER If the monitoring function for the main contactor or circuit breaker checkback signal is not activated then the drive could be powered up even if the main contactor or circuit breaker on an individual system fails This could overload and damage the input rectifiers on the individual system NOTICE When resetting restoring the parameterization to the factory setting this setting must be again made after the drive unit has been recommissioned Settings for motor connection to a motor with one winding system Before the commissioning a motor with several winding systems is automatically defined The setting for a one winding system is made during commissioning by setting parameter p7003 to 0 Settings via the AOP30 During commissioning you are asked whether a motor is connected to a one winding system or multiple winding system This setting must be made according to the motor connected NOTICE If the motor with a one winding system is not set using p7003 0 then the drive can be powered down tripped during the motor identification routine with an overcurrent fault message The system will not be properly tuned NOTICE When resetting restoring the parameteriza
199. ary supply is particularly recommended for low power lines susceptible to short time voltage dips or power failures With an external supply independent of the main supply warnings and fault messages may still be displayed on the operator panel and internal protection and monitoring devices if the main supply fails N DANGER When the external auxiliary supply is connected dangerous voltages are present in the cabinet unit even when the main circuit breaker is open NOTICE An external auxiliary supply infeed must always be used if the automatic restart WEA function is to be used with integrated EMERGENCY OFF option L57 or EMERGENCY STOP option L59 L60 Otherwise the automatic restart function does not work Table 4 11 Connection options for the external auxiliary voltage depending on the selected options Cabinet unit option External supply of auxiliary voltage independent of the main supply 24 V DC 230 V AC 230 V AC 230 V AC terminal X40 with Terminal X9 Terminal X40 terminal X40 uals L13 L26 when gt 800 With no further X options Version C L13 X L26 when I gt 800 A X L83 X X L84 X X L86 X X L87 X X 1 This is required not only when the open and closed loop control but also when the 230 V AC load thermistor motor protection PT100 evaluation or insulation monitor is to remain in operation if the main supply
200. as been completed the pulses are inhibited and parameter p1910 is reset to 0 e Encoder adjustment after the measurement has been completed the pulses are inhibited and parameter p1990 is reset to 0 e Rotating measurement after the measurement has been completed the pulses are inhibited and parameter p1960 is reset to 0 e After all of the measurements activated using p1900 have been successfully completed p1900 itself is set to 0 Note To set the new controller setting permanently the data must be saved with p0977 or p0971 on the non volatile CompactFlash card N DANGER During motor identification the drive might set the motor in motion The EMERGENCY STOP functions must be fully operational during commissioning To protect the machines and personnel the relevant safety regulations must be observed Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 295 Functions Monitoring and Protective Functions 9 2 Drive Functions 9 2 1 1 Description 296 Standstill measurement Motor identification with p1910 is used for determining the motor parameters at standstill see also p1960 speed controller optimization e Equivalent circuit diagram data p1910 1 e Magnetization characteristic p1910 3 For control engineering reasons you are strongly advised to carry out motor identification because the equivalent circuit diagram data motor cable resistance IGBT o
201. ase p0918 is read only and shows the address setting A change to the switch only becomes effective after the Control Unit has been switched on e Entering parameter p0918 via the operator panel You can only do this if the address has been set to 0 or 127 that is all switches from S1 to S7 are set to ON or OFF In this case changes become effective immediately Table 6 9 PROFIBUS address switches Switch Significance Technical specifications 1 20 14 Significance 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 S2 21 2 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 s3 22 4 tt I jon S4 23 8 PR er aE OFF S1 oe S7 4 a gt Example EET EE ON Ed Eil Ror we 25 ROA 1 4 32 37 Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 213 Operation 6 6 PROFIBUS Setting the PROFIBUS ID number The PROFIBUS Ident Number PNO ID can be set using p2042 SINAMICS can be operated on PROFIBUS with various identities This allows a PROFIBUS GSD that is independent of the device to be used e g PROFIdrive VIK NAMUR with Ident Number 3AA0 hex e 0 SINAMICS S G e 1 VIK NAMUR New settings do not become active until after POWER ON reset or download Note The advantages of Totally Integrated Automation TIA can only be utilized when selecting o 6 6 3 Monitoring Telegram failure Description 214 Following a telegram failure and after a monitoring time has elapsed t_An bit r2043
202. ass with synchronizer without degree of overlapping 91260 2 is activated contactor K2 to be closed is only closed when contactor K1 is opened anticipatory type synchronization Phasing of the motor voltage before synchronization must be set such that there is an initial jump upstream of the supply to which synchronization should be carried out This done by setting the synchronization setpoint p3809 A phase and frequency difference of around zero is produced when closing contactor K2 by braking the motor in the brief period in which both contactors are open In order for the function to run correctly the moment of inertia must be sufficient Due to the expense of determining the synchronization setpoint 93809 the decoupling restrictor is not needed The flying restart function must be activated p1200 1 Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 333 Functions Monitoring and Protective Functions 9 3 Extended functions Line i Converter with Voltage Sensing Module VSM10 Protection device ae Interlock to prevent simultaneous closing Figure 9 12 Example circuit for bypass with synchronizer without degree of overlapping Activation The bypass with synchronizer without degree of overlapping p1260 2 function can only be activated using a control signal It cannot be activated using a speed threshold or a fault Parameterization Once the bypass with
203. at X520 or X521 X531 High signal level Ux High 17 Vcc V HTL unipolar Low 10 Vec V Low signal level UL High 0 7 V HTL unipolar Low 0 2 Vv High signal level Unaitt 3 Vcc V HTL bipolar 2 Low signal level ULaitt Vcc 3 V HTL bipolar 2 Signal frequency fs 300 kHz Edge clearance tmin 100 ns Zero pulse inactive time tLo 500 tavo BHi tHi 2 3 ns before and after A B high Zero pulse active time thi 500 tALo BHi 2 X tlo 3 ns while A B high and beyond 108 1 Other signal levels according to the RS 422 standard 2 The absolute level of the individual signals varies between 0 V and Vcc of the measuring system 3 taLo Bhi is not a specified value but is the time between the falling edge of track A and the next but one rising edge of track B 4 The threshold can be set via p0405 04 switching threshold the factory setting is Low a fs gt Figure 4 17 Signal characteristic of the A and B track between two edges Time between two edges with pulse encoders Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Electrical installation 4 10 Other connections Tolerance range Tolerance range tio i forrising ty i forfalling i tio gt edgeofthe edgeofthe zero pulse t zero pulse i ALo BHi i l zs a Figure 4 18 Position of the zero pulse to the track signals Drive converter cabinet units Operating Ins
204. ata System of units physical Motor Motor data Optional Motor Dat Motor data Induction motor rotary K K K K K K K p350 0 Motor stator resistance cold Calculation of the t p354 0 Motor rotor resistance cold damping resistanc 0 01200 oem Motor holding brake p356 0 Motor stator leakage inductance 0 21262 mH Encoder p358 0 Motor rotor leakage inductance i damping induc 0 23138 mH Defaults of the sete p360 0 Motor magnetizing inductance magn inductanc 6 59758 mH Drive functions i l i i ROFIBUS proces mportant paramete Summary iii A The equivalent circuit diagram data must be entered completely Note If the equivalent circuit diagram data are not fully known deselect their input on the Motor Data page and have them calculated Figure 5 20 Entering equivalent circuit diagram data gt If required enter the equivalent circuit diagram data gt Click Continue gt Drive converter cabinet units 146 Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Commissioning 5 3 Procedure for commissioning via STARTER Calculating the motor controller data Configuration SINAMICS_G150 Calculation of the Motor Controller Data Drive unit Drive Drive_1 DDS 0 MDS 0 Options Control structure Drive setting Motor y Motor data Calculation of the motor controller data Optional Motor Dat No calculation Equivalent Circuit C12 Complete calculation wit
205. ata set Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5SE00189855A Operation 6 3 Basic information about the drive system Table 6 1 Command data set selection and display Select bit 1 Select bit 0 Display CDS p0811 p0810 selected r0836 active r0050 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 2 1 0 2 2 3 1 1 3 3 If a command data set which does not exist is selected the current data set remains active CDS 01 r0836 0 10836 1 CDS selected Jee OA a CDS effective Figure 6 4 Example Switching between command data set 0 and 1 DDS Drive data set A drive data set contains various adjustable parameters that are relevant with respect to open and closed loop drive control e Numbers of the assigned motor and encoder data sets p0186 Assigned motor data set MDS p0187 to p0189 up to 3 assigned encoder data sets EDS e Various control parameters e g Fixed speed setpoints 91001 to p1015 Speed limits min max p1080 p1082 Characteristic data of ramp function generator p1120 ff Characteristic data of controller p1240 ff The parameters that are grouped together in the drive data set are identified in the SINAMICS parameter list by Data set DDS and are assigned an index 0 n It is possible to parameterize several drive data sets You can switch easily between different drive configurations control type motor encoder by selecting the cor
206. ate NEC National Electrical Code or CEC Canadian Electrical Code standards Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 425 Technical specifications 12 3 Technical specifications 12 3 2 Table 12 13 Version C 380 V 480 V 3 AC part 1 Cabinet unit version C 380 V 480 V 3 AC Order number 6SL3710 1GE32 1CA0 1GE32 6CA0 1GE33 1CA0 Unit rating for IL at 50 Hz 400 V kW 110 132 160 for IH at 50 Hz 400 V 7 kW 90 110 132 for IL at 60 Hz 460 V 2 hp 150 200 250 for I at 60 Hz 460 V 2 hp 125 150 200 Output current Rated current In A 210 260 310 Base load current IL A 205 250 302 Base load current IH A 178 233 277 Input current Rated input current 5 A 229 284 338 Input current max A 335 410 495 Current requirements for 24 VDC JA 1 1 1 1 1 35 auxiliary supply Connection voltages Line voltage Vacrms 380 V 3 AC 10 to 480 V 3 AC 10 15 lt 1 min Line frequency Hz 47 to 63 Hz Electronics power supply Voc 24 20 4 28 8 Power loss kW 2 9 3 8 4 4 Cooling air requirement m s 0 17 0 23 0 36 Sound pressure level Lpa dB A 67 68 69 73 69 73 1 m at 50 60 Hz Line connection recommended DIN VDE mm2 2x70 2x95 2x 120 maximum DIN VDE mm2 4 x 240 4 x 240 4 x 240 Fixing screw M12 1 hole M12 1 hole M12 1 hole Motor connection recommended DIN VDE mm 2x50 2x70 2x95
207. ately with option M70 see Electrical installation EMC compliant installation The cable shields must be properly applied and the cabinet properly grounded at the appropriate points see Electrical installation EMC compliant installation L The voltage for the fan transformer T1 T10 for versions A and C and the internal power supply A1 T10 for version A only with option L13 L26 L83 L84 L86 L87 must be adapted to the supply voltage for the cabinet unit Larger cabinet units have 2 fan transformers T1 T10 T20 which must be set jointly For units that are connected in parallel the fan transformers must be set jointly in each sub cabinet see section Electrical installation Power connections Adjusting the fan voltage T 1 T10 and Electrical installation Power connections Adjusting the internal power supply A1 T10 L 50 Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Electrical installation 4 2 Checklist for electrical installation Item Activity Fulfilled Complete 9 Before the cabinet is operated from a non grounded supply IT system the connection C C bracket for the basic interference suppression device must be removed see Electrical installation Power connections Removing the connection bracket for the interference suppression capacitor with operation from a non grounded supply 10 T
208. ater es 365 VAST Installation AeviCe tsen e a a a a a aaan 366 11 3 2 Using crane lifting lugs to transport power DIOCKS s sssssssissssrisesrrssttrrssttrssttnrssttnnsttnnssennnnt 367 11 4 Replacing COMPONENMS ccecesecccceceeeeeeeeecee cee ceeeeeeeceesaaeeeceeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeseeaeeceeeeeseesenieeeeeeeees 369 11 4 1 Replacing the filter Mats ee eceeeeeceeeeee cece ceeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeaaeeeeeeaaeeeeeaaeeeseeaeeseeaeeeseeneeseeneeeaes 369 11 4 2 Replacing the power block type FX eeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeesaaeeeeeseeeeesaeeeetieeeeetnaeeeeea 370 11 4 3 Replacing the power block type GX oo eee eeeeeeeeeeeee ee ee enne ee eee aee ee taeeeeeteeeeetaeeeeesieeeeesnaeeeeeaa 372 11 4 4 Replacing the power block type HX cecceeceeeeeeenee eee eeeeneeeeeeieeeeetaeeeeeteeeeetaeeeetieeeeeeneeeetaa 374 11 4 5 Replacing the power block type UX ooo eeeeceeeeseeeeeeeee cece ee eeneeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeseeeeetaeeeetiaeeeeetnaeeeeeaa 378 11 4 6 Replacing the Control Interface Board type FX 00 eee ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeteeeeeeseeeeeteeeeeeteeeeees 382 11 4 7 Replacing the Control Interface Board type GX 2 eceeeeeeeeneeeeeeneeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeetaeeeeniaeeeees 384 11 4 8 Replacing the Control Interface Board type HX c ee eeceeceeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeteeeeeeteeeeennaeeeeees 386 11 4 9 Replacing the Control Interface Board type UX eee eeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeteeeestaeeeeees 388 T14 T0 Replac
209. ating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Operation 6 5 Setpoint sources e p4058 Analog inputs characteristic value y1 e p4059 Analog inputs characteristic value x2 e p4060 Analog inputs characteristic value y2 e p4063 Analog inputs offset Note In the factory setting and after basic commissioning an input current of 20 mA is equal to the main setpoint 100 reference speed p2000 which has been set to the maximum speed p1082 Example Changing Analog Input 0 from Current to Voltage Input 10 to 10 V Table 6 5 Example setting analog input 0 5 0 V Current voltage switchover 7 Set current voltage selector to Voltage V p4056 0 4 Set analog input type 0 to 10 V 10 V Note The new analog input must then be stored on the CompactFlash card so that it is protected in the event of a power failure F3505 Fault Analog input wire breakage The fault is triggered when the analog input type p4056 is set to 3 4 20 mA with open circuit monitoring and the input current of 2 mA has been undershot The fault value can be used to determine the analog input in question Table 6 6 Fault screen TM Analog input wire breakage Component number F value 00000003 0x00000003 hex 3 module A60 Cause i TM31 Wire break analog input 4 module A61 optional Remedy 0 Analog input 0 X521 1 2 TM31 Check analog input cables 1 Analog input 1 X521 3 4 Back
210. ating without encoder e Pole position identification No flying restart is carried out for V f control and sensorless closed loop vector control Commissioning Simulation is activated using p1272 1 the following pre requisites must be fulfilled e The drive unit must have been commissioned for the first time default Standard induction motors e The DC link voltage must lie below 40 V observe the tolerance of the DC link voltage sensing Alarm A07825 simulation mode activated must be output during simulation operation Parameters e p1272 Simulation operation Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 321 Functions Monitoring and Protective Functions 9 2 Drive Functions 9 2 12 Direction reversal Description The direction of rotation of the motor can be reversed using direction reversal via p1821 without having to change the motor rotating field by interchanging two phases on the motor and inverting the encoder signals using p0410 Reversal via p1821 can be detected from the motor direction of rotation The speed setpoint and actual value torque setpoint and actual value remain unchanged as does the relative position change A pulse inhibit must be set prior to attempting reversal Reversing can be set differently for each drive data set Note When changing over the drive data set to differently set reversing and with pulse approval fault F7434 is issued
211. ation 264 SMC30 107 SMC30 Sensor Module Cabinet Mounted option K50 107 Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A SMC30 connection examples 114 Speed controller 270 Speed controller adaptation 276 Speed controller optimization 298 Speed controller pre control 272 Speed limitation 255 Stall protection 346 Standstill measurement 296 STARTER 123 Commissioning 125 Connection via serial interface 161 Creating the project 125 Installation 124 Online operation via PROFINET 239 Starting the drive project 160 User interface 124 Storage 39 Suppression Speed 254 Switching between clockwise and counter clockwise rotation 232 T Technical specifications 417 General 410 Version A 380 V 480 V 3 AC 418 Version A 500 V 600 V 3 AC 432 Version A 660 V 690 V 3 AC 446 Version C 380 V 480 V 3 AC 426 Version C 500 V 600 V 3 AC 440 Version C 660 V 690 V 3 AC 458 Technology controller 327 Telegram selection user defined 215 Telegrams and process data 215 Temperature sensor 76 Thermal monitoring 343 Thermal motor protection 347 Thermistor Motor Protection Unit Option L83 L84 98 Timeout monitoring 234 TM31 71 TM31 front view 72 TM31 connection overview 73 Tool 43 54 365 Torque limiting 282 Transport units Connecting PE buses 60 Connecting the DC link connections 61 Connecting the DRIVE CLiQ topology 61 Connecti
212. autions are not taken CAUTION without a safety alert symbol indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken NOTICE indicates that an unintended result or situation can occur if the corresponding information is not taken into account If more than one degree of danger is present the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be used A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property damage Qualified Personnel The device system may only be set up and used in conjunction with this documentation Commissioning and operation of a device system may only be performed by qualified personnel Within the context of the safety notes in this documentation qualified persons are defined as persons who are authorized to commission ground and label devices systems and circuits in accordance with established safety practices and standards Proper use of Siemens products Trademarks Note the following WARNING Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical documentation If products and components from other manufacturers are used these must be recommended or approved by Siemens Proper transport storage installation assembly commissioning operation and maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any
213. ave factory settings to ROM Cancel Choose Target system gt Copy from RAM to ROM get sy py i Gz Note The Copy from RAM to ROM icon is only active when the drive unit is selected in the project navigator When the parameters have been reset to the factory settings initial commissioning needs to be carried out Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 177 Commissioning 5 7 Parameter reset to factory settings Drive converter cabinet units 178 Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Operation 6 1 Chapter content This chapter provides information on the following e Basic information about the drive system e Selecting command sources via PROFldrive Terminal strip NAMUR terminal block e Specifying setpoints via PROFldrive Analog inputs Motorized potentiometer Fixed setpoints e Control via the AOP30 operator panel Monitoring functions Functions Protective ura EA Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 179 Operation 6 2 General information about command and setpoint sources 6 2 General information about command and setpoint sources Description Four default settings are available for selecting the command sources and four for selecting the setpoint sources for the SINAMICS G150 cabinet unit The choice no selection is also available if selected no default settings are app
214. binet unit and motor connection terminals Cabinet unit connection terminals Motor connection terminals U2 T1 U V2 T2 V W2 T3 W In contrast to the connection for the clockwise phase sequence two phases have to be reversed with a counter clockwise phase sequence looking at the drive shaft Note If an incorrect rotating field was connected when the cables were installed and the rotating field cannot be corrected by swapping the motor cables it can be corrected when commissioning the drive via p1821 rotating field direction reversal by changing the rotating field and thus enabling a direction reversal see section Functions Monitoring and protective functions Direction reversal With motors that can be operated in a star delta configuration the windings must be checked to ensure that they have been connected properly Please refer to the relevant documentation for the motor and note the required insulation voltage for operating the cabinet unit 4 7 3 Adjusting the fan voltage T1 T10 The power supply for the device fan 230 V 1 AC in the Power Module T1 T10 is taken from the main supply system using a transformer The location of the transformer is indicated in the layout diagrams supplied The transformer is fitted with primary taps so that it can be fine tuned to the line voltage Drive converter cabinet units 64 Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Electrical installation
215. cable parallel to the control cable the cable cross section must be at least 16 mm e If relays contactors and inductive or capacitive loads are connected the switching relays or contactors must be provided with anti interference elements Cable installation e Cables that are subject to or sensitive to interference should be laid as far apart from each other as possible e All cables are to be laid as close as possible to grounded enclosure parts such as mounting plates or cabinet frames This reduces both noise radiation and interference injection e Reserve cores of signal and data cables must be grounded at both ends to achieve an additional shielding effect e Long cables should be shortened or laid in noise resistant areas to avoid additional connecting points Drive converter cabinet units 58 Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Electrical installation Shield connection I O interfacing Filtering cables 4 5 EMC compliant design If it is impossible to avoid crossing cables conductors or cables that carry signals of different classes must cross at right angles especially if they carry sensitive signals that are subject to interference Class 1 unshielded cables for lt 60 V DC unshielded cables for lt 25 V AC shielded analog signal cables shielded bus and data cables operator panel interfaces incremental absolute encoder lines Class 2 unshielded cables for gt 60 V DC and s 230 V D
216. cal specitications Order number Recommended protection Line protection with option L26 Rated current frame size to DIN 43620 1 Line and semiconductor protection without option L26 Rated current Frame size to DIN 43620 1 6SL3710 A 1GH28 5AA0 3NA3132 6 125 1 3NE1022 2 125 00 1GH31 0AA0 3NA3132 6 125 1 3NE1022 2 125 00 1GH31 2AA0 3NA3136 6 160 1 3NE1224 2 160 1 1 Rated output of a typical 6 pole standard induction motor based on IL or In at 690 V 3 AC 50 Hz 2 The base load current IL is based on a duty cycle of 110 for 60 s or 150 for 10 s with a duty cycle duration of 300 s see Overload capability 3 The base load current In is based on a duty cycle of 150 for 60 s or 160 for 10 s with a duty cycle duration of 300 s see Overload capability 4 The current values given here are based on the rated output current 5 The recommendations for the North American market in AWG or MCM must be taken from the appropriate NEC National Electrical Code or CEC Canadian Electrical Code standards Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5SE00189855A 447 Technical specifications 12 3 Technical specifications Table 12 24 Version A 660 V 690 V 3 AC part 2 Frame size to DIN 43620 1 1 Order number 6SL3710 1GH31 5AA0 1GH31 8AA0 1GH32 2AA0 U
217. cation 295 Motorized potentiometer 206 N NAMUR Outlet for external auxiliaries option BO3 119 Separate 24 V DC power supply option B02 119 NAMUR terminal block option BOO 117 Non grounded system 68 O OFF Key 232 ON Key 232 Online operation with STARTER 239 Operating hours counters 320 Operation on a non grounded system 68 Operation screen 221 486 Operator input inhibit parameters inhibit key 234 Operator panel 164 Overview 219 Option short codes 35 Outgoing section for external auxiliary equipment for NAMUR option B03 119 Output terminals 287 Overload capability 416 Overload responses 343 P Parameter reset 176 Parameter reset via STARTER 177 Resetting Parameters via AOP30 176 Parameterization errors 238 Permanent magnet synchronous motors 283 Power block Crane lifting lugs 367 Frame size FX replacement 370 Frame size GX replacement 372 Frame size HX replacement 374 Frame size JX replacement 378 Power connections 62 Connecting the motor and power cables 63 Power supply internal 67 Preparation Mechanical installation 42 PROFIBUS 209 Bus terminating resistor 211 Connectors 210 Setting the PROFIBUS Address 213 PROFIBUS link 209 PROFINET IO 245 Addresses 247 RT and IRT 246 Protecting power components 342 Protective functions 342 PT100 evaluation unit option L86 98 Q Quality 22 R Ramp function generator 256 Reference model 275 Relay out
218. cause of the braking resistor overload must be eliminated and the fault code acknowledged 10 3 4 External fault 3 Causes Fault code F7862 External fault 3 is triggered when the braking unit fitted for options L61 and L62 triggers a fault The drive is switched off with OFF2 Remedy The cause of the braking unit overload must be eliminated and the fault code acknowledged Drive converter cabinet units 360 Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Diagnosis faults and alarms 10 4 Service and Support 10 4 Service and Support Service and Support helpline Online Support Field service If you need help and do not know who to contact we make sure that you receive all the help you need as quickly as possible The helpline ensures that a specialist in your area can provide you with professional support The helpline in Germany for example is available 24 hours a day 365 days a year German and English are spoken Tel 0180 50 50 111 Our round the clock worldwide online support service provides quick and efficient support in five languages The comprehensive Internet based information system which is available round the clock provides product support services and support tools in the shop Online support provides a wide range of technical information e FAQs tips and tricks downloads current news e Manuals e Helpful programs and software products e http www siemens de automation service amp su
219. ceee entree eeeieeeeetaeeeeesaeeeeeeeeeeesieeeeetiaeeeeeaa 202 6 5 SELPOINUSOUICES SE oie eee tein tee ee as eee ta atta ae aaa AETAT 204 6 5 1 Analog inputs ts seceded isisa chad doeedl dedetes ede dvv tau davv een iaai anaa aaas 204 6 5 2 Motorized potentiometers iea fai adden siete Malan ed nein taint did 206 6 5 3 Fixed Speed setpoints a e a T e eerie tie ae a Seiad et hee eie iad 208 6 6 PROFIBUS cana aan tite eet ates se e teen ie tans tan tng ot etme cette oe te 209 6 6 1 PROFIBUS connections roere ai a aa aa sien ta a acted beta tines odes i aia aS ita 209 6 6 2 Control vias PROFIBUS a a E a a a aa a aiaa i 213 6 6 3 Monitoring Telegram failure ecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeseneaeeeseeeeeesenaeeeseaeeeeaees 214 6 6 4 Telegrams and process data oerein Eia tony etd avd ett TE ENEE EE 215 6 6 5 Structure of he telegram eien ann EEE AE EEE E siete de 217 6 6 5 1 Overview of control words and setpoints cccccceceeeeeeeeeeeceeeeseecaeeeeeeseeecaaeeeeeeeetenseaeeseess 217 6 6 5 2 Overview of status words and actual VAlUCS ce eececeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseneeeeseeeaeeesenaeeeenenaees 218 6 7 Control via the operator Panell cccccceceececceeeceeeeeeeseceenaeeeeeesececsaeeeeeeedseccacaeeeeeesesensieeeeeeeaees 219 6 7 1 Operator panel AOP30 overview and Menu structure 2 ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeteteeeettaeeeeeenaeeeees 219 6 7 2 Operation ScreeniMenUiiees sini dea a e a eee a
220. ces 20 Option L45 The contacts for the EMERGENCY OFF pushbutton are available at C E EMERGENCY terminal X120 and can be picked off so that they can be integrated in a OFF higher level line side protection concept Electrical installation Other pushbutton connections EMERGENCY OFF pushbutton integrated in the door of installed in the the cabinet unit option L45 cabinet door 21 Option L57 EMERGENCY OFF category 0 stops the drive in an uncontrolled C EMERGENCY manner No additional wiring is necessary when implemented in OFF category conjunction with option L45 0 If the cabinet unit is integrated in an external safety circuit however the 230 V AC or contact must be looped in via terminal block X120 Electrical 24V DC installation Other connections EMERGENCY OFF category 0 230 V AC 24 V DC option L57 22 Option L59 EMERGENCY STOP category 1 stops the drive in a controlled manner L C EMERGENCY With this option braking units brake chopper and external braking STOP category resistors may need to be implemented due to the load characteristic 1 230 V AC and to achieve the required shutdown times No additional wiring is necessary when implemented in conjunction with option L45 If the cabinet unit is integrated in an external safety circuit however the contact must be looped in via terminal block X120 The timer relay at K121 must be adapted to match system requirements see Electr
221. cordance with the figure Remove the busbars 12 screws Unscrew the connection to the DC link 8 nuts Remove the retaining screw at the top 1 screw Remove the retaining screws at the bottom 2 screws Disconnect the plug in connections for the fiber optic cables and signal cables 3 plugs On h WRN Remove the connection for the current transformer and associated PE connection 2 plugs 7 Unscrew the two retaining screws for the fan and attach the tool for de installing the power block at this position You can now remove the power block CAUTION When removing the power block ensure that you do not damage any signal cables Installation steps For installation carry out the above steps in reverse order CAUTION The tightening torques specified in the table Tightening torques for connecting current conducting parts must be observed Carefully establish the plug in connections and then ensure that they are secure The screwed connections for the protective covers must only be tightened by hand The fiber optic cable plugs must be remounted at their original slot Fiber optic cables and sockets are accordingly labeled for correct assignment U11 U21 U31 Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 377 Maintenance and servicing 11 4 Replacing components 11 4 5 Replacing the power block type JX Replacing the left hand power b
222. cted using F4 Sel par The corresponding parameter number of the short identifier is displayed using F1 Help and a description of the parameter can be called up Settings When you choose Commissioning service gt AOP settings gt Define operation screen you can adjust the display type and the values displayed as required see Operation AOP30 settings 6 7 3 Parameterization menu You can adjust the device settings in the Parameterization menu The drive software is modular The individual modules are called DOs drive objects Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 221 Operation 6 7 Control via the operator panel The following DOs are available in the SINAMICS G150 e CU General parameters for the Control Unit CU320 e VECTOR Drive control e TM31 Terminal Module TM31 Parameters with identical functions may exist with the same parameter number in more than one DO e g p0002 The AOP30 is used for operating devices that comprise more than one drive so that attention is focused on one drive i e the current drive You can switch between the drives either in the operation screen or in the main menu The corresponding function key is labeled Drive This drive determines the following e Operation screen e Fault and alarm displays e The controller ON OFF of a drive Depending on your requirements you can choose between two AOP display types 1
223. cting up the power supply and the signal cables The connecting cables for 24 V DC and 230 V AC to supply the left hand sub cabinet with power and for the signal cables must be connected Depending on the installed options this will involve up to 3 connecting cables that must be connected from the right hand sub cabinet cabinet panel H A25 to the lower connector sections in the left hand sub cabinet cabinet panel H A24 1 Connecting cable with the connector designation A1 X97 in the lower connector section A1 X97 2 Connecting cable with the connector designation A1 X98 in the lower connector section A1 X98 3 Connecting cable with the connector designation A1 X99 in the lower connector section A1 X99 The cables must be routed so that power cables cannot interfere with data and signals that are being transferred along the connecting cables 4 6 4 Connecting the DRIVE CLiQ topology Connecting up the DRIVE CLiQ topology The DRIVE CLiQ connection from the Power Module in the left hand sub cabinet cabinet field H A49 to the Control Unit CU320 cabinet field H A50 The connecting cable cable number W003 is inserted in the Power Module in the plant and must be inserted in the DRIVE CLiQ socket X102 of the Control Unit The cables must be routed so that power cables cannot cause interference on the DRIVE CLiQ connection Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 61 Electric
224. ctions or conduit thread connections on the basis of the cable cross section and drill the required holes in the blanking plates When the cable is fed in from above ensure that enough room is available if the cable has to be bent because of the cable feeder and cross sections The cable entries should be fed in vertically to minimize transverse forces on the entries see Mechanical installation line connection from above option M13 motor connection from above option M78 Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 41 Mechanical installation 3 3 Assembly 3 3 2 Preparatory steps On site requirements The cabinet units are designed for installation in closed electrical operating areas in compliance with EN 61800 5 1 A closed electrical operating area is a room or area containing electrical equipment which can be accessed by trained personnel only Access is controlled by a door or other form of barricade which can be opened only by means of a key or other tool The room or area is also clearly signed with appropriate warning notices The operating areas must be dry and free of dust The air supplied must not contain any electrically conductive gas vapors or dust which could impair operation It may be necessary to filter the air supplied to the installation room If the air contains dust filter mats option M54 can be installed in front of the ventilation grilles in the cabinet
225. ctor Max connectable cross section 4 mm2 4 10 8 Cabinet anti condensation heating option L55 Description The anti condensation heating is used at low ambient temperatures and high levels of humidity to prevent condensation forming One 100 W heater is installed for a 400 mm and 600 mm cabinet panel and two 100 W heaters for an 800 1000 and 1200 mm cabinet panel The power supply for the heating 110 V 230 V AC must be provided externally and fused at max 16 A N DANGER When the supply voltage for the cabinet anti condensation heating is connected dangerous voltages are present in the cabinet unit even when the main circuit breaker is open Connection Table 4 29 Terminal block X240 connection for cabinet anti condensation heating Terminal Designation Technical specifications 1 L1 110 V 230 V AC 2 N Voltage supply 3 PE Protective conductor Max connectable cross section 4 mm2 Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 87 Electrical installation 4 10 Other connections 4 10 9 EMERGENCY OFF category 0 230 V AC or 24 V DC option L57 Description EMERGENCY OFF category 0 for uncontrolled stop to EN 60204 1 This function involves disconnecting the cabinet unit from the supply via the line contactor bypassing the electronics by means of a safety combination to EN 60204 1 The motor then coasts to a stop To prevent
226. ctor protection without option L26 3NE1331 2 3NE1334 2 3NE1334 2 Rated current A 350 500 500 Frame size to DIN 43620 1 2 2 2 450 Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5SE00189855A Technical specifications 12 3 Technical specitications Order number 6SL3710 1GH32 6AA0 1GH33 3AA0 1GH34 1AA0 1 Rated output of a typical 6 pole standard induction motor based on Iz or IH at 690 V 3 AC 50 Hz 2 The base load current IL is based on a duty cycle of 110 for 60 s or 150 for 10 s with a duty cycle duration of 300 s see Overload capability 3 The base load current IH is based on a duty cycle of 150 for 60 s or 160 for 10 s with a duty cycle duration of 300 s see Overload capability 4 The current values given here are based on the rated output current 5 The recommendations for the North American market in AWG or MCM must be taken from the appropriate NEC National Electrical Code or CEC Canadian Electrical Code standards Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 451 Technical specifications 12 3 Technical specifications Table 12 26 Version A 660 V 690 V 3 AC part 4 Order number 6SL3710 1GH34 7AA0 1GH35 8AA0 1GH37 4AA0 Unit rating for IL at 50 Hz 690 V kW 450 560 710 for IH at 50 Hz 690 V 7 kW 400 450 560 Output current Rated current In A 465 57
227. culation of the controller parameters If during the measurement it becomes clear that the the drive cannot operate in a stable manner with the specified dynamic factor or that the torque ripples are too great the dynamic response is reduced automatically and the result displayed in r1968 The drive must Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Functions Monitoring and Protective Functions 9 2 Drive Functions also be checked to ensure that it is stable across the entire range The dynamic response might need to be reduced or Kp Tn adaptation for the speed controller parameterized accordingly When commissioning induction machines you are advised to proceed as follows Before connecting the load a complete rotating measurement without encoder p1960 1 with encoder p1960 2 should be carried out Since the induction machine is idling you can expect highly accurate results for the saturation characteristic and the rated magnetization current When the load is connected speed controller optimization should be repeated because the total moment of inertia has changed This is realized by selecting parameter p1960 without encoder p1960 3 with encoder p1960 4 When permanent magnet synchronous motors are commissioned the speed controller should be optimized p1960 2 4 when the load is connected Carrying out the rotating measurement p1960 1 2 The following measure
228. d protection 3NE1227 2 3NE1230 2 3NE1331 2 Rated current A 250 315 350 frame size to DIN 43620 1 1 1 2 440 Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Technical specifications 12 3 Technical specitications Order number 6SL3710 1GF31 8CAO 1GF32 2CA0 1GF32 6CA0 1 Rated output of a typical 6 pole standard induction motor based on I or IH at 500 V 3 AC 50 Hz 2 Rated output of a typical 6 pole standard induction motor based on IL or IH at 575 V 3 AC 60 Hz 3 The base load current IL is based on a duty cycle of 110 for 60 s or 150 for 10 s with a duty cycle duration of 300 s see Overload capability 4 The base load current IH is based on a duty cycle of 150 for 60 s or 160 for 10 s with a duty cycle duration of 300 s see Overload capability 5 The current values given here are based on the rated output current 6 The recommendations for the North American market in AWG or MCM must be taken from the appropriate NEC National Electrical Code or CEC Canadian Electrical Code standards Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 441 Technical specifications 12 3 Technical specifications Table 12 21 Version C 500 V 600 V 3 AC part 2 Order number 6SL3710 1GF33 3CA0 1GF34 1CA0 1GF34 7CA0O Unit rating for IL at 50 Hz 500 V kW 200 250 315 fo
229. d available system settings For this reason this chapter only describes the individual commissioning steps Prerequisites for installing STARTER Hardware requirements e PGorPC e Pentium II 400 MHz Windows 2000 e Pentium III 500 MHz Windows XP Professional e 512 MB main memory 1 GB recommended e 1024 x 768 pixel screen resolution Software requirements for using STARTER without existing STEP7 installation e Microsoft Windows 2000 SP3 SP4 e Microsoft Windows Server 2003 SP1 e Microsoft Windows XP Professional SP1 SP2 e Internet Explorer V5 0 1 or higher e Acrobat Reader V5 0 or higher is required to open the function diagrams in the online help Note If STARTER is used in combination with other STEP7 components the prerequisites for the S7 components shall apply Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 123 Commissioning 5 2 STARTER commissioning tool 5 2 1 Installing the STARTER commissioning tool STARTER is installed using the setup file on the CD supplied When you double click the Setup file the installation Wizard guides you through the process of installing STARTER 5 2 2 Layout of the STARTER user interface STARTER features four operating areas E OJ mjas wie Xx aD Sahai a Stel fah fale leje Drischar See 1 um Hik 22 artery Figure 5 1 STARTER operating areas Operating area Explanation 1 Toolbars In t
230. d loop controlled operation Figure 7 9 Changeover conditions In open loop operation the calculated actual speed value is the same as the setpoint value For vertical loads and acceleration processes parameters p1610 constant torque boost and p1611 acceleration torque boost must be modified in order to generate the static or dynamic load torque of the drive If on induction motors p1610 is set to 0 only the magnetizing current r0331 is injected at a value of 100 the rated motor current p0305 is injected For permanent magnet synchronous motors at p1610 0 a pre control absolute value derived from the supplementary torque r1515 remains instead of the magnetizing current To ensure that the drive does not stall during acceleration p1611 can be increased or acceleration pre control for the speed controller can be used This is also advisable to ensure that the motor is not subject to thermal overload at low speeds Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Setpoint channel and closed loop contro 7 4 Vector speed torque control with without encoder Vector control without a speed sensor has the following characteristics at low frequencies e Closed loop operation up to approx 1 Hz output frequency e Starting in closed loop operation directly after the drive has been energized induction motors only Note In this case the speed setpoint upstream of the ramp function generator m
231. d must be checked in terms of the control response required e Fans large centrifugal masses and pumps Kp p1470 2 10 Tn p1472 250 500 ms The Kp 2 and Tn 500 ms settings result in asymptotic approximation of the actual speed to the setpoint speed after a setpoint step change During many simple control procedures this is satisfactory for pumps and fans Stone mills separators large centrifugal masses Kp p1470 12 20 Tn p1472 500 1000 ms Kneader drives Kp p1470 10 Tn p1472 200 400 ms Note We recommend checking the effective speed control gain r1468 during operation If this value changes during operation the Kp adaptation is being used p1400 5 1 Kp adaptation can if necessary be deactivated or its behavior changed When operating with encoder p1300 21 A smoothing value for the actual speed value p1442 5 20 ms ensures quieter operations for motors with gear units Speed controller pre control integrated pre control with balancing The command behavior of the speed control loop can be improved by calculating the accelerating torque from the speed setpoint and connecting it on the line side of the speed controller This torque setpoint mv is applied to the current controller the current controller is pre controlled using adaptation elements directly as additive reference variable enabled via p1496 The torque setpoint mv is calculated from mv
232. d other devices are installed and connected in accordance with recognized engineering practice in the country of installation and in compliance with applicable regional regulations Special attention should be paid to cable dimensioning fuses grounding shutdown disconnection and overcurrent protection If an item of protective gear trips in a branch circuit a fault current may have been disconnected To reduce the risk of fire or an electric shock the current conducting parts and other components in the cabinet unit should be inspected and damaged parts replaced When an item of protective gear trips the cause of the trip must be identified and rectified Note Standard cabinet units are equipped with touch protection to BGV A3 in accordance with DIN 57 106 Part 100 VDE 0106 Part 100 Germany The version with option M60 features additional protective covers that offer a higher level of touch protection for current conducting parts when the cabinet doors are open These protective covers may have to be removed during installation and connection procedures Once work has been completed the protective covers must be properly refitted Note On ungrounded systems and systems with a grounded phase conductor and a line voltage gt 600 VAC measures must be taken on the line side to limit overvoltages to overvoltage category II in accordance with IEC 60664 1 CAUTION Only original DRIVE CLiQ cables may be used fo
233. d source All of the supplementary setpoints are deactivated for LOCAL master control Drive converter cabinet units 196 Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Operation 6 4 Command sources TM31 terminal assignment with PROF Idrive default setting When you choose the PROFldrive default setting use the following terminal assignment for TM31 TM31 x521 Alo 11 Va lt D 55 0 DA Kn Sy Ao Ee Free x Al1 13 NO X520 s D lt A jar Free Free T 4 i JO S F DIO aas So Free S 2l Dl er Free sC ree area Acknowledge S T Dia ue 8 JO fault ee 5 ii Mg 6 X522 A M A0 V 4 LQ 100 1259 Speed 0 20 mA X530 5 actual value Free S i oia AO 00 Q A 4 Free AN 2 DIS no 1ve a Current Free A AG i D 0 20 mA S f DI 6 6 actual value Free S4 n7 AO 1C A 7 se me Temp P m RE tome 250 A X541 X540 SIGS 12 NO Ready to stat i 1 24V DDOS Ee Free i DESEE a 14 Free T 7 2 24 V EON 5 2 Free ae Bi Jot v DIDO 11 z N a isl 24V eee Lk oV 1 2542 zal 24V DOT pe 8 rar 24V he Pulses 5 I 4 enabled TWA 5 No fault I D 22 j 6 4 ee ee eee N2 F
234. ddressed via the parameter index for reading and writing A distinction is made between various types of data set CDS Command data set By parameterizing several command data sets and switching between them the drive can be operated with different pre configured signal sources DDS Drive data set The drive data set contains the parameters for switching between different drive control configurations PDS Powerstack Data Set The number of powerstack data sets corresponds to the number of power units combined for units that are connected in parallel The CDS and DDS can be switched over during normal operation Further types of data set also exist however these can only be activated indirectly by means of a DDS changeover EDS encoder data set MDS Motor data set Drive converter cabinet units 182 Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Operation 6 3 Basic information about the drive system Terminal Module pe ge gee ie ae an eee 4 4 Option Board Drive Data set independent drive parameters DDS Drive Data Set Motor selection Encoder selection 1 Encoder selection 2 Encoder selection 3 r L pt PDS Power Data Set Figure 6 2 Parameter categories Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 183 Operation 6 3 Basic information about the drive system 6 3 2 Drive objects A drive
235. ded cable max 450 m During commissioning the dv dt filter plus Voltage Peak Limiter must be logged on using STARTER or the AOP30 operator panel p0230 2 Note When the factory settings are restored parameter p0230 is reset The parameter must be reset if the system is commissioned again Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5SE00189855A Electrical installation 4 10 Other connections 4 10 2 Main Contactor Option L13 Description The SINAMICS G150 cabinet unit is designed as standard without a line contactor Option L13 main contactor is needed if a switching element is required for disconnecting the cabinet from the supply necessary with EMERGENCY OFF The contactor is energized and supplied within the cabinet Connection Table 4 21 Terminal block X50 checkback contact main contactor closed Terminal Designation Technical specifications 4 NO Max load current 10 A 5 NC Max switching voltage 250 V AC 6 COM Max switching capacity 250 VA Required minimum load 21 mA 1 NO normally open contact NC normally closed contact COM mid position contact Max connectable cross section 4 mm 4 10 3 Sinusoidal Filter Option L15 Description The sine wave filter limits the voltage gradient and the capacitive charge discharge currents which usually occur with inverter operation It also prevents additional noise caused by the pulse frequency The
236. dentification the drive might set the motor in motion The EMERGENCY STOP functions must be fully operational during commissioning To protect machines and personnel the relevant safety regulations must be observed The following parameters are determined by means of motor identification 9 2 1 2 Description 298 e p1910 1 and induction motor p0350 p0354 p0356 p0358 p0360 p1825 p1828 p1829 p1830 e p1910 3 and induction motor p0362 p0366 e p1910 1 and permanent magnet synchronous motor p0350 p0356 p0357 p1825 p1828 p1829 p1830 Rotating measurement and speed controller optimization Rotating measurement can be activated via p1960 or p1900 1 The main difference between rotating measurement and standstill measurement is speed control optimization with which the drive s moment of inertia is ascertained and speed controller is set On induction motors the saturation characteristic and rated magnetization current are also measured If rotating measurement is not to be carried out at the speed set in p1965 this parameter can be changed before the measurement is started Higher speeds are recommended The same applies to the speed in p1961 at which the saturation characteristic is determined and the encoder test is carried out The speed controller is set to the symmetrical optimum in accordance with dynamic factor p1967 p1967 must be set before the optimization run and only affects the cal
237. des experienced users with detailed descriptions of all the functions Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 287 Output terminals 8 2 Analog outputs 8 2 Analog outputs Description The Customer Terminal Block features two analog outputs for outputting setpoints via current or voltage signals Factory setting e AOO Actual speed value 0 20 mA e AO1 Actual motor current 0 20 mA Signal flow diagram AO signal p4071 Actual speed value 10063 Output current 10068 DC link voltage 10070 Smoothing Curr U I p4073 Smoothing AO_type 14074 p4076 AO 0V Voltage output X522 1 Scaling Figure 8 1 Signal flow diagram analog output 0 Function diagram FD 1840 FD 9572 Parameters e p4071 e p4073 e 14074 e p4076 e p4077 e p4078 e p4079 e p4080 288 TM31 analog outputs AO 0 AO 1 Analog outputs signal source Analog outputs smoothing time constant Analog outputs actual output voltage current Analog outputs type Analog outputs characteristic value x1 Analog outputs characteristic value y1 Analog outputs characteristic value x2 Analog outputs characteristic value y2 Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5SE00189855A Output terminals 8 2 Analog outputs 8 2 1 List of signals for the analog signals List of signals for t
238. device is stored for more than two years its DC link capacitors must be reformed during commissioning The reforming procedure is described in Maintenance and servicing Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 39 Mechanical installation 3 3 Assembly 3 3 40 Assembly WARNING To ensure that the devices operate safely and reliably they must be properly installed and commissioned by qualified personnel taking into account the warnings provided in these operating instructions In particular the general and national installation and safety guidelines for high voltage installations e g VDE the Union of German Technical Engineers as well as the guidelines relating to the proper use of tools and personal protective equipment must be observed Death serious injury or substantial material damage can result if these factors are not taken into account Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5SE00189855A Mechanical installation 3 3 Assembly 3 3 1 Mechanical installation checklist Use the following checklist to guide you through the mechanical installation procedure for the cabinet unit Read the safety information at the start of these Operating Instructions before you start working on the device Note Check the boxes accordingly in the right hand column if the activity applies to the cabinet unit in your scope
239. dex 0 n A separate encoder data set is required for each encoder controlled by the Control Unit Up to 3 encoder data sets are assigned to a drive data set via parameters p0187 p0188 and p0189 An encoder data set can only be changed using a DDS changeover Each encoder may only be assigned to one drive and within a drive must in each drive data set either always be encoder 1 always encoder 2 or always encoder 3 One application for the EDS changeover would be a power component with which several motors are operated in turn A contactor circuit is used to changeover between these motors Each of the motors can be equipped with an encoder or be operated without an encoder Each encoder must be connected to its own SMx If encoder 1 p0187 is changed over via DDS then an MDS must also be changed over One drive object can manage up to 16 encoder data sets The number of encoder data sets configured is specified in p0140 When a drive data set is selected the assigned encoder data sets are selected automatically Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5SE00189855A Operation MDS Motor data set 6 3 Basic information about the drive system A motor data set contains various adjustable parameters describing the connected motor for the purpose of configuring the drive It also contains certain display parameters with calculated data e Adjustable parameters e g Motor component numb
240. doors and also in front of the hoods if necessary Option M54 offers additional protection against water sprayed against the housing from any direction and corresponds to degree of protection IP54 The permissible values for climatic ambient conditions must be taken into account At temperatures gt 40 C 104 F and altitudes gt 2000 m the devices must be derated The basic version of the cabinet units complies with the IP20 degree of protection in accordance with EN 60529 The built in units are installed in accordance with the dimension drawings supplied The clearance between the top of the cabinet unit and the ceiling is also specified on the dimension drawings The cooling air for the power unit is drawn in from the front through the ventilation grilles in the lower part of the cabinet doors The warmed air is expelled through the perforated top cover or the ventilation grilles in the top cover with option M13 M23 M43 M54 M78 Cooling air can also be supplied from below through raised floors or air ducts for example To allow this you have to create openings in the 3 section bottom plate According to EN 61800 3 the cabinet units are not suitable for use in low voltage public networks that supply residential buildings High frequency interference may occur if it is used in this type of network Additional measures e g line filter option LOO can be fitted for use in the first environment to EN 61800 3 category C2 Unpacki
241. drive emergency stop The braking units comprise a chopper power unit and a load resistor which must be attached externally To monitor the braking resistance a thermostat integrated in the shutdown train of the cabinet unit is installed in the braking resistor Table 4 33 Load data for the braking units Supply voltage Continuous Peak chopper Chopper Chopper Braking resistor Max current chopper power output P20 output P40 output Rs Pps P15 P20 Pao 380 V 480 V 25 kW 125 kW 100 kW 50 kW 4404 75 189A 380 V 480 V 50 kW 250 kW 200 kw 100 kw 2 20475 378 A 500 V 600 V 50 kW 250 kW 200 kW 100 kW 3 49 7 5 306 A 660 V 690 V 25 kW 125 kW 100 kW 50 kW 9 8 9 7 5 127 A 660 V 690 V 50 kW 250 kW 200 kW 100 kW 4997 5 255 A Installing the braking resistor 92 The braking resistor should not be installed in the vicinity of the converter The installation location must fulfill the following conditions The braking resistors are only suitable for floor mounting The maximum cable length between the cabinet unit and braking resistor is 100 m Sufficient space must be available for dissipating the energy converted by the braking resistor A sufficient distance from flammable objects must be maintained The braking resistor must be installed as a free standing unit Objects must not be placed on or anywhere above the braking resistor The braking resistor should not be installed underneath fire d
242. e it should be noted that the simulation mode can only be activated under an actual DC link voltage of 40 V If the voltage lies above this threshold the simulation mode is reset and a fault message F07826 is issued Communications with a higher level automation system can be tested using the simulation mode If the drive is also to return actual values note that it must be switched over to encoderless operation during simulation mode This means that large parts of the SINAMICS software e g software channel sequence control communications technology function etc can be tested in advance without requiring a motor Another application is to test the correct functioning of the Power Module Especially for drive units with higher power ratings 75 kW 690 V and 110 kW 400 V after repairs it is necessary to test the gating of the power semiconductors This is done by injecting a low DC voltage as DC link voltage e g 12 V The drive unit is then powered up and the pulses enabled It must be possible to run through all of the pulse patterns of the gating unit software This means that the software must allow the pulses to be switched in and various frequencies approached If a speed encoder is not being used then this is generally implemented using V f control or sensorless closed loop speed control Note The following functions are de activated in the simulation mode e Motor data identification e Motor data identification rot
243. e category II in accordance with IEC 60664 1 Current derating as a function of the pulse frequency When the pulse frequency is increased the derating factor of the output current must be taken into account This derating factor must be applied to the currents specified in the technical specifications for the cabinet units Table 12 7 Derating factor of the output current as a function of the pulse frequency for devices with a rated pulse frequency of 2 kHz Order no Power Output current Derating factor at 4 kHz 6SL3710 kW at 2 kHz A Connection voltage 380 480 V 3 AC 1GE32 1_A0 110 210 82 1GE32 6_A0 132 260 83 1GE33 1_A0 160 310 88 1GE33 8_A0 200 380 87 1GE35 0_A0 250 490 78 Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 413 Technical specifications 12 2 General data Table 12 8 Derating factor of the output current as a function of the pulse frequency for devices with a rated pulse frequency of 1 25 kHz Order no Power Output current Derating factor Derating factor 6SL3710 kW at 1 25 kHz A at 2 5 kHz at 5 kHz Connection voltage 380 480 V 3 AC 1GE36 1_A0 315 605 72 60 1GE37 5_A0 400 745 72 60 1GE38 4_A0 450 840 79 60 1GE41 0_A0 560 985 87 60 2GE41 1AA0 630 1120 72 60 2GE41 4AA0 710 1380 72 60 2GE41 6AA
244. e converter cabinet units 72 Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Electrical installation 4 9 Signal connections M VY gt s Customer terminal block X524 i cin se X521 C Alo 1 L_ M mn NEARE Buss nee Lm m e ye P YO S I NS t551 p NO pi AL LAN l i P10 D7 1e i N10 Tre M X520 X522 SC dio AO OV ft i Oto A0 0 2 Q ee osn aroc 3g Q NE scH DI3 AO 1V O wnnnennnenef oem aor 8 DO L oHm Ao 10 Temp J LTA X540 Temp 18 Do ie S5 24V EE S 2 24V I X541 SC zv 1 aaa ot hy 24V DIDO 8 2A 9 S zv DIDO 9 O ea l SC ot aay Di Do 10 4 yg oie a pi Ere DI DO 11 Lo r 4 S si ie X530 1 X542 PN cree 1D E S 2 DI5 gees s ie 0 I 2 I oC n7 cue J ET al M2 N IE o ex LM D EDD E l M D I Figure 4 7 Connection overview of TM31 customer terminal block Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 73 Electrical installation 4 9 Signal connections Note The digital inputs terminals X520 and X530
245. e cover Removal steps The removal steps are numbered in accordance with the figure 1 Remove the busbar 8 screws 2 Remove the retaining screws for the fan 3 screws 3 Disconnect the supply cables 1 x L 1 x N You can now carefully remove the fan CAUTION When removing the unit ensure that you do not damage any signal cables Installation steps For installation carry out the above steps in reverse order CAUTION The tightening torques specified in the table Tightening torques for connecting current conducting parts must be observed Carefully establish the plug in connections and then ensure that they are secure The screwed connections for the protective covers must only be tightened by hand Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 401 Maintenance and servicing 11 4 Replacing components 11 4 14 Replacing the fan fuse T1 F10 T1 F11 The order numbers for replacement fan fuses can be found in the spare parts list Z N WARNING Make sure that the cause of the fault is found before the fuse is replaced 11 4 15 Replacing the fuses for the auxiliary power supply A1 F11 A1 F12 The order numbers for replacing auxiliary power supply fuses that have blown can be found in the spare parts list J N WARNING You must carry out the following e First disconnect the auxiliary power supply e Then rectify t
246. e dynamic response of the controller can be altered using the search speed factor p1203 If the deviation of the speed adaptation controller is not too great the motor continues to be magnetized for the duration parameterized in p0346 Once the excitation build up time p0346 has elapsed the ramp function generator is set to the actual speed value and the motor ramped up to the current setpoint frequency ON OFF command NSearch max Aaaa aa ATAA a oa Setpoint speed Speed Demagnetize search Magnetize p1082 x 1 25 NSearch max Ramp up Figure 9 6 Flying restart J N WARNING When the flying restart p1200 function is active the drive may still be accelerated by the detection current despite the fact that it is at standstill and the setpoint is 0 For this reason entering the area around the drive when it is in this condition can cause death serious injury or considerable material damage Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 311 Functions Monitoring and Protective Functions 9 2 Drive Functions 9 2 6 2 Description 9 2 6 3 312 Flying restart with encoder The flying restart function behaves differently with V f control and vector control V f characteristic 91300 lt 20 Flying restart without encoder see Flying restart without encoder Vector control with encoder Since the speed is known from the start the motor can be magnet
247. e implemented using circuit breakers at and above an output current of gt 800 A Figure 2 7 Circuit principle for version A units that are connected in parallel 12 pulse infeed connected to one motor with one winding system Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 31 Device Overview 2 4 Wiring Principle Circuit principle for version A units that are connected in parallel with 12 pulse infeed motor with separate winding systems 12 pulse infeed Ge Tees ag Line supply connection Main switch optional 1 l 1 l l l l 1 i I Fuses optional 1 l l l 1 l l l i I i Main contactor optional 1 eee er ee i aoe ae 1 i Line reactor Uk 2 oF xs Rectifier m H W001 DCPS DCPS Integrated t DC link DCNS W002 DCNS ay aay Inverter Motor connection PE 1U U2 Motor with separate 1V2 2V2 winding systems 1W2 2W2 1 The main switch fuses and main contactor functions are implemented using circuit breakers at and above an output current of gt 800 A Figure 2 8 Circuit principle for version A units that are connected in parallel 12 pulse infeed connected to one motor with separate winding systems NOTICE The PE connection at the motor must be fed back directly to the cabinet unit Drive converter cabinet units 32 Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00
248. e power supply e Allow unimpeded access e Remove the protective cover Removal The steps for the removal procedure are numbered in accordance with the diagram 1 Remove the retaining screws for the fan 3 screws 2 Disconnect the supply cables 1 x L 1 x N You can now carefully remove the fan CAUTION When removing the fan ensure that you do not damage any signal cables Installation For re installation carry out the above steps in reverse order CAUTION The tightening torques specified in the table Tightening torques for connecting current carrying parts must be observed Carefully re establish the plug connections and ensure that they are secure The screwed connections for the protective covers must only be tightened by hand Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 393 Maintenance and servicing 11 4 Replacing components 11 4 12 Replacing the fan type HX Replacing the fan left hand power block S a 9 a 0 Cam O i Ie Pain ji Figure 11 16 Replacing the fan frame size HX left hand power block 394 Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Maintenance and servicing 11 4 Replacing components Description The average service life
249. e type plate Since the wizard establishes internal interconnections on the basis of the options selected you cannot change the selected options by clicking lt Back If you make an incorrect entry delete the entire drive unit from the project navigator and create a new one gt Check your options carefully and then click Continue gt Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 137 Commissioning 5 3 Procedure for commissioning via STARTER Selecting the control structure Configuration SINAMICS_G150 Control structure Drive unit Drive Drive_1 DDS 0 Options Drive setting Motor C Motor holding brake Encoder Defaults of the setpoint Function modules Technology controller Extended signals monitoring Drive functions Fr data exchang Closed loop control Important parameters Setpt n M control F control Summary F control V f control Control method Speed control with encoder 21 x Actual speed value preparation Figure 5 15 Selecting the control structure gt Select the required data e Function modules Technology controller Extended messages monitoring Drive converter cabinet units 138 Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Commissioning 5 3 Procedure for commissioning via STARTER e Control method choose one of the following open loop closed loop control types
250. ector 1 100 Vector p1075 Supplementary setpoint Vector 0 Vector p1076 Supplementary setpoint scaling Vector 1 100 Vector Parameter macro p1000 3 Motorized potentiometer 100003 This macro is used to set the motorized potentiometer as the setpoint source Table A 8 Parameter macro p1000 3 Motorized potentiometer Sink Source Parameters Description DO Parameters Description DO p1070 Main setpoint Vector 1r1050 Motorized potentiometer Vector p1071 Main setpoint scaling Vector 1 100 Vector p1075 Supplementary setpoint Vector 0 Vector p1076 Supplementary setpoint scaling Vector 1 100 Vector Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 481 Appendix A 2 Parameter macros Parameter macro p1000 4 Fixed setpoint 100004 This macro is used to set the fixed setpoint as the setpoint source Table A 9 Parameter macro p1000 4 Fixed setpoint Sink Source Parameters Description DO Parameters Description DO p1070 Main setpoint Vector 11024 Active fixed setpoint Vector p1071 Main setpoint scaling Vector 1 100 Vector p1075 Supplementary setpoint Vector 0 Vector p1076 Supplementary setpoint scaling Vector 1 100 Vector Drive converter cabinet units 482 Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A INDEX A A7850 External alarm 1 359 Acknowledge error from the AOP 234 Alarms 359 Analog inputs 75 204 Analog outputs 76 288 AOP setpoint 233
251. ed The EMERGENCY OFF functions must be fully operational during commissioning To protect machines and personnel the relevant safety regulations must be observed Note If speed controller optimization is carried out for operation with an encoder the control mode will be changed over to encoderless speed control automatically in order to be able to carry out the encoder test e 10047 e p1300 e p1900 e p1959 e p1960 e p1961 e p1965 e p1967 e 11969 e 13925 e 13927 e 13928 Status identification Open loop closed loop control operating mode Motor data identification and rotating measurement Speed controller optimization configuration Speed controller optimization selection Saturation characteristic speed for calculation Speed controller optimization speed Speed controller optimization dynamic factor Speed controller optimization inertia identified Identification complete indicator Motld control word Rotating measurement configuration Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5SE00189855A Functions Monitoring and Protective Functions 9 2 Drive Functions 9 2 2 Efficiency optimization Description Function diagram Parameters Drive converter cabinet The following can be achieved when optimizing efficiency using p1580 e Lower motor losses in the partial load range e Minimization of noise in the motor p1580 0 p1570 50 p1570 x 0 75 100 Wp1570x 0 5
252. ed Motor identification is optional when the equivalent circuit diagram data is entered Cancel Help Figure 5 18 Configuring the motor Entering motor data gt Enter the motor data see motor type plate gt If necessary check Do you want to enter the optional data gt If necessary activate Do you want to enter the equivalent circuit diagram data Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 143 Commissioning 5 3 Procedure for commissioning via STARTER 144 Note Click Template to open another selection screenform where you can choose the motor used in your application from a long list of standard motor types Select a motor from the list to enter the data stored in the system for that motor automatically in the data fields NOTICE You should only check the Do you want to enter equivalent circuit diagram data box if the data sheet with equivalent circuit diagram data is available If any data is missing an error message will be output when the system attempts to load the drive project to the target system gt Click Continue gt Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5SE00189855A Commissioning 5 3 Procedure for commissioning via STARTER Configuring the motor Entering optional data Configuration SINAMICS_G150 Optional Motor Data Drive unit Drive Drive_1 DDS 0 MDS 0 Options Control struc
253. ed in parallel Additional settings must be made for units that are connected in parallel before selecting the motor and entering the motor data via the operator panel e With 380 V 480 V 3 AC 6SL3710 2GE41 1AA0 6SL3710 2GE41 4AA0 6SL3710 2GE41 6AA0 e With 500 V 600 V 3 AC 6SL3710 2GF38 6AA0 6SL3710 2GF41 1AA0 6SL3710 2GF41 4AA0 e With 660 V 690 V 3 AC 6SL3710 2GH41 1AA0 6SL3710 2GH41 4AA0 6SL3710 2GH41 5AA0 Settings to monitor the checkback signal from the main contactor or circuit breaker for 12 pulse infeed The checkback contacts of the main contactors and the circuit breakers are connected in series in the factory and wired to digital input 5 of the CU320 Control Unit After the drive unit has been commissioned the checkback signal monitoring function must be activated This is realized using parameter p0860 Vector 722 5 Control_Unit p0860 r0722 5 Select parameter p0860 Line contactor checkback and connect to digital input DI5 lt MENU gt lt Parameterization gt lt Single DO gt lt 2 VECTOR gt lt OK gt select p0860 lt change gt select 1 CU_G lt OK gt select 10722 lt OK gt select 05 DI 5 X132 2 lt OK gt Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 173 Commissioning 5 5 First commissioning with the AOP30 A confirmation window is displayed in which 0860 0 Line contactor checkb 3 A 2 o a summ
254. eeeteeeeeeeeees 173 5 6 Status after COMMISSIONING sses a a A a a A 175 5 7 Parameter reset to factory settings ccceceeeeeeeeee cence ee seeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeaeeseneeeeeseeeeeeseeeaeeeeeeeaeeeeees 176 6 Operation nena des cai n s aaa a a E a E E Daas O 179 6 1 Chapter coment 22 tastes aeei e an a e a a eee eet E a a 179 6 2 General information about command and setpoint SOUICES ccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeetes 180 6 3 Basic information about the drive system eee eeeeceeeeceneeeeeeeeneeeeeaeeeeeeaaeeeeeaaeeeseeaeeeteaeeeeseaas 181 6 3 1 Parameters cs cczecice sored a seine ts heii E ott aaa a a a aaa deca aa aaa ede elaine at ede 181 6 3 2 Drive opec ia ale ticushedicuahesessimscidpine Sa ps thse A tees awash ypeaabecang ineeee S 184 6 3 3 Dalal SCS iena r e rates sched mse tba chek dears na enced a aa toes cen panel aaa Choe th eas 186 6 3 4 BICO technology interconnecting signals 0 eccceeeeceeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeseenaeeeeeeaas 191 6 4 Command SOuUIrCeS i aisessncate tet ee een elles tad oiled Atte ae ed ead ed ae 196 6 4 1 PROF Idrive default Setting s 2 240 asec vaadeccttdadectstatalidgens adevts E eaaut ENE a 196 6 4 2 TM31 terminals default Setting 0 0 eee ceeeee cece eeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeaaeeeeeeaeeeseeaaeeeeeeaeeeseecaeeeeeeateeeas 198 6 4 3 NAMUR default seting cc cccesehs seca aceheteciaahodee a E E Gah 200 6 4 4 PROF Idrive NAMUR default Setting 00 2 2 eececeeeeeneee
255. egenerative torque on startup and the motor comes to a standstill when pulses are inhibited e Motor identification In many cases Motor identification at standstill is the correct default setting for SINAMICS G150 Motor identification with motor running is the recommended setting for speed control with encoder this measurement is normally performed on non coupled machines N DANGER When the rotating measurement is selected the drive triggers movements in the motor that can reach the maximum motor speed The EMERGENCY OFF functions must be fully operational during commissioning To protect machines and personnel the relevant safety regulations must be observed gt Click Continue gt Drive converter cabinet units 154 Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Commissioning 5 3 Procedure for commissioning via STARTER Selecting the PROFIBUS message frame Configuration SINAMICS_G150 PROFIBUS process data exchange drive Drive unit Drive Drive_1 DDS 0 Options Control structure Select the PROFIBUS message frame type Drive setting Moto 5 x AE date PROFIBUS PZD message frame Free telegram configuration with BII 7 otor data Optional Motor Dat Equivalent Circuit C Calculation of the bv Motor holding brake Encoder Input data actual values Defaults of the setg words Drive functions Output ea ie words K K K ES K K ES K K SY K XS Important paramete
256. electrical connections for the cabinet unit e Adjusting the fan voltage and the internal power supply to local conditions supply voltage e The customer terminal block and its interfaces e The interfaces for additional options Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5SE00189855A 49 Electrical installation 4 2 Checklist for electrical installation 4 2 Checklist for electrical installation Use the following checklist to guide you through the electrical installation procedure for the cabinet unit Read the safety information at the start of these Operating Instructions before you start working on the device Note Check the boxes accordingly in the right hand column if the activity ap unit in your scope of supply In the same way check the boxes once y installation procedure to confirm that the activities are complete plies to the cabinet ou have finished the Item Power Activity connections Fulfilled Complete 1 The electrical connections of the two sub cabinets must be established for transport units that have been shipped separately refer to Electrical installation Power connections Electrical connection of separately shipped transport units The line side and motor side power cables must be dimensioned and routed in accordance with the ambient and routing conditions The maximum permissible cable lengths between the converter and motor must be obse
257. ement signal to each drive object The red FAULT LED extinguishes once all the faults have been acknowledged Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5SE00189855A Operation 2 VECTOR Faults Help A 0067 21 11 07 T0 External fault 1 y Back Ack 6 7 Control via the operator panel External fault 1 Fault value 00000000 0x00000000 hex Cause The BICO signal for external fault 1 has been triggered Remedy Back A v Figure 6 30 Fault screen You can use F5 Ack to acknowledge a stored fault 2 VECTOR Alarms A07991 motor data ident Active ANOTA External alarm 1 Active Help A v Back Clear F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 Figure 6 31 Alarm screen Alarms that are no longer active are removed from the alarm memory with F5 Clear F1 External alarm 1 Alarm value 00000000 0x00000000 hex Cause The BICO signal for external alarm 1 has been triggered The condition this external Back A v F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 6 7 9 Saving the parameters permanently Description If parameters have been changed using the operator panel confirm with OK in the Parameter Editor the new values are initially stored in the volatile memory RAM of the converter An S flashes in the top right of the AOP display until they are saved to a permanent memory This indicates t
258. en ensure that they are secure When dealing with connectors with a lock make sure that the locking lever is securely engaged once connected The fiber optic cable plugs must be remounted at their original slot Fiber optic cables and sockets are accordingly labeled for correct assignment U11 U21 U31 The screwed connections for the protective covers must only be tightened by hand Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 389 Maintenance and servicing 11 4 Replacing components 11 4 10 Replacing the fan type FX Replacing the fan a ig Top oe td i fase Si flo Be SRR f d Jaaa e o Sa Tonos i y in O PE O be nit Figure 11 14 Replacing the fan frame size FX 390 Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Maintenance and servicing 11 4 Replacing components Description The average service life of the device fans is 50 000 hours In practice however the service life depends on other variables e g ambient temperature degree of cabinet protection etc and therefore may deviate from this value The fans must be replaced in good time to ensure that the cabinet unit is available Preparatory steps e Disconnect the cabinet unit from the power supply e Allow unimpeded access e Remove the protective cover Removal The steps for the removal procedure are numbered in accordance with
259. ent A 200 250 315 frame size to DIN 43620 1 2 2 2 Line and semiconductor protection without option L26 3NE1225 2 3NE1227 2 3NE1230 2 Rated current A 200 250 315 1 1 448 Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5SE00189855A Technical specifications 12 3 Technical specitications Order number 6SL3710 1GH31 5AA0 1GH31 8AA0 1GH32 2AA0 1 Rated output of a typical 6 pole standard induction motor based on I or IH at 690 V 3 AC 50 Hz 2 The base load current I1 is based on a duty cycle of 110 for 60 s or 150 for 10 s with a duty cycle duration of 300 s see Overload capability 3 The base load current IH is based on a duty cycle of 150 for 60 s or 160 for 10 s with a duty cycle duration of 300 s see Overload capability 4 The current values given here are based on the rated output current 5 The recommendations for the North American market in AWG or MCM must be taken from the appropriate NEC National Electrical Code or CEC Canadian Electrical Code standards Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 449 Technical specifications 12 3 Technical specifications Table 12 25 Version A 660 V 690 V 3 AC part 3 Order number 6SL3710 1GH32 6AA0 1GH33 3AA0 1GH34 1AA0 Unit rating for IL at 50 Hz 690 V kW 250 315 400 for IH at 50 Hz 690 V 7 kW 200 2
260. ent IL 2 A 790 1036 1314 Base load current IH A 724 950 1216 Input current Rated input current 4 A 842 1116 1424 Input current max A 1295 1708 2186 Current requirements for 24 VDC JA 1 5 2 8 2 8 auxiliary supply Connection voltages Line voltage Vacrms 660 V 3 AC 10 to 690 V 3 AC 10 15 lt 1 min Line frequency Hz 47 to 63 Hz Electronics power supply Voc 24 20 4 28 8 Power loss kW 14 7 21 3 26 6 Cooling air requirement m s 1 48 1 56 2 96 Sound pressure level Lpa dB A 72 75 75 78 75 78 1 m at 50 60 Hz Line connection Per sub cabinet Per sub cabinet recommended DIN VDE 4 mm 4x 150 2 x 240 3 x 185 maximum DIN VDE mm 8 x 240 4 x 240 8 x 240 Fixing screw M12 4 holes M12 2 holes M12 4 holes Motor connection Per sub cabinet Per sub cabinet recommended DIN VDE 5 mm2 3x185 2x185 3 x 150 maximum DIN VDE mm 6 x 240 4 x 240 6 x 240 Fixing screw M12 3 holes M12 2 holes M12 3 holes Protective conductor connection Per sub cabinet Per sub cabinet Fixing screw M12 18 holes M12 2 holes M12 18 holes Max motor cable length shielded unshielded m 300 450 300 450 300 450 Dimensions standard version Width mm 1600 2400 3200 Height mm 2000 2000 2000 Depth mm 600 600 600 Power block frame size JX HX JX Weight without options approx kg 1360 1700 2620 Recommended protection Line protection Per sub cabinet Per sub cabinet with option L26 3NA3365 6 3NA3354 6 3NA3365 6
261. ent determines the data required e g moment of inertia for setting Start the drive the speed controller It also measures the with LOCAL and ON key magnetization characteristic and rated magnetization current of the motor Help Cancel To activate this function press the LOCAL key wait until the LED in the LOCAL key F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 lights up and then ON If motor identification is not carried out the motor control uses the motor characteristic values calculated from the type plate data rather than the measured values Drive converter cabinet units 172 Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Commissioning 5 5 First commissioning with the AOP30 DANGER When the the rotating measurement is selected the drive triggers movements in the motor that can reach the maximum motor speed The emergency OFF functions must be fully operational during commissioning To protect the machines and personnel the relevant safety regulations must be carefully observed Note If a fault is present when selecting the stationary or rotary measurement motor identification cannot be carried out Before rectifying the fault you have to leave the screen with No identification Motor identification can then be selected again via lt MENU gt lt Commissioning service gt lt Drive commissioning gt lt Motor identification gt 5 5 3 Additional settings required for units that are connect
262. entilation grilles and a filter medium in the air inlet doors and outlet hoods The hoods are flush with the cabinets at the side and front and have a recess at the rear so that air can escape even if the cabinet is wall mounted Air escapes from the front and back The hood is secured by means of the four holes for the crane hooks in the cabinet Hoods increase the height of the cabinet by 400 mm Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 ASE00189855A Mechanical installation 3 3 Assembly Compliance with degree of protection IP54 requires an intact filter medium which must be replaced on a regular basis according to the prevailing ambient conditions Filters can be fitted and replaced from outside the cabinet relatively easily Attaching a canopy to increase the degree of protection to IP21 option M21 1 Remove the crane transport assembly if fitted 2 Attach the spacers to the roof of the cabinet at the positions specified You may have to remove the protective grille 3 Fit the canopy to the spacers NOTICE In order to prevent water dripping into the spaces between the cabinet units connected in series there are drain channels on the sides of the canopies When fitting the canopies make sure that the drain channels interlock Insert the enclosed screws from above Insert the enclosed screws from below Figure 3 1 Fitting a canopy Drive converter cabinet units Operati
263. er p0131 e Display parameters e g Motor type selection p0300 Rated motor data p0304 ff Calculated rated data p0330 ff The parameters that are grouped together in the motor data set are identified in the SINAMICS parameter list by Data set MDS and are assigned an index 0 n A separate motor data set is required for each motor that is controlled by the Control Unit via a Motor Module The motor data set is assigned to a drive data set via parameter p0186 A motor data set can only be changed using a DDS changeover The motor data set changeover is for example used for e Changing over between different motors e Changing over between different windings in a motor e g star delta changeover e Motor data adaptation If several motors are operated alternately on one Motor Module a corresponding number of drive data sets must be created See Functions Drive functions for additional information and instructions on changing over motors One drive object can manage up to 16 motor data sets The number of motor data sets in p0130 may not exceed the number of drive data sets in p0180 Example of data set assignment Table 6 2 Example data set assignment DDS Motor p0186 Encoder 1 p0187 Encoder 2 p0188 Encoder 3 p0189 DDS 0 MDS 0 EDS 0 EDS 1 EDS 2 DDS 1 MDS 0 EDS 0 EDS 3 DDS 2 MDS 0 EDS 0 EDS 4 EDS 5 DDS 3 MDS 1 EDS 0 Drive converter cabinet units Op
264. er are converted here and made available to the closed loop controller via the DRIVE CLiQ interface for evaluation purposes In conjunction with SINAMICS G150 the following sensors can be connected to the SMC30 Sensor Module e TTL encoder e HTL encoder e KTY or PTC temperature sensor Table 4 46 Connectable encoders with supply voltage Encoder type X520 D Sub X521 terminal X531 terminal Open circuit Remote sense monitoring HTL bipolar 24 V Yes Yes Yes Yes No HTL unipolar 24 V Yes Yes Yes No No TTL bipolar 24 V Yes Yes Yes Yes No TTL bipolar 5 V Yes Yes Yes Yes To X520 TTL unipolar No No No No No Drive converter cabinet Table 4 47 Maximum signal cable lengths Encoder type Maximum signal cable length in m TTL 100 HTL unipolar 100 HTL bipolar 300 Note Because the physical transmission media is more robust the bipolar connection should always be used for HTL encoders The unipolar connection should only be used if the encoder type does not output push pull signals units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 107 Electrical installation 4 10 Other connections Table 4 48 Specification of measuring systems that can be connected Parameter Designation Threshold 4 Min Max Unit High signal level Unaitt 2 5 V TTL bipolar at X520 or X521 X531 Low signal level ULaitt 5 2 V TTL bipolar
265. er connections Table 4 25 Terminal block X50 checkback contact main circuit breaker closed Terminal Designation Technical specifications 1 NO Max load current 10 A 2 NC Max switching voltage 250 V AC 3 COM Max switching capacity 250 VA Required minimum load 1mA 1 NO normally open contact NC normally closed contact COM mid position contact Max connectable cross section 4 mm DANGER At currents of more than 800 A single units and above 1380 A units that are connected in parallel and with a live line voltage dangerous voltages are present in the cabinet unit even when the circuit breaker is open The upstream protective gear must be de energized when working on cabinets Setting the release current for the circuit breaker In equipment with a circuit breaker the release current must be set to match the plant requirements The appropriate specifications are given in the operating instructions supplied with the circuit breaker The release current is set as follows per default Table 4 26 Factory setting for overcurrent release Diagnostics Order number Output current Overcurrent trip L Short circuit trip non delayed I 6SL3710 1GE38 4AA0 840A 1 0 2 6SL3710 1GE41 0AA0 985 A 0 9 2 6SL3710 2GE41 6AA0 1560 A 1 0 both switches 2 both switches 6SL3710 1GF38 1AA0 810A 1 0 2 6SL3710 1GH38 1AA0 810A 1 0 2 6SL3710 2GH41 5AA0 15
266. er may need to be reconnected to the existing line voltage The line voltage assignments for making the appropriate setting on the transformer for the internal power supply are indicated in the following tables NOTICE If the terminals are not reconnected to the actual line voltage the internal power supply will not be correct Table 4 8 Line voltage assignments for the internal power supply 380 V 480 V 3 AC Line voltage range Tap Taps of voltage adaptation transformer A1 T10 LH1 LH2 342 V 390 V 380 V 1 2 391 V 410 V 400 V 1 3 411 V 430V 415V 1 4 431 V 450 V 440 V 1 5 451 V 470V 460 V 1 6 471 V 528 V 480 V 1 7 Table 4 9 Line voltage assignments for the internal power supply 500 V 600 V 3 AC Line voltage range Tap Taps of voltage adaptation transformer A1 T10 LH1 LH2 450 V 515V 500 V 1 8 516 V 540 V 525 V 1 9 541 V 560 V 550 V 1 10 561 V 590 V 575 V 1 11 591 V 670 V 600 V 1 12 Table 4 10 Line voltage assignments for the internal power supply 660 V 690 V 3 AC Line voltage range Tap Taps of voltage adaptation transformer A1 T10 LH1 LH2 591 V 630 V 600 V 1 12 631 V 680 V 660 V 1 14 terminals 12 and 13 are jumpered 681 V 759 V 690 V 1 15 terminals 12 and 13 are jumpered Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 67 Electrical installation
267. er p1750 2 must be set to 1 Closed loop control without changeover is restricted to applications with passive load These include applications in which the load cannot produce a regenerative torque on startup and the motor comes to a standstill when pulses are inhibited for example moments of inertia brakes pumps fans centrifuges extruders etc Standstill of any duration is possible without holding current only the motor magnetization current is impressed The stationary regenerating operation at a frequency close to zero is not permissible It is also possible to select sensorless control for passive loads during commissioning by setting p0500 2 technology application passive loads for sensorless control down to f 0 Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 267 Setpoint channel and closed loop control 7 4 Vector speed torque control with without encoder This function is activated automatically if quick commissioning is exited with p3900 gt 0 or if automatic calculation is called p0340 1 3 5 or p0578 1 Function diagram FP 6730 Interface to Motor Module Parameter e p0305 Rated motor current e 10331 Motor magnetizing current short circuit current e p0500 Technology application e p0578 Calculating technology unit dependent parameters e p1610 Torque setpoint static SLVC e pi611 Supplementary accelerating torque SLVC e p1750 Motor model configuration
268. erating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 189 Operation 6 3 Basic information about the drive system Copying the command data set CDS Set parameter p0809 as follows 1 p0809 0 number of the command data set to be copied source 2 p0809 1 number of the command data to which the data is to be copied target 3 p0809 2 1 Start copying Copying is finished when p0809 2 0 Copying the drive data set DDS Set parameter p0819 as follows 1 p0819 0 Number of the drive data set to be copied source 2 p0819 1 Number of the drive data set to which the data is to be copied target 3 p0819 2 1 Start copying Copying is finished when p0819 2 0 Copy motor data set MDS Set parameter p0139 as follows 1 p0139 0 Number of the motor data set that is to be copied source 2 p0139 1 Number of the motor data set which should be copied into target 3 p0139 2 1 Start copying Copying has been completed if p0139 2 0 Function diagram FP 8560 FP 8565 FP 8570 FP 8575 190 Command data sets CDS Drive data set DDS Encoder data set EDS Motor data sets MDS Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5SE00189855A Operation Parameter e p0120 e p0130 e p0139 0 e p0140 e p0170 e p0180 e p0186 e p0187 0 e p0188 0 e p0189 0 e 0809 e 0810 e p0811 e p0819 0 e p0820 e p0821 e p0822 e p0823 e p082
269. eration corresponds to class 1 5mm at Sto 9 Hz 5 m s at gt 9 to 200 Hz 1M2 to EN 60721 3 1 3 7 mmat 5 9 Hz 10 m s at gt 9 200 Hz 2M2 to EN 60721 3 2 0 075 mm at 10 58 Hz 10 m s at gt 58 200 Hz Shock load 3 Acceleration corresponds to class 40 m s at 22 ms 1M2 to EN 60721 3 1 100 m s at 11 ms 2M2 to EN 60721 3 2 100 m s at 11 ms 3M4 to EN 60721 3 3 Deviations from the defined classes are shown in ta ics 1 Applies to cable lengths of up to 100 m 2 The EN standard specified is the European edition of international standard IEC 62103 3 The EN standards specified are the European editions of the international IEC standards with the same designations 12 2 1 Derating data Current derating as a function of the installation altitude and ambient temperature If the cabinet units are operated at a installation altitude gt 2000 m above sea level the maximum permissible output current can be calculated using the following tables The installation altitude and ambient temperature are compensated here The degree of protection selected for the cabinet units must also be taken into account Table 12 2 Current derating as a function of ambient temperature inlet air temperature at the air inlet of the cabinet unit and installation altitude for cabinet units with degree of protection IP20 IP21 IP23 IP43 Installation altitude above sea level in m Ambient temperature i
270. erature alarm threshold e p0606 Motor overtemperature timer e p0607 Temperature sensor fault timer e p0610 Response to motor overtemperature condition e p4100 Temperature evaluation sensor type Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5SE00189855A 10 Diagnosis faults and alarms Chapter content 10 1 This chapter provides information on the following e Troubleshooting e Service and support offered by Siemens AG loop control 5 D 7 2 oO o o c e an fo o 2 no Cabinet operator panel PROFIBUS Input terminals A60 TM31 Namur terminals X2 Functions Protective functions Faults alarms Monitoring functions Diagnosis Drive converter cabinet units 349 Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Diagnosis faults and alarms This section describes procedures for identifying the causes of problems and the measures you need to take to rectify them If errors or malfunctions occur in the device you must carefully check the possible causes and take the necessary steps to rectify them If you cannot identify the cause of the problem or you discover that components are defective your regional office or sales office should contact Siemens Service and describe the problem in more detail 10 2 Diagnosis 10 2 Diagnosis Description Note 10 2 1 CU320 Control Unit A10 Diagnostics using LEDs
271. ermanently saved and the calculations required for closed loop control are carried out 171 Commissioning 5 5 First commissioning with the AOP30 NOTICE A filter at the motor end must be entered in p0230 option L08 motor reactor p0230 1 option L10 dV dt filter with Voltage Peak Limiter p0230 2 option L15 sine wave filter p0230 3 Motor control will not otherwise function properly When p0230 4 Sine wave filter third party a separate sine wave filter can be entered An input screen then appears in which the specific filter can be entered Note The choice no selection is also available as default setting for the command and setpoint sources if selected no default settings are applied for the command and setpoint sources Basic commissioning Motor identification 2 VECTOR motor identification Selecting motor identification p type a o To navigate through the selection fields Stationary and rotating a choose lt F2 gt or lt F3 gt Only stationary To activate a selection choose lt F5 gt Stationary measurement increases the No identification Help v OK control performance as deviations in the electrical characteristic values are F1 F2 F3 F4 FS minimized on account of deviations in the 4 material properties and manufacturing _ tolerances 2 VECTOR motor identification Rotary measurem
272. erter This results in further adaptability of SINAMICS for the tasks set On site processing in the drive supports modular machine concepts and results in increased overall machine performance Note A detailed description of the DCC Editor and the available Drive Control Blocks is given in the relevant documentation This documentation is available on the accompanying customer CD Drive converter cabinet units 250 Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Setpoint channel and closed loop control T 7 1 Chapter content This chapter provides information on the setpoint channel and closed loop control functions e Setpoint channel Direction reversal Skip speed Minimum speed Speed limitation Ramp function generator e V f control e Speed control with without encoder Monitoring functions Functions Protective ura EA Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 251 Setpoint channel and closed loop control 7 2 Setpoint channel Function diagrams To supplement these operating instructions the documentation folder contains simplified function diagrams describing the operating principle The diagrams are arranged in accordance with the chapters in the operating instructions The page numbers 7xx describe the functionality in the following chapter At certain points in this chapter reference is made to function diagrams with a 4 digit number These can be fou
273. esent the defined original status of the device on delivery Resetting the parameters to the factory settings means that all the parameter settings made since the system was delivered are reset Resetting Parameters via AOP30 Table 5 4 Procedure for resetting parameters to the factory settings with AOP30 Advanced access level Setting the Extended access level on the operator panel j lt Key pushbutton gt lt Access level gt Set Extended Select parameter reset Setting the parameter filter to Parameter reset lt MENU gt lt Commissioning Service gt lt Device commissioning gt lt OK gt lt 30 Parameter Reset gt lt OK gt Press OK Reset all parameters to factory settings The factory settings for all the device parameters are restored Drive converter cabinet units 176 Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Commissioning 5 7 Parameter reset to factory settings Parameter reset via STARTER With STARTER the parameters are reset in online mode The required steps are described below Step Selection in toolbar Choose Project gt Connect to target system 2s y Click the drive unit whose parameters you want to reset to the factory settings and click Restore factory settings icon in the toolbar i To confirm click OK Restore Factory Settings Do you really want to restore the factory settings Bus address and baud rate will not be reset Restore factory settings V S
274. ess data links are set up automatically in accordance with the telegram number setting The following vendor specific telegrams can be set via p0922 e p0922 220 Speed setpoint 32 bit metal industry c Free telegrams p0922 999 Send and receive telegrams can be configured as required by using BICO technology to interconnect the send and receive words The default process data assigned under a is retained during the changeover to p0922 999 although it can be changed or supplemented at any time To maintain compliance with the PROF ldrive profile however the following assignments should be retained e Interconnect PZD receive word 1 as control word 1 STW 1 e Interconnect PZD send word 1 as status word 1 STW 1 For more information about possible interconnections see function diagrams FP2460 and FP2470 and the simplified diagrams 620 to 622 Telegram interconnections 216 After changing p0922 999 factory setting to p0922 999 the telegrams are interconnected and blocked automatically Note Telegrams 20 and 352 are the exceptions Here the PZDO6 in the send telegram and PZDO3 to PZDO6 in the receive telegram can be interconnected as required When you change p0922 999 to p0922 999 the previous telegram interconnection is retained and can be changed Note If p0922 999 a telegram can be selected in p2079 A telegram interconnection is automatically made and blocked However the telegram ca
275. et units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 9 Table of contents 10 6 17 76 AOP setpoint anaa titi heed ate eed deed dees abe eee havin Mest aed ened 233 OTT TIMEOUt MONITONING 65 iisc4 sce E eee se eed td OET ia 234 6 7 7 8 Operator input inhibit parameterization inhibit cccceeeceecece cece eeeeneeeeeeeeseeeecaeeeeeeeessenaees 234 6 7 8 FaulltS and alar mS isee ead aeaea e ea aE aaa aa a a a a ciated ede tiec ieee 236 6 7 9 Saving the parameters permanently sseesssiesssirerrreseseenreseradnnntaedtnnnaninnstnaannnnanetnnenatnnssananena 237 6 7 10 Parameterization Crrors ccccccceceeeceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeececaaeceeeeeesecaaaaeceeeesecacaaeeeeeeseesecaaeeeeeeseeeeeess 238 6 8 PRORINE T O cain e E dae a A ee led ae ade ee leer eee eet GOP 239 6 8 1 Activating online operation STARTER via PROFINET 10 ccceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeneeeetteeeeeenaeeeens 239 6 8 2 General information about PROFINET IO ccceeeeeeeeceeeeeeceeeeeeeecaaeeeeeeeeeseneaeeeeeeesssnaeeeeees 245 6 8 2 1 General information about PROFINET IO for SINAMICS 0 ccceceeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeenaes 245 6 8 2 2 Real time RT and isochronous real time IRT COMMUNICATION eee eeteteeettteeeettteeeeteee 246 6 8 2 3 AddrEsSSES ini vas tended adden coda eed aaea dl ddd de eatae e aaiae a a ataie ad dee eed 247 6 8 2 4 Data transmissiOn 2 cahiin ns Ae a eaten die alae ed eds athe ae eat tas 24
276. etection systems since these could be triggered by the resulting heat For outdoor installation a hood should be provided to protect the braking resistor against precipitation in accordance with degree of protection IP20 CAUTION A ventilation clearance of 200 m must be maintained on all sides of the braking resistor with ventilation grilles Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Electrical installation Table 4 34 Dimensions of the braking resistors 4 10 Other connections Unit 25 kW resistor option L61 50 kW resistor option L62 Width mm 740 810 Height mm 605 1325 Depth mm 485 485 T1 T2 nf FEE HHE Screw terminal M12 lil He 2 5 mm ii g FTN l O m50 1 7 EH 2x HEH HAHH T Threaded bolt Ground connection HS M8
277. eter Function diagram FD 3020 Motorized potentiometer Drive converter cabinet units 206 Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Operation Parameters e p1030 e p1037 e p1038 e p1047 e p1048 e 11050 Drive converter cabinet units 6 5 Setpoint sources Motorized potentiometer configuration Motorized potentiometer maximum speed Motorized potentiometer minimum speed Motorized potentiometer ramp up time Motorized potentiometer ramp down time Motorized potentiometer setpoint after the ramp function generator Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 207 Operation 6 5 Setpoint sources 6 5 3 Fixed speed setpoints Description A total of 15 variable fixed speed setpoints are available The default setting specified for the setpoint sources during commissioning via STARTER or the operating panel makes 3 fixed speed setpoints available They can be selected via terminals or PROFIBUS Requirement The default setting for the fixed speed setpoints was chosen during commissioning e STARTER Fixed setpoint e AOP30 4 Fixed setpoint Signal flow diagram FSW bit 0 FSW bit 1 0 000 Fixed speed setpoint 01 p1001 Fixed speed setpoint 02 p1002 Fixed speed setpoint 03 p1003 Figure 6 19 Signal flow diagram Fixed speed setpoints Function diagram FP 3010 Fixed speed setpoints Parameter e p1001 Fixed speed setpoint 01 e p1002 Fixed speed setpoint 02 e p1003 F
278. ever only enable intervention below the shutdown thresholds which cannot be changed by the user The following thermal monitoring options are available e i t monitoring A07805 F30005 i2t monitoring is used to protect components that have a high thermal time constant compared with semi conductors Overload with regard to i t is present when the converter load r0036 is greater than 100 load in in relation to rated operation e Heatsink temperature A05000 F30004 Monitoring of the heat sink temperature r0037 of the power semi conductor IGBT e Chip temperature A05001 F30025 Significant temperature differences can occur between the barrier layer of the IGBT and the heatsink These differences are taken into account and monitored by the chip temperature r0037 If an overload occurs with respect to any of these three monitoring functions an alarm is first output The alarm threshold p0294 i t monitoring can be parameterized relative to the shutdown trip values The factory setting for the alarm threshold for chip temperature monitoring is 15 Kelvin K and 5 K for the heat sink and inlet air This means that the Overtemperature overload alarm is triggered at 15 K or 5 K below the shutdown threshold The parameterized responses are induced via p0290 simultaneously when the alarm is output Possible responses include e Reduction in pulse frequency p0290 2 3 This is a highly effective method of
279. fault Comments 1 M Reference conductor 2 P24 V 24 V DC supply Protected internally with fuse 1 A 3 P24 V 24 V DC outgoing circuit Max connectable cross section 2 5 mm Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 117 Electrical installation 4 10 Other connections Table 4 53 Terminal block A1 X2 connection NAMUR control terminal block Terminal Designation Default Comments 10 DI ON OFF dynamic Effective operation can be coded by a wire ON OFF static jumper on terminal A1 X400 9 10 factory setting jumper inserted jumper inserted ON OFF dynamic jumper removed ON OFF static 11 DI OFF dynamic 12 DI Faster Motorized potentiometer 13 DI Slower Motorized potentiometer 14 DI RESET Acknowledge error 15 DI Interlock OFF2 16 DI Counterclockwise 0 signal CW phase sequence 4 signal CCW phase sequence 17 DI Power Disconnection EMERGENCY OFF circuit 18 0 signal Power disconnection 1 signal No power disconnection 30 DO COM Ready for operation Relay output NO contact 31 DO NO 32 DO COM Motor turning Relay output NO contact 33 DO NO 34 DO NO Fault Relay output two way contact 35 DO COM 36 DO NC 50 51 Al 0 4 20 mA Speed setpoint Default 4 to 20 mA 60 61 AO 0 4 20 mA Motor frequency Default 4 20 mA defaulted with motor frequency can be reparameterized for other variables 62 63 AO
280. ference variable is subsequently changed the value entered in a parameter will not change Example With a reference speed of 1500 1 min a fixed speed of 80 corresponds to a value of 1200 1 min Ifthe reference speed is changed to 3000 1 min the value of 80 is retained and is now 2400 1 min Restrictions e When a unit changeover occurs rounding to the decimal places is carried out This can mean that the original value might change by up to one decimal place e fa referenced form is selected and the reference parameters e g p2000 are changed retrospectively the physical significance of some of the control parameters is also adjusted which can affect the control behavior e Changing the reference variables p2000 to p2007 in the STARTER in offline mode can cause parameter value limit violations leading in turn to error messages when the values are loaded to the drive unit Changing over the units The units can be changed over via the AOP30 and via STARTER e Unit changeover via AOP30 is always carried out immediately Once the corresponding parameters have been changed the values affected are displayed in the new selected unit e f STARTER is used unit changeover can only take place in offline mode in the configuration screen of the corresponding drive object The new units are not displayed until after the download Load project to target system and subsequent upload Load project to PG have been c
281. fied by a unique parameter number and by specific attributes e g read write BICO attribute group attribute and so on The parameters can be accessed via the following means e PC with the STARTER commissioning tool via PROFIBUS e The user friendly AOP30 Operator Panel Parameter types The following adjustable and display parameters are available e Adjustable parameters write read These parameters have a direct impact on the behavior of a function Example Ramp up and ramp down time of a ramp function generator e Display parameters read only These parameters are used to display internal variables Example Current motor current Parameters eee ore read r write read p ee SS BICO output Normal read BICO input Normal parameters read write parameters Figure 6 1 Parameter types All these drive parameters can be read and changed via PROFIBUS using the mechanisms defined in the PROF Idrive profile Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 181 Operation 6 3 Basic information about the drive system Parameter categories The parameters for the individual drive objects see Drive objects are categorized according to data sets as follows see Operation data sets e Data set independent parameters These parameters exist only once per drive object e Data set dependent parameters These parameters can exist several times for each drive object and can be a
282. for the total moment of inertia J of the machine and describes the time during which the unloaded drive can be accelerated with the rated motor torque r0333 Mmotratea from standstill to the rated motor speed p0311 Nmotrated Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 273 Setpoint channel and closed loop control 7 4 Vector speed torque contro with without encoder Function diagram Parameter 274 10345 Tstartup J X 2 X TT X Nmot ated 60 X Mmot rated P0341 x p0342 x 2 x Tr x p0311 60 x r0333 The ramp up and ramp down times should always be set to values larger than the startup time Note The ramp up and ramp down times p1120 p1121 of the ramp function generator in the setpoint channel should be set accordingly so that the motor speed can track the setpoint during acceleration and braking This will optimize the function of speed controller pre control Acceleration pre control using a connector input p1495 is activated by the parameter settings p1400 2 1 and p1400 3 0 p1428 dead time and p1429 time constant can be set for balancing purposes FP 6031 Pre control balancing reference acceleration model e p0311 Rated motor speed e 10333 Rated motor torque e p0341 Motor moment of inertia e p0342 Ratio between the total and motor moment of inertia e 10345 Rated motor startup time e p1400 2 Acceleration pre control source e p1428 Speed pre control ba
283. friction characteristic The coordinates of every point along the characteristic are defined by a speed parameter p382x and a torque parameter p383x point 1 p3820 and p3830 Features e There are 10 points along the characteristic to represent the friction characteristic e An automatic function supports the friction characteristic plot e A connector output r3841 can be interconnected as friction torque p1569 e The friction characteristic can be activated and de activated p3842 Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 315 Functions Monitoring and Protective Functions 9 2 Drive Functions Commissioning Function diagram Parameters 316 Speeds for making measurements as a function of the maximum speed p1082 are pre assigned in p382x when commissioning the drive system for the first time These can be appropriately changed corresponding to the actual requirements The automatic friction characteristic plot can be activated using p3845 The characteristic is then plotted the next time that it is enabled The following settings are possible e p3845 0 Friction characteristic plot de activated e p3845 1 Friction characteristic plot activated all directions of rotation The friction characteristic is plotted in both directions of rotation The result of the positive and negative measurement is averaged and entered into p383x e p3845 2 Friction characteristic plot activa
284. g command data set CDS will be interconnected accordingly Cancel Help Figure 5 25 Default settings for setpoints command sources Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 151 Commissioning 5 3 Procedure for commissioning via STARTER gt Under Command sources choose and Setpoint sources choose the appropriate settings for your device configuration The following command and setpoint source options are available Command sources PROF Idrive TM31 terminals NAMUR PROF Idrive NAMUR Setpoint sources PROF ldrive TM31 terminals Motorized potentiometer Fixed setpoint Note With SINAMICS G150 only CDS0O is normally used as a default setting for the command and setpoint sources Make sure that the selected default setting is compatible with the actual system configuration Note The choice no selection is also available as default setting for the command and setpoint sources if selected no default settings are applied for the command and setpoint sources gt Check your default settings carefully and then click Continue gt Drive converter cabinet units 152 Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Commissioning 5 3 Procedure for commissioning via STARTER Defining the technological application motor identification Configuration SINAMICS_G150 Drive functions Drive unit Options Control structure Drive setting Moto
285. g sections Device description Mechanical installation Electrical installation Commissioning guide Description of function Maintenance instructions Technical specifications Overview diagrams These provide a general overview of the functionality of the cabinet units Basic function diagrams These provide an overview of the basic functions of the cabinet unit for simple applications List Manual The List Manual consists of the following sections Parameter list Function diagrams Fault warning list Documentation for Drive Control Chart DCC Programming and Operating Manual DCC Editor description Function Manual Description of the standard DCC blocks Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Foreword The individual documentation describes precisely one customized cabinet unit and contains the following Technical support Spare parts Internet address Dimension drawing The dimension drawing documents the dimensions of the ordered cabinet unit Layout diagram The layout diagram shows the components installed in the ordered cabinet unit Circuit diagram The circuit diagram shows the electrical components installed in the ordered cabinet unit their interconnections and the customer interfaces Terminal diagram The terminal diagram shows all the customer terminals in the ordered cabinet unit and the associated in
286. g to the application using the weighting factor p1496 For p1496 100 pre control is calculated according to the motor and load moment of inertia 00341 p0342 A balancing filter is used automatically to prevent the speed controller acting against the injected torque setpoint The time constant of the balancing filter corresponds to the equivalent delay time of the speed control loop Speed controller pre control is correctly set 01496 100 calibration using p0342 if the component of the speed controller r1482 does not change while ramping up or ramping down in the range n gt 20 x p0310 Thus pre control allows a new speed setpoint to be approached without overshoot prerequisite torque limiting does switch in and the moment of inertia remains constant If the speed controller is pre controlled by means of injection the speed setpoint r0062 is delayed with the same smoothing time p1442 or p1452 as the actual value r1445 This ensures that no target actual difference r0064 occurs at the controller input during acceleration which would be attributable solely to the signal propagation time When speed pre control is activated the speed setpoint must be specified continuously or without a higher interference level avoids sudden torque changes An appropriate signal can be generated by smoothing the speed setpoint or activating ramp function generator rounding p1130 p1131 The startup time r0345 Tstartup is a measure
287. ge 1 Comparison of DC link voltage with F30002 Overvoltage gt OFF2 hardware shutdown threshold DC link undervoltage Comparison of DC link voltage with F30003 Undervoltage gt OFF2 hardware shutdown threshold Short circuit Second monitoring threshold checked F30001 Overcurrent gt OFF2 for overcurrent Uce monitoring for IGBT module F30022 Monitoring Uce gt OFF2 Ground fault Monitoring the sum of all phase After threshold in p0287 is exceeded currents F30021 power unit Ground fault gt OFF2 Note The sum of all phase currents is displayed in r0069 6 For operation the value in p0287 1 must be greater than the sum of the phase currents when the insulation is intact Line phase failure F30011 Line phase failure in main circuit gt OFF2 detection 1 1 The monitoring thresholds are permanently set in the converter and cannot be changed by the user Drive converter cabinet units 342 Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Functions Monitoring and Protective Functions 9 4 2 Description Example 9 4 Monitoring and protective functions Thermal monitoring and overload responses The priority of thermal monitoring for power components is to identify critical situations If alarm thresholds are exceeded the user can set parameterizable response options that enable continued operation e g with reduced power and prevent immediate shutdown The parameterization options how
288. gh power rating e With 380 V 480 V 3 AC 6SL3710 2GE41 1AA0 6SL3710 2GE41 4AA0 6SL3710 2GE41 6AA0 e With 500 V 600 V 3 AC 6SL3710 2GF38 6AA0 6SL3710 2GF41 1AA0 6SL3710 2GF41 4AA0 e With 660 V 690 V 3 AC 6SL3710 2GH41 1AA0 6SL3710 2GH41 4AA0 6SL3710 2GH41 5AA0 2 VECTOR motor standard motor type p0100 Motor standard IEC NEMA 0 IEC 50Hz kW _ p0300m motor type selection 1 Async_motor Help A v OK M 2 VECTOR motor parameter m 0 Back p0210 supply voltage 400 V p0304mMot U_Bemes AWR Vrms p0305mMot I _Bemes 405 00 Aeff p0307mMot P_Bemes 235 00 kW Help A v OK F1 F2 F M F5 2 VECTOR motor parameter m 0 p0308mMot cosphi_Bemes 0 870 p0310mMot f_Bemes 50 00 Hz p0311mMot n_Bemes 1485 00 min 1 p0335mMotor cooling method 0 Selbstkthlung Help A v OK F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 You can select the motor standard and type in the dialog screen The following is defined for the motor standard 0 Line frequency 50 Hz motor data in kW 1 line frequency 60 Hz motor data in hp The following selection options are available for the motor type 1 Induction motor 2 Permanent magnet synchronous motor Other values are not permitted To navigate through the selection fields choose lt F2 gt or lt F3 gt To activate a selection choose lt F5 gt Entering motor data specified on the ty
289. gram for process data Configuring drive objects When you commission the system for the first time using the STARTER tool you will use configuration parameters to set up the software based drive objects which are processed on the Control Unit Various drive objects can be created within a Control Unit The drive objects are configurable function blocks and are used to execute specific drive functions If you need to configure additional drive objects or delete existing ones after initial commissioning the drive system must be switched to configuration mode The parameters of a drive object cannot be accessed until the drive object has been configured and you have switched from configuration mode to parameterization mode Note Each installed drive object is allocated a number between 0 and 63 during initial commissioning for unique identification Parameters e p0101 Drive object numbers e 10102 Number of drive objects e p0107 Drive object type e p0108 Drive object configuration Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 185 Operation 6 3 Basic information about the drive system 6 3 3 Description Data Sets For many applications it is beneficial if more than one parameter can be changed simultaneously by means of one external signal during operation when the system is ready for operation This can be carried out using indexed parameters whereby the parameters are grouped t
290. h without encoder 7 4 Vector speed torque control with without encoder Description Compared with V f control vector control offers the following benefits Stability vis a vis load and setpoint changes Short rise times with setpoint changes gt better command behavior Short settling times with load changes gt better disturbance characteristic Acceleration and braking are possible with maximum adjustable torque Motor protection due to variable torque limitation in motor and regenerative mode Drive and braking torque controlled independently of the speed These benefits are available without speed feedback Vector control can be used with or without an encoder The following criteria indicate when an encoder is required Maximum speed accuracy requirements Maximum dynamic response requirements Better command behavior Shortest settling times when disturbances occur Torque control is required in a control range greater than 1 10 Allows a defined and or variable torque for speeds below approx 10 of the rated motor frequency p0310 to be maintained A speed controller is normally always required for applications in which an unknown speed can represent a safety risk where a load can be dropped e g lifting gear elevators etc With regard to setpoint input vector control is divided into Speed control Torque current control in short torque control Drive converter cabinet units Operating In
291. hange its operating point once an alarm threshold has been overshot which means that the drive can be operated until it reaches its shutdown values Once it reaches its shutdown threshold the converter switches itself off and the Overtemperature overload fault is output The time until shutdown however is not defined and depends on the degree of overload To ensure that an alarm can be output earlier or that the user can intervene if necessary in the drive process e g reduce load ambient temperature only the alarm threshold can be changed FP 8014 Thermal monitoring power unit r0036 Power Module overload r0037 Power Module temperatures p0290 Power Module overload response p0294 Power Module alarm with i t overload Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5SE00189855A Functions Monitoring and Protective Functions 9 4 Monitoring and protective functions 9 4 3 Block protection Description The error message Motor blocked is only triggered if the speed of the drive is below the variable speed threshold set in p2175 With vector control it must also be ensured that the speed controller is at the limit With V f control the current limit must already have been reached Once the ON delay 92177 has elapsed the message Motor blocked and fault F7900 are generated 0 00 210 000 00 rpm p2175 120 00 n_act lt p2175 p1300 gt 20 gt Vector controls p1300 lt 20 gt
292. hat at least 1 parameter has been changed and not yet stored permanently Two methods are available for permanently saving parameters that have been changed e To store the parameters permanently choose lt MENU gt lt Parameterization gt lt OK gt lt Permanent parameter transfer gt e When confirming a parameter setting with OK press the OK key for gt 1 s The system displays a message asking you whether the setting is to be saved in the EEPROM If you press Yes the system saves the setting in the EEPROM If you press No the setting is not saved permanently and the S starts flashing In both cases all changes that have not yet been saved permanently are stored in the EEPROM Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 237 Operation 6 7 Control via the operator panel 6 7 10 Parameterization errors If a fault occurs when reading or writing parameters a popup window containing the cause of the problem is displayed The system displays Parameter write error d pxxxx yy 0xnn and a plain text explanation of the type of parameterization error Drive converter cabinet units 238 Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Operation 6 8 PROFINET O 6 8 PROFINET IO 6 8 1 Activating online operation STARTER via PROFINET IO Description The following options are available for online operation via PROFINET IO e Online operation via IP Prereq
293. have a relatively high stator resistance 19 Independent voltage setpoint The user can define the output voltage of the Power Module independently of the frequency using BICO parameter p1330 via the interfaces e g analog input AIO of the TM31 gt p1330 r4055 0 Function diagram Parameter 260 FP 6300 e p1300 V f characteristic and voltage boost Open loop closed loop control operating mode Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5SE00189855A Setpoint channel and closed loop control 7 3 1 Description 7 3 V f control Voltage Boost With low output frequencies the V f characteristics yield only a small output voltage With low frequencies too the ohmic resistance of the stator windings has an effect and can no longer be ignored vis a vis the machine reactance With low frequencies therefore the magnetic flux is no longer proportional to the magnetization current or the V f ratio The output voltage may however be too low to e Magnetize the induction motor e Maintain the load e Compensate for the voltage losses ohmic losses in the winding resistors in the system e Induce a breakaway accelerating braking torque You can choose whether the voltage boost is to be active permanently p1310 or only during acceleration p1311 Drv outp I_max r0067 Permanent voltage boost a a U_boost perm p1310 0 R_stator active 10395 U_b
294. he analog outputs Table 8 1 List of signals for the analog outputs Signal Parameters Unit Scaling 100 See table below Speed setpoint before the setpoint filter r0060 rpm p2000 Motor speed unsmoothed r0061 rpm p2000 Actual speed smoothed r0063 rpm p2000 Output frequency r0066 Hz Reference frequency Output current r0068 Aeff p2002 DC link voltage r0070 V p2001 Torque setpoint r0079 Nm p2003 Output power r0082 kW r2004 For diagnostic purposes Control deviation r0064 rpm p2000 Modulation depth r0074 Reference modulation depth Torque generating current setpoint 10077 A p2002 Torque generating actual current r0078 A p2002 Flux setpoint r0083 Reference flux Actual flux r0084 Reference flux For further diagnostic purposes Speed controller output r1480 Nm p2003 component of speed controller 11482 Nm p2003 Scaling Table 8 2 Scaling Size Scaling parameter Default for quick commissioning Reference speed 100 p2000 p2000 Maximum speed p1082 Reference voltage 100 p2001 p2001 1000 V Reference current 100 p2002 p2002 Current limit p0640 Reference torque 100 p2003 p2003 2 x rated motor torque Reference power 100 r2004 12004 p2003 x p2000 x Tr 30 Reference frequency 100 p2000 60 Reference modulation depth 100 Maximum output voltage without overload Reference flux 100 Rated motor flux Reference temperature 100 100 C Drive co
295. he cause A fault is a message from the drive indicating an error or other exceptional unwanted status that causes the drive to shutdown This could be caused by a fault within the converter or an external fault triggered for example by the winding temperature monitor for the motor The faults are displayed and can be reported to a higher level control system via PROFIBUS In the factory default setting the message converter fault is also sent to a relay output Once you have rectified the cause of the fault you have to acknowledge the fault message What is an alarm An alarm is the response to a fault condition identified by the drive It does not result in the drive being switched off and does not have to be acknowledged Alarms are self acknowledging that is they are reset automatically when the cause of the alarm has been eliminated Fault and alarm displays 236 Every fault and alarm is entered in the fault alarm buffer along with time the error occurred The time stamp refers to the relative system time in milliseconds r0969 You can call up an overview screen that displays the current status of faults and or alarms for every drive object in the system by choosing MENU Fault memory alarm memory A context menu featuring the Back and Quit options appears when you press F4 Next The function required can be selected using F2 and F3 and executed by pressing F5 OK The Acknowledge function sends an acknowledg
296. he cause of the fault e Replace the fuse 11 4 16 Replacing the fuse A1 F21 1 Open the cabinet 2 Remove the defective fuse 3 Fit the replacement fuse and close the fuse holder 4 Close the cabinet The order numbers for replacing fuses that have blown can be found in the spare parts list J N WARNING You must carry out the following e First disconnect the auxiliary power supply e Then rectify the cause of the fault e Replace the fuse Drive converter cabinet units 402 Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Maintenance and servicing 11 4 17 Replacing the cabinet operator panel Open the cabinet Remove the operator panel Install the new operator panel NO oO FBR OMN Switch the unit into a no voltage condition 11 4 Replacing components Disconnect the power supply and communications line on the operator panel Release the fastenings on the operator panel Carry out any other work by reversing the sequence 11 4 18 Replacing the Backup Battery for the Cabinet Operator Panel Table 11 2 Technical specifications of the backup battery Type CR2032 3 V lithium battery Manufacturer Maxell Sony Panasonic Nominal capacity 220 mAh Maximum permissible charging current 10 mA restricted to lt 2 mA in operator panel Self discharge at 20 C 1 year Service life in backup mode gt 1 year at 70 C
297. he dynamic response of drives without an encoder is significantly reduced The actual speed is derived by means of a model calculation based on the converter output variables for current and voltage that have a corresponding interference level To this end the actual speed must be adjusted by means of filter algorithms in the software Function diagram FP 6040 Speed controller Parameter e r0062 CO Speed setpoint after the filter e 10063 CO Actual speed value smoothed e p0340 Automatic calculation control parameters e 10345 CO Rated motor startup time e p1442 Speed actual value smoothing time VC e p1452 Speed actual value smoothing time encoderless VC e p1460 Speed controller P gain with encoder e p1462 Speed controller integral time with encoder e p1470 Speed controller encoderless operation P gain e p1472 Speed controller encoderless operation integral time e 11482 CO Torque output speed controller e 11508 CO Torque setpoint before supplementary torque e p1960 Speed controller optimization selection Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 271 Setpoint channel and closed loop control 7 4 Vector speed torque contro with without encoder Examples of speed controller settings 7 4 3 1 Description 272 A few examples of speed controller settings with vector control without encoders p1300 20 are provided below These should not be considered to be generally valid an
298. he kinetic energy of the motor is used for buffering the DC link voltage in the event of a momentary power failure thereby delaying the drive e Vdc_max Regelung This function can be used to control a momentary regenerative load without shutdown with overvoltage in DC link Vdc_max control is only recommended for a supply without active closed loop control for the DC link and without feedback Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 303 Functions Monitoring and Protective Functions 9 2 Drive Functions Description of Vdc_min control kinetic buffering Vdc Power failure Power restoration 11246 r1286 m 77 lt 1 gt See SS SS SS Ss eS SS Se without V_dc min control fault F30003 OV eee 4 1 Vdc controller active nsetp lt 2 gt rpm Power failure time Iqsetp Oran meets RR regenerative Figure 9 4 Switching Vdc_min control on off kinetic buffering Note Kinetic buffering must only be activated in version A in conjunction with an external power supply When Vdc_min control is enabled with p1240 2 3 p1280 it is activated if the power fails when the Vdc_min switch in level r1246 r1286 is undershot In general the regenerative power braking energy of the drive machine generated when the motor speed is reduced is used to buffer the DC link voltage of the converter in other words when Vdc_min con
299. he type plate can be used to ascertain the date of manufacture If the period from the C E date of manufacture to initial commissioning or the cabinet unit downtime is less than two years the DC link capacitors do not have to be re formed If the downtime period is longer than two years they must be reformed in accordance with the description found in the section Maintenance and servicing Reforming the DC link capacitors 11 With an external auxiliary supply the cable for the 230 V AC supply must be connected to C C terminal X40 while the cable for the 24 V DC supply must be connected to terminal X9 see Electrical installation Power connections External supply of the auxiliary supply from a secure line 12 Option L10 During commissioning the filter must be selected via STARTER or C E dv dt filter plus AOP30 You are advised to check the selection by ensuring that Voltage Peak p0230 is set to 2 Limiter The required parameters are set automatically see Electrical installation Other connections dv dt filter plus Voltage Peak Limiter option L10 13 Option L15 During commissioning the filter must be selected via STARTER or C E Sine wave filter AOP30 You are advised to check the selection by ensuring that p0230 is set to 3 The required parameters are set automatically see Electrical installation Other connections Sine wave filter option L15 14 Option L19 To su
300. hing the top of the cabinet to the wall are also supplied for 400 mm wide cabinets to provide extra security Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 43 Mechanical installation 3 3 Assembly 3 3 4 3 3 5 Description 44 Mechanical connection of units that are connected in parallel The following cabinet units units that are connected in parallel are supplied in two separate transport units e 380 V 480 V 3 AC 6SL3710 2GE41 1AA0 6SL3710 2GE41 4AA0 6SL3710 2GE41 6AA0 e 500 V 600 V 3 AC 6SL3710 2GF38 6AA0 6SL3710 2GF41 1AA0 6SL3710 2GF41 4AA0 e 660 V 690 V 3 AC 6SL3710 2GH41 1AA0 6SL3710 2GH41 4AA0 6SL3710 2GH41 5AA0 The left hand sub cabinet has the locator code H A24 and H A49 and the right hand sub cabinet has the locator code H A25 and H A50 The cabinet operator panel is also mounted here Numerous connectors are provided attached loose with the equipment to mechanically connect the two sub cabinets These connectors should be attached and as far as possible evenly distributed Fitting additional canopies option M21 or hoods option M23 M43 M54 To increase the degree of protection of the cabinets from IP20 standard to IP21 IP23 IP43 or IP54 additional canopies or hoods are supplied These must be fitted once the cabinets have been installed The degree of protection can be increased to IP21 by fitting an additional canopy The canopy is
301. his area you can access frequently used functions via the icons 2 Project navigator The elements and projects available in the project are displayed here 3 Working area In this area you can change the settings for the drive units 4 Detail view Detailed information about faults and alarms for example is displayed this area Drive converter cabinet units 124 Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Commissioning 5 3 Procedure for commissioning via STARTER 5 3 Procedure for commissioning via STARTER Basic procedure using STARTER STARTER uses a sequence of dialog screens for entering the required drive unit data NOTICE These dialog screens contain default settings which you may have to change according to your application and configuration This is intentional because By taking time to consider what configuration data you enter you can prevent inconsistencies between the project data and drive unit data identifiable in online mode 5 3 1 Creating the project Click the STARTER icon on your desktop or choose the following menu path in the Windows start menu to call up STARTER Start gt Simatic gt STEP 7 gt STARTER The first time you run the software the main screen shown below appears with the following windows e STARTER Getting Started Drive Commissioning e STARTER Project Wizard The commissioning steps are listed below in numerical order Drive converter cabinet units Operating
302. hout equiv circuit diag data Motor holding brake Encoder Complete calculation with equiv circuit diagram data Defaults of the setg ODrive functions LIPROFIBUS proces Important paramete Note The basic settings of the current and speed control and limits as summary M well as the ESB data are calculated from the entered type plate S gt data The type plate data must be complete The calculation overwrites entered ESB data Input of the ESB data according to the data sheet is preferable to a calculation Cancel Help Figure 5 21 Calculating the motor controller data gt In Calculation of the motor controller data select the appropriate default settings for your device configuration Note If the equivalent circuit diagram data was entered manually see figure Entering the equivalent circuit diagram data the motor controller data should be calculated without calculating the equivalent circuit diagram data gt Click Continue gt Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 147 Commissioning 5 3 Procedure for commissioning via STARTER Configuring the motor holding brake Configuration SINAMICS_G150 Motor holding brake Drive unit Drive Drive_1 DDS 0 Uptions Control structure Holding brake configuration C ve settini h Ai n na No motor holding brake being used 0 m Motor data is Extended brake control Optional M
303. hows the maximum number of data sets parameterized and thereby available for selection in the drive e Drive indicates which data set is currently active in the drive e AOP indicates which particular data set is currently being displayed in the operator panel Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 223 Operation 6 7 Control via the operator panel 6 7 4 224 Menu Fault alarm memory When you select the menu a screen appears containing an overview of faults and alarms that are present For each drive object the system indicates whether any faults or alarms are present Fault or Alarm appears next to the relevant drive object In the graphic below you can see that at least one active fault alarm is present for the VECTOR drive object No faults alarms are indicated for the other drive objects Alarm overview 1 CU_G 2 VECTOR Fault Alarm 3 TM31 v Extras Diag 4 2 VECTOR Display diagnostics Current faults Current alarms Old faults Old alarms A v Back OK F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 2 VECTOR Faults imey4siel0m External fault 1 0067 21 11 07 Fault alarm memory When you navigate to the line with active alarms faults and then press the F5 lt Diag gt key the system displays a screen in which you have to select the current or old alarms faults Display diagnosis When you navigate to
304. hreshold temperature TM31 251 C When this value is exceeded TM31 sensing alarm A35211 is triggered p4102 1 Fault threshold for temperature TM31 251 C When this value is exceeded TM31 sensing fault F35207 is triggered p7003 Winding system Vector 1 Separate winding systems Vector Parameter macro p0700 5 PROFIdrive 70005 This macro is used to set the PROFIdrive interface as the default command source Table A 2 Parameter macro p0700 5 PROF Idrive Sink Source Parameter Description DO Parameter Description DO p0840 0 ON OFF 1 Vector r2090 0 PZD 1 bit 0 Vector p0844 0 No OFF2_1 Vector r2090 1 PZD 1 bit 1 Vector p0845 0 No OFF2_2 Vector 10722 3 CU DI3 CU p0848 0 No OFF3_1 Vector r2090 2 PZD 1 bit 2 Vector p0849 0 No OFF3_2 Vector 10722 2 CU DI2 CU p0806 Inhibit LOCAL mode Vector 0 Vector p0810 Changeover CDS bit 0 Vector 0 Vector p0852 Enable operation Vector r2090 3 PZD 1 bit 3 Vector p0854 Control request Vector r2090 10 PZD 1 bit 10 Vector p0922 PROF ldrive PZD telegram selection Vector 999 Free telegram configuration p1020 FSW bit 0 Vector 0 Vector p1021 FSW bit 1 Vector 0 Vector p1035 MOP raise Vector r2090 13 PZD 1 bit 13 Vector p1036 MOP lower Vector r2090 14 PZD 1 bit 14 Vector p1113 Direction of rotation reversal Vector r2090 11 PZD 1 bit 11 Vector p1140 Enable RFG Vector r2090 4 PZD 1 bit 4 Vector p1141 Start RFG Vector r2090 5 PZD 1 bit 5 Vector p1142 Enable nsetp Vector r2090 6 PZD 1 bit 6 Vector p2103 Acknowledge fault
305. iate NEC National Electrical Code or CEC Canadian Electrical Code standards Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 431 Technical specifications 12 3 Technical specifications 12 3 3 Table 12 16 Version A 500 V 600 V 3 AC part 1 Cabinet unit version A 500 V 600 V 3 AC Order number 6SL3710 1GF31 8AA0 1GF32 2AA0 1GF32 6AA0 Unit rating for IL at 50 Hz 500 V kW 110 132 160 for IH at 50 Hz 500 V 7 kW 90 110 132 for IL at 60 Hz 575 V hp 150 200 250 for I at 60 Hz 575 V 2 hp 150 200 200 Output current Rated current In A 175 215 260 Base load current IL 3 A 171 208 250 Base load current IH A 157 192 233 Input current Rated input current A 191 224 270 Input current max A 279 341 410 Current requirements for 24 VDC JA 1 35 1 35 1 35 auxiliary supply Connection voltages Line voltage Vacrms 500 V 3 AC 10 to 600 V 3 AC 10 15 lt 1 min Line frequency Hz 47 to 63 Hz Electronics power supply Voc 24 20 4 28 8 Power loss kW 3 8 4 2 5 0 Cooling air requirement m s 0 36 0 36 0 36 Sound pressure level Lpa dB A 69 73 69 73 69 73 1 m at 50 60 Hz Line connection recommended DIN VDE mm2 120 2x70 2x95 maximum DIN VDE mm 4 x 240 4 x 240 4 x 240 Fixing screw M12 2 holes M12 2 holes M12 2 holes Motor connection recommended DIN VDE mm 95 120 2x70
306. ic cables and signal cables 5 plugs 3 Remove the DRIVE CLiQ cables and connections to the CU320 5 plugs 4 Remove the retaining screws for the slide in electronics unit 2 screws When removing the slide in electronics unit you have to disconnect 5 further plugs one after the other 2 at the top 3 below CAUTION When removing the unit ensure that you do not damage any signal cables The Control Interface Board can then be removed from the slide in electronics unit CAUTION When removing the ribbon cable s connectors make sure that you actuate the locking lever on the connector very carefully e g with a screwdriver because otherwise the lock could be damaged Installation steps For installation carry out the above steps in reverse order CAUTION The tightening torques specified in the table Tightening torques for connecting current conducting parts must be observed Carefully establish the plug in connections and then ensure that they are secure When dealing with connectors with a lock make sure that the locking lever is securely engaged once connected The fiber optic cable plugs must be remounted at their original slot Fiber optic cables and sockets are accordingly labeled for correct assignment U11 U21 U31 The screwed connections for the protective covers must only be tightened by hand Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5
307. ical installation Other connections EMERGENCY STOP category 1 230 V AC option L59 Drive converter cabinet units 52 Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Electrical installation 4 2 Checklist for electrical installation Item Activity Fulfilled Complete 23 Option L60 EMERGENCY STOP category 1 stops the drive in a controlled manner C C EMERGENCY With this option braking units brake chopper and external braking STOP category resistors may need to be implemented due to the load characteristic 1 24VAC and to achieve the required shutdown times No additional wiring is necessary when implemented in conjunction with option L45 If the cabinet unit is integrated in an external safety circuit however the contact must be looped in via terminal block X120 The timer relay at K120 must be adapted to match system requirements see Electrical installation Other connections EMERGENCY STOP category 1 24 V AC option L60 24 Option L61 L62 The connecting cables and ground for the braking resistor must be C C 25 kW 125 kw connected to terminal block X5 1 2 A connection must be established 50 kW 250 kw between the braking resistor thermostatic switch and customer terminal braking unit block A60 When commissioning via AOP30 the settings for evaluating external fault 3 must be made The settings for evaluating the thermostatic switch as external fault 2 must be made see Elect
308. ich must be implemented on the line side For this purpose an NC contact is installed at terminal block X120 Connection Table 4 27 Terminal block X120 checkback contact EMERGENCY OFF pushbutton in the cabinet door Terminal Designation Technical specifications 1 NC 1 Checkback contacts of EMERGENCY OFF pushbutton in cabinet door 2 3 NC 22 Max load current 10 A 4 Max switching voltage 250 V AC Max switching capacity 250 VA Required minimum load 21 mA 1 NC normally closed contact 2 Factory setting in converter for options L57 L59 and L60 Max connectable cross section 4 mm2 Drive converter cabinet units 86 Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Electrical installation 4 10 Other connections 4 10 7 Cabinet illumination with service socket option L50 Description A universal lamp with an integrated service socket is installed in each cabinet panel The power supply for the cabinet illumination and socket must be provided externally and fused at max 10 A The cabinet illumination is switched on manually via a slide switch or automatically by means of an integrated motion detector factory setting The mode is selected via the switch on the light Connection Table 4 28 Terminal block X390 connection for cabinet illumination with service socket Terminal Designation Technical specifications 1 L1 230 V AC 2 N power supply 3 PE Protective condu
309. ield cannot be corrected by swapping the motor cables it can be corrected when commissioning the drive via p1821 rotating field direction reversal by changing the rotating field and thus enabling a direction reversal see section Direction reversal Direction of rotation changeover is triggered e via PROFIBUS by means of control word 1 bit 11 e via the cabinet operator panel LOCAL mode with the direction of rotation changeover key Note Note that only one direction of rotation is enabled in the factory setting when control is carried out via the AOP30 FP 3040 Direction of rotation limiting and direction of rotation changeover e pi110 Inhibit negative direction e p1111 Inhibit positive direction e p1113 Direction reversal units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 253 Setpoint channel and closed loop control 7 2 Setpoint channel 7 2 3 Suppression bandwidths and minimum speeds Description Variable speed drives can generate critical whirling speeds within the control range of the entire drive train This prevents steady state operation in their proximity in other words although the drive can pass through this range it must not remain within it because resonant oscillations may be excited The skip frequency bands allow this range to be blocked for steady state operation Because the points at which critical whirling speeds occur in a drive train can vary depending on age or thermal factors
310. ignment with p0922 20 Vector p2104 Acknowledge faults_2 Vector 0 Vector p2106 Ext fault_1 Vector r0722 1 CU DI1 CU p2107 Ext fault_2 Vector 1 Vector p2112 Ext alarm_1 Vector r0722 0 CU DIO CU p2116 Ext alarm_2 Vector 1 Vector p0738 DI DO8 CU 1 24 V CU p0748 8 Invert DI DO8 CU 0 Not inverted p0728 8 Set DI DO8 input or output CU 1 Output p0739 DI DO9 CU 1 24 V CU p0748 9 Invert DI DO9 CU 0 Not inverted p0728 9 Set DI DO9 input or output CU 1 Output p0740 DI DO10 CU 1 24 V CU p0748 10 Invert DI DO10 CU 0 Not inverted p0728 10 Set DI DO10 input or output CU 1 Output p0741 DI DO11 CU 1 24 V CU p0748 11 Invert DI DO11 CU 0 Not inverted p0728 11 Set DI DO11 input or output CU 1 Output Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 479 Appendix A 2 Parameter macros Sink Source Parameter Description DO Parameter Description DO p0742 DI DO12 CU 1 24 V CU p0748 12 Invert DI DO12 CU 0 Not inverted p0728 12 Set DI DO12 input or output CU 1 Output p0743 DI DO13 CU r0899 6 Switching on inhibited Vector p0748 13 Invert DI DO13 CU 1 Inverted p0728 13 Set DI DO13 input or output CU 1 Output p0744 DI DO14 CU 1 24 V CU p0748 14 Invert DI DO14 CU 0 Not inverted p0728 14 Set DI DO14 input or output CU 1 Output p0745 DI DO15 CU 12138 7 Ack fault Vector p0748 15 Invert DI DO15 CU 0 Not inverted p0728 15 Set DI DO15 inpu
311. igure 6 10 TM31 terminal assignment with PROFldrive default setting Control word 1 The bit assignment for control word 1 is described in Description of the control words and setpoints Status word 1 The bit assignment for status word 1 is described in Description of the status words and actual values Switching the command source The command source can be switched using the LOCAL REMOTE key on the AOP30 Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 197 Operation 6 4 Command sources 6 4 2 TM31 terminals default setting Prerequisites The TM31 Terminals default setting was chosen during commissioning e STARTER TM31 Terminals e AOP30 6 TM31 terminals Command sources Button LOCAL REMOTE AOP r0807 Master control active Assume master control STARTER 0 REMOTE TM31 1 LOCAL Operator panel STARTER Internal control Operator panel AOP Control panel STARTER PROFIBUS PROFINET M Input terminals A60 TM31 Figure 6 11 Command sources AOP30 gt terminal TM31 Priority The priority of the command sources is shown in the diagram Command sources AOP30 gt terminal TM31 Note The emergency OFF and motor protection signals are always active regardless of the command source For LOCAL master control all of the supplementary setpoints are de activated Drive converter cabinet units 198 Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E0018
312. in contactor or circuit breaker for 12 pulse infeed The checkback contacts of the main contactors and the circuit breakers are connected in series in the factory and wired to digital input 5 of the CU320 Control Unit After the drive unit has been commissioned the checkback signal monitoring function must be activated This is realized using parameter p0860 Vector 722 5 Control_Unit N DANGER If the monitoring function for the main contactor or circuit breaker checkback signal is not activated then the drive could be powered up even if the main contactor or circuit breaker on an individual system fails This could overload and damage the input rectifiers on the individual system NOTICE When resetting restoring the parameterization to the factory setting this setting must be again made after the drive unit has been recommissioned Settings for motor connection to a motor with one winding system During commissioning a motor with several winding systems is automatically defined The setting for a one winding system is made after commissioning has been completed by setting parameter p7003 to 0 NOTICE If the motor with a one winding system is not set using p7003 0 then the drive can be powered down tripped during the motor identification routine with an overcurrent fault message The system will not be properly tuned NOTICE When resetting restoring the parameterization t
313. ing current conducting parts must be observed Carefully establish the plug in connections and then ensure that they are secure The screwed connections for the protective covers must only be tightened by hand The fiber optic cable plugs must be remounted at their original slot Fiber optic cables and sockets are accordingly labeled for correct assignment U11 U21 U31 Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 379 Maintenance and servicing 11 4 Replacing components Replacing the right hand power block St Figure 11 9 Replacing the power block frame size JX right hand power block Drive converter cabinet units 380 Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Maintenance and servicing 11 4 Replacing components Preparatory steps e Disconnect the cabinet unit from the power supply e Allow unimpeded access to the power block e Remove the protective cover Removal steps The removal steps are numbered in accordance with the figure Remove the busbar 8 screws Unscrew the connection to the DC link 8 nuts Remove the retaining screw at the top 1 screw Remove the retaining screws at the bottom 2 screws Disconnect the plug in connections for the fiber optic cables and signal cables 2
314. ing the fan type FA harenean deed a len AOA A 390 11 4 11 Replacing the fan type GX eee eeeeneeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeaeeeseeaeeeeeeaaeeeseeaeeeseeaaeeeeeaeeeseenaeeeeniaeeeaes 392 11 4 12 Replacing the fan ype HX amei E E EER 394 11 4 13 Replacing the fan type JX eessseessssessrresssinssrsrnnnnennnnnsisnnasnnaantenannntansnnanannnnndeandantaananenaanann nana 398 11 4 14 Replacing the fan fuse T1 F10 T1 F11 ssesseeesiesesrrssesrsserrssrrrrssrrrssrrrrssrenssrrnrssrrnnnnt 402 11 4 15 Replacing the fuses for the auxiliary power supply A1 F11 A1 F12 eene 402 11 4 16 Replacing the fuse A1 F21 ooo eee eeeeee ee eeenee ee eeeeeeaeeeeeeeaeeeeeaaeeeseeaeeeseeaaeeeeeeaeeeseenaeeeenianeeees 402 11 4 17 Replacing the cabinet operator panel cccceececeeceeeceececeeeeeseeaeeeeeeeeesecaeaeeeeeeesesenieeeeeeeeetnas 403 11 4 18 Replacing the Backup Battery for the Cabinet Operator Panel ec eceeeseeeeeeeseneeeeeeeeeees 403 11 5 Forming the DC link CapaCitOrs sirara iaeiiai aR AAE E AATA a E A 405 11 6 Messages after replacing DRIVE CLIQ COMPONENTS eeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeteeeaeeeeeenees 406 11 7 Upgrading the cabinet Unit firmware cece cece cece cence ee seeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseeeeeeeseneaeeseeaeeeseeaeees 407 11 8 Load the new operator panel firmware from the PC c cccceceeeeeeeeceeeeeeeseceneeeeeeeseeseeeseees 408 12 Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 1
315. ints p1001 CO Fixed speed setpoint 1 Vector 300 300 rpm Vector p1002 CO Fixed speed setpoint 2 Vector 600 600 rpm Vector p1003 CO Fixed speed setpoint 3 Vector 1500 1500 rpm Vector p1083 CO Speed limit in positive direction Vector 6000 6000 rpm Vector of rotation p1086 CO Speed limit in negative Vector 6000 6000 rpm Vector direction of rotation p1115 Ramp function generator selection Vector 1 Extended RFG Vector p1120 Ramp function generator ramp up Vector 20 20s Vector time p1121 Ramp function generator ramp Vector 30 30s Vector down time p1135 OFF3 ramp down time Vector 10 10s Vector p1200 Flying restart operating mode Vector 0 Flying restart not active Vector p1240 Vdc controller configuration Vector 1 Vdc max controller enabled Vector Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 471 Appendix A 2 Parameter macros Sink Source Parameter Description DO Parameter Description DO p1254 Vdc controller automatic ON level Vector 1 Automatic detection enabled Vector detection p1280 Vdc controller configuration V f Vector 1 Vdc max controller enabled Vector p1300 Open loop closed loop control Vector 20 Encoderless speed control Vector operating mode p1911 Number of phases to be identified Vector 3 3 phases Vector p2051 0 Cl PROFIBUS PZD send word Vector r2089 0 ZSW1 Vector
316. ion reduce output voltage or switch off will be triggered Exceptions e With an activated sinus filter p0230 3 4 this behavior is not permitted because the factory set pulse frequency 2 5 kHz or 4 kHz should not be changed through this measure Consequently in this case the selection possibility for the parameter p0290 is limited to 0 and 1 Activation of the variable pulse frequency At commissioning the parameter p 0290 is automatically set to the value 2 This activates pulse frequency reduction at overload Deactivation of the variable pulse frequency By changing the parameter p0290 to 0 or 1 the variable pulse frequency is deactivated Function diagram FP 8014 Signals and monitoring functions thermal monitoring power unit Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 325 Functions Monitoring and Protective Functions 9 2 Drive Functions Parameter e 10036 Power unit overload I2t e 10037 CO Power unit temperatures e p0115 Sampling times for internal control loops e p0230 Drive filter type motor side e p0290 Power unit overload response e p1082 Maximum speed e 2135 13 Fault thermal overload power unit e 2135 15 Thermal overload in power unit alarm Drive converter cabinet units 326 Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Functions Monitoring and Protective Functions 9 3 9 3 1 Description 9 3 Extended functions Extended functions Techno
317. ion between the motors by modifying the speeds of the individual motors drive is relieved when the torque becomes too great Droop injection P1488 Speed setpoint Torque setpoint Actual speed value om Only active if pre control is active SLVC p1452 11470 p1472 p1436 gt 70 p1442 p1460 p1462 Encoderless VC only Figure 7 15 Speed controller with droop e All connected drives must be operated with vector and speed control with or without speed actual value encoder e The setpoints at the ramp function generators of the mechanically connected drives must be identical the ramp function generators must have identical ramp up and ramp down times Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Setpoint channel and closed loop contro 7 4 Vector speed torque control with without encoder Function diagram FP 6030 Speed setpoint droop Parameter e 10079 Total speed setpoint e 11482 Speed controller torque output e p1488 Droop input source e p1489 Droop feedback scaling e 11490 Droop feedback speed reduction e p1492 Droop feedback enable e 11508 Torque setpoint before supplementary torque 7 4 4 Closed loop torque control Description For sensorless closed loop speed control p1300 20 or closed loop speed control with encoder VC p1300 21 it is possible to change over to closed loop torque control using BICO parameter p1501 It is not possible to change
318. ions 340 External alarm 1 359 External fault 1 360 External fault 2 360 External fault 3 360 External supply 69 F F7860 External fault 1 360 F7861 External fault 2 360 F7862 External fault 3 360 Factory setting 176 Fan Frame size FX replace 390 Frame size GX replacement 392 Frame size HX replacement 394 Frame size JX replacement 398 Fan voltage adjustment 64 Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5SE00189855A Index Fast magnetization 302 L Faults 359 Faults and alarms 359 L10 79 L13 81 Faults and alarms 236 L15 81 Features 22 vers L19 83 Field of applications 21 L26 84 Filtermatten Austausch 369 i L45 86 Firmware update 407 i L50 87 Firmware upgrading 407 L55 87 Fixed setpoints 208 L57 88 Fixed speed setpoints 208 s L59 90 Flying restart 310 L60 91 with encoder 312 j L61 92 without encoder 311 L62 92 Forming the DC link capacitors 405 ee is L83 98 Friction characteristic curve 315 Fuse L84 98 L86 98 A1 F21 402 280 L87 100 Fans U1 F10 U1 F11 402 Fuse auxiliary power supply A1 F11 A1 F12 402 L939 monitoring 340 LOCAL REMOTE key 231 Lock AOP local mode 234 G Low overload 416 G33 102 G61 115 M M13 47 M21 45 H M23 46 High overload 416 M43 46 M54 46 M78 47 l Main circuit breaker incl fuses option L26 84 Main Contactor Option L13 81 Mainte
319. ipping The devices are packaged by the manufacturer in accordance with the climatic conditions and stress encountered during transit and in the recipient country The notes on the packaging for transportation storage and proper handling must be observed For transportation using forklifts the devices must be set down on a wooden pallet When the devices are unpacked they can be transported using the optional transport eyebolts option M90 or rails on the cabinet unit The load must be distributed evenly Heavy blows or impacts must be avoided during transit and when the devices are being set down for example Permissible ambient temperatures Ventilation 25 C to 70 C class 2K3 to IEC 60 721 3 2 Down to 40 C for max 24 hours Note Notes regarding built in line side components If built in system side components are to be installed on doors or side panels you must take the following points into account The degree of protection IP20 IP21 IP23 IP43 IP54 must not be reduced as a result The electromagnetic compatibility of the cabinet unit must not be adversely affected When control elements are installed on side or rear panels these panels must be grounded separately Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5SE00189855A Mechanical installation 3 2 Transportation and storage Note Notes regarding damage in transit e Carry out a thorough visual inspection of the device bef
320. iption of the control words and setpoints Status word 1 The bit assignment for status word 1 is described in Description of the status words and actual values Switching the command source The command source can be switched using the LOCAL REMOTE key on the AOP30 Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 203 Operation 6 5 Setpoint sources 6 5 Setpoint sources 6 5 1 Analog inputs Description The customer terminal block TM31 features two analog inputs for specifying setpoints for current or voltage signals In the factory setting analog input 0 terminal X521 1 2 is used as a current input in the range 0 to 20 mA Requirement The default setting for analog inputs was chosen during commissioning e STARTER TM31 Terminals e AOP30 2 TM31 terminals V Ea 99 ae Vv 5 1 Type i k Smoothing p4056 Offset p4053 p4063 Curr U I r4052 Current value r4055 only when p4056 3 p4058 F3505 Wire breakage analog input Figure 6 17 Signal flow diagram analog input 0 Scaling Function diagram FP 9566 TM31 analog input O Al 0 FP 9568 TM31 analog input 1 Al 1 Parameter e 14052 Actual input voltage current e p4053 Analog inputs smoothing time constant e 14055 Analog inputs actual input value in percent e p4056 Analog inputs type e p4057 Analog inputs characteristic value x1 Drive converter cabinet units 204 Oper
321. is equipped with a radio interference suppression filter as standard in accordance with the limit values defined in category C3 Optional filters can be fitted for use in the first environment category C2 Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 59 Electrical installation 4 6 Electrical connection of units that are connected in parallel Protective ground conductors e According to EN 61800 5 1 Section 6 3 6 7 the minimum cross section of the protective ground conductor must conform to the local safety regulations for protective ground conductors for equipment with a high leakage current 4 6 Electrical connection of units that are connected in parallel Description After the mechanical installation has been completed the following electrical connections must be established between the right hand and left hand sub cabinets for units that are connected in parallel e The PE buses must be connected e Connecting the DC link connections e The 24 V DC 230 V AC power supply and signal cables must be connected e The DRIVE CLiQ topology must be connected N DANGER During connection installation and repair work on units that are connected in parallel it must be ensured that both sub cabinets are electrically disconnected from the power supply 4 6 1 Connecting the PE busbars Connecting the PE buses A connector jumper is provided loose to connect the PE buses of the two s
322. issions of light noise particles or gas caused by for example Component malfunctions Software errors Operating and or ambient conditions not within the scope of the specification External influences damage 3 Hazardous shock voltages caused by for example Component malfunctions Influence of electrostatic charging Induction of voltages in moving motors Operating and or ambient conditions not within the scope of the specification Condensation conductive contamination External influences damage 4 Electrical magnetic and electromagnetic fields generated in operation that can pose a risk to people with a pacemaker implants or metal replacement joints etc if they are too close 5 Release of environmental pollutants or emissions as a result of improper operation of the system and or failure to dispose of components safely and correctly For more information about residual risks of the Power Drive System components see the relevant chapters in the technical user documentation 18 Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 ASE00189855A Safety information 1 3 Components that can be destroyed by electrostatic discharge ESD J N WARNING Electromagnetic fields electro smog Electromagnetic fields are generated by the operation of electrical power engineering installations such as transformers converters or motors Electromagnetic fields can interfere with electronic devices
323. itched using the LOCAL REMOTE key on the AOP30 Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 199 Operation 6 4 Command sources 6 4 3 NAMUR default setting Prerequisites The NAMUR terminal block option BOO is installed in the cabinet unit The NAMUR default setting was chosen during commissioning e STARTER NAMUR e AOP30 7 NAMUR Command sources Button LOCAL REMOTE AOP r0807 Master control active Assume master control STARTER 0 REMOTE NAMUR terminal block 5 1 LOCAL Operator panel STARTER Internal control Operator panel AOP Control panel STARTER N ENIRE NAMUR terminals X2 Figure 6 13 Command sources AOP30 gt NAMUR terminal block Priority The priority of the command sources is shown in the diagram Command sources AOP30 lt gt NAMUR terminal block Note The EMERGENCY STOP and motor protection signals are always active regardless of the command source For LOCAL master control all of the supplementary setpoints are deactivated Drive converter cabinet units 200 Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Operation 6 4 Command sources Terminal Assignment with the NAMUR Default Setting When you choose the NAMUR default setting the terminal assignment is as follows as with option BOO NAMUR terminal block A1X2 e M ON dynamic 2
324. ith a duty cycle duration of 300 s see Overload capability 4 The base load current IH is based on a duty cycle of 150 for 60 s or 160 for 10 s with a duty cycle duration of 300 s see Overload capability 5 The current values given here are based on the rated output current 6 The recommendations for the North American market in AWG or MCM must be taken from the appropriate NEC National Electrical Code or CEC Canadian Electrical Code standards Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 435 Technical specifications 12 3 Technical specifications Table 12 18 Version A 500 V 600 V 3 AC part 3 Order number 6SL3710 1GF35 8AA0 1GF37 4AA0 1GF38 1AA0 Unit rating for IL at 50 Hz 500 V kW 400 500 560 for I at 50 Hz 500 V 1 kW 315 450 500 for IL at 60 Hz 575 V 2 hp 600 700 800 for I at 60 Hz 575 V 2 hp 500 700 700 Output current Rated current In A 575 735 810 Base load current IL 3 A 560 710 790 Base load current IH A 514 657 724 Input current Rated input current A 598 764 842 Input current max A 918 1164 1295 Current requirements for 24 VDC JA 1 4 1 5 1 5 auxiliary supply Connection voltages Line voltage Vacrms 500 V 3 AC 10 to 600 V 3 AC 10 15 lt 1 min Line frequency Hz 47 to 63 Hz Electronics power supply Voc 24 20 4 28 8 Power loss kW 8 7 12 7 14 1 Cooling air
325. iting time p1212 Following successful acknowledgement and restoration of the voltage the system is automatically powered up again 308 Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5SE00189855A Functions Monitoring and Protective Functions 9 2 Drive Functions The startup attempt has been completed successfully once the flying restart and magnetization of the motor induction motor has been completed r0056 4 1 and one additional second has expired The startup counter is not reset to the initial value p1211 until this point If additional faults occur between successful acknowledgement and the end of the startup attempt then the startup counter when it is acknowledged is also decremented Monitoring time power restoration p1213 The monitoring time starts when the faults are detected If the automatic acknowledgements are not successful the monitoring time will continue If the drive has not successfully restarted by the time the monitoring time expires flying restart and motor magnetization must have been completed r0056 4 1 fault FO7320 is output Monitoring is deactivated by setting p1213 0 If p1213 is set to a value lower than the sum of p1212 the magnetization time r0346 and the additional delay time due to flying restart then fault F07320 will be generated on every restart attempt If for p1210 1 the time in p1213 is set to a value lower than p1212 then fault FO7320 will al
326. its 244 Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Operation 6 8 2 6 8 2 1 6 8 PROFINET IO General information about PROFINET IO General information about PROFINET IO for SINAMICS General information PROFINET PROFINET IO is an open Industrial Ethernet standard for a wide range of production and process automation applications PROFINET IO is based on Industrial Ethernet and observes TCP IP and IT standards The following standards ensure open multi vendor systems e International standard IEC 61158 PROFINET IO is optimized for high speed time critical data communication at field level Within the framework of Totally Integrated Automation TIA PROFINET represents a consequent enhancement of e PROFIBUS DP the established field bus and e Industrial Ethernet the communications bus for the cell level Experience gained from both systems was and is being integrated into PROFINET As an Ethernet based automation standard defined by PROFIBUS International PROFIBUS user organization PROFINET is a manufacturer independent communication and engineering model When a CBE20 Communication Board is inserted SINAMICS G150 becomes an IO device in terms of PROFINET SINAMICS G150 and CBE20 can be used for communication via PROFINET IO with RT CAUTION Inserting the CBE20 Communication Board deactivates the cyclic PZD channel for PROFIBUS DP Note PROFINET for drive technology is standardi
327. ive Functions 9 2 Drive Functions 9 2 4 Vdc control Description The Vdc control function can be activated using the appropriate measures if an overvoltage or undervoltage is present in the DC link e Overvoltage in the DC link Typical cause The drive is operating in regenerative mode and is supplying too much energy to the DC link Remedy Reduce the regenerative torque to maintain the DC link voltage within permissible limits Note When switching off or during rapid load changes if failure often arises and fault F30002 DC link overvoltage is reported you may be able to improve the situation by increasing the gain factor for the Vdc controller p1250 p1290 e g from 1 00 to 2 00 e Undervoltage in the DC link Typical cause Failure of the supply voltage or supply for the DC link Remedy Specify a regenerative torque for the rotating drive to compensate the existing losses thereby stabilizing the voltage in the DC link This process is known as kinetic buffering Kinetic buffering is only possible as long as energy is generated by the movement of the drive Characteristics e Vdc control This comprises Vdc_max control and Vdc_min control kinetic buffering which are independent of each other It contains a joint PI controller The dynamic factor is used to set Vdc_min and Vdc_max control independently of each other e Vdc_min control kinetic buffering With this function t
328. ive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 ASE00189855A Electrical installation 4 10 Other connections Note When the factory settings are restored parameter p0230 is reset The parameter must be reset if the system is commissioned again 4 10 4 Connection for External Auxiliary Equipment Option L19 Description This option includes an outgoing circuit fused at max 10 A for external auxiliary equipment e g separately driven fan for motor The voltage is tapped at the converter input upstream of the main contactor circuit breaker and therefore has the same level as the supply voltage The outgoing circuit can be switched within the converter or externally Connection Table 4 24 Terminal block X155 Connection for external auxiliary equipment Terminal Designation Technical specifications 1 L1 380 480 V 3 AC 2 L2 500 600 V 3 AC 3 L3 660 690 V 3 AC 11 Contactor control 230 V AC 12 13 NO Checkback 230 VAC 0 5A 14 motor circuit breaker 24V DC 2A 15 NO Checkback from 240 VAC 6A 16 contactor PE PE PE 1 NO NO contact Max connectable cross section 4 mm Note The connection for external auxiliary equipment must be set in accordance with the connected consumer Q155 Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 83 Electrical installation 4 10 Other connections Circuit proposal for controlli
329. ixed speed setpoint 03 e 11024 Fixed speed setpoint effective 208 Fixed speed setpoint Active 11024 Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5SE00189855A Operation 6 6 PROFIBUS Note Other fixed speed setpoints are available using p1004 to p1015 They can be selected using p1020 to p1023 6 6 PROFIBUS 6 6 1 PROFIBUS connection PROFIBUS Connection Position Address Switch and Diagnostic LED The PROFIBUS connection address switch and diagnostics LED are located on the Control Unit CU320 X126 Uii LEDs PRORIBUS l i PROFIBUS Connection Diagnostics LED m Hy 2 me o 60 PROFIBUS te anl Address switches ARR ED RAE Figure 6 20 View of the Control Unit with PROFIBUS interface Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 209 Operation 6 6 PROFIBUS PROFIBUS link The PROFIBUS link is connected by means of a 9 pin SUB D socket X126 The connections are electrically isolated Table 6 7 X126 PROFIBUS connection Pin Signal name Meaning Range 1 SHIELD Ground connection 2 M24 _ SERV Power supply for teleservice ground OV O O 3 RxD TxD P Receive transmit data P B B RS485 a O 4 CNTR P Control signal TTL O O 5 DGND PROFIBUS data reference potential C C O Q 6 VP Supply voltage plus 5V 10 oO 7 P24 SERV Power supply for teleservice P 24 V 24 V 20 4 V 28 8 V 8 Rx
330. ized immediately at the appropriate frequency The duration of magnetization is specified in p0346 Once the excitation build up time has elapsed the ramp function generator is set to the actual speed value and the motor ramped up to the current setpoint speed J N WARNING When the flying restart p1200 function is active the drive may still be accelerated by the detection current despite the fact that it is at standstill and the setpoint is 0 For this reason entering the area around the drive when it is in this condition can cause death serious injury or considerable material damage Parameters p1200 Flying restart operating mode e 0 Flying restart inactive e 1 Flying restart is always active start in the setpoint direction e 2 Flying restart is active after power on fault OFF2 start in the setpoint direction e 3 Flying restart is active after fault OFF2 start in the setpoint direction e 4 Flying restart is always active start only in the setpoint direction e 5 Flying restart is active after power on fault OFF2 start only in the setpoint direction e 6 Flying restart is active after fault OFF2 start only in the setpoint direction p1202 Flying restart search current p1203 Flying restart search rate factor r1204 Flying restart V f control status e 11205 Flying restart vector control status Note For p1200 1 2 3 the following applies Search in both directions
331. k mask 255 255 0 0 decimal 11111111 11111111 00000000 00000000 binary IP address 140 80 0 2 significance The first 2 bytes of the IP address decide the sub network in other words 140 80 The last two bytes address the node in other words 0 2 Default router If data needs to be forwarded by means of TCP IP to a partner located outside the sub network this is carried out via the default router In the properties dialog in STEP 7 Properties of Ethernet interface gt Parameters gt Network transfer the default router is described as the router STEP 7 assigns the local IP address to the default router Drive converter cabinet units 248 Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Operation 6 8 PROFINET IO 6 8 2 4 Data transmission Features The Communication Board CBE20 supports e IRT isochronous real time Ethernet e RT real time Ethernet e Standard Ethernet services TCP IP LLDP UDP and DCP PROFIdrive telegram for cyclic data transmission and non cyclic services Telegrams to send and receive process data are available for each drive object of a drive unit with cyclic process data exchange In addition to cyclic data transfer acyclic services can also be used for parameterizing and configuring the drive These acyclic services can be used by the supervisor or the controller The total length of the Ethernet frame increases with the number of drive objects in a drive unit Sequence of drive objects in the
332. l p1246 p1286 Vdc_min controller switch in level p1247 p1287 Vdc_min controller dynamic factor p1250 p1290 Vdc controller proportional gain p1251 p1291 Vdc controller integral action time p1252 p1292 Vdc controller derivative action time p1293 Vdc_min controller output limit V f control p1254 p1294 Vdc_max controller automatic ON level detection p1255 p1295 Vdc_min controller time threshold p1256 p1296 Vdc_min controller response p1257 p1297 Vdc_min controller speed threshold r1258 r1298 Vdc controller output Drive converter cabinet units 306 Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Functions Monitoring and Protective Functions 9 2 Drive Functions 9 2 5 Automatic restart function Description The automatic restart function automatically restarts the cabinet unit after an undervoltage or a power failure The alarms present are acknowledged and the drive is restarted automatically The drive can be restarted using e The standard procedure starting from standstill or e The flying restart function For drives with low moments of inertia and load torques facilitating the stopping of the drive within a matter of seconds e g pump drives with water gauges starting from standstill is recommended Note The flying restart function can also be activated for drives with large moments of inertia such as fan drives This enables you to switch to the motor that is still rotating J
333. l speed setpoint component Speed controller reference model natural frequency Speed controller reference model damping Speed controller reference model dead time Speed controller reference model speed setpoint output Speed controller reference model component input 855A 275 Setpoint channel and closed loop control 7 4 Vector speed torque control with without encoder 7 4 3 3 Speed controller adaptation Description Two adaptation methods are available namely free Kp_n adaptation and speed dependent Kp_n Tn_n adaptation Free Kp_n adaptation is also active in operation without encoder mode and is used in operation with encoder mode as an additional factor for soeed dependent Kp_n adaptation Speed dependent Kp_n Tn_n adaptation is only active in operation with encoder mode and also affects the Tn_n value pies p1400 6 Adaptation signal 1 referred to p200x or p205x Adaptation signal 2 p1458 p1466 p1460 fo p1456 p1457 Kp_n_adapt p1461 Encoderless P1465 gt i bist pia ee to speed vector contro Field weakening controller Encoderless vector control active p1464 only p1463 Speed dependent Tn_n adaptation Figure 7 13 Free Kp adaptation Tn_n_adapt A dynamic response reduction in the field weakening range can be activated in encoderless operation p1400 0 This is activated when the speed controller is optimized i
334. l via the operator panel Setting the date time for date stamping of error messages In this menu you set the date and time You can also set whether and or how the AOP and drive unit are to be synchronized Synchronization of the AOP with the drive enables error messages to be date and time stamped e None factory setting The times for the AOP and drive unit are not synchronized e AOP gt Drive If you activate this option the AOP and drive unit are synchronized immediately whereby the current AOP time is transferred to the drive unit The current AOP time is transferred to the drive unit every time the AOP is started At02 00 AOP time every day the current AOP time is transferred to the drive unit e Drive gt AOP If you activate this option the AOP and drive unit are synchronized immediately whereby the current drive unit time is transferred to the AOP The current drive unit time is transferred to the AOP every time the AOP is started At 02 00 AOP time every day the current drive unit time is transferred to the AOP Date format In this menu the date format can be set e DD MM YYYY European date format e MM DD YYYY North American data format Resetting AOP settings When you choose this menu option the AOP factory settings for the following are restored e Language e Display brightness contrast e Operation screen e Control settings NOTICE When you reset parameters
335. lancing dead time e p1429 Speed pre control balancing time constant e p1496 Acceleration pre control scaling e 1518 Acceleration torque Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5SE00189855A Setpoint channel and closed loop control 7 4 3 2 Reference model Description 7 4 Vector speed torque control with without encoder The reference model becomes operative when p1400 3 1 and p1400 2 0 The reference model is used to emulate the speed control loop with a P speed controller The loop emulation can be set in p1433 to p1435 It becomes effective if p1437 is connected to the output of the model r1436 The reference model delays the setpoint actual value deviation for the integral component of the speed controller so that settling stabilizing operations can be suppressed The reference model can also be externally emulated and the external signal entered via p1437 Droop Speed setpoint Actual speed value Figure 7 12 Re Function diagram FP 6031 Parameters e p1400 3 e p1433 e p1434 e p1435 e 11436 e p1437 Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189 Reference model pre control p1433 injection p1435 orque setpoint r1547 1 r1539 Ti Kp Tn 7 SLVC p1452 p1470 p1472 Ti VG p1442 p1460 p1462 ference model Pre control balancing reference acceleration model Reference mode
336. larm option L83 e PT100 Evaluation Unit Option L86 When a fault is indicated the following procedure is recommended 1 Identify the cause by examining the specified devices display or LEDs 2 Check the fault display on the relevant protection device and establish the fault 3 Rectify the displayed fault with the help of the appropriate operating instructions provided in Additional Operating Instructions Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 359 Diagnosis faults and alarms 10 3 Overview of warnings and faults 10 3 2 External fault 1 Causes Fault code F7860 External Fault 1 is triggered by the following optional protection devices in the cabinet unit e Thermistor motor protection unit shutdown option L84 e PT100 Evaluation Unit Option L86 Remedy When a fault is indicated the following procedure is recommended 1 Identify the cause by examining the specified devices display or LEDs 2 Check the fault display on the relevant protection device and establish the fault 3 Rectify the displayed fault with the help of the appropriate operating instructions provided in Additional Operating Instructions 10 3 3 External fault 2 Causes Fault code F7861 External Fault 2 is triggered when the braking resistor available with options L61 and L62 is subject to thermal overload thereby activating the thermostat The drive is switched off with OFF2 Remedy The
337. lied for the command and setpoint sources Command sources e PROFIdrive e TM31 terminals e NAMUR e PROFIdrive NAMUR Setpoint sources e PROFIdrive e Analog inputs e Motorized potentiometer e Fixed setpoints The various assignments are explained in the following sections Note Make sure that the default settings you choose during commissioning are compatible with the cabinet configuration see Commissioning Emergency STOP signals L57 L59 and L60 and motor protection signals L83 and L84 are always active regardless of the command source Function diagrams To supplement these Operating Instructions the documentation folder contains simplified function diagrams describing the operating principle The diagrams are arranged in accordance with the chapters in the Operating Instructions The page numbers 6xx describe the functionality in the following chapter At certain points in this chapter reference is made to function diagrams with a 4 digit number These are stored on the documentation CD in the SINAMICS G List Manual which provides experienced users with detailed descriptions of all the functions Drive converter cabinet units 180 Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Operation 6 3 Basic information about the drive system 6 3 Basic information about the drive system 6 3 1 Parameters Overview The drive is adapted to the relevant drive task by means of parameters Each parameter is identi
338. lock f y yA lt a Hac ES i A o an o an oro Figure 11 8 Replacing the power block frame size JX left hand power block Drive converter cabinet units 378 Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Maintenance and servicing 11 4 Replacing components Preparatory steps e Disconnect the cabinet unit from the power supply e Allow unimpeded access to the power block e Remove the protective cover Removal steps The removal steps are numbered in accordance with the figure Unscrew the connection to the DC link 8 nuts Remove the retaining screw at the top 1 screw Remove the retaining screws at the bottom 2 screws Disconnect the plug in connections for the fiber optic cables and signal cables 2 plugs Remove the connections to the mains supply 6 screws Oak oN a Unscrew the two retaining screws for the fan and attach the tool for de installing the power block at this position You can now remove the power block CAUTION When removing the power block ensure that you do not damage any signal cables Installation steps For installation carry out the above steps in reverse order CAUTION The tightening torques specified in the table Tightening torques for connect
339. logy controller The technology controller function module allows simple control functions to be implemented e g e Liquid level control e Temperature control e Dancer position control e Pressure control e Flow control e Simple control without higher level control e Tension control The technology controller features e Two scalable setpoints e Scalable output signal e Separate fixed values e Separate motorized potentiometer e The output limits can be activated and deactivated via the ramp function generator e The D component can be switched to the system deviation or actual value channel e The motorized potentiometer of the technology controller is only active when the drive pulses are enabled The technology controller is designed as a PID controller whereby the differentiator can be switched to the control deviation channel or the actual value channel factory setting The P I and D components can be set separately A value of 0 deactivates the corresponding component Setpoints can be specified via two connector inputs The setpoints can be scaled via parameters p2255 and p2256 A ramp function generator in the setpoint channel can be used to set the setpoint ramp up ramp down time via parameters p2257 and p2258 The setpoint and actual value channel each have a smoothing element The smoothing time can be set via parameters p2261 and p2265 The setpoints can be specified via separate fixed setpoints p2201 to
340. loop controller Example liquid level control The objective here is to maintain a constant level in the container This is carried out by means of a variable speed pump in conjunction with a sensor for measuring the level The level is determined via an analog input e g Al0 TM31 and sent to the technology controller The level setpoint is defined in a fixed setpoint The resulting controlled variable is used as the setpoint for the speed controller In this example a Terminal Module TM31 is used Drive converter cabinet units 328 Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Functions Monitoring and Protective Functions 9 3 Extended functions Sensor Figure 9 8 Level control Application Tec_ctr Kp Tec_ctr Tn p2280 p2285 XSetp Ramp function generator Tec_ctr Setpoint p2253 n_setp1 f p1155 a Xactual Figure 9 9 Level control Controller structure Key control parameters e p1155 r2294 n_setp1 downstream of RFG FD 3080 e p2253 12224 Technology controller setpoint effective via fixed setpoint FD 7950 e p2263 1 D component in fault signal FD 7958 e p2264 r4055 Actual value signal Xactual via AIO of TM31 FP 9566 e p2280 Kp Calculate P gain by means of optimization e p2285 Tn Calculate integral time by means of optimization e p2200 1 Technology controller enabled Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 329 F
341. ls e g because the faults occurred too frequently 4 Automatic restart after line supply failure no additional startup attempts If p1210 4 an automatic restart will only be performed if in addition fault F30003 occurs on the Motor Module or there is a high signal at binector input p1208 1 or in the case of an infeed drive object A_Infeed F06200 is pending If additional faults are pending then these faults will also be acknowledged if this is successful the startup attempt will be resumed The failure of the CU s 24 V power supply will be interpreted as a line supply failure 6 Restart after any fault with additional startup attempts If p1210 6 an automatic restart will be performed after any fault or at p1208 0 1 If the faults occur one after the other then the number of startup attempts is defined using p1211 Monitoring over time can be set using p1213 Startup attempts p1211 and waiting time p1212 p1211 is used to specify the number of startup attempts The number is decremented internally after each successful fault acknowledgement line supply voltage must be restored or the infeed signals that it is ready Fault F07320 is output when the number of parameterized startup attempts is reached If p1211 x x 1 startup attempts will be made Note A startup attempt starts immediately when the fault occurs The faults are acknowledged automatically at intervals of half the wa
342. m line side 8 remove jumpers 7 8 and connect button 9 Jumper wired in the factory 10 11 Jumper wired in the factory 14 12 Jumper wired in the factory 13 15 On for monitored start 16 Remove jumpers 15 16 and connect button 17 NO 1 Checkback trip safety combination 18 1 NO NO contact Max connectable cross section 4 mm Setting The time 0 5 to 30 s set at the contactor safety combination K121 should be greater or at least identical to the time that the drive requires to reach standstill via quick stop OFF3 ramp down time p1135 since the converter is disconnected from the power supply after expiry of the time at K121 Diagnostics Messages output during operation and in the event of faults meaning of LEDs on K120 K121 are described in the Additional Operating Instructions of the Operating Instructions Drive converter cabinet units 90 Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Electrical installation 4 10 11 Description Connection Setting Diagnostics 4 10 Other connections EMERGENCY STOP category 1 24 V DC option L60 EMERGENCY STOP category 1 for controlled stop to EN 60204 1 This function stops the drive by means of a quick stop along a deceleration ramp that must be parameterized The cabinet unit is then disconnected from the power supply via the line contactor which bypasses the electronics by means of a safety combination to EN 60204 1 The operating status and the functio
343. maximum DIN VDE mm 2x150 2x150 2 x 150 Fixing screw M12 2 holes M12 2 holes M12 2 holes Protective conductor connection Fixing screw M12 2 holes M12 2 holes M12 2 holes Max motor cable length shielded unshielded m 300 450 300 450 300 450 Dimensions standard version Width mm 800 800 800 Height mm 2000 2000 2000 Depth mm 600 600 600 Power block frame size GX GX GX Weight without options approx kg 390 390 390 432 Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5SE00189855A Technical specifications 12 3 Technical specitications Order number Recommended protection Line protection with option L26 Rated current frame size to DIN 43620 1 Line and semiconductor protection without option L26 Rated current Frame size to DIN 43620 1 6SL3710 A 1GF31 8AA0 3NA3244 6 250 2 3NE1227 2 250 1 1GF32 2AA0 3NA3252 6 315 2 3NE1230 2 315 1 1GF32 6AA0 3NA3354 6 355 3 3NE1331 2 350 2 1 Rated output of a typical 6 pole standard induction motor based on IL or I at 500 V 3 AC 50 Hz 2 Rated output of a typical 6 pole standard induction motor based on IL or I at 575 V 3 AC 60 Hz 3 The base load current IL is based on a duty cycle of 110 for 60 s or 150 for 10 s with a duty cycle duration of 300 s see Overload capability 4 The base load current IH is based on a duty cycle of 150 for 60 s or 160 fo
344. ments are carried out when the enable signals are set and a switch on command is issued in accordance with the settings in p1959 and p1960 Encoder test If a speed encoder is used the direction of rotation and the pulse number are checked Only for induction motors Measurement of the magnetization characteristic p0362 to p0369 Measurement of the magnetization current p0320 and determination of the offset voltage of the converter for offset compensation Measurement of the saturation of the leakage inductance and setting of the current controller adaptation p0391 p0393 This is automatically activated with 1LA1 and 1LA8 motors p0300 11 18 see p1959 5 Speed controller optimization p1470 and p1472 if p1960 1 encoderless operation p1460 and p1462 if p1960 2 operation with encoder Kp adaptation switch off Acceleration pre control setting p1496 Setting for ratio between the total moment of inertia and that of the motor p0342 Note To set the new controller setting permanently the data must be saved with p0977 or p0971 to non volatile memory on the CompactFlash card Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 299 Functions Monitoring and Protective Functions 9 2 Drive Functions Parameter 300 N DANGER During speed controller optimization the drive triggers movements in the motor that can reach the maximum motor spe
345. meter values e Function keys for prompted navigation through the menus e Two stage security concept to protect against accidental or unauthorized changes to settings e Degree of protection IP 54 when installed Display 5 function keys Master control selection Direction reversal Increase decrease Numeric keypad ON OFF Figure 5 32 Components of the cabinet unit operator panel AOP30 164 Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Commissioning 5 5 First commissioning with the AOP30 5 5 First commissioning with the AOP30 5 5 1 Initial ramp up Start screen When the system is switched on for the first time the Control Unit CU320 is initialized automatically The following screen is displayed SIEMENS Figure 5 33 Initial screen When the system boots up the parameter descriptions are loaded into the operating field from the CompactFlash card NOTE Load parameter description E 0 50 400 PLEASE WAIT Figure 5 34 Load the parameter descriptions while booting up the system Selecting the language When the system is first booted up a screen for selecting the language appears S prachaliewahliLanguagelsclection You can select the language in the dialog English screen Deutsch Frangais Espa ol To change the language choose lt F2 gt or Italiano lt F3 gt Chi
346. missioning In this menu you can enter the device commissioning status directly This is the only way that you can reset parameters to the factory setting for example 6 7 5 3 AOP settings Control settings This defines the settings for the control keys in LOCAL mode see Operation Control via the operator panel Operation via the operator panel Display settings In this menu you set the lighting brightness and contrast for the display Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 225 Operation 6 7 Control via the operator panel Defining the operation screen In this menu you can switch between five operation screens You can set the parameters that are to be displayed Define operation screen Operation screen Screen2 not_active lt gt 01 KAMRE CAVE Setpt after limit Oper screen type 4 values 2 bar lt gt F5 02 02 r00024 00 Drv U_outp smooth Operation screen values gt 03 02 r00032 00 Power factor smth Screen2 type 8 values 1 bar lt gt 04 02 r00026 00 Vdc smooth Help A v Back Change Help A v Back Change F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 Figure 6 27 Defining the operation screen The following image shows how the entries are assigned to the screen positions OPERATION gt 12 25 30 S OP
347. missioning an induction motor When commissioning a permanent magnet synchronous motor there are a few special conditions that apply which are detailed in a separate chapter see Setpoint channel and closed loop control permanent magnet synchronous motors gt Click Continue gt Drive converter cabinet units 142 Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Commissioning 5 3 Procedure for commissioning via STARTER Configuring the motor Entering motor data Configuration SINAMICS_G150 Motor data Dive unit Drive Drive_1 DDS 0 MDS 0 Options nae structure Motor data Induction motor rotary Template rive setting Motor a ae ea p304 0 Rated motor voltage Motor holding brake 305 0 Rated motor current 00 Encoder p307 0 Rated motor power 108 00 Defaults of the selpoin p308 0 Rated motor power factor 10 850 Drive functions p310 0 Rated motor frequency 50 90 PROFIBUS p311 0 Rated motor speed RPM Important parameters p335 0 Motor cooling type Non vertat TT Summary a Ea The motor data must be entered completely MV Do you want to enter the optional data MV Do you want to enter the equivalent circuit diagram data Note Deselection of the optional or equivalent circuit diagram data resets these irrevocably Motor identification is required when the equivalent circuit diagram data is deselect
348. mm2 2x150 2 x 240 8 x 240 Fixing screw M12 1 hole M12 1 hole M12 4 holes Protective conductor connection Fixing screw M12 2 holes M12 2 holes M12 2 holes Max motor cable length shielded unshielded m 300 450 300 450 300 450 Dimensions standard version Width mm 400 400 600 Height mm 2000 2000 2000 Depth mm 600 600 600 Power block frame size GX GX HX Weight without options approx kg 300 300 670 Recommended protection Line and semi cond protection 3NE1334 2 3NE1436 2 3NE1438 2 Rated current A 500 630 800 frame size to DIN 43620 1 2 3 3 428 Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5SE00189855A Technical specifications 12 3 Technical specitications Order number 6SL3710 1GE33 8CA0 1GE35 0CA0 1GE36 1CA0 1 Rated output of a typical 6 pole standard induction motor based on I or IH at 400 V 3 AC 50 Hz 2 Rated output of a typical 6 pole standard induction motor based on IL or IH at 460 V 3 AC 60 Hz 3 The base load current IL is based on a duty cycle of 110 for 60 s or 150 for 10 s with a duty cycle duration of 300 s see Overload capability 4 The base load current IH is based on a duty cycle of 150 for 60 s or 160 for 10 s with a duty cycle duration of 300 s see Overload capability 5 The current values given here are based on the rated output current 6 The recommendations for the North American market in AWG or MCM must be taken from the app
349. motor based on I or IH at 690 V 3 AC 50 Hz 2 The base load current I1 is based on a duty cycle of 110 for 60 s or 150 for 10 s with a duty cycle duration of 300 s see Overload capability 3 The base load current IH is based on a duty cycle of 150 for 60 s or 160 for 10 s with a duty cycle duration of 300 s see Overload capability 4 The current values given here are based on the rated output current 5 The recommendations for the North American market in AWG or MCM must be taken from the appropriate NEC National Electrical Code or CEC Canadian Electrical Code standards Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 459 Technical specifications 12 3 Technical specifications Table 12 30 Version C 660 V 690 V 3 AC Part 2 frame size to DIN 43620 1 1 Order number 6SL3710 1GH31 5CA0 1GH31 8CA0 1GH32 2CA0 Unit rating for IL at 50 Hz 690 V kW 132 160 200 for IH at 50 Hz 690 V 7 kW 110 132 160 Output current Rated current In A 150 175 215 Base load current IL 2 A 142 171 208 Base load current IH A 134 157 192 Input current Rated input current 4 A 164 191 224 Input current max A 232 279 341 Current requirements for 24 VDC JA 1 1 1 35 1 35 auxiliary supply Connection voltages Line voltage Vacrms 660 V 3 AC 10 to 690 V 3 AC 10 15 lt 1 min Line frequency Hz 47 to 63
350. mseinheit 50 kW Option L62 92 Bypass Bypass with synchronizer with degree of overlapping 331 Bypass with synchronizer without degree of overlapping 333 Without synchronization 335 Bypass function 330 C Cabinet anti condensation heating option L55 87 Cabinet illumination with service socket option L50 87 Cable lengths 62 CAN bus 104 CBC10 104 CBC10 Communication Board CAN bus 104 CBE20 102 CDS command data set 186 Copy 190 Certificate of compliance with order 15 Certification 15 Changing the language 231 Checklist Electrical installation 50 Mechanical installation 41 Circuit breaker option L26 84 483 Index Cleaning 364 Closed loop torque control 279 Command data set 186 Command sources General information 180 NAMUR 200 PROFIdrive 196 PROFIdrive NAMUR 202 TM31 terminals 198 Communication Board Ethernet CBE20 option G33 102 Connecting the DC link connections 61 Connecting the PE buses 60 Connecting up the DRIVE CLIQ topology 61 Connecting up the power supply and the signal cables 61 Connection cross sections 62 Connection for External Auxiliary Equipment Option L19 83 Connector input CI 192 Connector output CO 192 Control Interface Board Frame size FX replacement 382 Frame size GX replacement 384 Frame size HX replacement 386 Frame size JX replacement 388 Control via PROFIBUS 213 Customer terminal block 71 Customer terminal block extension optio
351. n 1 2 Safety and operating instructions 1 2 Safety and operating instructions Prerequisites 16 DANGER This equipment is used in industrial high voltage installations During operation this equipment contains rotating and live bare parts For this reason they could cause severe injury or significant material damage if the required covers are removed if they are used or operated incorrectly or have not been properly maintained When the machines are used in non industrial areas the installation location must be protected against unauthorized access protective fencing appropriate signs Those responsible for protecting the plant must ensure the following e The basic planning work for the plant and the transport assembly installation commissioning maintenance and repair work is carried out by qualified personnel and or checked by experts responsible e The operating manual and machine documentation are always available e The technical specifications regarding the applicable installation connection environmental and operating conditions are always observed e The plant specific assembly and safety guidelines are observed and personal protection equipment is used e Unqualified personnel are forbidden from using these machines and working near them This operating manual is intended for qualified personnel and only contain information and notes relating to the intended purpose of the machines
352. n C 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 0 to 2000 100 95 0 87 0 Up to 2500 100 96 3 91 4 83 7 Up to 3000 100 96 2 92 5 87 9 80 5 Up to 3500 100 96 7 92 3 88 8 84 3 77 3 Up to 4000 100 97 8 92 7 88 4 85 0 80 8 74 0 Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 411 Technical specifica tions 12 2 General data Table 12 3 Current derating as a function of the ambient temperature inlet air temperature at the air inlet of the cabinet unit and installation altitude for cabinet units with degree of protection IP54 Installation altitude Ambient temperature in C above sea level in m 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 0 to 2000 100 95 0 87 5 80 0 Up to 2500 100 96 3 91 4 84 2 77 0 Up to 3000 100 96 2 92 5 87 9 81 0 74 1 Up to 3500 100 96 7 92 3 88 8 84 3 77 7 71 1 Up to 4000 97 8 92 7 88 4 85 0 80 8 74 7 68 0 Voltage derating as a function of the installation altitude In addition to current derating voltage derating must also be considered at installation altitudes gt 2000 m above sea level 412 Table 12 4 Voltage derating as a function of the installation altitude 380 V 480 V 3 AC Installation altitude Rated converter input voltage abo
353. n G61 115 D Data sets 186 Date of manufacture 33 DCC 22 250 DDS drive data set 187 Copy 190 Decrease Key 233 Derating 411 Derating behavior at increased pulse frequency 324 Derating data 411 Current derating as a function of the installation altitude and ambient temperature 411 Current derating as a function of the pulse frequency 413 Voltage derating as a function of the installation altitude 412 Design 24 Diagnosis 350 LEDs 350 Parameters 355 Digital inputs 74 75 484 Digital inputs outputs 77 Digital outputs 291 Direction of rotation changeover 253 Direction reversal 322 Downloading the firmware operator panel 408 Drive Control Chart 250 Drive Control Chart DCC 22 Drive data set 187 Drive objects 184 Droop Function 278 dv dt filter plus Voltage Peak Limiter option L10 79 E EC declaration of conformity 15 EC manufacturer s declaration 15 EDS encoder data set 188 Efficiency optimization 301 Electrical connection of units that are connected in parallel 60 Electromagnetic compatibility EMC compliant design 58 Introduction 56 Noise emissions 56 Operational reliability and noise immunity 56 EMERGENCY OFF category 0 option L57 88 EMERGENCY OFF pushbutton option L45 86 EMERGENCY STOP category 1 option L59 90 EMERGENCY STOP Category 1 option L60 91 Encoder data set 188 Ethernet interface 103 Extended braking control 338 Extended monitoring funct
354. n also be extended This is an easy method of creating extended telegram interconnections on the basis of existing telegrams Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5SE00189855A Operation 6 6 5 Structure of the telegrams Table 6 10 Structure of the telegrams 6 6 PROFIBUS Telegr PZD 1 PZD 2 PZD 3 PZD 4 PZD 5 PZD 6 PZD 7 PZD8 PZD9 PZD 10 1 STW1 NSOLL_A ZSW1 NIST_A 2 STW1 NSOLL_B STW2 ZSW1 NIST_B ZSW2 3 STW1 NSOLL_B STW2 G1_STW ZSW1 NIST_B ZSW2 G1_ZSW G1_XIST1 G1_XACT2 4 STW1 NSOLL_B STW2 G1_STW G2_STW ZSW1 NIST_B ZSW2 G1_ZSW Further assignment see FP2420 20 STW1 NSOLL_A ZSW1 NIST_A_ IAIST_ MIST_ PIST_ MELD_ GLATT GLATT GLATT GLATT NAMUR 220 STW1_ NSOLL_B STW2_BM M_ADD M_LIM free free free free BM ZSW1_ NIST_A IAIST MIST WARN_ FAULT_ ZSW2_ free free free BM CODE CODE BM 352 STW1 NSOLL_A PCS7_3 PCS7_4 PCS7_5 PCS7_6 ZSW1 NIST_A_ IAIST_ MIST_ WARN_ FAULT_ GLATT GLATT GLATT CODE CODE 999 STW1 free free free free free free free free free ZSW1 free free free free free free free free free 6 6 5 1 Overview of control words and setpoints Table 6 11 Overview of control words and setpoints Abbreviation Description Parameter Function diagram STW1 Control word 1 interface mode SINAMICS See table Control word 1 interface FP2442 p20
355. n are indicated by means of five LEDs K120 Table 4 32 Terminal block X120 connection for EMERGENCY STOP category 1 24 V DC Terminal Technical specifications 4 Jumper wired in the factory 11 5 Jumper wired in the factory 10 7 Loop in EMERGENCY OFF button from line side 8 remove jumpers 7 8 and connect button 9 Jumper wired in the factory 14 12 Jumper wired in the factory 13 15 On for monitored start 16 Remove jumpers 15 16 and connect button 17 NO 1 Checkback trip safety combination 18 1 NO NO contact Max connectable cross section 4 mm The time 0 5 to 30 s set at the contactor safety combination K120 should be greater or at least identical to the time that the drive requires to reach standstill via quick stop OFF3 ramp down time p1135 since the converter is disconnected from the power supply after expiry of the time at K120 Messages output during operation and in the event of faults meaning of LEDs on K120 are described in the Additional Operating Instructions of the Operating Instructions Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 91 Electrical installation 4 10 Other connections 4 10 12 25 kW Braking Unit Option L61 50 kW Braking Unit Option L62 Description Braking units are used when regenerative energy occurs occasionally and briefly for example when the brake is applied to the
356. n designatiqn Location designation H A24 H A49 H A25 H A50 Left hand sub cabinet Right hand sub cabinet Figure 2 2 Example of the cabinet drive version A e g 1500 kW 690 V 3 AC certain components are optional Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 25 Device Overview 2 3 Design Special features when connecting up and operating units that are connected in parallel The DC links of the sub cabinets conntected in parallel must always be interconnected and the connecting cables between the two sub cabinets cable numbers W001 and W002 must be connected The cabinet drive units can be connected to the line supply in either a 6 pulse or 12 pulse connection For a 12 pulse connection the following special considerations must be taken into account e The 12 pulse connection to the line supply is only possible using a double tier transformer with three winding systems Transformer vector groups Dy5Dd0 or Dy11Dd0 should preferably be selected When using sub windings that are electrically offset with respect to one another the line harmonics are reduced with respect to the 6 pulse infeed Requirements for the transformer The no load voltages of both secondary windings must not differ from each other by more than 0 5 with reference to the rated voltage The differences between the short circuit voltages of the two secondary windings must be less than 5 of the rated value
357. n from the appropriate NEC National Electrical Code or CEC Canadian Electrical Code standards Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 427 Technical specifications 12 3 Technical specifications Table 12 14 Version C 380 V 480 V 3 AC part 2 Order number 6SL3710 1GE33 8CA0 1GE35 0CA0 1GE36 1CA0 Unit rating for IL at 50 Hz 400 V kW 200 250 315 for I at 50 Hz 400 V 1 kW 160 200 250 for IL at 60 Hz 460 V 2 hp 300 400 500 for I at 60 Hz 460 V 2 hp 250 350 350 Output current Rated current In A 380 490 605 Base load current IL 3 A 370 477 590 Base load current IH A 340 438 460 Input current Rated input current A 395 509 629 Input current max A 606 781 967 Current requirements for 24 VDC A 1 35 1 35 1 4 auxiliary supply Connection voltages Line voltage Vacrms 380 V 3 AC 10 to 480 V 3 AC 10 15 lt 1 min Line frequency Hz 47 to 63 Hz Electronics power supply Voc 24 20 4 28 8 Power loss kW 5 3 6 4 8 2 Cooling air requirement m s 0 36 0 36 0 78 Sound pressure level Lpa dB A 69 73 69 73 70 73 1 m at 50 60 Hz Line connection recommended DIN VDE mm2 2x120 2x185 2 x 240 maximum DIN VDE mm 4 x 240 4 x 240 4 x 240 Fixing screw M12 1 hole M12 1 hole M12 4 holes Motor connection recommended DIN VDE mm 2x95 2x150 2 x 185 maximum DIN VDE
358. n order to achieve a greater dynamic response in the base speed range Example of speed dependent adaptation Note This type of adaptation is only active in operation with encoder mode Drive converter cabinet units 276 Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Setpoint channel and closed loop contro 7 4 Vector speed torque control with without encoder Kp n Proportional gain Tnn Integral time l p1463xp1462 i with adaptation without adaptation 0 p1464 p1465 1 Constant lower speed range n lt p1464 2 Adaptation range p1464 lt n lt p1465 3 Constant upper speed range n gt p1465 Figure 7 14 Example of speed dependent adaptation Function diagram FP 6050 Kp_n Tn_n adaptation Parameters e p1400 5 Speed control configuration Kp Tn adaptation active Free Kp_n adaptation e p1455 Speed controller P gain adaptation signal e p1456 Speed controller P gain adaptation lower starting point e p1457 Speed amplifier P gain adaptation upper starting point e p1458 Adaptation factor lower e p1459 Adaptation factor upper e p1470 Speed controller encoderless operation P gain Speed dependent Kp_n Tn_n adaptation VC only e p1460 Speed controller P gain adaptation speed lower e p1461 Speed controller P gain adaptation speed upper e p1462 Speed controller integral time adaptation speed lower e p1463 Speed controller integral time adaptation speed upper e p1464 Speed controller adaptation
359. n state voltage and compensation for the IGBT lockout time can only be estimated if the data on the type plate is used For this reason the stator resistance for the stability of sensorless vector control or for the voltage boost with the V f characteristic is very important Motor identification is essential if long supply cables or third party motors are used When motor data identification is started for the first time the following data is determined with p1910 1 on the basis of the data on the type plate rated data e Equivalent circuit diagram data e Total resistance of Power cable resistance Reabie and Stator resistance Rs e IGBT on state voltage compensation for the IGBT lockout time Since the type plate data provides the initialization values for identification you must ensure that it is entered correctly and consistently taking into account the connection type star delta so that the above data can be determined If the resistance of the motor supply cable is known you are advised to enter this value before the standstill measurement P0352 so that it can be subtracted from the total measured resistance when the stator resistance p0350 is calculated Entering the cable resistance improves the accuracy of thermal resistance adaptation particularly when long supply cables are used This governs behavior at low speeds particularly during encoderless vector control Frequency Cable and Motor converter serie
360. n text or in a quasi analog bar display e SINAMICS is an integral part of Totally Integrated Automation TIA The TIA concept offers an optimized range of products for automation and drive technology This concept is characterized by planning design communication and data management procedures that are consistent throughout the product range SINAMICS is totally integrated in the TIA concept Separate S7 PCS7 blocks and faceplates for WinCC are available e Integration in SIMATIC H systems is possible via a Y link e Drive Control Chart DCC Drive Control Chart DCC expands the facility for the simplest possible configuring of technological functions for the SINAMICS drive system The block library encompasses a large selection of closed loop arithmetic and logic function blocks as well as more comprehensive open loop and closed loop control functions The user friendly DCC editor enables easy graphical configuration and a clear representation of control loop structures as well as a high degree of reusability of existing diagrams DCC is an add on to the STARTER commissioning tool The SINAMICS G150 drive converter cabinet units are manufactured to meet high standards of quality and exacting demands This results in a high level of reliability availability and functionality for our products The development design and manufacturing processes as well as order processing and the logistics supply center have been certified to DIN I
361. nance 364 365 Maintenance and servicing 363 MDS motor data set 189 Increase Key 233 Increasing the output frequency 317 Installation Installation 43 yE Copy 190 Hining ihe cabinet ofthe anspor pallet 43 Mechanical connection of units that are connected in Installation device 366 f parallel 44 nstalliom snerta Mechanical installation Insulation Monitor Option L87 100 gt Checklist 41 IT system 68 M enu Setting the date 229 K Menu AOP30 settings 225 K50 107 Basic Commissioning 225 K82 116 Commissioning service 225 K82 terminal module for activating Safe Torque Off Complete commissioning 225 and Safe STOP 1 116 Control settings 225 Kinetic buffering 304 Defining the operation screen 226 Device commissioning 225 Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 485 Index Display settings 225 Drive commissioning 225 Fault alarm memory 224 Motor identification 225 Operation screen 221 Resetting the fan runtime 225 Structure 220 Menu Setting the time 229 Menu Date format 229 Menu Resetting AOP settings 229 Menu Software Version 230 Menu Database version 230 Menu AOP30 diagnosis 230 Menu Battery status 230 Menu Keyboard test 230 Menu LED test 230 Menu Language Sprache Langue Idioma Lingua 231 Minimum cable lengths 63 Minimum speed 254 Monitoring Functions 342 Motor changeover selection 313 Motor data set 189 Motor identifi
362. nd on the documentation CD in the SINAMICS List Manual which provides experienced users with detailed descriptions of all the functions 7 2 Setpoint channel 7 2 1 Setpoint addition Description The supplementary setpoint can be used to enter correction values from higher level closed loop controls This can be implemented using the summing point of the main supplementary setpoint in the setpoint channel Both variables are imported simultaneously via two separate or one setpoint source and added in the setpoint channel Function diagram Parameters 252 FD 3030 Main added setpoint setpoint scaling jogging e p1070 Main setpoint e p1071 Main setpoint scaling e 11073 Main setpoint effective e p1075 Supplementary setpoint e p1076 Supplementary setpoint scaling e 11077 Supplementary setpoint effective e 11078 Total setpoint effective Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5SE00189855A Setpoint channel and closed loop contro 7 2 2 Direc Description Prerequisites Function diagram Parameter Drive converter cabinet 7 2 Setpoint channel tion reversal Due to the direction reversal in the setpoint channel the drive can be operated in both directions with the same setpoint polarity Use the p1110 or p1111 parameter to block negative or positive direction of rotation Note If an incorrect rotating field was connected when the cables were installed and the rotating f
363. nded braking control Description Commissioning Function diagram The extended braking control function module allows complex braking control for motor holding brakes and operational brakes The brake is controlled as follows the sequence reflects the priority e Via parameter p1215 e Via binector parameters p1219 0 3 and p0855 e Via zero speed detection e Via a connector interconnection threshold value The extended braking control function module can be activated by running the commissioning Wizard Parameter r0108 14 indicates whether the function module has been activated Parameter p1215 must be set to 3 and the brake controlled via a digital output on customer terminal strip TM31 FD 2704 Zero speed detection FD 2707 Release apply brake FD 2711 Signal outputs Example 1 Starting against applied brake 338 When the device is switched on the setpoint is enabled immediately if other enable signals are issued even if the brake has not yet been released p1152 1 The factory setting p1152 r0899 15 must be separated here The drive starts by generating a torque against the applied brake The brake is not released until the motor torque or motor current p1220 has exceeded braking threshold 1 p1221 This configuration is used for example when the drive is connected to a belt that is under tension loop accumulator in the steel industry Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008
364. net units 478 Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Appendix Parameter macro p0700 10 PROFIdrive NAMUR 70010 This macro is used to set the PROFIdrive NAMUR interface as the default command source A 2 Parameter macros Table A 5 Parameter macro p0700 10 PROFIdrive NAMUR Sink Source Parameter Description DO Parameter Description DO p0840 0 ON OFF 1 Vector 0 Assignment with p0922 20 Vector p0844 0 No OFF2_1 Vector 1 Assignment with p0922 20 Vector p0845 0 No OFF2_2 Vector 10722 3 CU DI3 CU p0848 0 No OFF3_1 Vector 0 Assignment with p0922 20 Vector p0849 0 No OFF3_2 Vector 1 Vector p0806 Inhibit LOCAL mode Vector 0 Vector p0810 Changeover CDS bit 0 Vector 0 Vector p0852 Enable operation Vector 1 Assignment with p0922 20 Vector p0854 Control request Vector 1 Assignment with p0922 20 Vector p0922 PROF Idrive PZD telegram Vector 20 PROF Idrive NAMUR selection p1020 FSW bit 0 Vector 0 Vector p1021 FSW bit 1 Vector 0 Vector p1035 MOP raise Vector 0 Vector p1036 MOP lower Vector 0 Vector p1113 Direction of rotation reversal Vector 0 Assignment with p0922 20 Vector p1140 Enable RFG Vector 1 Assignment with p0922 20 Vector p1141 Start RFG Vector 1 Assignment with p0922 20 Vector p1142 Enable nsetp Vector 1 Assignment with p0922 20 Vector p2103 Acknowledge fault_1 Vector 0 Ass
365. nfuigen aL PG PC Schnittstelle einstellen Vorschau EP Projekt lt Zur ck Weiter gt Setting the bus address Figure 5 31 Geben Sie bitte die Antriebsgeratedaten ein Antriebsgerat Sinamics T Typ G150 X Version 2 5 X C SINAMICS_G150 Sinamics Tutorial Einf gen Abbrechen Gerat Busadresse Name Note The bus addresses on CU320 and on the PC must not be set the same 5 The connecting cable from CU320 to AOP30 must be ground off on CU320 A null modem cable must be used here to connect the PC COM interface and CU320 This interface must not be switched Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 163 Commissioning 5 4 The AOP30 operator panel 5 4 Description LEDs Keyboard interlock The AOP30 operator panel An operator panel is located in the cabinet door of the cabinet unit for operating monitoring and commissioning tasks It has the following features e Graphical back lit LCD for plain text display and a bar display of process variables e LEDs for indicating the operating modes e Help function describing causes of and remedies for faults and alarms e Keypad for controlling drives during operation e LOCAL REMOTE switchover for selecting the control terminal master control assigned to operator panel or Customer Terminal Block PROFIBUS e Numeric keypad for entering setpoint or para
366. ng Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 45 Mechanical installation 3 3 Assembly Fitting a hood to increase the degree of protection to IP23 IP43 IP54 option M23 M43 M54 1 Remove the crane transport assembly if fitted 2 Make sure that a perforated top cover is not fitted on the top of the cabinet depending on production requirements this can be fitted at a later stage 3 Options M43 and M54 only Use the sealing tape provided to attach the contact surfaces of the hood to the top of the cabinet 4 Fit the hood to the roof of the cabinet at the positions specified fixing points for the crane transport assembly Insert the original hood screws M14 from above Insert the enclosed screws and plain washers M8 from below Additional screws here for wide hoods Figure 3 2 Attaching a hood Drive converter cabinet units 46 Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Mechanical installation 3 3 6 Description 3 3 Assembly Line connection from above option M13 motor connection from above option With options M13 and M78 the cabinet unit is equipped with an additional hood The connection straps for the power cables the clamping bar for mechanically securing the cables an EMC shield bus and a PE busbar are located within the hood The hood adds an extra 405 mm to the cabinet height The busbars for connection from above are fully mounted when the system is delivered For transport reasons
367. ng the auxiliary contactor from within the converter 4 10 5 Description 84 The following circuit for example can be used if the auxiliary contactor is to be controlled from within the converter The Operation message is then no longer available for other purposes NY xa A1 X40 115 111 i2 3 111 12 See OO SO a l TM31 K155 Operation BERROSPE _ Figure 4 8 Circuit proposal for controlling the auxiliary contactor from within the converter Note If 230 V AC is applied to the relay outputs the customer terminal block must also be grounded via a 6 mm protective conductor Main switch incl fuses or circuit breaker option L26 Up to 800 A single units and up to 1380 A units that are connected in parallel a switch disconnector with externally mounted fuses is used as the main circuit breaker Above 800 A single units and above 1380 A units that are connected in parallel the standard circuit breaker is used to disconnect the voltage and provide overload and short circuit protection The circuit breaker is controlled and supplied within the converter CAUTION Switching at input Cabinet units with circuit breaker may be powered up only once every 3 minutes Failure to observe this rule can cause damage to the circuit breaker Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 ASE00189855A Electrical installation Connection 4 10 Oth
368. ng the cabinets 42 Check the delivery against the delivery note to ensure that all the items have been delivered Check that the cabinet is intact The packaging material must be discarded in accordance with the applicable country specific guidelines and rules Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Mechanical installation Required tools To install the connections you will require Spanner or socket spanner w f 10 Spanner or socket spanner w f 13 Spanner or socket spanner w f 16 17 Spanner or socket spanner w f 18 19 Hexagon socket spanner size 8 Torque wrench up to 50 Nm Screwdriver size 2 Screwdriver Torx T20 Screwdriver Torx T30 3 3 3 Installation Lifting the cabinet off the transport pallet The applicable local guidelines regarding the transportation of the cabinet from the transport palette to the installation location must be observed 3 3 Assembly A crane transport assembly option M90 can also be fitted on the top of the cabinet The fixing screws on the transport pallet can be removed from the pallet base without having to raise the cabinet unit The positions of the fixing screws are indicated by red markings on the outside of the pallets Installation Four holes for M12 screws are provided on each cabinet panel to secure the cabinet to the ground The fixing dimensions are specified on the dimension drawings enclosed Two wall supports for attac
369. ng the signal cables 61 Connecting the voltage supply 61 Electrical connection 60 Transportation 38 487 Index Type plate 33 Date of manufacture 33 Option short codes 35 Specifications 34 U Unit changeover 323 Units that are connected in parallel Mechanical connection 44 Unpacking the cabinets 42 V V f control 258 Vdc control 303 Vdc_max control 306 Vdc_min control 304 Vector control sensorless 266 with encoder 269 Vector speed torque control with without encoder 265 Version A Design 24 Version C Design 27 Voltage boost 261 During acceleration 263 Permanent 262 W Wiring principle 28 X X1400 103 X451 CAN bus 106 X452 CAN bus 106 X520 74 SMC30 112 X521 75 SMC30 113 X522 76 X530 75 X531 SMC30 113 X540 77 X541 77 X542 78 488 Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5SE00189855A Siemens AG Subject to change Industry Sector Siemens AG 2008 Drive Technologies Large Drives P O Box 4743 90025 NUREMBERG GERMANY www siemens com automation
370. ng too low the loss is established by means of a CRC check when the system is switched on again This triggers a message instructing the user to replace the battery and then load the database and or set the time For instructions on how to change the battery see Maintenance and servicing Keyboard test In this screen you can check that the keys are functioning properly Keys that you press are represented on a symbolic keyboard on the display You can press the keys in any order you wish You cannot exit the screen F4 back until you have pressed each key at least once Note You can also exit the key test screen by pressing any key and keeping it pressed LED test In this screen you can check that the 4 LEDs are functioning properly Drive converter cabinet units 230 Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Operation 6 7 Control via the operator panel 6 7 6 Language Sprache Langue Idioma Lingua The operator panel downloads the texts for the different languages from the drive You can change the language of the operator panel via the Language Sprache Langue Idioma Lingua menu Note Additional languages for the display Languages in addition to the current available languages in the display are available on request 6 7 7 Operation via the operator panel LOCAL mode You activate the control keys by switching to LOCAL mode If the green LED in the LOCAL REMOTE key does not light up the key i
371. nge in proportion to the frequency f to ensure a constant magnetization current Iu V f characteristic control is derived from these basic premises The field weakening range is above the rated motor frequency where the maximum voltage is reached The flux and maximum torque decrease as the frequency increases this is illustrated in the following diagram U M P i 4u P p 7 Motor nominal i M i working point oy iM 7 7 5 5 l gt f lt gt lt gt Voltage range f Field range f n max Figure 7 4 Operating areas and characteristic curves for the induction motor with converter supply Several variations of the V f characteristic exist which are listed in the following table Drive converter cabinet units 258 Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Setpoint channel and closed loop control 7 3 V f control Table 7 1 p1300 V f characteristics Parameter Meaning Application property value 0 Linear characteristic Standard with variable voltage boost v Vi p1300 0 0 7 1 Linear characteristic Characteristic that compensates for voltage v with flux current losses in the stator resistance for static Vra control FCC dynamic loads flux current control FCC r0071 This is particularly useful for small motors orc since they have a relatively high stator ites esa resistance dependent 0 ani f 2 Parabolic Characteristic that takes
372. ning torques specified in the table Tightening torques for connecting current conducting parts must be observed Carefully establish the plug in connections and then ensure that they are secure When dealing with connectors with a lock make sure that the locking lever is securely engaged once connected The fiber optic cable plugs must be remounted at their original slot Fiber optic cables and sockets are accordingly labeled for correct assignment U11 U21 U31 The screwed connections for the protective covers must only be tightened by hand Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 383 Maintenance and servicing 11 4 Replacing components 11 4 7 Replacing the Control Interface Board type GX Replacing the Control Interface Board Figure 11 11 Replacing the Control Interface Board frame size GX Drive converter cabinet units 384 Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Maintenance and servicing 11 4 Replacing components Preparatory steps e Disconnect the cabinet unit from the power supply e Allow unimpeded access e Remove the protective cover Removal steps The removal steps are numbered in accordance with the figure 1 Remove the CU320 mount 1 nut If necessary remove the PROFIBUS plug and connection to the operator panel X140 on the CU320 and carefully remove the CU320 2 Disconnect the plug in connections for the fiber opt
373. nit rating for IL at 50 Hz 690 V kW 132 160 200 for IH at 50 Hz 690 V 7 kW 110 132 160 Output current Rated current In A 150 175 215 Base load current IL 2 A 142 171 208 Base load current IH A 134 157 192 Input current Rated input current 4 A 164 191 224 Input current max A 232 279 341 Current requirements for 24 VDC JA 1 1 1 35 1 35 auxiliary supply Connection voltages Line voltage Vacrms 660 V 3 AC 10 to 690 V 3 AC 10 15 lt 1 min Line frequency Hz 47 to 63 Hz Electronics power supply Voc 24 20 4 28 8 Power loss kW 2 8 3 8 4 2 Cooling air requirement m s 0 17 0 36 0 36 Sound pressure level Lpa dB A 67 68 67 73 67 73 1 m at 50 60 Hz Line connection recommended DIN VDE mm 95 120 2x70 maximum DIN VDE mm 4 x 240 4 x 240 4 x 240 Fixing screw M12 2 holes M12 2 holes M12 2 holes Motor connection recommended DIN VDE 5 mm2 70 95 120 maximum DIN VDE mm 2x150 2x150 2 x 150 Fixing screw M12 2 holes M12 2 holes M12 2 holes Protective conductor connection Fixing screw M12 2 holes M12 2 holes M12 2 holes Max motor cable length shielded unshielded m 300 450 300 450 300 450 Dimensions standard version Width mm 800 800 800 Height mm 2000 2000 2000 Depth mm 600 600 600 Power block frame size FX GX GX Weight without options approx kg 320 390 390 Recommended protection Line protection with option L26 3NA3240 6 3NA3244 6 3NA3252 6 Rated curr
374. nized motor is transferred to the supply and retrieved again During the changeover both contactors K1 and K2 are closed at the same time for a period phase lock synchronization A reactor is used to de couple the drive converter from the line supply the uk value for the reactor is 10 2 Line supply Converter with Voltage Sensing Protective device Module VSM10 i Reactor K2 Figure 9 140 Typical circuit diagram for bypass with synchronizer with degree of overlapping Activation The function with synchronizer with degree of overlapping p1260 1 function can only be activated using a control signal It cannot be activated using a speed threshold or a fault Parameterization Once the bypass with synchronizer with degree of overlapping p1260 1 function has been activated the following parameters must be set Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 331 Functions Monitoring and Protective Functions 9 3 Extended functions Table 9 5 Parameter settings for bypass function with synchronizer with degree of overlapping Parameter Description p1266 Control signal setting when p1267 0 1 p1267 0 1 Bypass function is initiated by the control signal p1267 1 0 p1269 0 Signal source for contactor K1 feedback p1269 1 Signal source for contactor K2 feedback p3800 1 The internal voltages are used for synchronization p3802 r1261 2 Synchronizer activation is
375. nnect the plug in connections for the fiber optic cables and signal cables 5 plugs 8 Disconnect the plug for the thermocouple 9 Unscrew the two retaining screws for the fan and attach the tool for de installing the power block at this position You can now remove the power block CAUTION When removing the power block ensure that you do not damage any signal cables Installation steps For installation carry out the above steps in reverse order CAUTION The tightening torques specified in the table Tightening torques for connecting current conducting parts must be observed Carefully establish the plug in connections and then ensure that they are secure The screwed connections for the protective covers must only be tightened by hand The fiber optic cable plugs must be remounted at their original slot Fiber optic cables and sockets are accordingly labeled for correct assignment U11 U21 U31 Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 371 Maintenance and servicing 11 4 Replacing components 11 4 3 Replacing the power block type GX Replacing the power block aneo g ar a y ror Al a aaa j Ga K D ke 5 7 ja Figure 11 5 Replacing the power block frame size GX 372 Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Maintenance and servicing Preparatory steps
376. nnector very carefully e g with a screwdriver because otherwise the lock could be damaged Installation steps For installation carry out the above steps in reverse order CAUTION The tightening torques specified in the table Tightening torques for connecting current conducting parts must be observed Carefully establish the plug in connections and then ensure that they are secure When dealing with connectors with a lock make sure that the locking lever is securely engaged once connected The fiber optic cable plugs must be remounted at their original slot Fiber optic cables and sockets are accordingly labeled for correct assignment U11 U21 U31 The screwed connections for the protective covers must only be tightened by hand Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 387 Maintenance and servicing 11 4 Replacing components 11 4 9 Replacing the Control Interface Board type JX Replacing the Control Interface Board T Dy Aisa i CED TAF n ooo oh Feo Fo r 90 00 e e BF Figure 11 13 Replacing the Control Interface Board frame size JX Drive converter cabinet units 388 Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Maintenance and ser
377. not yet fully underway light Possible causes The controller is not transmitting any setpoints In isochronous mode the controller did not send a Global Control or it sent a defective Global Control GC Red Steady light Cyclic communication has been interrupted Orange 2 Hz flashing light Firmware checksum error CRC error OPT OFF Electronic power supply outside permissible tolerance range option The component is not ready for operation The Option Board is missing or an associated drive object has not been created Green Steady light Option Board is ready 0 5 Hz flashing Depends on the Option Board used light Red Steady light At least one fault is pending on this component The Option Board is not ready e g after switching on MOD OFF Reserved Customer Terminal Block TM31 A60 Table 10 2 Description of the LEDs on the TM31 LED RDY Color State Description OFF The electronics power supply is missing or lies outside permissible tolerance range Green Steady light The component is ready for operation and cyclic DRIVE CLIQ communication is taking place Orange Steady light DRIVE CLiQ communication is being established Red Steady light At least one fault is pending on this component Note LED is driven irrespective of the corresponding messages being reconfigured Green red 0 5 Hz flashing Firmware is being downloaded light 2 Hz flashing Firmware
378. ns 10 2008 A5E00189855A Technical specifications 12 3 Technical specitications Order number 6SL3710 2GH41 5AA0 1 Rated output of a typical 6 pole standard induction motor based on I or IH at 690 V 3 AC 50 Hz 2 The base load current I1 is based on a duty cycle of 110 for 60 s or 150 for 10 s with a duty cycle duration of 300 s see Overload capability 3 The base load current IH is based on a duty cycle of 150 for 60 s or 160 for 10 s with a duty cycle duration of 300 s see Overload capability 4 The current values given here are based on the rated output current 5 The recommendations for the North American market in AWG or MCM must be taken from the appropriate NEC National Electrical Code or CEC Canadian Electrical Code standards Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 457 Technical specifications 12 3 Technical specifications 12 3 6 Cabinet unit version C 660 V 690 V 3 AC Table 12 29 Version C 660 V 690 V 3 AC Part 1 Order number 6SL3710 1GH28 5CA0 1GH31 0CA0 1GH31 2CA0 Unit rating for IL at 50 Hz 690 V kW 75 90 110 for IH at 50 Hz 690 V kW 55 75 90 Output current Rated current In A 85 100 120 Base load current IL 2 A 80 95 115 Base load current IH A 76 89 107 Input current Rated input current 4 A 93 109 131 Input current max A 131 155 1
379. nverter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 289 Output terminals 8 2 Analog outputs Example changing analog output 0 from current to voltage output 10 V 10 V X522 1 2 Voltage output present at terminal 1 ground is at terminal 2 t p4076 4 Set analog output type 0 to 10 10 V x Example changing analog output 0 from current to voltage output 10 V 10 V and setting the characteristic X522 1 2 Voltage output present at terminal 1 ground is at terminal 2 7 p4076 0 4 Set TM31 AO_type analog output 0 to 10 V 10 V p4077 0 0 00 Set TM31 AO_char x1 to 0 00 p4078 0 0 000 Set TM31 AO_char y1 to 0 000 V p4079 0 100 00 Set TM31 AO_char x2 to 100 00 p4080 0 10 000 Set TM31 AO_char y2 to 10 000 V Drive converter cabinet units 290 Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Output terminals 8 3 Digital outputs 8 3 Digital outputs Description Four bi directional digital outputs terminal X541 and two relay outputs terminal X542 are available These outputs are for the most part freely parameterizable Signal flow diagram Inversion X542 DOO ape mee Apo 1 Ready to start 3 r0899 0 5 1 Ready to operate DOI 2 r0899 1 1 Operation enabled r0899 2 P X541 a DI DO 8 o 1 Ramp up ramp down DI DO 9 R completed Dobe DIDO 10 yg 12199 5 __ DIDO 11 o
380. o the factory setting this setting must be again made after the drive unit has been recommissioned Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 159 Commissioning 5 3 Procedure for commissioning via STARTER 5 3 4 Starting the drive project You have created a project and saved it to your hard disk You now have to transfer your project configuration data to the drive unit Transferring the STARTER project to the drive unit To transfer the STARTER project you created offline to the drive unit carry out the following steps Step Selection in toolbar 1 Choose lt Project gt Connect to target system 25 mt 2 Choose Target system gt Load project to target system 7 NOTICE The project has now been loaded to the drive unit The data is currently only stored in the volatile memory of the drive unit and not on the CompactFlash card To store the project data on the CompactFlash card so that it is protected in the event of a power failure carry out the following step Selection in toolbar Step 3 Choose Target system gt Copy from RAM to ROM Note The Copy from RAM to ROM icon is only active when the drive unit is selected in the project navigator Drive converter cabinet units 160 Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Commissioning 5 3 Procedure for commissioning via STARTER Results of the previous steps
381. oad current IH is based on a duty cycle of 150 for 60 s or 160 for 10 s with a duty cycle duration of 300 s see Overload capability 4 The current values given here are based on the rated output current 5 The recommendations for the North American market in AWG or MCM must be taken from the appropriate NEC National Electrical Code or CEC Canadian Electrical Code standards Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 461 Technical specifications 12 3 Technical specifications Table 12 31 Version C 660 V 690 V 3 AC Part 3 Order number 6SL3710 1GH32 6CA0 1GH33 3CA0 1GH34 1CA0 Unit rating for IL at 50 Hz 690 V kW 250 315 400 for IH at 50 Hz 690 V 7 kW 200 250 315 Output current Rated current In A 260 330 410 Base load current IL 2 A 250 320 400 Base load current IH A 233 280 367 Input current Rated input current 4 A 270 343 426 Input current max A 410 525 655 Current requirements for 24 VDC JA 1 35 1 35 1 4 auxiliary supply Connection voltages Line voltage Vacrms 660 V 3 AC 10 to 690 V 3 AC 10 15 lt 1 min Line frequency Hz 47 to 63 Hz Electronics power supply Voc 24 20 4 28 8 Power loss kW 5 0 6 1 8 1 Cooling air requirement m s 0 36 0 36 0 78 Sound pressure level Lpa dB A 67 73 67 73 72 75 1 m at 50 60 Hz Line connection recommended DIN VDE mm 2x95 2x 12
382. object is a self contained software function with its own parameters and if necessary its own faults and alarms Drive objects can be provided as standard e g I O evaluation or you can add single e g option board or multiple objects e g drive control Control Unit Drive objects Eva Eva Eva Eva luation Drive luation i luation 99 luation onboard control Option Terminal Terminal i Board Module I Module Terminal Module Terminal Figure 6 3 Drive objects Standard drive objects e Drive control Drive control handles closed loop control of the motor At least 1 Power Module and at least 1 motor and up to 3 encoders are assigned to the drive control e Control Unit inputs outputs The inputs outputs on the Control Unit are evaluated within a drive object Optionally installed drive objects e Option board evaluation A further drive object handles evaluation of an installed option board The specific method of operation depends on the type of option board installed e Terminal Module evaluation A separate drive object handles evaluation of the respective optional Terminal Modules Drive converter cabinet units 184 Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Operation 6 3 Basic information about the drive system Properties of a drive object e Separate parameter space e Separate window in STARTER e Separate fault alarm system e Separate PROF Idrive tele
383. ogether in a data set according to their functionality and indexed Indexing allows several different settings which can be activated by switching the data set to be defined in each parameter Note The command and drive data sets can be copied in STARTER Drive gt Configuration gt Command data sets or Drive data sets tab The displayed command and drive data sets can be selected in the associated STARTER screen forms CDS Command data set 186 The BICO parameters binector and connector inputs are grouped together in a command data set These parameters are used to interconnect the signal sources of a drive see Operation BICO technology Interconnecting signals By parameterizing several command data sets and switching between them the drive can be operated with different pre configured signal sources A command data set contains the following examples e Binector inputs for control commands digital signals ON OFF enable signals p0844 etc Jog p1055 etc e Connector inputs for setpoints analog signals Voltage setpoint for V f control p1330 Torque limits and scaling factors p1522 p1523 p1528 p1529 In the factory setting two command data sets are available this number can be increased to a maximum of four using p0170 number of command data sets CDS The following parameters are available for selecting command data sets and for displaying the currently selected command d
384. oint limitation The speed controller receives its setpoint rO062 from the setpoint channel and its actual value r0063 either directly from the speed actual value encoder vector control with encoder or indirectly via the motor model encoderless vector control The system difference is increased by the PI controller and in conjunction with the pre control results in the torque setpoint When the load torque increases the speed setpoint is reduced proportionately when the droop function is active which means that the single drive within a group two or more mechanically connected motors is relieved when the torque becomes too great Droop injection Closed loop speed control Speed setpoint Torque setpoint r0063 Actual speed value only active if pre control is active p1496 gt 0 Figure 7 10 Speed controller The optimum speed controller setting can be determined via the automatic speed controller optimization function p1900 1 rotating measurement If the moment of inertia has been specified the speed controller Kp Tn can be calculated by means of automatic parameterization p0340 4 The controller parameters are defined in accordance with the symmetrical optimum as follows Tn 4xTs Kp 0 5 x r0345 Ts 2 x r0345 Tn Ts Sum of the short delay times includes p1442 and p1452 Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Se
385. oject gt Accessible nodes Subsequently the nodes found are displayed in the interactive screen Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 241 Operation 6 8 PROFINET IO P Accessible nodes TCP IP Auto gt Broadcom NetXtreme Gig Sle sssible nodes 25 Bus node address 0 0 0 0 name Activate extended slot search Do you want to accept the selected drive units into the project Select drive units Refresh F5 Figure 6 35 STARTER gt Accessible nodes The selected node is edited by selecting the field for the node with the right mouse button and selecting the option Edit Ethernet node P Accessible nodes TCP IP Auto gt Broadcom NetXtreme Gig PBR ccessible nodes 3 Bus node address 0 0 Activate extended slot search Do you want to accept the selected drive units into the project Select drive units Refresh F5 Close Help Figure 6 36 STARTER Accessible nodes Edit Ethernet node Drive converter cabinet units 242 Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Operation 6 8 PROFINET IO In the following interactive screen enter a freely selectable device name and the IP address and subnet mask The subnet screens must match before STARTER can be run Edit Ethernet Node Node MAC address Detection using LED Device SINAMICS Assign name IP Configuration IP address 192 168 Gateway
386. ompleted Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 323 Functions Monitoring and Protective Functions 9 2 Drive Functions Unit groups Parameter 9 2 14 Description 324 Each parameter that can be switched is assigned to a unit group which can be switched within certain limits depending on the group This assignment and the units groups for each parameter appear in the parameter list in the SINAMICS List Manual The unit groups can be individually switched using 4 parameters p0100 p0349 p0505 and p0595 e p0010 Commissioning parameter filter e p0100 IEC NEMA mot stds e p0349 Selection of units system motor equivalent circuit diagram data e p0505 Selection of units system e p0595 Selection of technological unit e p0596 Reference variable of technological unit e p2000 Reference frequency speed e p2001 Reference voltage e p2002 Reference current e p2003 Reference torque e p2004 Reference power e p2005 Reference angle e p2007 Reference acceleration Derating behavior at increased pulse frequency To reduce motor noise or to increase output frequency the pulse frequency can be increased relative to the factory setting The increase in the pulse frequency normally results in a reduction of the maximum output current see Technical data current derating depending on the pulse frequency When commissioning the converter the behavior at overload is adjusted in such a
387. on Two key icons To prevent users from accidentally actuating the control keys and changing parameters you O appear in the top right of the display when these inhibit functions are enabled Drive converter cabinet units 234 Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Operation 6 7 Control via the operator panel Table 6 16 Display of operator input parameters disable Inhibit type Online operation Offline operation No inhibit Operator input inhibit Parameters disable Operator input inhibit parameters disable Settings Safety locks Parameters disable Operator inhibit lock not_active lt z Password Parameters disable not_active ma Access level 1 Standard Change Enter password again Help A v Back OK v qC Cancel OK F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 Figure 6 29 Set inhibit functions The Operator input inhibit setting can be changed directly via lt F5 gt Change once you have selected the selection field When Parameterization inhibit is activated you have to enter a numeric password repeat this entry You must also enter this password when deactivating Parameterization inhibit Operator input inhibit factory setting not active e Active The parameters can still be viewed but a parameter value cannot be saved message Note operator input inhibit active
388. on A units that are connected in parallel with 6 pulse infeed motor with separate winding systems 6 pulse infeed Line supply connection Main switch optional 1 Fuses optional 1 Main contactor optional 1 Line reactor Uk 2 Rectifier Connected voltage DC link Inverter Motor connection Motor with separate winding system 1 The main switch fuses and main contactor functions are implemented by a main switch upwards of an output voltage gt 800 A Figure 2 6 Circuit principle for version A units that are connected in parallel 6 pulse infeed connected to one motor with separate winding systems Drive converter cabinet units 30 Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Device Overview 2 4 Wiring Principle Circuit principle for version A units that are connected in parallel with 12 pulse infeed motor with one winding system PE 12 pulse infeed F TN a RS F O PARR l Line supply connection l ZE PE ifi Az PE raASsa s SE ees eae ees Sees BERS 4j t IZ S32 435 J Bae A Main switch optional 1 ri I i i I i I Fuses optional 1 l 1 i ct i a i Main contactor optional 1 EREA EEE i E eer eee eed 1 a H Line reactor Uk 2 Rectifier Integrated DC link Inverter Motor connection PE Motor with one winding system 1 The main switch fuses and main contactor functions ar
389. on Board Ethernet CBE20 Drive converter cabinet units 102 Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Electrical installation MAC address 4 10 Other connections The MAC address of the Ethernet interfaces is indicated on the upper side of the CBE20 The plate is no longer visible after installation Note Please note the MAC address prior to installing the module so that it is available to you for the subsequent commissioning X1400 Ethernet interface Table 4 43 Connector X1400 port 1 4 Pin Signal name Technical specifications 1 RX Receive data 2 RX Receive data 3 TX Transmit data 4 Reserved do not use 5 Reserved do not use 6 TX Transmit data 7 Reserved do not use 8 Reserved do not use Screened backshell M_EXT Screen permanently connected Assembly CAUTION The Option Board should only be inserted and removed when the Control Unit and Option Board are disconnected from the power supply Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 103 Electrical installation 4 10 Other connections 1 Release and remove the protective cover G 7 T10 Fixing screws M3 0 8 Nm 2 Introduce and fix the Option Board Figure 4 14 Mounting the CBE20 4 10 17 CBC10 CAN Communication Board option G20 Description e E E A 2 EH 4 E Figure 4 1
390. on L26 3NE1435 2 3NE1447 2 3NE1448 2 Rated current A 560 670 850 Frame size to DIN 43620 1 3 3 3 452 Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Technical specifications 12 3 Technical specitications Order number 6SL3710 1GH34 7AA0 1GH35 8AA0 1GH37 4AA0 1 Rated output of a typical 6 pole standard induction motor based on l or IH at 690 V 3 AC 50 Hz 2 The base load current I1 is based on a duty cycle of 110 for 60 s or 150 for 10 s with a duty cycle duration of 300 s see Overload capability 3 The base load current IH is based on a duty cycle of 150 for 60 s or 160 for 10 s with a duty cycle duration of 300 s see Overload capability 4 The current values given here are based on the rated output current 5 The recommendations for the North American market in AWG or MCM must be taken from the appropriate NEC National Electrical Code or CEC Canadian Electrical Code standards Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 453 Technical specifications 12 3 Technical specifications Table 12 27 Version A 660 V 690 V 3 AC part 5 Order number 6SL3710 1GH38 1AA0 2GH41 1AA0 2GH41 4AA0 Unit rating for IL at 50 Hz 690 V kW 800 1000 1350 for IH at 50 Hz 690 V 7 kW 710 900 1200 Output current Rated current In A 810 1070 1360 Base load curr
391. on monitor checks the entire electrically connected circuit for insulation faults The insulation resistance as well as all the insulation faults from the mains supply to the motor in the cabinet are detected Two response values between 1 KQ and 10 MQ can be set If a response value in undershot an alarm is output to the terminal A system fault is output via the signaling relay system When the cabinet unit is delivered the plant configuration one or several loads in one electrically connected network and the protection philosophy immediate shutdown in the event of an insulation fault or restricted continued motion can vary This means that the signaling relays of the insulation monitor must be integrated by the customer in the fault and warning sequence Safety information NOTICE Only one insulation monitor can be used within the same electrically connected network Note When the insulation monitor is used the connection bracket for the interference suppression capacitor must be removed see Electrical installation Removing the connection bracket for the interference suppression capacitor with operation from an ungrounded supply Controls and displays on the insulation monitor 100 BENDER 4 A ISOMETER IRDH275 IT SYSTEM teal R 086kQ FTH J CECE Figure 4 12 Controls and displays on the insulation monitor Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A
392. ons provided in Help You can call up the online help at any time by choosing Help gt Getting Started STARTER features a detailed online help function Drive converter cabinet units 126 Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Commissioning 5 3 Procedure for commissioning via STARTER The STARTER project wizard Project Wizard Starter Introduction Create PG PC Set Insert drive Summary new project interface Find drive units online Open existing project offline IV Display Wizard during start Cancel Figure 5 3 STARTER project wizard gt Click Arrange drive units offline in the STARTER project wizard Project Wizard Starter i 4 Introduction Create PG PC Set Insert drive Summary new project interface units Please enter the project data Project name Projet Author fr Storage loc Ic Siemens Step 4S 7 proj E Comment Figure 5 4 Create new project Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 127 Commissioning 5 3 Procedure for commissioning via STARTER gt Enter a project name and if necessary the author memory location and a comment gt Click Continue gt to set up the PG PC interface Project Wizard Starter 4 Ue 2 Introduction Create PG PC Set Insert drive Summary new project interface units Specify the online connection to the drive unit Set HER PC Adapter PROFIBUS
393. ontrol Unit is defective In this state the CBE20 cannot be used Flashing 2 5 Hz Communication between the Control Unit and the CBE20 is faulty Possible causes The CBE20 was removed following power up The CBE20 is defective Orange Flashing 2 5 Hz Firmware is being downloaded 354 Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5SE00189855A Diagnosis faults and alarms 10 2 Diagnosis 10 2 2 Diagnostics via parameters All Objects key diagnostic parameters details in List Manual Parameters Name Description r0945 Fault code Displays the fault number Index 0 is the most recent fault last fault to have occurred r0948 Fault time received in milliseconds Displays the system runtime in ms at which the fault occurred r0949 Fault value Displays additional information about the fault This information is required for detailed fault diagnosis 12109 Fault time removed in milliseconds Displays the system runtime in ms at which the fault was rectified 12123 Alarm time received in milliseconds Displays the system runtime in ms at which the alarm occurred 12124 Alarm value Displays additional information about the alarm This information is required for detailed alarm diagnosis 12125 Alarm time removed in milliseconds Displays the system runtime in ms at which the alarm was rectified CU320 key diagnostic parameter
394. ontrol loop structures as well as a high degree of reusability of existing diagrams The open loop and closed loop control functionality is defined by using multi instance enabled blocks Drive Control Blocks DCBs from a pre defined library DCB library that are selected and graphically linked by dragging and dropping Test and diagnostic functions allow verification of the program behavior and troubleshooting in the event of a fault The block library encompasses a large selection of closed loop arithmetic and logic function blocks as well as comprehensive open loop and closed loop control functions For combining analyzing and acquiring binary signals all commonly used logic functions are available for selection AND XOR on off delay RS flipflop counter etc Numerous computation functions are available for monitoring and evaluating numerical variables for example absolute value generation division min max evaluation Besides drive control functions it is also a simple matter to configure axis winding functions PI controllers ramp function generators and wobble generators Almost unlimited programming of control structures is possible in conjunction with the SIMOTION motion control system These can then be combined with other program sections to form an overall program Drive Control Chart for SINAMICS also provides a convenient basis for resolving drive level open loop and closed loop control tasks directly in the conv
395. onverter initially contactor K2 is opened and after the excitation time contactor K1 is closed The converter then captures the rotating motor and the motor is operated on the converter Contactor K2 must be designed for switching under load Contactors K1 and K2 must be interlocked against closing at the same time The flying restart function must be activated p1200 1 Line Converter with Voltage Sensing Module VSM10 Protection device A Interlock to prevent simultaneous closing Figure 9 13 Example circuit for bypass without synchronization Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 335 Functions Monitoring and Protective Functions 9 3 Extended functions Activation Parameterization Once the bypass without synchronizer p1260 3 function has been activated the following parameters must be set The bypass with synchronizer p1260 3 can be triggered by the following signals p1267 e Bypass by means of control signal p1267 0 1 The bypass can be activated by means of a digital signal p1266 e g from a higher level automation system If the digital signal is canceled a changeover to converter operations is triggered once the debypass delay time 1263 has expired Bypass at speed threshold p1267 1 1 Once a certain speed is reached the system switches to bypass i e the converter is used as a Start up converter The bypass cannot be connected
396. oost accel p1311 Ramp up active p1199 0 Voltage boost on acceleration Figure 7 5 Voltage boost total Note The voltage boost affects all V f characteristics p1300 from 0 to 6 NOTICE If the voltage boost value is too high this can result in a thermal overload of the motor winding Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 261 Setpoint channel and closed loop control 7 3 V f control Permanent voltage boost p1310 The voltage boost is active across the entire frequency range up to the rated frequency fn whereby the value decreases continuously at higher frequencies y V f linear Vmax Caelo T DORT paroa aaia Vn 4 p0304 0 fn fmax p0310 p1082 x number of pole pairs p0305 rated motor current x permanent r0395 current stator resistance x p1310 permanent voltage boost Figure 7 6 Permanent voltage boost example p1300 0 p1310 gt 0 p1311 0 Drive converter cabinet units 262 Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Setpoint channel and closed loop contro 7 3 Vf control Voltage boost during acceleration p1311 Voltage boost is only active during acceleration or braking Voltage boost is only active if the Ramp up active signal r1199 0 1 or Ramp down active r1199 1 1 is pending vV V f linear Vmax eY D Fy Vn p0304 f 7777777777777777777
397. or identification or speed controller optimization Table 7 3 Motor data type plate Parameter Description Comments p0320 Rated motor short circuit current This is used for the field weakening characteristic p0322 Maximum motor speed Maximum mechanical speed p0323 Maximum motor current De magnetization protection p0325 Rotor position identification current 1st phase p0327 Optional load angle Optional otherwise leave at 90 p0328 Reluctance torque constant p0329 Rotor position identification current p0341 Motor moment of inertia For speed controller pre control p0344 Motor weight p0350 Stator resistance cold p0356 Quadrature axis stator inductance Lq p0357 In line stator inductance Ld Short circuit protection For short circuits that can occur in the drive converter or in the motor cable the rotating machine would supply the short circuit until it comes to a standstill An output contactor can be used for protection This should be located as close as possible to the motor This is particularly necessary if the motor can still be driven by the load when a fault develops The contactor must be provided with a protective circuit against overvoltage on the motor side so that the motor winding is not damaged as a result of the shutdown Control signal rO863 1 VECTOR is used to control the contactor via a free digital output the checkback contact of the contactor is connected to
398. or input COM Center contact on a changeover contact CU Control Unit D DC Direct current DDS Drive data set DI Digital input DI DO Digital input output bidirectional DO Digital output E ESD Electrostatic devices EMC Electromagnetic compatibility EN European standard F Eis Fault FAQ Frequently asked questions FW Firmware H RFG Ramp function generator HW Hardware Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 469 Appendix A 1 List of abbreviations 470 NEMA NO P p PDS PE PROFIBUS PTC R es RAM RS 232 RS 485 SI STW SW TIA TM UL Vdc ZSW Input output International electrical engineering standard Insulated gate bipolar transistor Jog mode Inductance Light emitting diode Ground Motor data set Normally closed contact Standardization body in the USA United States of America Normally open contact Adjustable parameter Power unit data set Protective earth Serial data bus Positive temperature coefficient Visualization parameter read only Read and write memory Serial interface Standard Describes the physical characteristics of a digital serial interface Safety Integrated PROFldrive control word Software Totally Integrated Automation Terminal Module Underwriters Laboratories Inc DC link voltage PROFldrive status word Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5SE00189855A Appendix A 2 P
399. ore accepting the delivery from the shipping company e Check that you have received all the items specified on the delivery note e Notify the shipping company immediately of any missing components or damage e If you identify any hidden defects or damage contact the shipping company immediately and ask them to examine the device e f you fail to contact them immediately you may lose your right to claim compensation for the defects and damage e f necessary you can request the support of your local Siemens office J N WARNING Damage in transit indicates that the device has been subject to unreasonable stress The electrical safety of the device can no longer be ensured It must not be connected until a thorough high voltage test has been carried out Non observance can result in death severe personal injury or substantial property damage Storage The devices must be stored in clean dry rooms Temperatures between 25 C and 70 C are permissible Temperature variations greater than 20 K per hour are not permitted If the device is stored for a prolonged period once it has been unpacked cover it or take other appropriate measures to ensure that it does not become dirty and that it is protected against environmental influences Failure to take such measures will invalidate any claims for damages under the terms of the warranty J N WARNING The device should not be stored for more than two years If the
400. ort circuit proof Max connectable cross section 1 5 mm Note This voltage supply is only for powering the digital inputs X541 4 non floating digital inputs outputs Table 4 18 Terminal strip X541 Terminal Designation 1 Technical specifications 6 M Electronics ground 5 DI DO 11 As input 4 DI DO 10 Voltage 3 V to 30 V 3 DI DO 9 Typical current consumption 10 mA at 24 V DC 2 DIDO 8 As output The summation current of the four outputs including the currents of the inputs is limited to 100 mA continued short circuit proof in the delivery condition 1 P24 Auxiliary voltage 24 V DC Max total load current of 24 V auxiliary voltage of terminal blocks X540 and X541 combined 150 mA 1 DI DO Digital input output M Electronics ground Max connectable cross section 1 5 mm2 Note An open input is interpreted as low When externally generated 24 V DC signals are connected to a digital input the ground reference of the external signal must also be connected Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 77 Electrical installation 4 9 Signal connections CAUTION Due to the limitation of the aggregate of the output currents an over current can cause a short circuit on an output terminal or even intrusion of the signal of a different terminal X542 2 relay outputs two way contact Table 4
401. otective Functions 9 3 Extended functions e After contactor K2 has fed back the closed state r1269 1 1 contactor K1 is opened and the converter inhibits the pulses The converter is in Ready for operation and bypass state e Ifthe On command is cancelled in this phase the converter will change to Ready to start and bypass status If the appropriate contactors are being used the converter will be isolated from the line supply and the DC link discharged To transfer the motor back from the line supply the sequence is simply reversed At the start of the process contactor K2 is closed and contactor K1 is open e The Command bypass control bit is canceled e g by the higher level automation e The bypass function sets the control word bit synchronizing e The pulses are enabled Since synchronizing is set before pulse enable the converter interprets this as a command to retrieve the motor from the line supply e Once converter synchronization to line frequency line voltage and line phasing is complete the synchronization algorithm reports this state e The bypass mechanism evaluates this signal and closes contactor K1 The signal is evaluated internally BICO wiring is not required e Once contactor K1 has reported closed status contactor K2 is opened and the motor returns to operation on the converter 9 3 2 2 Bypass with synchronizer without degree of overlapping p1260 2 Description When Byp
402. otor Dat Equivalent Circuit C Calculation of the bv K K K K K K K K K Encoder Defaults of the setg Drive functions Pi data exchi Important paramete Summary iii gt A Figure 5 22 Configuring the motor holding brake gt Under Holding brake configuration choose the appropriate settings for your device configuration gt Click Continue gt Drive converter cabinet units 148 Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Commissioning 5 3 Procedure for commissioning via STARTER Entering the encoder data option K50 Note If you have specified option K50 SMC30 Sensor Module the following screen is displayed in which you can enter the encoder data Configuration SINAMICS_G150 Encoder Drive unit Drive Drive_1 DDS 0 MDS 0 Options Control structure i i oe a Which encoder do you want to use Unive setting Motor M Encoder 1 I Encoder 2 Encoder 3 Motor data Optional Motor Dat Encoder 1 Equivalent Circuit C Calculation of the t Encoder name Encoder_1 Motor holding brake Encoder evaluation SMC30 SMC30 4 T Defaults of the setg Encoder with Drive CliG interface NNN SKM IS Drive functions J Read encoder agai Pr data exche Read encode agam mportant paramete C Select standard Via motor order no Summary encoder from list lt ii gt Enter data Encoder data Encoder type Code number 2048 HTL A B A
403. otor power factor 0 850 p310 0 Rated motor frequency 50 90 Hz p311 0 Rated motor speed 1500 0 rev min p335 0 Motor cooling type 0 Optional Motor Data p320 0 Motor rated magnetizing current short circuit current 91 000 Arms p322 0 Maximum motor speed 5000 0 rev min p341 0 Motor moment of inertia 0 666000 kgrr p342 0 Ratio between the total and motor moment of inertia 1 000 p344 0 Motor weight for the thermal motor model 440 0 kg v Copy text to clipboard Cancel Help Figure 5 29 Summary of the drive unit data gt You can use the Copy to clipboard function to copy the summary of the drive unit data displayed on the screen to a word processing program for further use gt Click Finish gt Save your project to the hard disk by choosing Project gt Save Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Commissioning 5 3 Procedure for commissioning via STARTER 5 3 3 Additional settings required for units that are connected in parallel After commissioning by means of STARTER additional settings must be made for units that are connected in parallel e With 380 V 480 V 3 AC 6SL3710 2GE41 1AA0 6SL3710 2GE41 4AA0 6SL3710 2GE41 6AA0 e With 500 V 600 V 3 AC 6SL3710 2GF38 6AA0 6SL3710 2GF41 1AA0 6SL3710 2GF41 4AA0 e With 660 V 690 V 3 AC 6SL3710 2GH41 1AA0 6SL3710 2GH41 4AA0 6SL3710 2GH41 5AA0 Settings to monitor the checkback signal from the ma
404. ous Real Time Ethernet Real time properties of PROFINET IO where IRT telegrams are transmitted deterministically via planned communication paths in a defined sequence to achieve the best possible synchronism and performance This is also known as time scheduled communications whereby knowledge about the network structure is utilized IRT requires special network components that support planned data transfer When the transfer procedure is implemented in the ERTEC ASICs Enhanced Real Time Ethernet Controller this results in cycle times of at least 500 us and a jitter accuracy of less than 1 us e g 1 ms cycle Reserved range Minimum width i Cyclic scheduled Spontaneous communication communication Monitored limit Monitored limit Figure 6 41 Broadband distribution reservation PROFINET IO IRT Note When operating S7 300 stations with SINAMICS drives presently only communications via PROFINET IO with RT are possible Drive converter cabinet units 246 Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Operation 6 8 PROFINET IO 6 8 2 3 Addresses Definition MAC address Each PROFINET device is assigned a worldwide unique device identifier in the factory This 6 byte long device identifier is the MAC address The MAC address is divided up as follows e 3 bytes manufacturer s ID and e 3 bytes device identifier consecutive number The MAC address is usually indicated on the front of the device
405. overs must only be tightened by hand The fiber optic cable plugs must be remounted at their original slot Fiber optic cables and sockets are accordingly labeled for correct assignment U11 U21 U31 Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 373 Maintenance and servicing 11 4 Replacing components 11 4 4 Replacing the power block type HX Replacing the left hand power block Figure 11 6 Replacing the power block frame size HX left hand power block Drive converter cabinet units 374 Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Maintenance and servicing 11 4 Replacing components Preparatory steps e Disconnect the cabinet unit from the power supply e Allow unimpeded access to the power block e Remove the protective cover Removal steps The removal steps are numbered in accordance with the figure Remove the busbar 6 screws Unscrew the connection to the DC link 8 nuts Remove the retaining screw at the top 1 screw Remove the retaining screws at the bottom 2 screws Disconnect the plug in connections for the fiber optic cables and signal cables 3 plugs On h WD Remove the connection for the current transformer and associated PE connection 1 plug Remove the connection for the DC link sensor 1 nut N 8 Remove the power connections 6 screws 9 Unscrew the two retaining screws for the fan and attach the tool for de installing the
406. p1496 x J x dw dt p1496 x p0341 x p0342 x dw dt w 2mf The motor moment of inertia p0341 is calculated when commissioning the drive system The factor p0342 between the total moment of inertia J and the motor moment of inertia must be determined manually or by optimizing the speed controller Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5SE00189855A Setpoint channel and closed loop contro 7 4 Vector speed torque control with without encoder Note When speed controller optimization is carried out the ratio between the total moment of inertia and that of the motor p0342 is determined and acceleration pre control scaling p1496 is set to 100 If p1400 2 p1400 3 0 then the pre control balancing is automatically set Droop injection Acceleration pre control soe p0341 p0342 PI Speed r1547 0 s controller gt Speed setpoint Torque setpoint 1547 1 11539 2 Actual speed value Ti Kp Th 7 SLVC p1452 p1470 p1472 j Ti VC 1442 1460 1462 1 only effective when p1400 2 p p p 2 only effective when p1400 2 Figure 7 11 Speed controller with pre control When correctly adapted when accelerating the speed controller only has to compensate disturbance variables in its control loop This is achieved with a relatively minor controlled variable change at the controller output The effect of the pre control variable can be adapted accordin
407. p2000 Absolute actual current smoothed 6 r0027 LIST A p2002 Motor temperature 7 10035 1 T_MOT C Reference temperature Converter temperature 8 r0037 T_LT C Reference temperature Actual torque smoothed 9 r0031 M_ACT Nm p2003 Converter output voltage smoothed 10 r0025 C_OUT V p2001 For diagnostic purposes Speed setpoint smoothed r0020 NSETP 1 min p2000 Control factor smoothed r0028 AUSST Reference modulation depth Field producing current component r0029 IDACT A p2002 Torque producing current component r0030 IQACT A p2002 Converter overload r0036 LTI2T 100 Shutdown Degree of thermal overload Speed actual value motor encoder r0061 N_ACT 1 min p2000 Speed setpoint after filter r0062 NSETP 1 min p2000 Actual speed smoothed r0063 N_ACT 1 min p2000 Control deviation r0064 NDIFF 1 min p2000 Slip frequency r0065 FSCHL Hz Reference frequency Output frequency r0066 F_OUT Hz Reference frequency Output voltage r0072 UACT V p2001 Control factor r0074 AUSST Reference modulation depth Torque generating actual current r0078 IQACT A p2002 Actual torque value r0080 M_ACT Nm p2003 For further diagnostic purposes Fixed speed setpoint effective r1024 1 min p2000 Active motorized potentiometer setpoint r1050 1 min p2000 Resulting speed setpoint r1119 NSETP 1 min p2000 Speed controller output 11508 NREGY Nm p2003 component of speed controller 11482 NREGI Nm p2003 PROFIBUS setpoint 12050 PBSOL 1 min p2000
408. p2051 1 Cl PROFIBUS PZD send word Vector r0063 n act Vector p2051 2 Cl PROFIBUS PZD send word Vector r0068 l act Vector p2051 3 Cl PROFIBUS PZD send word Vector r0080 M act Vector p2051 4 Cl PROFIBUS PZD send word Vector r0082 P act Vector p2051 5 Cl PROFIBUS PZD send word Vector 12131 FAULT Vector p2080 0 BI PROFIBUS send status word 1__ Vector r0899 0 Ready for switching on Vector p2080 1 BI PROFIBUS send status word 1__ Vector r0899 1 Ready for operation Vector p2080 2 BI PROFIBUS send status word 1__ Vector r0899 2 Operation Vector p2080 3 BI PROFIBUS send status word 1 Vector 12139 3 Fault Vector p2080 4 BI PROFIBUS send status word 1 Vector r0899 4 No OFF2 Vector p2080 5 BI PROFIBUS send status word 1 Vector r0899 5 No OFF3 Vector p2080 6 BI PROFIBUS send status word 1 Vector r0899 6 Switching on inhibited Vector p2080 7 BI PROFIBUS send status word 1__ Vector 12139 7 Alarm active Vector p2080 8 BI PROFIBUS send status word 1 Vector 12197 7 No setpoint actual value Vector deviation p2080 9 BI PROFIBUS send status word 1__ Vector r0899 9 Control request Vector p2080 10 Bl PROFIBUS send status word 1 Vector r2199 1 Comparison value reached Vector p2080 11 Bl PROFIBUS send status word 1 Vector 11407 7 M I P limiting not active Vector p2080 12 Bl PROFIBUS send status word 1 Vector 0 Vector p2080 13 Bl PROFIBUS send status word 1 Vector r2129 14 No alarm for motor Vector overtemperature
409. pe plate To navigate through the selection fields choose lt F2 gt or lt F3 gt To activate a selection choose lt F5 gt To change a parameter value navigate to the required selection field and activate your entries with lt F5 gt The system displays another window in which you can e Enter the value directly or e select the value from a list When you have finished entering the motor data choose Continue underneath the final parameter value and activate with lt F5 gt Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Commissioning 5 5 First commissioning with the AOP30 Note The description provided for the following stages also applies to commissioning an induction motor When commissioning a permanent magnet synchronous motor p0300 2 there are a few special conditions that apply which are detailed in a separate chapter see Setpoint channel and closed loop control Permanent magnet synchronous motors Basic commissioning entering the encoder data if available 2 VECTOR encoder commissioning e 0 p0400eEncoder type selection 9999 users p0404eEncoder_config effective 00200008H p0405eSquare wave encoder A B 00000009H Help A v OK ei F2 Fs F4 F5 2 VECTOR encoder commissioning e 0 p0405eSquare wave encoder A B 00000009H p0408eRot enc pulse number per 1024 p0491 Fault react ENCODE
410. perating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 233 Operation 6 7 Control via the operator panel AOP setpoint ramp up time factory setting 10 s AOP setpoint ramp down time factory setting 10 s e Recommendation set as ramp up ramp down time p1120 p1121 Changing the ramp up ramp down times does not affect the settings for parameters p1120 and p1121 because this is an AOP specific setting AOP starting setpoint factory setting 0 000 rpm Note The internal drive ramp function generator is always active Settings MENU Commissioning Service AOP Settings Control Settings Save AOP local mode factory setting no e Yes Deactivates the Control via operator panel function thereby disabling the LOCAL REMOTE key e No Activates the LOCAL REMOTE key Note LOCAL functionality can also be locked on the drive by means of the p0806 parameter BI Lock master control Settings MENU Commissioning Service AOP Settings Control Settings Acknowledge error from the AOP factory setting yes e Yes Errors can be acknowledged via the AOP e No Errors cannot be acknowledged via the AOP 6 7 7 7 Timeout monitoring In LOCAL mode or if OFF in REMOTE is active the drive is shut down after 1 s if the data cable between the AOP and drive is disconnected 6 7 7 8 Operator input inhibit parameterization inhibit can activate an operator input parameters disable using a key pushbutt
411. perator panel firmware from the PC Description Firmware might need to be loaded to the AOP if the AOP functionality needs to be upgraded If once the drive has powered up the CompactFlash Card is found to contain a newer version of the firmware a message will appear on the AOP30 prompting you to load the new firmware You should click YES in response to this prompt The firmware will then be loaded automatically on the operator panel and the following dialog screen will appear SIEMENS SINAMICS F supply Software being loaded Please do not disconnect the power F1 F2 E3 F4 ES Figure 11 21 Dialog screen loading firmware If the firmware cannot be loaded successfully it can be loaded using the following manual method The load program LOAD_AOP30 and the firmware file can be found on the CD Loading the firmware 1 Oona A OON Establish the RS232 connection from the PC to the AOP30 Provide the supply voltage 24 V DC Start the LOAD_AOP30 program on the PC Choose the PC interface COM1 COM2 Choose and open the firmware AOP30 H86 Follow the instructions in the status window of the program and connect the power supply for the AOP30 while pressing the red key O 7 The load procedure is started automatically 8 Switch the power on switch the power supply off and then back on 408 Drive converter cabinet units
412. plays the fault and or alarm on the AOP30 operator panel Faults are indicated by the red FAULT LED and a fault screen is automatically displayed You can use the F1 Help function to call up information about the cause of the fault and how to remedy it You can use F5 Ack to acknowledge a stored fault Any alarms are displayed by the yellow flashing ALARM LED The system also displays a note in the status bar providing information on the cause Every fault and alarm is entered in the fault alarm buffer along with time the error occurred The time stamp refers to the relative system time in milliseconds r0969 Activate the Set date time AOP synchronization gt Drive setting to date and time stamp errors on the AOP30 A fault is a message from the drive indicating an error or other exceptional unwanted status This could be caused by a fault within the converter or an external fault triggered for example from the winding temperature monitor for the induction motor The faults are displayed and can be reported to a higher level control system via PROF drive In the factory default setting the message converter fault is also sent to a relay output Once you have rectified the cause of the fault you have to acknowledge the fault message What is an alarm 358 An alarm is the response to a fault condition identified by the drive It does not result in the drive being switched off and does not have to be acknowledged Alarms are
413. pply auxiliary equipment e g separately driven fan for motor the C Connection for drive must be properly connected to terminals X155 1 L1 to X155 3 external L3 The supply voltage of the auxiliary equipment must match the input auxiliary voltage of the cabinet unit The load current must not exceed 10 A and equipment must be set at Q155 in accordance with the load connected see Set value Electrical installation Other connections Connection for external auxiliary equipment option L19 15 Option L26 In equipment with main circuit breaker the release current must be set C C Main circuit to match the installation requirements see Electrical Installation Other breaker incl connections Main switch incl fuses or main circuit breaker option fuses circuit L26 breakers 16 Option L50 The 230 V auxiliary supply for the cabinet illumination with an integrated C C Cabinet service socket must be connected to terminal X390 and protected with illumination with a fuse max 10 A on the line side see Electrical installation Other service socket Connections Cabinet illumination with service socket option L50 17 Option L55 The 230 V auxiliary supply for the anti condensation heating for the C E Cabinet anti cabinet 230 V 50 Hz 100 W or 230 V 50 Hz 2 x 100 W for cabinets condensation with a width of 800 to 1200 mm must be connected to terminals X240 heating 1 to 3 and protected with fuses max 1
414. pply is missing or outside permissible tolerance range Power supply lt 5 V Orange Steady light Electronic power supply for measuring system present Supply voltage gt 5 V Notice You must ensure that the connected encoder can be operated with a 24 V supply Operating an encoder designed for a 5 V supply with a 24 V supply can damage the encoder electronics beyond repair CBE20 Communication Board Ethernet option G33 Table 10 5 Description of the LEDs on the CBE20 LED Color State Description Link port OFF The electronics power supply is missing or lies outside the permissible tolerance range Green Steady light A different device is connected to port x and a physical connection exists Activity OFF The electronics power supply is missing or lies outside the permissible port tolerance range Yellow Steady light Data is being received or sent at port x Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 353 Diagnosis faults and alarms 10 2 Diagnosis LED Fault Color State OFF Description If the link port LED is green The CBE20 is operating normally data is being exchanged with the configured IO Controller Red Flashing The response monitoring time has elapsed Communication has been interrupted The IP address is incorrect Incorrect or missing configuration Incorrect parameterization Inco
415. pport If your plant is down and you need fast on site help we can provide the specialists with the required expertise wherever you are With our comprehensive service network we offer professional and reliable expertise to get your plant up and running again as quickly as possible Experts are available 24 hours a day 365 days a year Tel 0180 50 50 444 Of course we can also arrange special service contracts tailored to your specific requirements For details please contact your Siemens office Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 361 Diagnosis faults and alarms 10 4 Service and Support Spare parts and repairs Our global network of regional spare parts warehouses and repair centers enables us to respond quickly and reliably with modern logistics procedures During the operational phase of your machinery we provide a comprehensive repairs and spare parts service to ensure maximum operational reliability Our service includes expert advice with technical problems and a wide range of product and system support services tailored to your needs For more information about repairs or spare parts please call the following number in Germany Tel 0180 50 50 448 You can call this number outside office hours and at the weekend to contact our emergency spare parts service Technical support We offer technical support in both German and English for deploying products systems
416. put BI Binector input Signal source Signal sink _xzijoo a pio p1055 C en man DI1 p1056 C Jog 2 0722 1 jac 24 V X122 1 DIO Internal p1055 C Jog 1 r0722 0 722 0 X122 2 DI 1 Internal p1056 C TO722 1 ae 722 1 1 92 Figure 6 7 Interconnection of digital signals example Example 2 connection of OC OFF3 to several drives The OFF3 signal is to be connected to two drives via terminal DI 2 on the Control Unit Each drive has a binector input 1 OFF3 and 2 OFF3 The two signals are processed via an AND gate to STW1 2 OFF3 Drive converter cabinet units 194 Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Operation 6 3 Basic information about the drive system BO Binector output BI Binector input Signal source Signal sink Drive 4 24V Drive 2 Figure 6 8 Connection of OFF3 to several drives example BICO interconnections to other drives The following parameters are available for BICO interconnections to other drives e 19490 Number of BICO interconnections to other drives e 19491 0 15 BI CI of BICO interconnections to other drives e r9492 0 15 BO CO of BICO interconnections to other drives e p9493 0 15 Reset BICO interconnections to other drives Binector connector converters and connector binector converters Binector connector converter e Several digital signals are converted to a 32 bit integer double word or to a 16 bit integer word e p2080 0 15 Bl PROFldrive PZD send bit se
417. puts 78 Removing the interference suppression capacitor 68 Replacement Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Index Crane lifting lugs 367 Fan frame size FX 390 Fan frame size GX 392 Filter mats 369 Installation device 366 Operator panel 403 Replacing Automatic firmware update 406 Control Interface Board frame size FX 382 Control Interface Board frame size GX 384 Control Interface Board frame size HX 386 Control Interface Board frame size JX 388 Error messages 406 Fan frame size HX 394 Fan frame size JX 398 Operator panel battery 403 Power block frame size FX 370 Power block frame size GX 372 Power block frame size HX 374 Power block frame size JX 378 Replacing components 369 Replacing the Backup Battery of the Cabinet Operator Panel 403 Replacing the cabinet operator panel 403 Residual risks 18 Rotating measurement 298 Runtime 320 S S5 Selector for voltage current AIO Al1 76 Saving the Parameters Permanently 237 Separate 24 V DC power supply for NAMUR option B02 119 Service 23 Service and Support 361 Setpoint addition 252 Setpoint channel 252 Setpoint sources 204 Analog inputs 204 Fixed speed setpoints 208 General information 180 Motorized potentiometer 206 Setting the PROFIBUS Address 213 Shield connection 71 Signal connections 71 Simulation operation 321 Sine wave filter option L15 81 Slip compens
418. r Motor data Optional Motor Dat Equivalent Circuit C Calculation of the f Motor holding brake Encoder Defaults of the setg lt K K K K K K K K K K K Important paramete Summary i gt PROFIBUS proces _ v Drive Drive_1 DDS 0 Pumps and fans 1 v mA motor identification is recommended at the initial commissioning Motor data identification at stan Technological application Motor identification 4 motor data identification is performed once at the drive enable The motor is under current and may turn up to a quarter of a revolution Figure 5 26 Defining the technological application motor identification Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 153 Commissioning 5 3 Procedure for commissioning via STARTER gt Select the required data e Technological application Standard drive VECTOR 0 Edge modulation is not enabled The dynamic voltage reserve is increased 10 V which reduces the maximum output voltage Pumps and fans 1 default setting Edge modulation is enabled The dynamic voltage reserve is reduced 2 V which increases the maximum output voltage Passive loads for sensorless control down to f 0 2 Controlled operation down to standstill is possible for passive loads These include applications in which the load cannot produce a r
419. r 10 s with a duty cycle duration of 300 s see Overload capability 5 The current values given here are based on the rated output current 8 The recommendations for the North American market in AWG or MCM must be taken from the appropriate NEC National Electrical Code or CEC Canadian Electrical Code standards Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5SE00189855A 433 Technical specifications 12 3 Technical specifications Table 12 17 Version A 500 V 600 V 3 AC part 2 Order number 6SL3710 1GF33 3AA0 1GF34 1AA0 1GF34 7AA0 Unit rating for IL at 50 Hz 500 V kW 200 250 315 for I at 50 Hz 500 V 1 kW 160 200 250 for IL at 60 Hz 575 V 2 hp 300 400 450 for I at 60 Hz 575 V 2 hp 250 350 450 Output current Rated current In A 330 410 465 Base load current IL 3 A 320 400 452 Base load current IH A 280 367 416 Input current Rated input current A 343 426 483 Input current max A 525 655 740 Current requirements for 24 VDC JA 1 4 1 4 1 4 auxiliary supply Connection voltages Line voltage Vacrms 500 V 3 AC 10 to 600 V 3 AC 10 15 lt 1 min Line frequency Hz 47 to 63 Hz Electronics power supply Voc 24 20 4 28 8 Power loss kW 6 1 8 1 7 8 Cooling air requirement m s 0 36 0 78 0 78 Sound pressure level Lpa dB A 69 73 72 75 72 75 1 m at 50 60 Hz Line connection recommended DI
420. r I at 50 Hz 500 V 1 kW 160 200 250 for IL at 60 Hz 575 V 2 hp 300 400 450 for I at 60 Hz 575 V 2 hp 250 350 450 Output current Rated current In A 330 410 465 Base load current IL 3 A 320 400 452 Base load current IH A 280 367 416 Input current Rated input current A 343 426 483 Input current max A 525 655 740 Current requirements for 24 VDC JA 1 4 1 4 1 4 auxiliary supply Connection voltages Line voltage Vacrms 500 V 3 AC 10 to 600 V 3 AC 10 15 lt 1 min Line frequency Hz 47 to 63 Hz Electronics power supply Voc 24 20 4 28 8 Power loss kW 6 1 8 1 7 8 Cooling air requirement m s 0 36 0 78 0 78 Sound pressure level Lpa dB A 69 73 72 75 72 75 1 m at 50 60 Hz Line connection recommended DIN VDE mm2 2x120 2x185 2x 185 maximum DIN VDE mm 4 x 240 4 x 240 4 x 240 Fixing screw M12 1 hole M12 2 holes M12 2 holes Motor connection recommended DIN VDE mm 2x95 2x120 2 x 150 maximum DIN VDE mm2 2x150 4 x 240 4 x 240 Fixing screw M12 1 hole M12 2 holes M12 2 holes Protective conductor connection Fixing screw M12 2 holes M12 2 holes M12 2 holes Max motor cable length shielded unshielded m 300 450 300 450 300 450 Dimensions standard version Width mm 400 600 600 Height mm 2000 2000 2000 Depth mm 600 600 600 Power block frame size GX HX HX Weight without options approx kg 300 670 670 Recommended protection Line and semi cond protection
421. r kinetic buffering The monitoring time can be set in parameter p1255 p1295 If buffering i e the power failure lasts longer than the time set here the drive will shut down with fault F7406 drive kinetic buffering maximum time exceeded The standard fault reaction for this fault is OFF3 which means that this function can be used for controlled drive deceleration in the event of a power failure In this case excess regenerative energy can only be dissipated via an additional braking resistor Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 305 Functions Monitoring and Protective Functions 9 2 Drive Functions Description of Vdc_max control V Switch on level Vy controller active In Figure 9 5 Activating deactivating the Vdc_max control The switch on level of the Vdc_max control r1242 or r1282 is calculated as follows e when the automatic switch in level sensing is disabled p1254 0 11242 r1282 1 15 x p0210 device supply voltage DC link e when the automatic switch on level sensing is enabled p1254 1 11242 r1282 Vdc_max 50 V Vdc_max overvoltage threshold of the converter Function diagram FD 6220 FP 6320 Vdc_max controller and Vdc_min controller Parameters p1240 p1280 Vdc controller configuration 11242 r1282 Vdc_min controller switch in level p1243 p1283 Vdc_max controller dynamic factor p1245 p1285 Vdc_min controller switch in leve
422. r wiring the DRIVE CLiQ nodes Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 55 Electrical installation 4 4 Introduction to EMC 4 4 Introduction to EMC What is meant by EMC Electromagnetic compatibility EMC describes the capability of an electrical device to function satisfactorily in an electromagnetic environment without itself causing interference unacceptable for other devices in the environment EMC therefore represents a quality feature for the e Internal noise immunity Resistance to internal electrical disturbances e External noise immunity resistance against external electromagnetic disturbances e Noise emission level environmental effects caused by electromagnetic emissions To ensure that the cabinet unit functions satisfactorily in the system the environment subject to interference must not be neglected For this reason special requirements exist regarding the structure and the EMC of the system Operational reliability and noise immunity Noise emissions 56 In order to achieve the greatest possible operational reliability and immunity to noise of a complete system converter automation drive machines etc measures must be taken by the converter manufacturer and the user Only when all these measures are fulfilled can the faultless functioning of the converter be guaranteed and the specified legal requirements 2004 108 EC be met Product standard EN 6180
423. re 5 7 Setting the interface properties NOTICE You must activate PG PC is the only master on bus if no other master PC S7 etc is available on the bus Note Projects can be created and PROFIBUS addresses for the drive objects assigned even if a PROFIBUS interface has not been installed on the PC To prevent bus addresses from being assigned more than once only the bus addresses available in the project are proposed gt Once you have done this click OK to confirm the settings and return to the project wizard Drive converter cabinet units 130 Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Commissioning 5 3 Procedure for commissioning via STARTER Project Wizard Starter z 3 Introduction Create PG PC Set Insert drive Summary new project interface units Specify the online connection to the drive unit Set sir ee PC Adapter PROFIBUS Change and test Cancel Figure 5 8 Setting the interface gt Click Continue gt to set up a drive unit in the project wizard Project Wizard Starter 1 7 i 4 Introduction Create PG PC Set Insert drive Summary new project interface units Please enter the drive unit data Preview Drive unit EP Project Device Sinamics v Type G150 X Version 2 6x X Bus addr 33 v Name SINAMICS_G1 50 Sinamics tutorial lt Back Continue gt Cancel Figure 5 9 Inserting the drive unit
424. re 7 2 Signal flow diagram Speed limitation Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 255 Setpoint channel and closed loop control 7 2 Setpoint channel Function diagram Parameter FP 3050 Skip frequency bands and speed limiting e p1082 Maximum speed e p1083 CO Speed limit in positive direction of rotation e 11084 CO Speed limit positive effective e p1085 Cl Speed limit in positive direction of rotation e p1086 CO Speed limit in negative direction of rotation e 11087 CO Speed limit negative effective e p1088 Cl Speed limit in negative direction of rotation 7 2 5 Ramp function generator Description 256 The ramp function generator limits the rate at which the setpoint changes when the drive is accelerating or decelerating This prevents excessive setpoint step changes from damaging the drive train Additional rounding times can also be set in the lower and upper speed ranges to improve control quality and prevent load surges thereby protecting mechanical components such as shafts and couplings The ramp up and ramp down times each refer to the maximum speed p1082 The rounding times that can be set can prevent the actual speed value from being overshot when the setpoint is approached thereby improving control quality Notice if rounding times are too long this can cause the setpoint to be overshot if the setpoint is reduced abruptly during ramp up Rounding is also effecti
425. re activated Encoder adjustment is activated automatically together with the motor identification routine e Motor identification standstill measurement p1910 e Speed controller optimization rotary measurement p1960 Motor data for permanent magnet synchronous motors Table 7 2 Motor data type plate Parameter Description Comments p0304 Rated motor voltage If this value is not known the value 0 can also be entered Entering the correct value however means that the stator leakage inductance p0356 p0357 can be calculated more accurately p0305 Rated motor current p0307 Rated motor power p0310 Rated motor frequency p0311 Rated motor speed p0314 Motor pole pair number If this value is not known the value 0 can also be entered p0316 Motor torque constant If this value is not known the value 0 can also be entered Drive converter cabinet units 284 Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Setpoint channel and closed loop contro 7 4 Vector speed torque control with without encoder If the torque constant kt is not stamped on the rating plate or specified in the data sheet you can calculate this value from the rated motor data or from the stall current lo and stall torque Mo as follows My _ 60min PN Mg IN 2nxnyxly or Ip ky The optional motor data can be entered if it is known Otherwise this data is estimated from the type plate data or determined by means of mot
426. re subject to wear or require maintenance or servicing Maintenance aims to preserve the specified condition of the cabinet unit Dirt and contamination must be removed regularly and parts subject to wear replaced The following points must generally be observed 11 2 1 Cleaning Dust deposits Ventilation Dust deposits inside the cabinet unit must be removed at regular intervals or at least once a year by qualified personnel in line with the relevant safety regulations The unit must be cleaned using a brush and vacuum cleaner and dry compressed air max 1 bar for areas that cannot be easily reached The ventilation openings in the cabinet must never be obstructed The fan must be checked to make sure that it is functioning correctly Cable and screw terminals 364 Cable and screw terminals must be checked regularly to ensure that they are secure in position and if necessary retightened Cabling must be checked for defects Defective parts must be replaced immediately Note The actual intervals at which maintenance procedures are to be performed depend on the installation conditions cabinet environment and the operating conditions Siemens offers its customers support in the form of a service contract For further details contact your regional office or sales office Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5SE00189855A Maintenance and servicing 11 3 Maintenance 11 3 Maintenance
427. re value of 50 C to 250 C and makes it available for further evaluation e Set the PTC temperature sensor type p4100 1 e Activate motor temperature measurement via the external sensor p0600 10 In the delivery condition and on completion of commissioning the source for the external sensor is set to the customer terminal block TM31 p0603 TM31 r4105 e Alarm A7910 is triggered once the PTC responds e Fault F7011 is triggered once the delay time defined in p0606 has elapsed Sensor monitoring for wire breakage short circuit Function diagram Parameter 348 If the temperature of the motor temperature monitor is outside the range 140 C to 250 C the sensor cable is broken or has short circuited Alarm A07015 Alarm temperature sensor fault is triggered Fault F07016 Fault temperature sensor fault is triggered once the delay time defined in p0607 has elapsed Fault FO7016 can be suppressed by p0607 0 If an induction motor is connected the drive continues operating with the data calculated in the thermal motor model If the system detects that the motor temperature sensor set in p0600 is not connected alarm A07820 Temperature sensor not connected is triggered FP 8016 Thermal monitoring motor FP 9576 TM31 temperature evaluation KTY PTC FP 9577 TM31 sensor monitoring KTY PTC e p0600 Motor temperature sensor for monitoring e p0604 Motor overtemperature fault threshold e p0605 Motor overtemp
428. requirement m s 0 78 1 48 1 48 Sound pressure level Lpa dB A 72 75 72 75 72 75 1 m at 50 60 Hz Line connection recommended DIN VDE mm2 2 x 240 3x 185 4x 150 maximum DIN VDE mm 4 x 240 8 x 240 8 x 240 Fixing screw M12 2 holes M12 4 holes M12 4 holes Motor connection recommended DIN VDE mm 2x185 3x150 3 x 185 maximum DIN VDE mm2 4 x 240 6 x 240 6 x 240 Fixing screw M12 2 holes M12 3 holes M12 3 holes Protective conductor connection Fixing screw M12 2 holes M12 18 holes M12 18 holes Max motor cable length shielded unshielded m 300 450 300 450 300 450 Dimensions standard version Width mm 1200 1600 1600 Height mm 2000 2000 2000 Depth mm 600 600 600 Power block frame size HX JX JX Weight without options approx kg 860 1320 1360 Recommended protection Line protection with option L26 3NA3354 6 3NA3365 6 3NA3365 6 Rated current A 2 x355 2 x 500 2 x 500 frame size to DIN 43620 1 3 3 3 Line and semiconductor protection without option L26 3NE1447 2 3NE1448 2 3NE1334 2 Rated current A 670 850 2 x 500 Frame size to DIN 43620 1 3 3 2 436 Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Technical specifications 12 3 Technical specitications Order number 6SL3710 1GF35 8AA0 1GF37 4AA0 1GF38 1AA0 1 Rated output of a typical 6 pole standard induction motor based on I or IH at 500 V 3 AC 50 Hz 2 Rated output of a
429. responding drive data set One drive object can manage up to 32 drive data sets The number of drive data sets is configured with p0180 Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 187 Operation 6 3 Basic information about the drive system Binector inputs p0820 to p0824 are used to select a drive data set They represent the number of the drive data set 0 to 31 in binary format where p0824 is the most significant bit e p0820 BI Drive data set selection DDS bit 0 e p0821 BI Drive data set selection DDS bit 1 e p0822 BI Drive data set selection DDS bit 2 e p0823 BI Drive data set selection DDS bit 3 e p0824 BI Drive data set selection DDS bit 4 Supplementary conditions and recommendations e Recommendation for the number of DDS in a drive The number of DDS in a drive should correspond with the number of changeover options in other words p0180 DDS 2 p0130 MDS e Max number of DDS for one drive object 32 DDS EDS Encoder data set 188 An encoder data set contains various adjustable parameters describing the connected encoder for the purpose of configuring the drive e Adjustable parameters e g Encoder interface component number p0141 Encoder component number p0142 Encoder type selection p0400 The parameters that are grouped together in the encoder data set are identified in the SINAMICS parameter list by Data set EDS and are assigned an in
430. ressing a field producing current at the current limit which considerably reduces the magnetization time e Ifthe Flying restart function is activated the excitation build up time set in p0346 is still used Commissioning Parameter setting p1401 6 1 is necessary to activate fast magnetization Then magnetization is carried out with maximum current 0 9 x r0067 When the flux setpoint is reached the current is reduced via the smoothing p1616 maximum 32 x p0115 2 If stator resistance identification is activated see p0621 fast magnetization is deactivated internally and alarm A07416 displayed If there are conflicts in the configuration of parameter p1401 alarm A07416 is output and a fault detection procedure is used to display the particular conflict Function diagram FP 6491 Flux control configuration FP 6722 Field weakening characteristic Id setpoint ASM p0300 1 FP 6723 Field weakening controller flux controller ASM p0300 1 Parameter e p0320 Motor rated magnetization current short circuit current e p0346 Motor excitation build up time e p0621 Stator resistance identification after restart e p0640 Current limit e p1401 Flux control configuration e p1570 Flux setpoint e p1573 Flux threshold value magnetization e p1590 Flux controller P gain e p1616 Current setpoint smoothing time Drive converter cabinet units 302 Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Functions Monitoring and Protect
431. rial Connector binector converter e A 32 bit integer double word or a 16 bit integer word is converted to individual digital signals e p2099 0 1 Cl PROF Idrive PZD selection receive bit serial Fixed values for interconnection using BICO technology The following connector outputs are available for interconnecting any fixed value settings e p2900 0 n CO Fixed value_ _1 e p2901 0 n CO Fixed value_ _2 e p2930 0 n CO Fixed Value_M_1 Example These parameters can be used to interconnect the scaling factor for the main setpoint or to interconnect an additional torque Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 195 Operation 6 4 Command sources 6 4 Command sources 6 4 1 PROF ldrive default setting Requirements The PROF Idrive default setting was chosen during commissioning e STARTER PROF Idrive e AOP30 5 PROF Idrive Command sources Button LOCAL REMOTE AOP r0807 Master control active Assume master control STARTER 0 REMOTE PROFIBUS PROFINET 1 LOCAL Operator panel STARTER Internal control Operator panel AOP Control panel STARTER Input terminals A60 TM31 Figure 6 9 Command sources AOP30 lt gt PROF Idrive Priority The command source priorities are shown in the diagram Command sources AOP30 lt PROFIldrive Note The EMERGENCY STOP and motor protection signals are always active regardless of the comman
432. rical installation Other connections Braking unit 25 kW 125 kW option L61 braking unit 50 kW 250 kW option L62 25 Option L83 The PTC thermistor sensors PTC resistor type A must be connected to C C Thermistor the thermistor motor protection unit F127 at terminals T1 and T2 for motor alarms see Electrical installation Other connections Thermistor protection motor protection device option L83 L84 device alarm 26 Option L84 The PTC thermistor sensors PTC resistor type A must be connected to C C Thermistor the thermistor motor protection unit F125 at terminals T1 and T2 for motor shutdown see Electrical installation Other connections Thermistor protection motor protection device option L83 L84 device shutdown 27 Option L86 The resistor thermometers must be connected to evaluation unit B140 C H PT100 for the PT100 evaluation A two wire or three wire system can be used evaluation unit here to connect the PT100 sensors The sensors are divided into two groups see Electrical installation Other connections PT100 evaluation unit option L86 This must be taken into account for the evaluation factory setting 28 Option L87 The insulation monitor can only be operated from an insulated network L C Insulation Only one insulation monitor can be used in an electrically connected monitoring network For line side control the signaling relays must be connected accordingl
433. ried out correctly If the resistance of the supply cable is greater than 20 to 30 of the total resistance this should be entered in p0352 before motor data identification is carried out p1900 p1910 To deactivate thermal adaptation set p0620 0 This may be necessary if adaptation cannot function accurately enough due to the following supplementary conditions For example if a KTY sensor is not used for temperature detection and the ambient temperatures fluctuate significantly or the overtemperatures of the motor p0626 p0628 deviate significantly from the default settings due to the design of the motor Function diagram FP 4715 Actual speed value and rotor position measurement motor encoder FD 6030 Speed setpoint droop FP 6040 Speed controller FP 6050 Kp_n Tn_n adaptation FP 6060 Torque setpoint FP 6490 Speed control configuration Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 269 Setpoint channel and closed loop control 7 4 Vector speed torque contro with without encoder 7 4 3 Description 270 Speed controller Both closed loop control techniques with and without encoder SLVC VC have the same speed controller structure that contains the following components as kernel e Pl controller e Speed controller pre control e Droop Function The torque setpoint is generated from the total of the output variables and reduced to the permissible magnitude by means of torque setp
434. rive to accelerate slightly In group drives the flying restart function should not be activated due to the different coasting properties of the individual motors Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5SE00189855A Functions Monitoring and Protective Functions 9 2 Drive Functions 9 2 6 1 Flying restart without encoder Description Depending on parameter p1200 the flying restart function is started with the maximum search speed Nsearch max ONCe the de excitation time p0347 has elapsed see diagram Flying restart NsSearch max 1 25 X Nmax p1082 The flying restart function behaves differently with V f control and vector control e V f characteristic 01300 lt 20 The search speed yielded from parameter p1203 reduces the search frequency in accordance with the motor current The parameterizable search current p1202 is injected here If the search frequency is similar to the rotor frequency a current minimum occurs Once the frequency has been found the motor is magnetized The output voltage during the magnetization time p0346 is increased to the voltage value yielded from the V f characteristic see Flying restart e Vector control without encoder The motor speed is determined using the speed adaptation control loop for the electric motor model To begin with the search current p1202 is injected and then the controller is activated starting from the maximum search frequency Th
435. rms siiis eaaa pii aaa aaa a aar apea aaa e 349 10 1 Chapter contente ie deed a be anos enn ede apa a i oa oa tapane debe need 349 10 2 DIAGNOSIS Aae eee ee as ae ee Rana eR ete T ee se a nd ae ee eet 350 10 2 1 Diagnostics Using LEDS suiers aaeain a ita ae aa i a AS 350 10 2 2 Diagnostics via parameters nosei E E EA E A E E E 355 10 2 3 Indicating and rectifying faults eissssinesininaai a aa a E a a aR aa 358 10 3 Overview of warnings And faults 0 0 eee ceeeeeeeeeeee caer eeeeaeeeeeeaeeeseeaaeeeseaaeeeseeaeeeseaeeeseenaeeeseaaes 359 103 1 CE xtermal alan I cect a a esha Ses ey ea a aa leet iea a a aa e 359 1032 SExtermalitault Iaras an meas a a i e a E T gece Saa 360 10 3 3 External fault 2 nhare ee aia e eaa eaaa E a e ai EE E A 360 10 347 Extemal fau a a a deat a a e a a a a e A aa eaaa 360 10 4 Senice and SUPPOME cossin duiena aea aa a a a a a a a E 361 104 Spare pansis te e a a a a es cates e aa a aa eet n a ea Te a aa N th daaa Eataa 362 11 Maintenance and SOriCiING iissscccccsscitisssccesetsescceaseccenessencccccaascesevessaccnsavdeecevasticscecvaeeveananesvasazed seczeessaaacsas 363 11 1 Chapter contentat e eaa tia rhel va leaden cig lentabitcoetiad ected tech e ea daauie viet wakes 363 11 2 Maint Nance erea a aa ts Reeet latent a e bias tieends heel eE EEA 364 AV2S1 S E AMIAG E A A ke ieee Seve A E T E E sa eae E ATA rates 364 11 3 Maintenances 21 3 2260 ailet tata adie We cate tear A ult heater A ete ee deed aeons ne
436. roller reduces the torque limits in order to prevent the drive from accelerating any further A real closed loop torque control with a speed that automatically sets itself is only possible in the closed loop control range but not in the open loop control range of the sensorless closed loop vector control In the open loop controlled range the torque setpoint changes the setpoint speed via a ramp up integrator integrating time p1499 x p0341 x p0342 This is the reason that sensorless closed loop torque control close to standstill is only suitable for applications that require an accelerating torque there and no load torque e g traversing drives Closed loop torque control with encoder does not have this restriction OFF responses e OFF1 and p1300 22 23 Response as for OFF2 e OFF1 p1501 1 signal and p1300 22 23 No separate braking response the braking response is provided by a drive that specifies the torque The pulses are inhibited when the brake application time p1217 expires Standstill is detected when the speed actual value of the speed threshold p1226 is undershot or when the monitoring time 91227 started when speed setpoint lt speed threshold p1226 expires Switching on inhibited is activated Drive converter cabinet units 280 Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Setpoint channel and closed loop contro e OFF2 7 4 Vector speed torque control with without encoder
437. ropriate NEC National Electrical Code or CEC Canadian Electrical Code standards Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 429 Technical specifications 12 3 Technical specifications Table 12 15 Version C 380 V 480 V 3 AC part 3 Order number 6SL3710 1GE37 5CA0 1GE38 4CA0 1GE41 0CA0 Unit rating for IL at 50 Hz 400 V kW 400 450 560 for I at 50 Hz 400 V 1 kW 315 400 450 for IL at 60 Hz 460 V 2 hp 600 600 800 for I at 60 Hz 460 V 2 hp 450 500 700 Output current Rated current In A 745 840 985 Base load current IL 3 A 725 820 960 Base load current IH A 570 700 860 Input current Rated input current A 775 873 1024 Input current max A 1188 1344 1573 Current requirements for 24 VDC JA 1 4 1 4 1 5 auxiliary supply Connection voltages Line voltage Vacrms 380 V 3 AC 10 to 480 V 3 AC 10 15 lt 1 min Line frequency Hz 47 to 63 Hz Electronics power supply Voc 24 20 4 28 8 Power loss kW 9 6 10 1 14 4 Cooling air requirement m s 0 78 0 78 1 48 Sound pressure level Lpa dB A 70 73 70 73 72 75 1 m at 50 60 Hz Line connection recommended DIN VDE mm2 3x185 4x 150 4x 185 maximum DIN VDE mm 4 x 240 8 x 240 8 x 240 Fixing screw M12 4 holes M12 4 holes M12 4 holes Motor connection recommended DIN VDE mm2 3x150 3x185 4x185 maximum DIN VDE mm2 8 x240
438. routed without bus connector I Shield connection g y NE Eume aa 6 _ E 7 T Figure 6 22 Cable routing Drive converter cabinet units 212 Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Operation 6 6 PROFIBUS 6 6 2 Control via PROFIBUS More information on PROFIBUS programming For more information about the PROFIBUS programming refer to the section PROFIBUS DP PROFINET IO communication in the documentation SINAMICS S120 Function Manual DP1 PROFIBUS diagnostics LED The PROFIBUS diagnostics LED is located on the front of the Control Unit CU320 Its statuses are described in the following table Table 6 8 Description of the LEDs Color State Description OFF Cyclic communication has not yet taken place Green Steady light PROFIBUS is ready for communication and cyclic communication is taking place Green Flashing 0 5 Hz Full cyclic communication is not yet taking place Possible causes The master is not transmitting setpoints Red Steady light Cyclic communication has been interrupted Setting the PROFIBUS Address Two methods are available for setting the PROFIBUS address e The address switches DIP switches on the front of the Control Unit behind the cover plate see PROFIBUS connection In this c
439. rrect or missing device name 10 Controller not present switched off but Ethernet connection present Other CBE20 errors Steady light CBE20 bus fault No physical connection to a subnet switch Incorrect transmission rate Full duplex transmission not activated Sync OFF If the link port LED is green Control Unit task system is not synchronized with the IRT clock An internal substitute clock is generated Green Flashing Control Unit task system has synchronized with the IRT clock and data is being exchanged Steady light Task system and MC PLL have synchronized with the IRT clock OPT on the Control Unit Green OFF Steady light The electronics power supply is missing or lies outside the permissible tolerance range Communication Board either defective or not inserted Communication Board is ready and cyclic communication is taking place Flashing 0 5 Hz The Communication Board is ready but cyclic communication is not yet taking place Possible causes At least one fault is pending Communication is being established Red Steady light Cyclic communication via PROFINET has not yet been established However acyclic communication is possible SINAMICS is waiting for a parameterization configuration telegram Flashing 0 5 Hz The firmware download to the CBE20 has failed Possible causes The CBE20 is defective The memory card for the C
440. rrent 5 The recommendations for the North American market in AWG or MCM must be taken from the appropriate NEC National Electrical Code or CEC Canadian Electrical Code standards Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 463 Technical specifications 12 3 Technical specifications Table 12 32 Version C 660 V 690 V 3 AC Part 4 Order number 6SL3710 1GH34 7CA0 1GH35 8CA0 1GH37 4CA0 Unit rating for IL at 50 Hz 690 V kW 450 560 710 for IH at 50 Hz 690 V 7 kW 400 450 560 Output current Rated current In A 465 575 735 Base load current IL 2 A 452 560 710 Base load current IH A 416 514 657 Input current Rated input current 4 A 483 598 764 Input current max A 740 918 1164 Current requirements for 24 VDC JA 1 4 1 4 1 5 auxiliary supply Connection voltages Line voltage Vacrms 660 V 3 AC 10 to 690 V 3 AC 10 15 lt 1 min Line frequency Hz 47 to 63 Hz Electronics power supply Voc 24 20 4 28 8 Power loss kW 9 1 10 8 13 5 Cooling air requirement m s 0 78 0 78 1 48 Sound pressure level Lpa dB A 72 75 72 75 72 75 1 m at 50 60 Hz Line connection recommended DIN VDE mm 2x 185 2 x 240 3 x 185 maximum DIN VDE mm 4 x 240 4 x 240 8 x 240 Fixing screw M12 2 holes M12 2 holes M12 4 holes Motor connection recommended DIN VDE 5 mm2 2x150 2x185 3 x 150 maximum DIN
441. rved depending on the type of cable used see Electrical installation Power connections Connection cross sections and cable lengths The PE ground at the motor must be fed back directly to the cabinet unit The cables must be properly connected with a torque of 50 Nm to the cabinet unit terminals The cables for the motor and low voltage switchgear must also be connected with the required torques For units that are connected in parallel the connecting cables W001 W002 for the DC links on the two sub cabinets must be closed see Electrical installation Power connections Connection of DC link connectors The cables between the low voltage switchgear and the cabinet unit must be protected with line fuses to provide adequate conductor protection VDE 636 Part 10 With version C combined fuses must be used for conductor and semi conductor protection VDE 636 Part 40 EN 60269 4 See Technical specifications for the appropriate fuses For strain relief the cables must be clamped on the cable propping bar C type mounting bar LJ When EMC shielded cables are used screwed glands that connect the shield to ground with the greatest possible surface area must be provided on the motor terminal box On the cabinet the cables must be grounded with the clips supplied with the EMC shield bus with the greatest possible surface area shield bus supplied with option LOO or can be ordered separ
442. ry Paint finish RAL 7035 indoor requirements Compliance with standards Standards EN 60146 1 EN 61800 2 EN 61800 3 EN 50178 2 EN 60204 1 EN 60529 3 CE mark To EMC directive No 2004 108 EC and low voltage directive No 2006 95 EC RI suppression In accordance with the EMC product standard for variable speed drives EN 61800 3 second environment Application in first environment possible with line filters option LOO 1 Ambient conditions Storage Transport During operation Ambient temperature 25 55 C 25 70 C 0 40 C as of 40 C for 24 hours up to 50 C with derating Humidity range 510 95 5 95 at 40 C 5 95 non condensing corresponds to class 1K4 to EN 60721 3 1 2K3 to EN 60721 3 2 3K3 to EN 60721 3 3 Environmental class harmful chemical substances 3 1C2 to EN 60721 3 1 2C2 to EN 60721 3 2 3C2 to EN 60721 3 3 Organic biological influences 1B1 to EN 60721 3 1 2B1 to EN 60721 3 2 3B1 to EN 60721 3 3 Installation altitude Up to 2000 m above sea level without derating gt 2000 m above sea level with derating see Derating data 410 Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5SE00189855A Technical specifications 12 2 General data Electrical data Mechanical stability Storage Transport During operation Vibrational load Displacement Accel
443. s details in List Manual Parameters Name Description r0002 Control Unit status display Status display for the Control Unit r0018 Control Unit firmware version Displays the firmware version of the Control Unit For the display parameters for the firmware version of the other connected components see the parameter description in the List Manual 10721 Digital inputs actual terminal value Displays the actual value at the digital input terminals on the CU This parameter shows the actual value uninfluenced by simulation mode of the digital inputs 10722 Status of digital inputs CU Displays the status of the digital inputs on the CU This parameter shows the status of the digital inputs under the influence of simulation mode of the digital inputs 10747 Status of digital outputs CU Display of the CU digital output status This parameter shows the status of the digital inputs under the influence of simulation mode of the digital inputs 12054 Profibus status Displays the status of the Profibus interface Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 355 Diagnosis faults and alarms 10 2 Diagnosis Parameters r9976 0 7 Name Description System load Displays the system load The individual values computation load and cyclic load are measured over short time slices from these values the maximum the minimum and the a
444. s are arranged in accordance with the chapters in the operating instructions The page numbers 9xx describe the functionality in the following chapter At certain points in this chapter reference is made to function diagrams with a 4 digit number These can be found on the documentation CD in the SINAMICS List Manual which provides experienced users with detailed descriptions of all the functions Drive converter cabinet units 294 Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Functions Monitoring and Protective Functions 9 2 Drive Functions 9 2 Drive Functions 9 2 1 Motor identification and automatic speed controller optimization Description Two motor identification options which are based on each other are available e Standstill measurement with p1910 motor identification e Rotating measurement with p1960 speed controller optimization These can be selected more easily via p1900 p1900 2 selects the standstill measurement motor not rotating p1900 1 also activates the rotating measurement p1900 1 sets p1910 1 and p1960 in accordance with the current control type p1300 Parameter p1960 is set depending on p1300 e p1960 1 if p1300 20 or 22 encoderless control e p1960 2 if p1300 21 or 23 control with encoder The measurements parameterized using p1900 are started in the following sequence after the corresponding drive has been enabled e Standstill static measurement after the measurement h
445. s inductance p1825 p1828 p0352 M p0353 M p0350 M p0356 M p0358 M p0354 M L series Figure 9 1 Equivalent circuit diagram for induction motor and cable Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Functions Monitoring and Protective Functions 9 2 Drive Functions If an output filter see p0230 or series inductance p0353 is used its data must also be entered before the standstill measurement is carried out The inductance value is then subtracted from the total measured value of the leakage With sine wave filters only the stator resistance valve threshold voltage and valve interlocking time are measured Note Leakage values in excess of 35 to 40 of the rated motor impedance will restrict the dynamic response of speed and current control in the voltage limit range and in field weakening operation Note Standstill measurement must be carried out when the motor is cold In p0625 enter the estimated ambient temperature of the motor during the measurement with KTY sensor set p0600 p0601 and read r0035 This is the reference point for the thermal motor model and thermal Rs Rr adaptation In addition to the equivalent circuit diagram data motor data identification p1910 3 can be used for induction motors to determine the magnetization characteristic of the motor Due to the higher accuracy the magnetization characteristic should if possible be determined
446. s not active Note If the OFF in REMOTE function is activated the LED in the LOCAL REMOTE key flashes For LOCAL master control all of the supplementary setpoints are de activated After the master control has been transferred to the operator panel the BICO interconnections at bit O to bit 10 of the control word of the sequence control are not effective refer to function diagram 2501 6 7 7 1 LOCAL REMOTE key Activate LOCAL mode Press the LOCAL key REMOTE LOCAL mode LED lights up REMOTE mode LED does not light up the ON OFF JOG direction reversal faster and slower keys are not active Settings Menu Commissioning Service AOP Settings Control Settings Save LOCAL mode factory setting yes e Yes The LOCAL or REMOTE operating mode is saved when the power supply is switched off and restored when the power supply is switched back on e No LOCAL or REMOTE operating mode is not saved REMOTE is active when the supply voltage is switched back on OFF in REMOTE factory setting no e Yes The OFF key functions in REMOTE mode even if the drive is being controlled by external sources PROFIBUS customer terminal strip NAMUR terminal strip WARNING This function is not an EMERGENCY STOP function e No The OFF key is only effective in LOCAL mode Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 231 Operation 6 7 Control via the operator panel LOCAL
447. scription p1520 p1521 M limits 0640 ft P I limits p1530 p1531 P limits Figure 7 17 Torque limiting 11407 9 The value specifies the maximum permissible torque whereby different limits can be parameterized for motor and regenerative mode e p0640 Current limit e p1520 CO Torque limit upper motoring e p1521 CO Torque limit lower regenerative e p1522 Cl Torque limit upper motoring e p1523 Cl Torque limit lower regenerative e p1524 CO Torque limit upper motoring scaling e p1525 CO Torque limit lower regenerative scaling e p1530 Power limit motoring e p1531 Power limit regenerating The currently active torque limit values are displayed in the following parameters e r0067 Maximum drive output current e 11526 Torque limit upper motoring without offset e 11527 Torque limit lower regenerative without offset All of the following limits act on the torque setpoint that is either available at the speed controller output for closed loop speed control or as torque input for closed loop torque control The minimum or the maximum is used for the various limits This minimum or maximum is cyclically calculated and is displayed in r1538 or r1539 e 11538 Upper effective torque limit e 11539 Lower effective torque limit Drive converter cabinet units 282 Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Setpoint channel and closed loop contro 7 4 Vector speed torque control with without encoder
448. sections and cable lengths eececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeeseaeeeeeeeaees 62 4 7 2 Connecting the motor and power cables 0 0 eccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeseneaeeseeeeeeteenaees 63 4 7 3 Adjusting the fan voltage T1 T10 ssessssessrrssirrersrsrrsrisransnrnnsnnnnesnnnnsnanndentaananenaanannnaeannennnnna 64 4 7 4 Adjusting the internal power supply A1 T10 version A only sseseseseeeseerisserrsseerrssrerseeen 67 4 7 5 Removing the connection bracket for the interference suppression capacitor with operation from an ungrounded supply ccccceceeeeceeceeceeeeeeeeceeceeeeeeesecaeeeeeeeeseeenaeeeeeeeeeeseaees 68 4 8 External Supply of the Auxiliary Supply from a Secure Line ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteaeeeeeeeees 69 4 8 1 230 V AG auxiliary SUPPI iae tdaadetcd ends boave le laddoceaiecgee beta seeenacnceet bavanes aeededaniayteaenepeleted 70 4 8 2 24 V DG auxiliary Suppl vaca naa ake ae aici nie ant ded ece ol avid sete ean ene 70 4 9 ogha l CONMECHIONS aana a ext aah tees eee ARAS dante ee eee he ae eae 71 4 9 1 Customer terminal block ABQ cenina A A E E E Ea 71 4 10 Olhar COMMECUIONS erromara a o E adaadunaeaateneaaeetan tae 79 4 10 1 dv dt filter plus Voltage Peak Limiter option L10 eee ec eee eeeeeeeeee eect eeneeeeetaeeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeeneaas 79 4 10 2 Main Contactor Option L13 ee ceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeseneeeneees 81 4 10
449. shows the actual value uninfluenced by simulation mode of the digital inputs r4022 Status of digital inputs Displays the status of the digital inputs on the TM31 This parameter shows the status of the digital inputs under the influence of simulation mode of the digital inputs 14047 Status of digital outputs Displays the status of the TM31 digital outputs Inversion via p4048 is taken into account Additional diagnostic parameters for units that are connected in parallel details in List Manual For units that are connected in parallel there are additional diagnostic parameters that provide detailed information about individual Power Modules for a parallel circuit configuration e With 380 V 480 V 3 AC 6SL3710 2GE41 1AA0 6SL3710 2GE41 4AA0 6SL3710 2GE41 6AA0 e With 500 V 600 V 3 AC 6SL3710 2GF38 6AA0 6SL3710 2GF41 1AA0 6SL3710 2GF41 4AA0 e With 660 V 690 V 3 AC 6SL3710 2GH41 1AA0 6SL3710 2GH41 4AA0 6SL3710 2GH41 5AA0 r7000 r7252 Special parameters for Power Modules in a parallel circuit configuration Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 357 Diagnosis faults and alarms 10 2 Diagnosis 10 2 3 Indicating and rectifying faults The device features a wide range of functions that protect the drive against damage if a fault occurs faults and alarms Indicating faults and alarms What is a fault If a fault occurs the drive dis
450. so be generated on every restart attempt The monitoring time must be extended if the faults that occur cannot be immediately and successfully acknowledged Parameter e p1210 Automatic restart mode e pi211 Automatic restart start attempts e p1212 Automatic restart delay time start attempts e p1213 Automatic restart monitoring line supply return Settings To prevent the motor from switching to phase opposition when the drive is being restarted there is a delay while the motor demagnetizes t 2 3 x motor magnetization time constant Once this time has elapsed the inverter is enabled and the motor is supplied with power Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 309 Functions Monitoring and Protective Functions 9 2 Drive Functions 9 2 6 Description 310 Flying restart The Flying restart function enabled via p1200 allows the converter to switch to a motor that is still rotating Switching on the converter without the flying restart function would not allow any flux to build up in the motor while it is rotating Since the motor cannot generate any torque without flux this can cause it to switch off due to overcurrent F07801 The flying restart function first determines the speed of the drive with which V f or vector control is initialized so that the converter and motor frequency can be synchronized During the standard start up procedure for the converter the motor must be at
451. start only in the setpoint direction For p1200 4 5 6 the following applies Search only in the setpoint direction Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Functions Monitoring and Protective Functions 9 2 Drive Functions 9 2 7 Motor changeover selection 9 2 7 1 Description The motor data set changeover is for example used for e Changing over between different motors e Motor data adaptation Note To switch to a rotating motor the flying restart function must be activated 9 2 7 2 Example of changing over between two motors Prerequisites The drive has been commissioned for the first time 2 motor data sets MDS p0130 2 2 drive data sets DDS p0180 2 2 digital outputs to control the auxiliary contactors 2 digital inputs to monitor the auxiliary contactors 1 digital input to select the data set 2 auxiliary contactors with auxiliary switches 1 NO contact 2 motor contactors with positively driven auxiliary switches 1 NC contact 1NO contact s1 0830 _a 0830 0 5 7 0830 1 S I amp K1H K2 Figure 9 7 Example of motor changeover Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 313 Functions Monitoring and Protective Functions 9 2 Drive Functions Table 9 2 Settings for the motor changeover example Parameters Settings Comments p0130 2 Configure 2 MDS
452. stems lt 1000 V for use in the second environment For use in the first environment only when sold and installed by skilled personnel Category C3 Rated voltage lt 1000 V use in the second environment only Category C4 Rated voltage 21000 V or for rated currents 2 400 A in complex systems in the second environment Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 57 Electrical installation 4 5 EMC compliant design 4 5 EMC compliant design The following section provides some basic information and guidelines that will help you comply with the EMC and CE guidelines cabinet assembly e Connect painted or anodized metal components using toothed self locking screws or remove the insulating layer e Use unpainted de oiled mounting plates e Establish a central connection between ground and the protective conductor system ground Shield gaps e Bridge shield gaps at terminals circuit breakers contactors and so on with minimum impedance and the greatest possible surface area Using large cross sections e Use underground and grounding cables with large cross sections or better still with litz wires or flexible cables Laying the motor supply cable separately e The distance between the motor supply cable and signal cable should be gt 20 cm Do not lay signal cables and motor cables in parallel to each other Use anti interference elements e Lay an equalizing
453. structions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 265 Setpoint channel and closed loop control 7 4 Vector speed torque contro with without encoder 7 4 1 Description 266 Vector control without encoder For sensorless vector control only SLVC Sensorless Vector Control the position of the flux and actual speed must be determined via the electric motor model The model is buffered by the incoming currents and voltages At low frequencies approx 0 Hz the model cannot determine the speed For this reason and due to uncertainties in the model parameters or inaccurate measurements the system is switched from closed loop to open loop operation in this range The changeover between closed loop open loop operation is controlled on the basis of time and frequency conditions p1755 p1756 p1758 only for induction motors The system does not wait for the time condition to elapse if the setpoint frequency at the ramp function generator input and the actual frequency are below p1755 x 1 p1756 100 simultaneously Transition from open loop to closed loop operation always takes place when the changeover speed in p1755 characteristic 1 in the figure below If the speed increase is set very slow and a changeover delay time gt 0 is set in p1759 transition takes place after the changeover delay time characteristic 2 in the figure below f_actl p1755 rpm p1755 1 p1756 100 rpm Open loop controlled operation Close
454. synchronizer without degree of overlapping p1260 2 function has been activated the following parameters must be set Table 9 6 Parameter settings for bypass function with synchronizer without degree of overlapping Parameters Description p1266 Control signal setting when p1267 0 1 p1267 0 1 Bypass function is initiated by the control signal p1267 1 0 p1269 0 Signal source for contactor K1 feedback p1269 1 Signal source for contactor K2 feedback p3800 1 The internal voltages are used for synchronization p3802 r1261 2 Synchronizer activation is triggered by the bypass function p1200 1 The flying restart function is always active Drive converter cabinet units 334 Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Functions Monitoring and Protective Functions 9 3 2 3 Description 9 3 Extended functions Bypass without synchronizer p1260 3 When the motor is transferred to the supply contactor K1 is opened following converter s pulse inhibit The system then waits for the motor excitation time to elapse after which contactor K2 is closed and the motor is run directly on the supply If the motor is switched on in a non synchronized manner when activated an equalizing current flows and this must be taken into account when designing the protective equipment see diagram Circuit bypass without synchronization When the motor is being transferred from the supply by the c
455. t Rated input current A 395 509 629 Input current max A 606 781 967 Current requirements for 24 VDC A 1 35 1 35 1 4 auxiliary supply Connection voltages Line voltage Vacrms 380 V 3 AC 10 to 480 V 3 AC 10 15 lt 1 min Line frequency Hz 47 to 63 Hz Electronics power supply Voc 24 20 4 28 8 Power loss kW 5 3 6 4 8 2 Cooling air requirement m s 0 36 0 36 0 78 Sound pressure level Lpa dB A 69 73 69 73 70 73 1 m at 50 60 Hz Line connection recommended DIN VDE mm2 2x120 2x185 2 x 240 maximum DIN VDE mm 4 x 240 4 x 240 4 x 240 Fixing screw M12 2 holes M12 2 holes M12 2 holes Motor connection recommended DIN VDE mm 2x95 2x150 2 x 185 maximum DIN VDE mm2 2x150 2 x 240 2 x 240 Fixing screw M12 2 holes M12 2 holes M12 2 holes Protective conductor connection Fixing screw M12 2 holes M12 2 holes M12 2 holes Max motor cable length shielded unshielded m 300 450 300 450 300 450 Dimensions standard version Width mm 1000 1000 1200 Height mm 2000 2000 2000 Depth mm 600 600 600 Power block frame size GX GX HX Weight without options approx kg 480 480 860 Recommended protection Line protection with option L26 3NA3260 3NA3372 3NA3475 Rated current A 400 630 800 frame size to DIN 43620 1 3 3 4 Line and semiconductor protection without option L26 3NE1334 2 3NE1436 2 3NE1438 2 Rated current A 500 630 800 Frame size to DIN 43620 1 2 3 3
456. t current Output 3 AC Three phase connection 0 480 V Rated output voltage 210A Rated output current Temperature range 0 40 C Ambient temperature range within which the cabinet unit can operate under 100 load Degree of protection IP20 Degree of protection Duty class l l Duty class to EN 60146 1 1 100 continuously with the specified current values the cabinet unit can operate continuously under 100 load Cooling method AF A Cooling medium air F circulation method forced cooling drive unit fan in the device Weight Weight of the cabinet unit Drive converter cabinet units 34 Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Device Overview 2 5 Type plate Explanation of the option short codes Table 2 3 Explanation of the option short codes Version Version A C Input options LOO Line filter for use in the first environment to EN 61800 3 category C2 TN TT v systems L13 Main contactor vA L22 Line reactor not included in scope of delivery vA v L23 Line reactor uk 2 v v L26 Main circuit breaker incl fuses circuit breakers v Output options L08 Motor reactor v a L10 dv dt filter plus Voltage Peak Limiter v L15 Sine wave filter for 380 V 480 V 3 AC up to 250 kW and for 500 V 600 V v 3 AC up to 132 kW only Input and output options M70 EMC shield bus v v M75 PE busbar
457. t or output CU 1 Output p2103 Acknowledge fault 1 TM31 0 TM31 p2104 Acknowledge fault 2 TM31 0 TM31 p4030 DOO TM31 0 Vector p4031 DO1 TM31 0 Vector p4038 DO8 TM31 0 Vector p4028 8 Set DI DO8 input or output TM31 0 Input p4039 DO9 TM31 0 TM31 p4028 9 Set DI DO9 input or output TM31 0 Input p4040 DO10 TM31 0 TM31 p4028 10 Set DI DO10 input or output TM31 0 Input p4041 DO11 TM31 0 TM31 p4028 11 Set DI DO11 input or output TM31 0 Input Drive converter cabinet units 480 Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Appendix Parameter macro p1000 1 PROFIdrive 100001 A 2 Parameter macros This macro is used to set the default setpoint source via PROFIdrive Table A 6 Parameter macro p1000 1 PROFIdrive Sink Source Parameters Description DO Parameters Description DO p1070 Main setpoint Vector r2050 1 PROF Idrive PZD2 Vector p1071 Main setpoint scaling Vector 1 100 Vector p1075 Supplementary setpoint Vector 0 Vector p1076 Supplementary setpoint scaling Vector 1 100 Vector Parameter macro p1000 2 Terminal TM31 100002 This macro is used to set analog input 0 on customer terminal block TM31 as the setpoint source Table A 7 Parameter macro p1000 2 TM31 terminals Sink Source Parameter Description DO Parameter Description DO p1070 Main setpoint Vector r4055 AIO TM31 TM31 p1071 Main setpoint scaling V
458. te da Gast eva a lead 221 6 7 3 Parameterization MENU ccteetis cotec eee aoe ened cathe ace eee ad det a eva teed aan eae 221 6 7 4 Menu Fault alarm Memo ccccccceceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceneeeeeseneeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeseneaeeeseeeeeeseeaeeeeeeeeeenees 224 6 7 5 Menu Commissioning Service craes ni a eia EEEE ARE RSE 225 6 7 5 1 Drive commissioning eserinin iaa a ia a A Ee iai ens 225 6 7 5 2 Dovie COmMISSONMNO ecn E E E A E A 225 GT AOP SOUS aaee i EEA E A 225 6 7 5 4 Lists of signals for the operation SCreen 0 2 eecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeeseeaeeeseeaeeeseeaeees 226 6 7 9 9 AOP30 GiaGnOSis sic aii centigtacacenciasnet E Madehes seuitedediedsacthed aeraudag euaudidee dhiehjasdhignedeu mazes avis 230 6 7 6 Language Sprache Langue dioma LinQua ccccceececteeeeeeeecneeeeeeneeeeeeaeeesesaeeeseenaeeeeesaeeeeneaas 231 6 7 7 Operation via the operator panel LOCAL mode cccccceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeetiaeeeeeteees 231 6 7271 EOGALIREMOTE KEY a teeta ie ie ae dee Aa a Aaa anaa SEa Ea 231 6 1 2 ON key OFE Keyan anaa aeii aa a a a aE aa adaa aaa adat 232 6 7 7 3 Switching between clockwise and counter clockwise rotation cccceeeeeeeeeseeeteeseeneeeeseenees 232 CLA SOO E AEE E E T dela dive he cob E aes Solas drone ice ae a eadieds 233 6 7 7 5 Increase setpoint decrease setpoint ececcecceceeceeeeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaeceeeesesenaeeeeeeseeeeeiaeeeeess 233 Drive converter cabin
459. ted positive direction of rotation e p3845 3 Friction characteristic plot activated negative direction of rotation N DANGER When the friction characteristic is plotted the drive can cause the motor to move As a result the motor may reach maximum speed When commissioning the drive the EMERGENCY STOP functions must function perfectly To protect the machines and personnel the relevant safety regulations must be observed FD 7010 Friction characteristic curve e p3820 Friction characteristic value nO e T e p3839 Friction characteristic value M9 e r3840 Friction characteristic status e r3841 Friction characteristic output e p3842 Activate friction characteristic e p3845 Activate friction characteristic plot Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Functions Monitoring and Protective Functions 9 2 Drive Functions 9 2 9 Increasing the output frequency 9 2 9 1 Description In applications that require higher output frequencies the pulse frequency of the converter may have to be increased It may also be necessary to change the pulse frequency to prevent resonance from occurring Since increasing the pulse frequency also increases the switching losses a derating factor for the output current must be taken into account when the drive is configured Once the pulse frequency has been increased the new output currents are automatically included in the calcula
460. ternal wiring in the cabinet unit This diagram documents the line side target wiring Spare parts list The spare parts list contains all the available spare parts for the ordered cabinet unit Additional operating instructions The instructions for OEM components installed in the ordered cabinet unit are supplied as OEM documentation Tel 49 0 180 50 50 222 Fax 49 0 180 50 50 223 Internet http www siemens de automation support request Note Calls are subject to charge e g 0 14 min from fixed lines within Germany Tariffs of other phone providers may differ You will find spare parts on the Internet at http support automation siemens com WW view en 16612315 Information about SINAMICS can be found on the Internet at the following address http www siemens com sinamics Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Table of contents FORO WOM ao a A E AEA RAN EAS ink ARE ASAE AE E E EANES 5 1 Safety intormatioNM sesira aA Ea AAE EE AA EAA EE A Aa SAA ARORAA E aaa EAE 15 1 1 W aming aeir or n a E T E A A E A 15 1 2 Safety and operating iNStrUCtiONS ceceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeaeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeaeeeseeaeeeeaees 16 1 3 Components that can be destroyed by electrostatic discharge ESD ececeeeeeeeeetteeeeeees 17 2 DEVICE OVEWVIOW EEEE E E E S ia A EA anda ie ARAN eee 21 2 1 Chapter content arse hannan iaaea ra aeaa aa ie sages ten dente sea
461. tes too slowly e The fan fuses may blow due to an overcurrent Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 65 Electrical installation 4 7 Power connections Note The order numbers for fan fuses that have blown can be found in the spare parts list Table 4 5 Line voltage assignments for setting the fan transformer 380 V 480 V 3 AC Line voltage Taps of the fan transformer T1 T10 380 V 10 380 V 400 V 10 400 V 440 V 10 440 V 480 V 10 480 V Table 4 6 Line voltage assignments for setting the fan transformer 500 V 600 V 3 AC Line voltage Taps of the fan transformer T1 T10 500 V 10 500 V 525 V 10 525 V 575 V 10 575V 600 V 10 600 V Table 4 7 Line voltage assignments for setting the fan transformer 660 V 690 V 3 AC Line voltage Taps of the fan transformer T1 T10 660 V 10 660 V 690 V 10 690 V Drive converter cabinet units 66 Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Electrical installation 4 7 Power connections 4 7 4 Adjusting the internal power supply A1 T10 version A only A transformer A1 T10 is installed for the internal 230 V AC power supply for the cabinet unit The location of the transformer is indicated in the layout diagrams supplied When delivered the taps are always set to the highest level The line side terminals of the transform
462. the diagram 1 Remove the retaining screws for the fan 2 screws 2 Disconnect the supply cables 1 x L 1 x N You can now carefully remove the fan CAUTION When removing the fan ensure that you do not damage any signal cables Installation For re installation carry out the above steps in reverse order CAUTION The tightening torques specified in the table Tightening torques for connecting current carrying parts must be observed Carefully re establish the plug connections and ensure that they are secure The screwed connections for the protective covers must only be tightened by hand Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 391 Maintenance and servicing 11 4 Replacing components 11 4 11 Replacing the fan type GX Replacing the fan Figure 11 15 Replacing the fan frame size GX Drive converter cabinet units 392 Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Maintenance and servicing 11 4 Replacing components Description The average service life of the device fans is 50 000 hours In practice however the service life depends on other variables e g ambient temperature degree of cabinet protection etc and therefore may deviate from this value The fans must be replaced in good time to ensure that the cabinet unit is available Preparatory steps e Disconnect the cabinet unit from th
463. the hoods are delivered separately and must be mounted on site With options M23 M43 and M54 plastic ventilation grilles and filter mats are also supplied A 5mm aluminum mounting plate with no holes is fitted in the roof of the cover for feeding in the cables Depending on the number of cables and the cross sections used holes for attaching cable glands for feeding in the cables must be drilled in this mounting plate on site Note The control cables and optional brake resistors are connected as before from below Attaching the Hood 1 Remove the crane transport assembly if fitted 2 Options M43 and M54 only Use the sealing tape provided to attach the contact surfaces of the hood to the top of the cabinet 3 Fit the hood to the roof of the cabinet at the positions specified fixing points for the crane transport assembly 4 To secure the power cables remove the front panel of the hood Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 47 Mechanical installation 3 3 Assembly f Q ES vL o 6 O Q Z0 E fe e E 0 St H j j j j j j j j j A 0 N X N a N EARAETE TE TEITE S K ot St v se cn os 2p 56 n 0 0 Figure 3 3 Attaching the hood with M13 M78 Electrical installation 4 1 Chapter content This chapter provides information on the following e Establishing the
464. the main contactor from switching under load an OFF2 is triggered simultaneously The operational status is indicated by means of three LEDs K120 In the factory setting this version is set with a 230 V AC button circuit Note When the EMERGENCY OFF button is pressed the motor coasts to an uncontrolled standstill and the main motor voltage is disconnected to EN 60204 1 Auxiliary voltages e g for separately driven fans or anti condensation heating may still be present Certain sections of the converter e g the closed loop controller or any auxiliary equipment may also remain live If all the voltages have to be completely disconnected the EMERGENCY OFF pushbutton must be integrated in a protection concept which must be implemented on the line side For this purpose an NC contact is installed at terminal X120 Connection Table 4 30 Terminal block X120 connection for EMERGENCY OFF category 0 230 V AC and 24V DC Terminal 230 V AC and 24 V DC button circuit 4 Jumper wired in the factory 5 7 Loop in EMERGENCY OFF button from line side 8 remove jumpers 7 8 and connect button 9 Jumper wired in the factory 10 11 Jumper wired in the factory 14 12 Jumper wired in the factory 13 15 On for monitored start 16 Remove jumpers 15 16 and connect button 17 NO Checkback trip safety combination 18 1 NO NO contact Max connectable cross section 4 mm2
465. the measuring system In conjunction with SINAMICS G150 the following encoders can be selected e HTL e TTL gt Enter the required encoder data gt Click OK Drive converter cabinet units 150 Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Commissioning 5 3 Procedure for commissioning via STARTER CAUTION Once the encoder has been commissioned the supply voltage 5 24 V set for the encoder is activated on the SMC30 Module If a 5 V encoder is connected and the supply voltage has not been set correctly the encoder may be damaged Default settings for setpoints command sources Configuration SINAMICS_G150 Defaults of the setpoints command sources Drive unit Drive Drive_1 DDS 0 Options Control structure Select the default macros for your command sources Drive setting Motor CDSO 7TM31 terminals Motor data S Optional Motor Dat Command sources Equivalent Circuit C S CDS1 No selection Calculation of the t Motor holding brake All binector inputs Bl of the corresponding command data Encod set CDS will be interconnected accordingly Drive functions PROFIBUS proces Important paramete Select the default macros for your setpoint sources Summary s5 lt u gt CDSO TM31 terminals Setpoint sources cDsi No selection v All connector inputs CI of the correspondin
466. the yellow MENU key MAIN MENU Operation screen Parameterization Fault alarm memory Commissioning service Sprachauswahl Language selection Help A v OK F1 F2 F3 ra F5 Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Dialog screen for the main menu It can be accessed at any time with the MENU key Press F2 or F3 to navigate through the menu options in the main menu 219 Operation 6 7 Control via the operator panel Menu structure of the operator panel 220 Operation screen Main menu Current faults Current alarms Old list of faults Parameterization Individ DO All DO Data set selection Fault memory Alarm memory Permanent parameter transfer Faults Fault history Alarms Fault history Commissioning Drive Basic commissioning Service commissioning Device Complete Language Sprache L commissioning commissioning angue Idioma Lingua Motor identification Reset fan operating time AOP settings Control settings Display settings Define operator screen Set date time Date format Reset AOP settings Help texts can be called up for all alarms and faults AOP30 diagnosis Software database version
467. thout encoder cccceeceeceececeeeee cece eeeeeaeceeeeeeseeaaeaeeeeeeseceaeeeeeesecsenieaeeeseeees 266 7 4 2 Vector control with ENCOdEL cccccceeeeeseceecececeeeeeeeeeeeaeaeeeeeecaeecaaeeeeeeeeeeeaaaeeeeeesessenieeeeeteeees 269 7 4 3 Speed controlere e hase ees ed ee dee nee ea dened 270 7 4 3 1 Speed controller pre control integrated pre control with balanCing cscceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 272 453 25 Reference Mod ela a a a a aa E tied nadie aana ede eee Anan i aani 275 7 4 3 3 Speed controller adaptation 2 2 0 0 cc ccceccceccececeeeeeee eeeeceaeeeeeeeeeecaaaeceeeeeeccaaeeeeeeeeseceaaeeeeeseseseess 276 CASA Droop FUNCHON siei erea agesey dave aaa aaa data sania aia a ea 278 7 4 4 Closed loop torque COO e e ee e a a a a ea a ae aeea E aA eta 279 7 4 5 Torgue Arming a a E E E 282 7 4 6 Permanent magnet synchronous MOMOSS cecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeaeeeeeeaterseeaaees 283 Output terimitialS e aaaea EN AETA REINE E RA EET A Aa ENA EE EA E 287 8 1 Chapter contenta mir mons a ea a poe ne nee ain am eee 287 8 2 Analog Outputs ea E teas ee ae oie eee eee en ee ae 288 8 2 1 List of signals for the analog signals cceseecceeeeeenneeeeeeneeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeseeaeeeeeeaeeeseenaeeeeneteeees 289 8 3 Digital outputs irmas a aaah Sate a deste ate bade aae abate adada aaaea Tenses eaaa i anA detent ae 291 Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 ASE001898
468. time p1216 has elapsed When the master switch is in the zero position the speed setpoint is inhibited and the drive ramps down along the ramp function generator s ramp down ramp The brake closes once the standstill limit 91226 is undershot Once the brake closing time p1217 has elapsed the speed controller is inhibited the motor is no longer generating any force Extended braking control is used with the modifications described below xxxx function diagram number 2704 p1275 02 1 Brake to standst p1224 05 gt H Fp re PES U 2707 B 2501 Pulse enable i rake OR OR operation operation result Enable speed controller Extended brake control p1279 11229 3_ S085 p1279 gt 1 22010 p lt 1 gt 2711 Enable n_setp p1142 C Enable speed setpoint As Setpoint 2 enable amp r0898 6 lt 1 gt Setpoint enable on higher level D controller e g S7 1 Setpoint enable Ti T5 master switch deflected Figure 9 14 Example Service brake on a crane drive Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 339 Functions Monitoring and Protective Functions 9 3 Extended functions 9 3 4 Extended monitoring functions Description The extended monitoring functions function module enables additional monitoring functions e Speed setpoint monitoring n_setp lt p2161 e Speed setpoint
469. ting Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Technical specifications 12 3 Technical specitications 12 3 Technical specifications Note The current voltage and output values specified in the following tables are rated values The cables to the cabinet unit are protected by fuses with gL characteristic The connection cross sections are calculated for three core copper cables installed horizontally in free air at an ambient temperature of 30 C 86 F in accordance with DIN VDE 0298 Part 2 Group 5 and the recommended line protection in accordance with DIN VDE 0100 Part 430 Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 417 Technical specifications 12 3 Technical specifications 12 3 1 Table 12 9 Version A 380 V 480 V 3 AC part 1 Cabinet unit version A 380 V 480 V 3 AC Order number 6SL3710 1GE32 1AA0 1GE32 6AA0 1GE33 1AA0 Unit rating for IL at 50 Hz 400 V kW 110 132 160 for IH at 50 Hz 400 V 7 kW 90 110 132 for IL at 60 Hz 460 V 2 hp 150 200 250 for I at 60 Hz 460 V 2 hp 125 150 200 Output current Rated current In A 210 260 310 Base load current IL 3 A 205 250 302 Base load current IH A 178 233 277 Input current Rated input current A 229 284 338 Input current max A 335 410 495 Current requirements for 24 VDC JA 1 1 1 1 1 35 auxiliary supply Connection voltages Line voltage
470. tings Diagnosis Faults alarms Monitoring functions Functions Protective sunt pod AS Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 121 Commissioning 5 1 Chapter content Important information prior to commissioning 122 The cabinet unit offers a varying number of internal signal interconnections depending on the delivery condition and the options installed For the converter control to be able to process the signals correctly several software settings must be made During initial power up of the CU320 Control Unit and during first commissioning parameter macros are executed and the necessary settings made The settings are documented in the Appendix After initial power up first commissioning and also following a Parameter reset to factory settings individual parameter values deviate from the factory settings stated in the List Manual Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5SE00189855A Commissioning 5 2 Description 5 2 STARTER commissioning tool STARTER commissioning tool You can use the STARTER commissioning tool to configure and commission SINAMICS drives and drive systems The drive can be configured using the STARTER drive configuration wizard Note This chapter shows you how to carry out commissioning using STARTER STARTER features a comprehensive online help function which provides detailed explanations of all the processes an
471. tion 4 10 Other connections 4 10 22 NAMUR terminal block option B00 Description Connection The terminal block is designed in accordance with the requirements and guidelines defined by the standards association for measurement and control systems in the chemical industry NAMUR recommendation NE37 that is certain device functions are assigned to fixed terminals The inputs and outputs assigned to the terminals fulfill PELV protective extra low voltage and protective separation requirements The terminal block only contains the necessary functions Unlike the NAMUR recommendation optional terminals are not available The 24 V DC is supplied on the line side via terminals A1 X2 1 3 protected with 1 A within the converter You must ensure that the PELV safety requirements protective extra low voltage with protective separation are fulfilled To monitor the temperature of explosion proof motors option BOO features a PTC thermistor release mechanism with PTB approval Shutdown if limit value is exceeded The associated PTC sensor is connected to terminal A1 X3 90 91 The terminal block is divided into three sections e X1 X2 for the power connections e A1 X2 for signal cables which must fulfill PELV requirements with electrical separation e A1 X3 for connecting the motor PTC thermistor detector Table 4 52 Terminal block A1 X2 24 V supply voltage connection Terminal Designation De
472. tion 6 3 Basic information about the drive system Binectors BI binector input BO Binector output A binector is a digital binary signal without a unit which can assume the value 0 or 1 Binectors are subdivided into binector inputs signal sink and binector outputs signal source Table 6 3 Binectors Abbreviation and symbol gt Name Binector input Binector Input signal sink Description Can be interconnected to a binector output as source The number of the binector output must be entered as a parameter value a Binector output Binector output signal source Can be used as a source for a binector input Connectors Cl connector input CO Connector output A connector is a digital signal e g in 32 bit format It can be used to emulate words 16 bits double words 32 bits or analog signals Connectors are subdivided into connector inputs signal sink and connector outputs signal source The options for interconnecting connectors are restricted to ensure that performance is not adversely affected Table 6 4 Connectors Abbreviation and Name Description symbol Connector input Can be interconnected to a connector output as o gt Connector input source signal sink The number of the connector output must be entered as a parameter value Connector output Can be used as a source for a connector input co gt Connector output signal source
473. tion for power unit protection Note Use of a sine wave filter option L15 must be selected using p0230 3 when commissioning This setting fixes the pulse frequency to 4 kHz or 2 5 kHz and it cannot be changed 9 2 9 2 Default pulse frequencies The specified maximum output frequencies can be achieved with the default pulse frequencies listed below Table 9 3 Maximum output frequency with default pulse frequency Converter rating Default pulse frequency Maximum output frequency kW kHz Hz Supply voltage 380 480 V 3 AC 110 250 2 160 315 900 1 25 100 Supply voltage 500 600 V 3 AC 110 1000 1 25 100 Supply voltage 660 690 V 3 AC 75 1500 1 25 100 The pulse frequencies set in the factory are also the minimum frequencies The scanning times for the inputs and outputs of the customer terminal block TM31 are set in the factory to 4000 us This is also the minimum limit Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 317 Functions Monitoring and Protective Functions 9 2 Drive Functions 9 2 9 3 Description Procedure 318 Increasing the pulse frequency The pulse frequency can be increased in a virtually continuously variable manner to between the value preassigned in the factory and the maximum pulse frequency which can be set 1 Parameter p0009 on the Control Unit must be set to 3 Basic drive configuration 2
474. tion itself executed within the converter In the event of a fault the external alarm 1 A7850 and external fault 1 F7860 are triggered Connection Table 4 40 Terminal block A1 B140 connection for evaluation unit PT100 resistors Terminal Designation Technical specifications T11 T13 90 240 V AC DC PT100 sensor 1 group 1 T21 T23 90 240 V AC DC PT100 sensor 2 group 1 T31 T33 90 240 V AC DC PT100 sensor 3 group 1 T41 T43 90 240 V AC DC PT100 sensor 1 group 2 T51 T53 90 240 V AC DC PT100 sensor 2 group 2 T61 T63 90 240 V AC DC PT100 sensor 3 group 2 51 52 54 90 240 V AC DC Relay output limit value group 1 reached changeover contact 61 62 64 90 240 V AC DC Relay output limit value group 2 reached changeover contact Ground _ OUT 1 0 4 20 mA U1 OUT 1 0 2 10V 11 OUT 1 Analog output out 1 sensor group 1 Ground _ OUT 2 0 4 20 mA U2 OUT 2 0 2 10V 12 OUT 2 Analog output out 2 sensor group 2 Max connectable cross section 2 5 mm Diagnostics Messages output during operation and in the event of faults meaning of LEDs on B140 are described in the Additional Operating Instructions of the Operating Instructions Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 99 Electrical installation 4 10 Other connections 4 10 15 Description Insulation Monitor Option L87 In non grounded systems IT systems the insulati
475. tion of Safe Torque Off and Safe STOP 1 option K82 Description Option K82 terminal module for activating Safe Torque Off and Safe Stop 1 is used for isolated activation via a variable control voltage range of the safety functions already present in the standard version which can also be used without option K82 Use the option K82 to activate the following safety integrated functions terminology according to draft IEC 61800 5 2 e Safe torque off STO e Safe Stop 1 SS1 time controlled Note The integrated safety functions starting from the Safety Integrated SI input terminals of the SINAMICS components Control Unit Power Module satisfy the requirements in accordance with the equipment directive 98 37 EC the EN 60204 1 DIN EN ISO 13849 1 category 3 formerly EN954 1 as well as the requirements for Performance Level PL d and IEC 61508 SIL2 In combination with option K82 the requirements specified in Machinery Directive 98 37 EC as well as in EN 60204 1 and DIN EN ISO 13849 1 category 3 formerly EN 954 1 are satisfied for Performance Level PL d and IEC 61508 SIL2 Note Detailed and comprehensive instructions and information for the Safety Integrated functions can be found in the accompanying operating instructions which are available as additional documentation on the enclosed customer CD Drive converter cabinet units 116 Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Electrical installa
476. tion to the factory setting this setting must be again made before the drive unit is re commissioned Drive converter cabinet units 174 Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Commissioning 5 6 Status after commissioning 5 6 Status after commissioning LOCAL mode control via operator panel Analog outputs Digital outputs You switch to LOCAL mode by pressing the LOCAL REMOTE key Control ON OFF is carried out via the ON and OFF keys You specify the setpoint using the increase and decrease keys or by entering the appropriate numbers using the numeric keypad The actual speed r0063 is output as a current output in the range 0 to 20 mA at analog output 0 X522 2 and 3 A current of 20 mA is equal to the maximum speed in p1082 The actual current value rO068 is output as a current output in the range 0 to 20 mA at analog output 1 X522 5 and 6 A current of 20 mA corresponds to the current limit 00640 which is set to 1 5 x the rated motor current p0305 The enable pulses signal is output at digital output 0 X542 2 and 3 The no fault active signal is output at digital output 1 X542 5 and 6 fail safe The ready to start signal is output at digital output 8 X541 2 Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 175 Commissioning 5 7 Parameter reset to factory settings 5 7 Parameter reset to factory settings The factory settings repr
477. to 30 V 2 DI5 Typical current consumption 10 mA at 24 V Reference potential is always terminal M2 3 DI 6 Level 4 DI 7 high level 15 V to 30 V low level 3 V to 5 V 5 M2 Ground reference 6 M Electronics ground 1 DI digital input M2 ground reference M Electronics ground Max connectable cross section 1 5 mm Note An open input is interpreted as low X521 2 analog inputs differential inputs Table 4 14 Terminal block X521 Terminal Designation Technical specifications 1 Al 0 As voltage input 2 Al 0 10 V 10 V Ri 100 kQ Resolution 11 bits sign 3 Al 1 As current input 4 Al 1 4 mA 20 mA 20 mA 20 mA 0 mA 20 mA Ri 250 Q Resolution 10 bits sign 5 P10 Auxiliary voltage 10 V continued short circuit proof 6 M Ground reference 7 N10 Auxiliary voltage 10 V continued short circuit proof 8 M Ground reference 1 Al analog input P10 N10 auxiliary voltage M Ground reference Max connectable cross section 1 5 mm CAUTION The input current of the analog inputs must not exceed 35 mA when current measurements are performed Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 75 Electrical installation 4 9 Signal connections S5 Selector for voltage current AIQ Al1 Table 4 15 Selector for voltage current S5 Switch Function 5 0
478. tpoint channel and closed loop contro 7 4 Vector speed torque control with without encoder If vibrations occur with these settings the speed controller gain Kp will need to be reduced manually Actual speed value smoothing can also be increased standard procedure for gearless or high frequency torsion vibrations and the controller calculation performed again because this value is also used to calculate Kp and Tn The following relationships apply for optimization e If Kp is increased the controller becomes faster although overshoot is increased However signal ripples and vibrations in the speed control loop will increase e Although reducing Tn will also speed up the controller it will increase overshoot When setting speed control manually you are advised to define the dynamic response via Kp and actual speed value smoothing first so that the integral time can subsequently be reduced as much as possible Please remember that closed loop control must also remain stable in the field weakening range To suppress any vibrations that occur in the speed controller it is usually only necessary to increase the smoothing time in p1452 for operation without an encoder or p1442 for operation with an encoder or reduce the controller gain The integral output of the speed controller can be monitored via r1482 and the limited controller output via r1508 torque setpoint Note In comparison with speed control with an encoder t
479. trol is active the motor speed no longer follows the main setpoint and can be reduced to zero The SINAMICS system continues operating until the shutdown threshold of the DC link voltage is undershot see Switching Vdc_min control on off lt 1 gt Note All parameter specifications in parentheses refer to V f control Drive converter cabinet units 304 Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Functions Monitoring and Protective Functions 9 2 Drive Functions e V f control The Vdc_min controller acts on the speed setpoint channel When Vdc_min control is active the drive setpoint speed is reduced so that the drive becomes regenerative e Speed control The Vdc_min controller acts on the speed controller output and affects the torque generating current setpoint When Vdc_min control is active the torque generating current setpoint is reduced so that the drive becomes regenerative If the power fails the DC link voltage decreases due to the lack of power from the supply system When the DC link voltage threshold set via parameter p1245 p1285 is reached the Vdc_min controller is activated Due to the PID properties of the controller the motor speed is reduced to the extent that the regenerative drive energy maintains the DC link voltage at the level set in p1245 p1285 The kinetic energy of the drive governs the dropout characteristic of the motor speed and in turn the buffering duration In centrifugal mass drives
480. tructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 109 Electrical installation 4 10 Other connections Cable length m 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 For encoders with a 5 V supply at X521 X531 the cab current this applies cable cross sections of 0 5 mm le length is dependent on the encoder SS n Fl e a 0 05 0 1 0 15 0 2 0 25 0 3 Encoder power consumption A 0 35 0 4 Figure 4 19 110 Signal cable length as a function of the sensor current consumption Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Electrical installation 4 10 Other connections X500 DRIVE CLiQ interface X524 Electronics power supply LEDs X520 HTL TTL with open circuit monitoring HTL TTL with X521 open circuit monitoring Shield connection Protective conductor connection M4 1 8Nm Figure 4 20 SMC30 Sensor Module Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 111 Electrical installation 4 10 Other connections 4 10 18 2 Connection X520 Encoder connection 1 for HTL TTL encoder with open circuit monitoring Table 4 49 Encoder connection X520 Pin Signal name Technical specifications 1 Temp Temperature sensor connection KTY84 1C130 PTC 2 Reserved do not use 15 s 3 Reserved do
481. ture Motor data Induction motor rotary Drive setting Motor Name Comment Value Unit Motor data p320 0 Motor rated magnetization current short circ 191 000 Arms p322 0 Maximum motor speed 5000 0 RPM Equivalent Circuit CS p341 0 Motor moment of inertia 0 666000 kgm C Calculation of the t p342 0 Ratio between the total and motor moment of 1 000 Motor holding brake p344 0 Motor weight 440 0 kg Encoder p352 0 Cable resistance 0 00000 Ohm Defaults of the sete p353 0 Motor series inductance 0 000 mH Drive functions PROFIBUS proces Important paramete Summary a5 lt 3 gt The optional motor data do not have to be entered completely Note Unknown data must be set to their default values If you want to reset all optional data you must deselect their input on the Motor Data page lt Back J Cancel Help Figure 5 19 Entering optional motor data gt If required enter the optional motor data gt Click Continue gt Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 145 Commissioning 5 3 Procedure for commissioning via STARTER Configuring the motor Entering the equivalent circuit diagram data Configuration SINAMICS_G150 Equivalent Circuit Diagram Data Drive unit Drive Drive_1 DDS 0 MDS 0 Uptions Control structure Drive setting Repres of equiv circuit diag d
482. typical 6 pole standard induction motor based on IL or I at 575 V 3 AC 60 Hz 3 The base load current IL is based on a duty cycle of 110 for 60 s or 150 for 10 s with a duty cycle duration of 300 s see Overload capability 4 The base load current IH is based on a duty cycle of 150 for 60 s or 160 for 10 s with a duty cycle duration of 300 s see Overload capability 5 The current values given here are based on the rated output current 6 The recommendations for the North American market in AWG or MCM must be taken from the appropriate NEC National Electrical Code or CEC Canadian Electrical Code standards Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 437 Technical specifications 12 3 Technical specifications Table 12 19 Version A 500 V 600 V 3 AC part 4 Order number 6SL3710 2GF38 6AA0 2GF41 1AA0 2GF41 4AA0 Unit rating for IL at 50 Hz 500 V kW 630 710 1000 for I at 50 Hz 500 V 1 kW 560 630 800 for IL at 60 Hz 575 V 2 hp 900 1000 1250 for I at 60 Hz 575 V 2 hp 800 900 1000 Output current Rated current In A 860 1070 1360 Base load current IL 3 A 836 1036 1314 Base load current IH A 770 950 1216 Input current Rated input current A 904 1116 1424 Input current max A 1388 1708 2186 Current requirements for 24 VDC A 2 8 2 8 3 0 auxiliary supply Connection voltages Line
483. u might also have to upgrade the firmware for the DRIVE CLiQ components in the cabinet unit If the system detects that the firmware in the DRIVE CLiQ components needs to be updated it will trigger this process automatically when the automatic firmware update is performed Automatic firmware T update sequence During an automatic firmware update the RDY LED on the CU320 Control Unit flashes slowly orange 0 5 Hz The firmware update is performed automatically and in sequence on the DRIVE CLiQ components during the update process an LED on the component whose firmware is being updated will flash slowly green red 0 5 Hz Once the firmware update on an individual DRIVE CLiQ component is complete the LED on that component will flash quickly green red 2 Hz Once the firmware update on all components is complete the LED on the CU320 Control Unit will flash quickly orange 2 Hz To complete the automatic firmware update process a POWER ON is required switch the device off and back on again CAUTION The power supply to the components must not be interrupted while the firmware is being upgraded CAUTION New firmware should only be installed if there is a problem with the cabinet unit Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 407 Maintenance and servicing 11 8 Load the new operator panel firmware from the PC 11 8 Load the new o
484. ub cabinets Establishing the connection 1 At the right hand side of the left sub cabinet release 1 x M12 nut of the PE rail remove the nut washer and screw 2 At the left hand side of the right sub cabinet release 1 x M12 nut of the PE rail remove the nut washer and screw Locate the connecting jumper at the PE rails of the sub cabinets to be connected Insert the bolts from the front into the grounding lugs of the PE buses Re locate the washers and nuts Oo oan Aa O Tighten the nuts tightening torque 50 Nm Drive converter cabinet units 60 Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Electrical installation 4 6 Electrical connection of units that are connected in parallel 4 6 2 Establishing the DC link connections Connecting the DC link connections The DC link connection on the two sub cabinets must be made using preassembled cables these must be connected from the left hand sub cabinet H A49 to the right hand sub cabinet H A25 50 J N WARNING Under no circumstances may the connections be interchanged or short circuited The cabinet unit will be destroyed if the DC link connections are either interchanged or short circuited The following connecting cables must be connected e DCPS cable number W001 in sub cabinet H A49 to H A25 50 DCPS e DCNS cable number W002 in sub cabinet H A49 to H A25 50 DCNS 4 6 3 Connecting the power supply and signal cables Conne
485. uisites e STARTER with version 2 4 1 1 e Firmware version 2 2 5 1 e CBE20 STARTER via PROFINET IO example PROFINET interface STARTER PG PC GUe20 a ae PROFINET gy Devicet IP 1 Figure 6 32 STARTER via PROFINET example Procedure establishing online operation with PROFINET 1 Set the IP address in Windows XP The PC PG is referred here to a fixed free IP address 2 Settings in STARTER 3 Assignment of the IP address and the name for the PROFINET interface of the drive unit The PROFINET interface must be baptized so that the STARTER can establish communication 4 Select online operation in STARTER Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 239 Operation 6 8 PROFINET IO Set the IP address in Windows XP On the desktop right click on Network environment gt Properties gt double click on Network card and choose gt Properties gt Internet Protocol TCP IP gt Properties gt Enter 240 the freely assignable addresses Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties e General the appropriate IP settings Obtain an IP address automatically Use the following IP address You can get IP settings assigned automatically if your network supports this capability Otherwise you need to ask your network administrator for IP address 192 Subnet mask p55 Default gateway
486. ummary vi Ramp down time with OFF3 f 0 000 s Ji gt KIK K K K K I I I I I I a Cancel Help Figure 5 28 Important parameters gt Enter the required parameter values Note STARTER provides tool tips if you position your cursor on the required field without clicking in the field gt Click Continue gt Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 157 Commissioning 5 3 Procedure for commissioning via STARTER Summary of the drive unit data 158 Configuration SINAMICS_G150 Summary K K K K K K K K K K K K K K Options Control structure Drive setting Motor Motor data Optional Motor Dat Equivalent Circuit C Calculation of the f Motor holding brake Encoder Defaults of the sete Drive functions Pr data exch The following data of the drive unit has been entered Drive unit Name SINSMICS_G150 Order no 6SL3710 1GE32 144x Bus address 33 Drive Name Drive_1 Options Name K50 SMC30 Sensor Module Control structure Control type Speed control with encoder 21 Drive setting Standard IEC motor 50Hz SI units Connection voltage 400 Motor Motor name Motor Motor type Induction motor rotating 1 Motor data p304 0 Rated motor voltage 340 Vims p305 0 Rated motor current 233 00 Arms p307 0 Rated motor power 108 00 kw p308 0 Rated m
487. unctions Monitoring and Protective Functions 9 3 Extended functions 9 3 2 Bypass function The bypass function uses digital converter outputs to activate two contactors and uses digital inputs to evaluate the contactor s feedback e g via TM31 This circuit allows the motor to be operated using the converter or directly on the supply line The contactors are activated by the converter The feedback signals for the contactor positions have to be returned to the converter The bypass circuit can be implemented in two ways without synchronizing the motor to the supply and with synchronizing the motor to the supply The following applies to all bypass versions Prerequisites The bypass switch is also shut down when one of the OFF2 or OFF3 control word signals is canceled Exception If necessary the bypass switch can be interlocked by a higher level controller such that the converter can be shut down completely i e including the controller electronics while the motor is operated on the supply The protective interlocking must be implemented on the system side When the converter is started up again after POWER OFF the status of the bypass contactors is evaluated After powering up the converter can thereby change straight into Ready to start and bypass status This is only possible if the bypass is activated via a control signal the control signal p1266 is still present once the system has been ramped up and
488. until the speed setpoint is greater than the bypass speed threshold p1265 The system reverts to converter mode when the setpoint on the input of the ramp function generator r1119 falls below the bypass speed threshold p1265 The setpoint gt comparison value condition prevents the bypass from being reactivated straight away if the actual speed is still above the bypass speed threshold p1265 after switching back to converter operations The bypass time debypass time bypass speed variables and the command source for changing over are set using parameters Table 9 7 Parameter settings for bypass function with synchronizer without degree of overlapping Parameter Description p1262 Bypass dead time setting p1263 Debypass dead time setting p1264 Bypass delay time setting p1265 Speed threshold setting when p1267 1 1 p1266 Control signal setting when p1267 0 1 p1267 0 Trigger signal setting for bypass function p1267 1 p1269 1 Signal source for contactor K2 feedback p3800 1 The internal voltages are used for synchronization p3802 r1261 2 Synchronizer activation is triggered by the bypass function P1200 1 The flying restart function is always active 9 3 2 4 Function diagram FP 7020 Synchronization Drive converter cabinet units 336 Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Functions Monitoring and Protective Functions 9 3 2 5 Parameters 9
489. ust be applied directly to these shield connections It is important here to establish the greatest possible area of contact and a good conductive connection Note These shield springs can be used for all control cables in the cabinet unit because all the shield connections are identical in design Figure 4 5 Shield connection Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 71 Electrical installation 4 9 Signal connections Overview S5 lt q Current voltage switchover X540 p RDY of analog inputs Auxiliary power supply gt gt SI P24 V x alls X521 on x 4 Analog inputs D N X541 Digital outputs gt x x 1 D ol X522 gt HIN 4 Analog outputs is x Temperature sensor a oo A Eq EX Aled X520 X530 E Digital inputs _ gt En n X542 S Relay 1 2E 2 t kelay 2 Eo E Eq Shield connection gt Protective conductor connection gt M4 OG Figure 4 6 Customer terminal block TM31 Driv
490. ust be greater than the changeover speed in p1755 Closed loop operation up to approx 1 Hz settable via parameter p1755 and the ability to start or reverse at 0 Hz directly in closed loop operation settable via parameter p1750 result in the following benefits e No changeover required within closed loop control smooth operation no dips in frequency e Stationary speed torque control up to approx 1 Hz Note When the motor is started or reversed in closed loop control at 0 Hz it is important to take into account that a switchover is made from closed loop to open loop control automatically if the system remains in the 0 Hz range for too long gt 2 s or gt p1758 if p1758 gt 2 s Permanent magnet synchronous motors are always started and reversed in open loop operation The changeover speeds are set to 10 or 5 of the rated motor speed Changeover is not subject to any time condition p1758 is not evaluated Prevailing load torques motor or regenerative are adapted in open loop operation facilitating constant torque crossover to closed loop operation even under high static loads Whenever the pulses are enabled the rotor position is identified Closed loop operation down to standstill for passive loads By restricting to a passive load at the starting point it is possible to maintain stationary closed loop operation down to zero frequency standstill without having to change over to open loop operation Paramet
491. vA v Motor protection and safety functions L45 EMERGENCY OFF pushbutton installed in the cabinet door vA L57 EMERGENCY OFF category 0 230 V AC or 24 V DC v 7 L59 EMERGENCY STOP category 1 230 V AC v L60 EMERGENCY STOP category 1 24 V AC v L83 Thermistor motor protection unit alarm vA L84 Thermistor motor protection unit shutdown v L86 PT100 evaluation unit vA L87 Insulation monitoring v M60 Additional shock protection vA v Increase in degree of protection M21 Degree of protection IP21 vA v M23 Degree of protection IP23 vA v M43 Degree of protection IP43 vA v M54 Degree of protection IP54 vA v Mechanical options M06 Base 100 mm high RAL 7022 v v M07 Cable compartment 200 mm high RAL 7035 Jv Jv M13 Line connection from above vA M78 Motor connection from above vA M90 Crane transport assembly top mounted v vA Other options G20 CBC10 Communication Board v vA G33 CBE20 Communication Board v vA Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 35 Device Overview 2 5 Type plate Version Version A C G61 Customer terminal block extension TM31 v K50 Sensor Module Cabinet Mounted SMC30 v v K51 VSM10 Voltage Sensing Module Cabinet Mounted v K82 Terminal module for controlling the Safe Torque Off and Safe Stop 1 safety vA functions L1
492. ve in the zero crossover in other words when the direction is reversed the ramp function generator output is reduced to zero via initial rounding the ramp down time and final rounding before the new inverted setpoint is approached via start rounding the ramp up time and end rounding Rounding times that can be set separately are active in the event of a fast stop OFF3 The actual ramp up ramp down times increase with active rounding The rounding type can be set using p1134 and separately activated deactivated using p1151 0 in the zero point Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Setpoint channel and closed loop contro Signal flow diagram Setp_before_RFG 1119 Figure 7 3 Function diagram FP 3060 FP 3070 Parameter e r1119 e p1120 e p1121 e p1130 e p1131 e p1134 e p1135 e p1136 e p1137 e r1150 e p1151 7 2 Setpoint channel RFG t_ramp up RFG T_StartRdg RFG T_EndRdg RFG t_ramp down 0 00 999999 00 s 0 00 30 00 s 0 00 30 00 s 0 00 999999 00 s p1120 10 00 p1130 0 00 p1131 0 00 p1121 10 00 nsetp_after_RFG 11150 Signal flow diagram Ramp function generator Simple ramp function generator Extended ramp function generator Ramp function generator setpoint at the input Ramp function generator ramp up time Ramp function generator ramp down time Ramp function generator initial rounding time Ramp function generator final rounding time Ramp function
493. ve sea level in m 380 V 400 V 420 V 440 V 460 V 480 V 0 to 2000 100 Up to 2250 100 96 Up to 2500 100 98 94 Up to 2750 100 98 94 90 Up to 3000 100 95 91 88 Up to 3250 100 97 93 89 85 Up to 3500 100 98 93 89 85 82 Up to 3750 100 95 91 87 83 79 Up to 4000 96 92 87 83 80 76 Table 12 5 Voltage derating as a function of the installation altitude 500 V 600 V 3 AC Installation altitude Rated converter input voltage above sea level in m 500 V 525 V 550 V 575 V 600 V 0 to 2000 100 Up to 2250 100 Up to 2500 100 Up to 2750 100 Up to 3000 100 Up to 3250 100 98 Up to 3500 100 98 94 Up to 3750 100 98 95 91 Up to 4000 100 95 91 87 Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5SE00189855A Technical specifications 12 2 General data Table 12 6 Voltage derating as a function of the installation altitude 660 V 690 V 3 AC Installation altitude Rated converter input voltage above sea level in m 660 V 690 V 0 to 2000 100 Up to 2250 100 96 Up to 2500 98 94 Up to 2750 95 90 Up to 3000 92 88 Up to 3250 89 85 Up to 3500 85 82 Up to 3750 Up to 4000 Note On systems with a grounded phase conductor and a line voltage gt 600 V AC line side components should be installed to limit overvoltages to overvoltag
494. verage value are generated and displayed in the appropriate indices Further the degree of memory utilization of the data and program memory is displayed Vector key diagnostic parameters details in List Manual Parameters r0002 Name Description Operating display The value provides information about the current operating status and the conditions necessary to reach the next status r0020 Speed setpoint smoothed Displays the actual smoothed speed velocity setpoint at the input of the speed velocity controller or V f characteristic after the interpolator r0021 Actual speed smoothed Displays the smoothed actual value of the motor speed velocity r0026 DC link voltage smoothed Displays the smoothed actual value of the DC link 10027 Absolute actual current smoothed Displays the smoothed actual value of the current r0031 Actual torque smoothed Displays the smoothed actual torque 10035 Motor temperature If r0035 does not equal 200 0 C the following applies e This temperature indicator is valid e AnKTY sensor is connected e f using an asynchronous motor the thermal motor model is activated p0600 0 or p0601 0 If r0035 equals 200 0 C the following applies e This temperature indicator is invalid temperature sensor fault e AnPTC sensor is connected If using a synchronous motor the thermal motor model is activated p
495. vert DI DO15 CU 0 Not inverted p0728 15 Set DI DO15 input or output CU 1 Output p2103 Acknowledge fault 1 TM31 r2090 7 PZD 1 bit 7 Vector p2104 Acknowledge fault 2 TM31 r4022 3 TM31 DI3 TM31 p4030 DOO TM31 r0899 11 Pulses enabled Vector p4031 DO1 TM31 r2139 3 Fault Vector p4048 1 Invert DO1 TM31 1 Inverted p4038 DO8 TM31 r0899 0 Ready for switching on Vector p4028 8 Set DI DO8 input or output TM31 1 Output p4039 DO9 TM31 0 TM31 p4028 9 Set DI DO9 input or output TM31 0 Input p4040 DO10 TM31 0 TM31 p4028 10 Set DI DO10 input or output TM31 0 Input p4041 DO11 TM31 0 TM31 p4028 11 Set DI DO11 input or output TM31 0 Input Drive converter cabinet units 474 Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Appendix Parameter macro p0700 6 Terminal block TM31 70006 This macro is used to set customer terminal block TM31 as the command source A 2 Parameter macros Table A 3 Parameter macro p0700 6 Terminal block TM31 Sink Source Parameter Description DO Parameter Description DO p0840 0 ON OFF 1 Vector r4022 0 TM31 DIO TM31 p0844 0 No OFF2_1 Vector 1 CU p0845 0 No OFF2_2 Vector r0722 3 CU DI3 CU p0848 0 No OFF3_1 Vector 1 Vector p0849 0 No OFF3_2 Vector 10722 2 CU DI2 CU p0806 Inhibit LOCAL mode Vector 0 Vector p0810 Changeover CDS bit 0 Vector 0 Vector p0852 Enable operation Vector r4022 4 TM31 DI
496. verview Note It is important that the storage period is calculated from the date of manufacture and not from the date that the equipment was shipped The DC link capacitors are re formed by applying the rated voltage without load for at least 30 minutes at room temperature e Operation via PROFIBUS Set bit 3 of control word 1 operation enable permanently to 0 Switch on the converter by means of an ON signal bit 0 of the control word all the other bits must be set in such a way that the converter can be operated Once the delay time has elapsed switch off the converter and restore the original PROFIBUS setting e Operation via terminal block Set p0852 to 0 factory setting is 1 Switch on the converter via digital input 0 on the customer terminal block Once the delay time has elapsed switch off the converter and restore the original setting for p0852 Note Reforming cannot be carried out in LOCAL mode via the AOP30 Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 405 Maintenance and servicing 11 6 Messages after replacing DRIVE CLiIQ components 11 6 Messages after replacing DRIVE CLiQ components After DRIVE CLiQ components are replaced Control Interface Board TM31 SMCxx when service is required generally after power up a message is not output The reason for this is that an identical component is detected and accepted as spare
497. vice can only be addressed by an IO controller for example for the transfer of project engineering data including the IP address during startup or for user data exchange in cyclic operation after it has been assigned a device name with the IO supervisor Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 247 Operation 6 8 PROFINET O NOTICE The device name must be saved in a non volatile fashion either using the Primary Setup Tool PST or using HW Config from STEP 7 Replacing Control Unit CU320 IO device If the IP address and device name are stored in a non volatile memory this data is also forwarded with the memory card CF card of the Control Unit If an IO device must be completely replaced due to a device or module defect the Control Unit automatically assigns parameters and configures the new device or module Following this cyclic exchange of user data is restarted The CF card allows module exchange without an IO supervisor when a fault occurs ina PROFINET device Definition Sub network mask The bits set in the sub network define the part of the IP address that contains the address of the sub network The following generally applies e The network address is obtained by an AND operation on the IP address and sub network mask e The node address is obtained by an AND NOT operation on the IP address and sub network mask Example of the sub network mask Sub networ
498. vicing 11 4 Replacing components Preparatory steps e Disconnect the cabinet unit from the power supply e Allow unimpeded access e Remove the protective cover Removal steps The removal steps are numbered in accordance with the figure 1 Remove the CU320 mount 1 nut If necessary remove the PROFIBUS plug and connection to the operator panel X140 on the CU320 and carefully remove the CU320 2 Disconnect the plug in connections for the fiber optic cables and signal cables 5 plugs 3 Remove the DRIVE CLiQ cables and connections to the CU320 5 plugs 4 Remove the retaining screws for the slide in electronics unit 2 screws When removing the slide in electronics unit you have to disconnect 5 further plugs one after the other 2 at the top 3 below CAUTION When removing the unit ensure that you do not damage any signal cables The Control Interface Board can then be removed from the slide in electronics unit CAUTION When removing the ribbon cable s connectors make sure that you actuate the locking lever on the connector very carefully e g with a screwdriver because otherwise the lock could be damaged Installation steps For installation carry out the above steps in reverse order CAUTION The tightening torques specified in the table Tightening torques for connecting current conducting parts must be observed Carefully establish the plug in connections and th
499. vide the PELV terminal assignment as option BOO 24 V infeed at terminal A1 X1 1 2 3 no longer needed 4 10 24 Outgoing section for external auxiliary equipment for NAMUR option B03 Description If power is to be supplied to a motor fan on site option BO3 provides an uncontrolled fuse protected 10 A outgoing section As soon as the supply voltage is present at the converter input it is also present at these terminals The voltage corresponds to the converter input voltage You must take this into account when configuring the separately driven fan Connection Table 4 56 Terminal block A1 X1 uncontrolled power outlet 10 A for supplying a separately driven motor fan Terminal Default Comments 1 2 3 PE Outgoing section for separately driven motor U Uline fan Max connectable cross section 2 5 mm Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 119 Electrical installation 4 10 Other connections Drive converter cabinet units 120 Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A Commissioning 5 1 Chapter content This chapter provides information on the following e An overview of the operator panel functions e Initial commissioning of the cabinet initialization Entering the motor data drive commissioning Entering the most important parameters basic commissioning concluding with motor identification e Data backup e Parameter reset to factory set
500. wing must be taken into account when the devices are transported e Some of the devices are heavy or top heavy e Due to their weight the devices must be handled with care by trained personnel e Serious injury or even death and substantial material damage can occur if the devices are not lifted or transported properly J N WARNING The devices are operated with high voltages All connection work must be carried out when the cabinet is de energized All work on the device must be carried out by trained personnel only Non observance of these warnings can result in death serious personal injury or substantial property damage Work on an open device must be carried out with extreme caution because external supply voltages may be present The power and control terminals may be live even when the motor is not running Dangerously high voltage levels are still present in the device up to five minutes after it has been disconnected due to the DC link capacitors For this reason the unit should not be opened until a reasonable period of time has elapsed N DANGER Five safety rules When carrying out any kind of work on electrical devices the five safety rules must always be observed Disconnect the system Protect against reconnection Make sure that the equipment has zero potential Ground and short circuit Cover or fence off adjacent components that are still live aR WRN 11 4
501. y pressing the key that allows you to switch between CW CCW rotation e CW rotation and Increase key mean The displayed setpoint is positive and the output frequency is increased e CCW rotation and Increase key mean The displayed setpoint is negative and the output frequency is increased 6 7 7 6 AOP setpoint Settings MENU Commissioning Service AOP Settings Control Settings Save AOP setpoint factory setting no e Yes In LOCAL mode the last setpoint once you have released the INCREASE or DECREASE key or confirmed a numeric entry is saved The next time you switch the system on in LOCAL mode the saved value is selected This is also the case if you switched to REMOTE in the meantime or the power supply was switched off When the system is switched from REMOTE to LOCAL mode while the drive is switched on motor is running the actual value that was last present is set as the output value for the motorized potentiometer setpoint and saved If the system is switched from REMOTE to LOCAL mode while the drive is switched off the motorized potentiometer setpoint that was last saved is used e No On power up in LOCAL mode the speed is always set to the value entered under AOP starting setpoint When the system is switched from REMOTE to LOCAL mode while the drive is switched on motor is running the actual value that was last present is set as the output value for the AOP setpoint Drive converter cabinet units O
502. y or with individual drives the cabinet unit is fed via a converter transformer assigned to the cabinet unit integrated in the cabinet unit alarm train see Electrical installation Other connections Insulation monitoring option L87 Point 9 must also be taken into account Before the cabinet is operated from an ungrounded supply IT system the connection bracket for the basic interference suppression device must be removed see Electrical installation Power connections Removing the connection bracket for the interference suppression capacitor with operation from an ungrounded supply Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 53 Electrical installation 4 2 Checklist for electrical installation Safe Torque Off and Safe Stop 1 safety functions option K82 functions must be activated prior to use via parameter assignment in addition an acceptance test must be performed and an acceptance log must be created see section Electrical installation Other connections Terminal module for activating Safe Torque Off and Safe Stop 1 Item Activity Fulfilled Complete Safety Integrated 29 Option K82 The terminal block X41 must be connected line side the safety C Required tools 54 To install the connections you will require Spanner or socket spanner w f 10 Spanner or socket spanner w f 13 Spanner or socket sp
503. zed and described in the following document Reference PROFldrive Profile Drive Technology PROFINET System Description Order no 6ES7398 8FA10 8AA0 6ES7151 1AA10 8AA0 Drive converter cabinet units Operating Instructions 10 2008 A5E00189855A 245 Operation 6 8 PROFINET O 6 8 2 2 Real time RT and isochronous real time IRT communication Real time communication If supervisors are involved in communication this can result in excessively long runtimes for the production automation system When communicating time critical IO user data PROFINET therefore uses its own real time channel rather than TCP IP Definition Real Time RT and determinism Real time means that a system processes external events over a defined period Determinism means that a system responds in a predictable manner deterministically In industrial networks both of these requirements are important PROFINET meets these requirements PROFINET is implemented as a deterministic real time network as follows e Transmission of time critical data takes place at guaranteed time intervals To achieve this PROFINET provides an optimized communication channel for real time communication Real Time RT e An exact prediction of the time at which the data transfer takes place is possible e Problem free communication using other standard protocols is guaranteed within the same network Definition Isochronous real time communication IRT Isochron

Operating Instructions

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents